JP2021065781A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of making a good eye-catching power to game balls.SOLUTION: If a plurality of balls P91 and P92 enters a body member 9310 within a prescribed period, a retention device 8500 operates such that, compared to the ball P91 which has entered first, the ball P92 which has entered after that is more likely to pass through a V winning switch 8315d. Therefore, an eye-catching power to the ball P92 can be enhanced. Accordingly, willingness (motivation) to causing the plurality of balls P91 and P92 to enter the body member 9310 as a batch can be enhanced and at the same time a player's performing a single-shot shooting can be suppressed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 55

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which the ratio of winning from the taxiway to the starting winning opening can be changed on a regular basis (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-70526

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the attention of the gaming ball entering the taxiway. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving attention to a gaming ball entering a taxiway.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can detect the passage of a gaming area in which a gaming ball is formed so as to be able to flow down and at least a part of the gaming balls that have flowed down the gaming area. The detection means, a connecting flow path that connects the gaming area and the detecting means so that the game ball can flow down, and a switching means that can switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path are provided. The detection means detects the passage of at least a part of the gaming balls flowing down the connecting flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by detecting the passage of the gaming balls, and at least. One of the switching means is provided, and the switching means is inserted after the earliest gaming ball, which is the first gaming ball among the plurality of gaming balls that have entered the connecting flow path within a predetermined period. The connecting flow path is switched in such a manner that the following game ball that has been balled makes it easier for the ball to pass through the detection means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the connecting flow path is at least partially different from the first flow path connected to the detection means and the first flow path thereof. A second flow path connected to one of the detection means is provided, and the second flow path allows the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. It is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the gaming ball to flow down from the gaming area to the detecting means as compared with the period required for the switching means, and the switching means is such that the earliest gaming ball flows down the first flow path. As a result, the subsequent gaming ball changes to a state of passing through the second flow path.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the switching means is arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means of the connecting flow path, and the gaming ball enters the detecting means. An emission regulating means that can be switched between a first state that regulates the ball and a second state that allows the gaming ball to enter the detecting means is provided, and the emission regulating means is at least the first gaming ball. The first state is set when the ball arrives, and the second state is set when the subsequent gaming ball arrives.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the attention to the gaming ball entering the taxiway can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the attention of the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball can be improved.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the switching mode of the emission control means and the flow-down mode of the gaming ball can be combined with respect to the gaming ball. You can improve your attention.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a delay device. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the delay device in line VII-VII of FIG. FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of the delay device on line VIII-VIII of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the slide moving member. (A) is a front view of the slide moving member, (b) is a side view of the slide moving member in the direction of arrow Xb of FIG. 10 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. 10 (a). It is a top view of the slide moving member in the direction of arrow Xc, and FIG. 10D is a partial cross-sectional view of the slide moving member in line Xd-Xd of FIG. 10A. It is a front perspective view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device. (A) is a front view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device, (b) is a side view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device in the direction of arrow XIIb of FIG. 12 (a), and (c) is 12 (a) is a top view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device in the direction of arrow XIIc in FIG. 12 (a), and (d) is the sorting device and the second adjusting device in the XIId-XIid line of FIG. 12 (a). It is a partial sectional view. It is a front view of a delay device. It is a front view of a delay device. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the second adjusting device in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis. (A) to (d) are cross-sectional views of the functional disk device which is a cross-sectional view of the functional disk device in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device. It is a partial front view of a delay device. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the delay device. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. (A) is a top view of the fan-shaped member, (b) is a side view of the fan-shaped member in the direction of arrow XXIIIb of FIG. 23 (a), and (c) is a side view of the fan-shaped member of FIG. 23 (a). It is sectional drawing of the fan-shaped member in line XXIIIc, (d) is the bottom view of the fan-shaped member in the direction view of arrow XXIIId of FIG. 23 (b). (A) is a side view of the link member, and (b) is a bottom view of the link member in the direction of arrow XXIVb of FIG. 24 (a). (A) is a top view of a fan-shaped member and a link member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member and the link member in line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25 (a). It is a top view of a fixed floor. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a fixed floor in line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 26, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a fixed floor in line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 26. (A) is a partial top view of the delayed floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delayed floor device in line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a), and (c) is a portion of the delayed floor device. Top view, (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device in line XXVIIId-XXVIIId of FIG. 28 (c). (A) is a top view of the delayed floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delayed floor device in the line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delayed floor device. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device in the XXIXd-XXIXd line of FIG. 29 (c). (A) is a top view of the delayed floor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (A) is a top view of the delayed floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delayed floor device in the line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delayed floor device. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device on the XXXId-XXXId line of FIG. 31 (c). (A) is a top view of the delayed floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delayed floor device in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delayed floor device. (D) is a front view of the delayed floor device in the direction of arrow XXXIId in FIG. 32 (c). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the delayed floor device in the line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (c). (A) to (c) are partial front views of the delay device according to the second embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the delay device according to the third embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the delay device. (A) to (c) are front views of the delay device according to the fourth embodiment. (A) to (c) are front views of the delay device. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 5th Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a continuous passage groove. (A) is a front view of the stopping device, and (b) is a top view of the stopping device in the direction of arrow XLIb of FIG. 41 (a). (A) and (b) are the front view of the stop portion and the stop device. (A) and (b) are the front view of the stop portion and the stop device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of each part when the ball which entered the 1st prize opening is detected. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the continuous passage groove and the stopping device showing an example of the movement of the sphere in the continuous passage groove. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the continuous passage groove and the stopping device showing an example of the movement of the sphere in the continuous passage groove. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate and the lower movable plate. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device in the modified example of the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate and the lower movable plate. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a delay device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of each part when the ball which entered the V winning opening is detected. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of each part when the ball which entered the V winning opening is detected.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 33, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (not shown), a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, for example, the larger the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64, the easier it is to select a shorter period as the variable display period on the display device. Similarly, the second winning opening 640 is also controlled.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be configured to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a front-view triangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown) for driving the opening / closing to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state of.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided, and the certificate stamp, etc. attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory (including a drive motor 5521, solenoids 6521, 6522, 8521, 8522) is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 is connected. , Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 472.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 21. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the back of the game board 13. FIG. 5 shows a state in which the delay device in which the ball flowing down the game area and flowing into the first winning opening 64 flows down is disassembled from the game board 13.

The ball that has flowed into the first winning opening 64 flows down the inside of the delay device 300, is thrown from the detection port 312d arranged at the lower end thereof, and passes through a detection sensor (not shown), so that a lottery is performed. That is, the lottery has not yet been performed from the time the ball enters the first winning opening 64 until it passes through the detection sensor.

Next, the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is a front view of the delay device 300, and FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the delay device 300 on the VII-VII line of FIG. Note that in FIG. 7, the game board 13 is partially illustrated for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a groove is formed in the delay device 300, and the groove and the game board 13 that hits the surface form a path through which the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down. A speed reducing device 320 having a main body member 310 and a sliding moving member 321 that slides and moves with respect to the main body member 310, a first adjusting device 330 for adjusting the return operation of the speed reducing device 320, and rotation with respect to the main body member 310. It mainly includes a distribution device 340 that operates and distributes balls to different flow paths, and a second adjustment device 350 that is coaxial with the rotation axis of the distribution device 340 and adjusts the return operation of the distribution device 340.

The main body member 310 is a member that constitutes a groove in which the side arranged to face the game board 13 is opened, and the first groove 311 and the first groove 311 in which the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 first flows down. A path extending laterally from the connecting portion between the second groove 312 extending vertically downward from the lower end of the passage 311 and the connecting portion between the first groove 311 and the second groove 312 and longer than the extending length of the second groove 312. A third groove 313 connected to the detection port 312d and a support plate extending in a plate shape from the front side of the bottom plate opening 311b toward the lower side of the first groove 311 and supporting the slide moving member 321. A unit 314 and a section 314 are mainly provided.

The first groove 311 is a ball in the main passage 311a that lowers the ball entered from the first winning opening 64 in a straight line diagonally downward, and in the central portion of the bottom plate of the main passage 311a in the depth direction (the central portion in the depth direction of the ball). The bottom plate opening 311b, which is an opening formed with a width shorter than the radius of the above, and the top plate opening 311c, which allows the wind turbine member 322 of the speed reducer 320 to be extended inward in the top plate portion, and the top plate portion opening 311c. A pair of bearings 311d, which are arranged in pairs in the depth direction with the plate opening 311c in between, and which serve as bearings for the wind turbine member 322, and a back recessed in a size that allows the ball to roll from the main passage 311a to the back side. Mainly includes a side recessed portion 311e.

The recessed portion 311e on the back side is a recessed portion connected near the entrance of the main passage 311a, and the bottom surface is set to the same height as the bottom surface of the main passage 311a near the entrance, and the main passage 311a is directed toward the downstream side. It is configured in a manner of ascending and tilting.

The second groove 312 is a recess formed in the plate portion on the back side (back side in FIG. 6) and is divided into a contact wall 312a that gives a load to bounce the ball that has reached the lower end of the first groove 311 in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 312b, which is recessed in an arc shape so that the device 340 can be arranged, and the receiving wall portion 312c, which receives the ball flowing in from the third groove 313 and acts as a detent for the sorting device 340, and throws the ball. It mainly includes a detection port 312d and a side wall portion 312e that is arranged to face the recessed portion 312b.

The support plate portion 314 includes a pair of elongated holes 314a through which the guide rod portion 321c of the slide moving member 321 is inserted. The elongated hole 314a is configured in the same direction as the elongated hole 331a of the first adjusting device 330 (consisting of overlapping in the front-rear direction).

The speed reducing device 320 mainly includes a slide moving member 321 that slides when the ball passes through the first groove 311 and a wind turbine member 322 that is meshed with the slide moving member 321 and is brought into contact with the ball to rotate. Prepare for.

The slide moving member 321 is guided by the elongated hole 314a of the main body member 310 and the elongated hole 331a of the first adjusting device 330, which will be described later, so that the slide moving member 321 can operate linearly.

The wind turbine member 322 has a main body gear portion 322a having a gear portion that is pivotally supported by the bearing portion 311d and meshed with the slide moving member 321 at the rear end portion, and the wind turbine member 322 radially from the shaft portion of the main body gear portion 322a. It mainly includes a first extending wing portion 322b and a second extending wing portion 322c which are extended in pairs and form an angle of 90 ° with each other.

As shown in FIG. 7, the first extending vane portion 322b and the second extending vane portion 322c are configured so as to be able to project from the top plate opening 311c toward the inside of the first groove 311a, and at the same time. The first extending vane portion 322b is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the ball in the initial state in which the slide moving member 321 is maintained at the lower end position by gravity when the slide moving member 321 is brought into contact with the ball flowing down the groove 311a.

The second extending vane portion 322c includes a convex portion 322c1 of the tip end portion in the extending direction, which is projected in a tapered shape in a direction close to the first groove 311 from the state shown in FIG. The convex portion 322c1 acts in a manner of separating the spheres when the spheres flow down the first groove in succession.

The first adjusting device 330 includes a main body plate member 331 which is a plate-shaped member sandwiching the main body member 310 between the game board 13 and a main body gear portion 322a of the wind turbine member 322 while being pivotally supported by the main body plate member 331. It mainly includes a rotary urging device 332 having a fixed gear portion 332a to be meshed with each other. The gear ratio of the fixed gear portion 332a to the main body gear portion 322a of the wind turbine member 322 is about 2. That is, as the wind turbine member 322 rotates by 90 °, the rotary urging device 332 rotates by 45 °.

The main body plate member 331 is provided with a pair of elongated holes 331a for guiding the slide moving member 321 and is also formed on the support plate portion 314 in which the elongated holes 314a having the same shape are arranged to face each other. The slide moving member 321 is configured to be slidable in the straight direction by being guided by these elongated holes 314a and 331a.

The rotary urging device 332 mainly includes a fixed gear portion 332a pivotally supported by the main body plate member 331 and a functional disk device 332b fixed to the fixed gear portion 332a at the axial end and having a recessed groove inside. Prepare for.

The sorting device 340 is a device that is pivotally supported by the central hole 345 in the main body member 310 on the right side of the second groove 312 of the main body member 310, and is a sphere that flows in from the second groove 312b in the initial state shown in FIG. The first wall portion 341 that receives the first wall portion 341, the second wall portion 342 that is arranged above the first wall portion 341 with one sphere separated from each other, and the sorting device 340 from the tip of the second wall portion 342. The arc wall portion 343 formed along the arc shape centered on the rotation axis, the concave portion 312 formed from the disk shape, and the concave portion 312 of the second groove 312 are arranged at the surface position and on the back side of the second groove 312. It mainly includes a complementary plate portion 344 formed in a manner of complementing a part of the plate portion, and a central hole 345 which is a through hole pivotally supported by the main body member 310.

The second wall portion 342 includes a tip convex portion 342a that is radially projected on the extending tip. The sphere that abuts on the arc wall portion 343 and flows down by the tip convex portion 342a can apply a load counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 6) to the sorting device 340, which is intended by the action of the sphere. It is possible to prevent the distribution device 340 from returning to the initial position side.

The initial position of the sorting device 340 is defined by the stopper portion S1 projecting rearward of the game board 13. That is, at the initial position, the tip of the arc wall portion 343 is stopped by the stopper portion S1, so that the sorting device 340 is stopped. The driving force for rotating the sorting device 340 clockwise in the front view (clockwise in FIG. 6) is generated by the second adjusting device 350.

The second adjusting device 350 is a device fixed to the complementary plate portion 344 of the sorting device 340 and has a flow path in which the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB that changes the center of gravity is movable. It will be described later in 15.

FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the delay device 300 on line VIII-VIII of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the slide moving member 321 is arranged at the central portion of the main passage 311a. As a result, when the slide moving member 321 projects inside the main passage 311a, the convex portion 321a1 can be reliably brought into contact with the sphere flowing down the first groove 311.

The sphere flowing down the passage 311a may flow into the recessed portion 311e on the back side due to its shape. The recessed portion 311e on the back side has a return wall portion 311e1 configured so as to be closer to the main passage 311a side toward the downstream side (left side in FIG. 8). As a result, the ball that has flowed into the recessed portion 311e on the back side cannot be returned to the main passage 311a, and it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged.

Next, the slide moving member 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a front perspective view of the slide moving member 321. FIG. 10A is a front view of the slide moving member 321. FIG. 10B is a view in the direction of arrow Xb in FIG. 10A. 10 (c) is a side view of the slide moving member 321, FIG. 10 (c) is a top view of the slide moving member 321 in the direction of arrow Xc of FIG. 10 (a), and FIG. 10 (d) is a view of FIG. 10 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the slide moving member 321 in the Xd-Xd line of.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the slide moving member 321 includes a long plate-shaped first overhanging plate portion 321a that overhangs the central portion of the main passage 311a of the delay device 300 in a plane parallel to the main passage. The second overhanging plate portion 321b, which is continuously provided at one end of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and is extended downward with respect to the extending direction of the first overhanging plate portion 321a, and each overhanging plate portion 321b. A pair of round bar-shaped guide rods 321c extending in parallel at both ends of the protruding plates 321a and 321b in the long direction, and a depth direction with respect to the respective overhanging plates 321a and 321b (paper surface in FIG. 10A). It mainly includes a rack gear portion 321d extending in a straight line and forming rack gear teeth at a position offset in the vertical direction).

The first overhanging plate portion 321a is a plate portion extending in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the main passage 311a in the assembled state (see FIG. 6), and is arranged at intervals of the diameters of the spheres. A convex portion 321a1 is provided so as to be convex from the upper surface in a semicircular shape. When the convex portion 321a1 comes into contact with the sphere, the velocity of the sphere passing through the main passage 311a (see FIG. 8) is reduced.

The second overhanging plate portion 321b includes a convex portion 321b1 that has the same function as the convex portion 321a1, and an inclined surface 321b2 (see FIG. 10D) that inclines downward toward the back side. When the second overhanging plate portion 321b overhangs the inside of the main passage 311a, the inclined surface 321b2 makes it easy for the flowing ball to face the back side recessed portion 311e (see FIG. 8). Therefore, the passage period of the sphere can be lengthened as compared with the case where the sphere flows down in a straight line along the extending direction of the passage 311a.

Since the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the second overhanging plate portion 321b have different extension directions, the first extending plate portion 321a overhangs the inside of the main passage 311a, while the second overhanging plate portion 321b is a book. A state arranged outside the passage 311a can be formed. That is, the degree of deceleration of the sphere can be changed by arranging the slide moving member 321. The details will be described later.

The guide rod portion 321c is inserted into the elongated hole 331a of the first adjusting device 330 (see FIG. 6). As a result, the slide moving member 321 is supported so as to be slidable along the extending direction of the elongated hole 331a.

The rack gear portion 321d is extended in parallel with the extending direction of the elongated hole 331a, and the rack gear teeth are meshed with the main body gear portion 322a of the wind turbine member 322 (see FIG. 6). As a result, the wind turbine member 322 rotates, so that the rack gear portion 321d is slid in the linear direction (extending direction of the elongated hole 331a).

Next, the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350, FIG. 12A is a front view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350, and FIG. 12B is a diagram. 12 (a) is a side view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350 in the direction of arrow XIIb of FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 12 (c) shows the sorting device 340 and the second adjustment in the direction of arrow XIIc of FIG. 12 (a). It is a top view of the apparatus 350, and FIG. 12D is a partial cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 340 and the second adjusting apparatus 350 in the XIId-XIid line of FIG. 12A. Note that FIG. 12D shows a state in which the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is on the deceleration wall portion 351d.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the front side of the complementary plate portion 344 is opened except for the portion occupied by each wall portion 341, 342, 343, and is used as a side wall of the passage through which the ball flows down (see FIG. 6). ..

The second adjusting device 350 is a center of gravity changing device 351 fixed to the back surface side of the complementary plate portion 344 and having a recessed flow path for flowing the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB inside, and a recessed portion of the center of gravity changing device 351. A lid member 352 fixed to the center of gravity changing device 351 in a manner of covering the lid is mainly provided.

The center of gravity changing device 351 includes a disk-shaped main body member 351a having a shallow recessed portion, a recessed groove portion 351b in which the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is recessed in the main body member 351a with a width that allows the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB to flow down, and the recessed groove portion. A partition wall 351c that allows the passage of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB only at the tip, and a deceleration mechanism that extends to one side of the flow path partitioned by the partition wall 351c and decelerates the flow of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere. It is oscillatingly supported by one end (lower end of FIG. 12 (a)) of the deceleration wall portion 351d and the partition wall 351c, and is oscillatingly supported in one direction of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB (FIG. 12 (a) rightward direction). ) Is mainly provided with a directional valve 351e that allows only passage of.

The position of the center of gravity of the second adjusting device 350 excluding the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is set to be the same as the center of rotation. That is, the stable posture of the distribution device 340 is determined by the position where the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is arranged with respect to the center of rotation.

Here, the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB is composed of a sphere having a weight equal to or less than the weight of the sphere. For example, if the weight of the sphere is 5 grams, it is desirable to select a spherical object having a weight of about 2 to 4 grams as the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the forces of the ball flowing into the sorting device 340 and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB are balanced, and the sorting device 340 can be rotated by the weight of the sphere.

The deceleration mechanism of the deceleration wall portion 351d will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (d). The deceleration wall portion 351d is a portion that supports both sides of the sphere from below and rolls the sphere in that state. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB does not roll at the portion (the central portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 12 (d)) where the length from the rotation axis is the maximum diameter (radius r1). At a portion where the length from the rotation axis has a radius (radius r'1) shorter than the maximum diameter, the ball comes into contact with the deceleration wall portion 351d and rolls. Therefore, when the rotation speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is the same, the speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is decelerated as compared with the speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB when the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB rolls on the partition wall 351c (rolls with a radius r1). It is possible to slow down the speed of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB when rolling (rolling with a radius r'1) on the wall portion 351d.

That is, the translational movement distance per rotation of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB can be shortened. When the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is decelerated by this method, the deceleration can be performed while maintaining the rotational energy of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB, so that the braking is too effective and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB stops at an unintended position. The situation can be avoided.

Further, since the degree of deceleration of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB can be arbitrarily set by setting the contact position (rolling radius of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB) between the deceleration wall portion 351d and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB, a special material (high friction) can be set. The pseudo center of gravity sphere GB can be sufficiently decelerated even when the forming distance of the deceleration wall portion 351d is short.

Next, the operation of the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. 13 and 14 are front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 13 shows a state immediately after the sphere has flowed through the main body member 310 in the initial state shown in FIG. 6, and FIG. 14 shows a state immediately after the sphere has flowed through the main body member 310 in the state of FIG. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 340 changes its posture between the initial state (see FIG. 6) and the changed state (see FIG. 13) due to the passage of the sphere, and the speed reducing device 320 has the number of passing spheres. The state (arrangement in the height direction) changes depending on the initial state (see FIG. 6), the intermediate state (see FIG. 13), and the ascending state (see FIG. 14).

Each state of the speed reducer 320 will be described. When the speed reducing device 320 is in the intermediate state, the slide moving member 321 moves and is arranged at a position where the convex portion 321a projects from the bottom surface of the main passage 311a. Therefore, in this state, the sphere that has flowed into the main passage 311a comes into contact with the convex portion 321a and flows down while being decelerated. In the intermediate state, the second overhang plate portion 321b is arranged outside the first groove 311.

When the speed reducing device 320 is in the raised state, the slide moving member 321 further overhangs the inside of the main passage 311a, and the second overhanging plate portion 321b is arranged above the bottom surface of the back side recessed portion 311e. Since the second overhanging plate portion 321b has an inclined surface 321b (see FIG. 10) on the upper surface, the sphere flowing into the main passage 311a in this state is a recessed portion 311e on the back side along the inclination of the inclined surface 321b. After flowing to the lower end of the recessed portion 311e on the back side, it merges with the main passage 311a again.

When the speed reducing device 320 is in the raised state, the road width (width in the height direction) of the main passage 31a is narrowed by the first overhang plate portion 321a projecting inside the main passage 311a. Further, in the present embodiment, the slide moving member 321 slides in a direction in which the slide moving member 321 is inclined with respect to the extending direction of the passage 311a, so that the contact wall 312a of the second groove 312 and the first overhanging plate portion 321a The width with the end is narrowed. Therefore, the deceleration of the ball can be performed by narrowing the road width of the main passage 311a and increasing the flow path resistance by narrowing the road width of the connecting portion between the first groove 311 and the second groove 312.

Each state of the sorting device 340 will be described. When the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the ball flowing into the sorting device 340 is received by the first wall portion 341. Then, the distribution device 340 rotates to the changed state (see FIG. 13) due to the weight of the sphere, and the sphere flows into the detection port 312d.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 312e is configured to project above the first wall portion 341 (overhang at a height equal to or greater than the radius of the sphere), the sphere flows into the third groove 313 side. Is suppressed. Therefore, when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state, the sphere that has flowed into the sorting device 340 can flow down vertically with a high probability (it can flow down in the shortest period of time).

When the sorting device 340 is in a changed state (see FIG. 13), the sphere flowing into the sorting device 340 comes into contact with the arc wall portion 343 and flows into the third groove 313. Since the arc wall portion 343 is formed from an arc shape centered on the center hole 345 of the sorting device 340, a load when a sphere collides is applied in a direction toward the rotation axis of the sorting device 340. It is suppressed that a load in the rotation direction is applied to the sorting device 340.

Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sorting device 340 unintentionally returns to the initial state due to the impact of the ball flowing into the sorting device 340 in the changing state on the sorting device 340, and the sorting device 340 changes for a predetermined period. It can be ensured that the condition is maintained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, adjustment of the posture change timing of the sorting device 340 will be described. 15 (a) to 15 (c) are cross-sectional views of the second adjusting device 350 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis. 15 (a) to 15 (c) show that the internal structure of the center of gravity changing device 351 is visible, and FIG. 15 (a) shows the case where the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6). In FIG. 15B, the case where the sorting device 340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 13) is shown, and in FIG. 15C, the state immediately before the sorting device 340 returns from the changed state to the initial state. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the second adjusting device 350, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB moves inside the recessed groove portion 351b as the posture changes. As a result, the position of the center of gravity of the second adjusting device 350 changes, and the second adjusting device 350 repeats stopping and rotating.

The operation of the second adjusting device 350 will be described. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB is arranged on the right side of the central hole 345. A load is applied in the direction of rotating the second adjusting device 350 clockwise in the front view (clockwise in FIG. 15). As a result, even if the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) vibrates slightly, the sorting device 340 can maintain the posture at the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 15B, when the sorting device 340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 13), the inclination formed by the partition wall 351c and the directional valve 351e is inclined downward toward the left. At the same time, the inclination formed by the deceleration wall portion 351d is set to be downwardly inclined toward the right. Therefore, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB rolls on the upper side of the partition wall 351c and flows to the left along the arrow L1, falls on the deceleration wall portion 351d at the end, rolls on the upper side of the deceleration wall portion 351d, and the arrow L2. It operates to flow to the right along.

As a result, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB can be sent to the left of the central hole 345, so that the second adjusting device 350 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 15) by the weight of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. A load is applied in the direction. As a result, the sorting device 340 can be maintained in a changed state for a certain period of time (the period until the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB passes to the right of the central hole 345).

The period for maintaining the changed state can be arbitrarily changed depending on the degree of deceleration of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB by the deceleration wall portion 351d. For example, if the flow speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is halved by the deceleration wall portion 351d, the period for maintaining the distribution device 340 in the changed state can be doubled.

As the mode of the deceleration wall portion 351d, various modes are exemplified. For example, a method of decelerating the translational movement speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB by reducing the radius of gyration at the point where the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB comes into contact with the deceleration wall portion 351d is exemplified (see FIG. 12 (d)). That is, by receiving the rotation of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB not at the maximum diameter portion (center portion) but at the portion where the diameter becomes smaller (near the end portion), the translational movement distance per rotation of the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB is obtained. This is a method of shortening and decelerating the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB without reducing the number of rotations. According to this method, the translational speed of the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB after passing through the deceleration wall portion 351d can be increased as compared with the case of reducing the rotation speed of the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB.

Therefore, immediately after reaching the right end of the deceleration wall portion 351d, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB can be thrown to the right at a large speed, and immediately after the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB reaches the right end of the deceleration wall portion 351d, FIG. It is possible to shorten the period until the state changes to the state shown in (c).

As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB passes through the directional valve 351e before and after the state of the distribution device 340 changes from the changed state to the initial state. As shown in FIG. 15C, the directional valve 351e is configured to allow the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB to flow to the right, while preventing the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB from flowing to the left. This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB from bouncing back to the left of the central hole 345.

In the present embodiment, the period from when the sorting device 340 changes to the changed state to when it returns to the initial state is a variable period which is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) is four. It is set to a longer period than (shortest fluctuation period).

Therefore, when a ball is inserted into the distribution device when the distribution device 340 is in the initial state, and the ball enters the detection port 312d (see FIG. 6), the number of reserved balls in the winning port 64 becomes four. In addition, the balls that have entered the distribution device 340 before the end of the fluctuation that is started after that (before the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is vacant) are all distributed to the third groove 313 (see FIG. 13). Then, while the ball passes through the third groove 313, the fluctuation of 1 of the winning opening 64 ends, and the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 becomes vacant, so that the winning opening 64 overflows (the state in which the number of reserved balls is the maximum). By entering the ball into the detection port 312d, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even though the ball has entered.

The degree of deceleration of the ball in the third groove 313 can be set by various methods. For example, the ball may be decelerated by attaching a high-friction sheet to the bottom wall on which the ball rolls.

Here, as a first setting example, the period until the balls pass through the third groove 313 is easily selected when, for example, the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 4, the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period). By setting the period longer than that, when two balls enter the sorting device 340 in succession, the second ball enters the detection port 312d and the second ball enters the third groove. The period from passing through 313 to entering the detection port 312d can be made longer than the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is four. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

Further, as a second setting example, the period until the ball passes through the third groove 313 is, for example, a variable period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 3, and the number of reserved balls is 4. By setting a period longer than the total period of the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) that is likely to be selected in the case of individual balls, even if two balls are continuously inserted into the third groove 313, one ball is inserted. Since the two fluctuations are digested in the period from when the eyeball enters the detection port 312d until the second ball passes through the third groove 313 and enters the detection port 312d, after that, Even if two balls enter the detection port 312d, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

Next, the functional disk device 332b will be described with reference to FIG. In the functional disk device 332b, the position of the center of gravity changes as in the case of the second adjusting device 350 by moving the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB arranged between the functional disk device 332b and the main body plate member 331 (see FIG. 7). It is a device that changes the direction of the load applied to the 332b.

16 (a) to 16 (d) are cross-sectional views of the functional disk device 332b, which is a cross-sectional view of the functional disk device 332b in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis. FIG. 16A shows the case where the speed reducer 320 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), and FIG. 16B shows immediately after the speed reducer 320 changes from the initial state to the intermediate state (see FIG. 13). 16 (c) shows immediately after the speed reducer 320 changes its state from the intermediate state to the ascending state (see FIG. 14), and FIG. 16 (d) shows the speed reducer 320 from the intermediate state to the initial state. The state immediately after the state change is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 16, the functional disk device 332b is a partition that limits the portion through which the sphere can pass from the recessed groove portion 332b1 that is recessed from the back side at a depth at which the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB can move. The wall 332b2 and the partition wall 332b2 are arranged as a rollable plate portion on the lower side of the partition wall 332b2, and are formed so as to project a predetermined width from the end of the partition wall 332b2 and slow down the flow of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. The first deceleration wall portion 332b3, the second deceleration wall portion 332b4 that is arranged on the opposite side of the partition wall 332b2 with the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 sandwiched between them and decelerates the flow of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB, and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. It is mainly provided with a directional valve 332b5 that limits the passage of the vehicle in one direction from the left side to the right side.

For convenience, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB uses the same reference numerals as the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB accommodated in the second adjusting device 350, and is limited to those having the same shape and weight as the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. Not the purpose.

The functional disk device 332b can allow the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB to flow down at the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 to pass through the directional valve 332b5, or can pass through the directional valve 332b5 to flow down at the second deceleration wall portion 332b4. .. Hereinafter, the operation of the functional disk device 332b will be described in detail. In addition, FIG. 6, FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the speed reducer 3420 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the partition plate 332b is tilted downward to the right, and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is a functional disk device. It is maintained on the right side of 332b. As a result, a load for maintaining the slide moving member 321 downward is applied from the rotary urging device 332 to the slide moving member 321 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) vibrates, it is possible to prevent the slide moving member 321 from moving up and down.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the reduction gear 3420 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 13), the partition plate 332b2 is in a mode of inclining downward to the left, while the first reduction wall portion 332b3 is It is considered to be a downward slope to the right. Therefore, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB rolls the upper surface of the partition plate 332b2 to the left along the arrow L3, and then rolls to the right on the upper surface of the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 along the arrow L4. The center of gravity sphere GB is sent to the right side of the rotation center of the functional disk device 332b, and a load is applied in the direction of returning the functional disk device 332b to the initial state (direction of rotating clockwise in FIG. 16).

In the middle of the flow of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), in a state where the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is arranged on the left side of the center of rotation, yesterday the disk device 332b was counterclockwise in FIG. 16 (b). Since the load is applied in the direction of rotating the slide moving member 321 due to gravity, the lowering of the slide moving member 321 can be stopped. Further, the weight of the sphere can prevent the slide moving member 321 from descending (even if the sphere descends, it is possible to form a state in which the slide moving member 321 immediately rises when the sphere arrives).

As shown in FIG. 16 (c), when the speed reducer 3420 is in the ascending state (see FIG. 14), the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 is in a mode of descending and tilting to the left, while the second deceleration wall. The portion 332b4 is in a mode of inclining downward to the right. Therefore, the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB rolls the upper surface of the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 to the left along the arrow L5, and then rolls to the right on the upper surface of the second deceleration wall portion 332b4 along the arrow L6. As a result, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is sent to the right side of the rotation center of the functional disk device 332b, and a load is applied in the direction of returning the functional disk device 332b to the initial state (direction of rotating clockwise in FIG. 16).

When the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is rolling on the upper surface of the first deceleration wall portion 332b3, the sphere passes through the main passage 311a and the deceleration device 320 moves to the ascending state, and the functional disk device 332b is shown in FIG. 16 (c). In the posture shown in the above, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is subsequently decelerated by the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 and further decelerated by the second deceleration wall portion 332b4, so that the reduction gear 320 is placed in the intermediate state. Compared with the case (see FIG. 13), the period until the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB is arranged to the right of the center of rotation is lengthened. Therefore, the speed reducer 320 can be maintained in the ascending state (see FIG. 14) longer than the period in which it is maintained in the intermediate state (see FIG. 13).

As shown in FIG. 16D, when the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB arranged on the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 or the second deceleration wall portion 332b4 is arranged to the right of the center of the functional circle device 332b, the slide moving member The reduction device 320 operates due to the weight of 321 to bring the functional disk device 332b into the same posture as the initial state, and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is discharged from the first reduction wall portion 332b3 or the second reduction wall portion 332b4 and is recessed. Roll 332b1. When the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB passes through the directional valve 332b5, the functional disk device 332b returns to the initial state (see FIG. 16A).

A flow pattern of a sphere flowing down inside the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 300. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b) show a case where three balls P1 to P3 are inserted in a row from the winning opening 64, and FIG. In a), the state in which the spheres P1 to P3 are arranged in front of the wind turbine member 322 is shown, and in FIG. 17 (b), the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 are separated from the second extending vane portion 322c of the wind turbine member 322. In FIG. 18A, the state in which the sphere P2 pushed the second extending wing portion 322c and reached the sorting device 340 was illustrated, and in FIG. 18B, the sphere P3 was the first. The state in which the two grooves 312 begin to invade is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 17 (a), FIG. 17 (b), FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), after the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 in the lower right space of the structural drawing. A graph showing the situation of is illustrated. In addition, the timing at which the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 actually deviates slightly (about 0.2 seconds), but in the graph, the balls P1 to P3 win the prize in order to facilitate understanding. It is illustrated as having entered the mouth 64 at the same time, and the horizontal axis is configured as the elapsed time T.

In the graph, the timing when the spheres P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 (“IN”) and the timing when the spheres P1 to P3 enter the detection opening 312d (“OUT”) are shown, and when the spheres P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 (“OUT”). Which section is flowing down is illustrated by a code. Further, in the corresponding drawing, which timing of the graph the state shown in FIGS. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b) represents is indicated by a triangular mark.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the spheres P1 to P3 flow down the first groove 311 under the same conditions until they reach the wind turbine member 322, and there is no difference in their velocities.

As shown in FIG. 17B, the first ball P1 pushes forward the first extending blade portion 322b of the wind turbine member 322, and the second ball P2 is separated from the second extending blade portion 322c. Then, the preceding sphere P1 flows down to the convex portion 321a1 without being decelerated, while the convex portion 321a1 projects into the main passage 311a on the downstream side of the sphere P2. Therefore, when the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 come into contact with the convex portion 321a1, a load in the direction opposite to the flow direction is intermittently applied and the sphere P3 decelerates. As a result, a space can be provided between the spheres P1 and the spheres P2. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the spheres from being clogged and malfunctioning due to the two spheres being simultaneously entered into the sorting device 340. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the first period of passing through the first groove required for the ball P1 to pass through the first groove 311 is set to 2 seconds (T11 = 2s), and after the ball P1 has passed, the speed reducer 320 ( The deceleration return first start period, which is the period from the intermediate state to the start of returning to the initial state, is set to 5 seconds, and the speed reducer is set to return to the initial state 1 second after the start of return.

Further, the second period T2, which is the period from when the ball P1 enters the second groove 312 to when it enters the detection port 312d, is 1.5 seconds (T2 = 1.5s). The second period T2 is the first half T2a (T2a = 1s) of the second period, which is one second before reaching the sorting device 340, and the second half of the second period, which is 0.5 seconds after passing through the sorting device 340. It is divided into T2b (T2b = 0.5s), and the period during which the ball passes through the second groove 312 is invariant regardless of the state of the sorting device 340.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the second ball P2 pushes the second extending blade portion 322c of the wind turbine member 322, the preceding ball P2 flows into the second groove, while the ball P3 , Flows into the recessed portion 311e on the back side along the inclined surface 321b2 of the slide moving member 321. As a result, in addition to being decelerated by the convex portion 321a1, the flow path of the sphere P3 is extended by the amount passing through the inner recessed portion 311e, so that the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 can be spaced apart from each other.

In the present embodiment, the first groove passage second period T12 required for the sphere P2 to pass through the first groove 311 is set to 3 seconds (T12 = 3s), and the sphere P3 passes through the first groove 311. The third period T13 required for passing through the first groove is set to 6 seconds (T13 = 6s). Further, the deceleration return second start period, which is the period from the passage of the ball P2 to the start of the deceleration device 320 returning to the initial state (from the ascending state), is set to 7 seconds, and the deceleration device is set to 2 seconds after the start of the return. It is set to return to the initial state.

Further, since the sphere P2 comes into contact with the arc wall portion 343 of the sorting device 340 and flows into the third groove 313, the path to the detection port 312d is extended as compared with the sphere P1. Therefore, the distance between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 can be widened.

In the present embodiment, the third period T3 required for the balls P2 and P3 to pass through the third groove 313 is set to 3 seconds (T3 = 3s). Further, the speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB of the second adjusting device 350 is set in such a manner that the distribution maintenance period BT1 which is the period from the change of the state of the distribution device 340 to the change state to the start of returning to the initial state is 4 seconds. It is set (BT1 = 4s).

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the speed reducer 320 is in the raised state, the distance between the end of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the contact wall 312a is about the same as the diameter of the sphere. Will be done. Therefore, the spheres P2 and P3 are subjected to a large resistance when passing between the end portion of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the contact wall 312a, and the momentum is reduced. Thereby, the distance between the spheres P1 and the spheres P2 and P3 can be widened.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the sphere P2 flows down the third groove 313 and receives the first wall portion 341 and presses it against the wall portion 312c, so that the sorting device 340 can be easily maintained in the changed state. it can.

As shown in the graph, the distribution device 340 is maintained in the changed state even at the timing when the sphere P3 flows into the distribution device 340 (at the timing when only the distribution maintenance period BT1 has elapsed after the state of the distribution device 340 changes to the changed state. The sphere P3 reaches the sorting device 340). Therefore, the ball P3 flows into the third groove 313. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distance between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 from being shortened.

As shown in the graph, according to the present embodiment, when the spheres P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 in succession, the spheres P1 and P2 enter the detection opening 312d at intervals of 4 seconds, and the spheres P2 And the ball P3 enter at intervals of 3 seconds. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation period of 1 selected after the maximum number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, in the case of FIGS. 17 and 18, an overflow occurs in the winning opening 64. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the sorting device 340 is maintained in the changed state is one variable period selected after the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is maximized when the balls flow into the detection port 312d. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the ball P2 enters the sorting device 340 during the fluctuation period, the ball P2 is surely flowed into the third groove 313. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring when the balls continuously enter the sorting device 340.

Therefore, even when three balls P1 to P3 are continuously entered into the winning opening 64, the timing at which they are entered into the detection opening 312d can be shifted, and overflow at the winning opening 64 can be suppressed. Can be done. As a result, even if the player does not pay special attention, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball enters the winning opening 64 but cannot receive the lottery, and the game can be performed comfortably.

In the present embodiment, when another ball is connected to the rear of the ball P3 and another ball enters the winning opening 64 (when four balls are continuously entered), the fourth ball and the ball P3 are connected. The timing of entering the detection port 312d cannot be shifted. Therefore, it is desirable to recommend a stop hit so as not to play a game in which four balls are inserted into the winning opening 64 while the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is three.

Further, as shown in the graph, when the balls P1 to P3 continuously enter the winning opening 64, for example, the ball P3 wins a prize at an interval of 1 second or more after entering the winning opening 64 of the ball P1. When entering the mouth 64, by the time the ball P3 reaches the sorting device 340, the sorting device 340 has been returned to the initial state, so that the ball P3 flows down the second groove 312 in the vertical direction and the detection port 312d. Enter the ball. In this case, the delay period of the ball P3 is not sufficient, and the overflow at the winning opening 64 cannot be suppressed.

Therefore, the effect of suppressing overflow when the third ball enters the winning opening 64 is limited to a limited situation (after the ball P1 and the ball P2 continuously enter the winning opening 64, the ball P1 enters the ball. Since it can be played only in the situation where the ball P3 enters the winning opening 64 within 1 second from the above, it happens to be stopped (holding the winning opening 64) while leaving the need for the player to make a stop. If you forget to stop launching the ball when the number of balls is 3, you can fortunately create a situation where the winning opening 64 does not overflow if the situation is met.

This makes it possible to form a clear difference in the number of lottery opportunities for the number of balls entered into the winning opening 64 between the player who makes a stop and the player who does not make a stop. In a rare situation where three balls enter the winning opening 64 in a row when the number of reserved balls in the opening 64 is 3, the third ball P3 does not overflow at the winning opening 64. It is possible to make the conditions strict (limit the ball entry interval) and produce the value when overflow does not occur.

As a result, it is possible to make the player who makes a stop hit more carefully (because it is possible to pay attention to the number of reserved balls and stop the launch at an early stage), so there is an opportunity for a lottery. It is possible to enthusiastically operate the handle 51 (see FIG. 1) in order to acquire more of the above, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, a case where the balls P4 and P5 enter the delay device 300 at intervals will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. 19 (a), 19 (b) and 20 are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 19 (a) shows a state in which the ball P4 reaches the wind turbine member 322 when the speed reducer 320 is in the initial state, and FIG. 19 (b) shows the speed reducer 320 in the intermediate state and the distribution device 340. The case where the ball P5 enters the winning opening 64 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 enters the detection port 312d (4 seconds after the ball P4 enters) is shown in the figure. In 20, the state immediately before the ball P5 is entered into the sorting device 340 is illustrated. In FIGS. 19 (a), 19 (b), and 20, in the lower right space of the structural drawing, a graph showing the situation after the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 has a horizontal axis. It is shown as an elapsed time T.

In the graph, the timing when the spheres P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 (“IN”) and the timing when the spheres P4 and P5 enter the detection opening 312d (“OUT”) are shown, and when and which of the spheres P4 and P5 Whether it flows down the section is indicated by a symbol. Further, which timing of the graph the state shown in FIGS. 19A, 19B, and 20 represents is indicated by a triangular mark in the corresponding drawing.

In the state shown in FIG. 20, the ball P5 does not enter the third groove 313, flows vertically downward through the second groove 312, and enters the detection port 312d. Here, if the ball P5 enters the detection port 312d before the fluctuation immediately after the ball P4 enters the detection port 312d is completed, overflow may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first groove passage second period T12 required for the ball P5 to pass through the speed reducer 320 in the intermediate state is the period of fluctuation when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is four (3). The mode is set to be longer than (seconds) (the first groove passage second period T12 is set to 3 seconds). In this case, even if the sphere P5 does not flow into the third groove 313 (flows down the second groove 312 in the vertical direction), the fluctuation ends before the sphere P5 passes over the slide moving member 321. It is possible to prevent the overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64. In this case, since the ball P5 does not flow down the third groove 313, the timing of the lottery by the ball P5 can be advanced, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

Further, since the distribution maintenance period BT1 from the state change of the distribution device 340 to the start of returning to the initial state is set to 4 seconds, it is 3 seconds after the ball P4 enters the winning opening 64 (winning opening). It is possible to reliably enter the ball that has entered the third groove 313 (the period of fluctuation when the number of reserved balls of 64 is four). Further, since the ball can be entered into the third groove 313 until immediately before the sorting device 340 returns to the initial state, the ball P4 enters within less than 4 seconds after entering the winning opening 64. The ball can be reliably entered into the third groove 313. As a result, even when the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 at intervals of 3 seconds or less, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a case where balls continuously enter the sorting device 340 will be described. In the present embodiment, for example, when the speed reducer 320 is in the ascending state (see FIG. 14), it is a state that occurs when two additional balls enter the winning opening 64 in succession (for example, FIG. 17 (see FIG. 14). This is a state that occurs when the balls P1 and P2 shown in a) are inserted, and after the balls P2 enter the second groove 312, two balls continuously enter the winning opening 64). 21 (a) to 21 (c) are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 21 (a) shows a state in which the sorting device 340 is in the initial state and the ball P6 enters the sorting device 340. In FIG. 21 (b), the sorting device 340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P6 to rotate the ball. The state in which P7 is extruded is illustrated, and in FIG. 21 (c), the state in which the sphere P6 flows down the second groove 312 and the sphere P7 flows down the third groove 313 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the sorting device 340 is provided with a space capable of accommodating only one ball between the first wall portion 341 and the second wall portion 342. Therefore, when two balls reach the sorting device 340 in a row, the first ball P6 is housed in the sorting device 340, but the second ball P7 remains without being housed. Therefore, only the sphere P6 can flow down to the detection port 312d alone.

The tip convex portion 342a arranged at the tip of the second wall portion 342 of the sorting device 340 moves the sphere P7 to the entrance of the third groove 313 in a posture in which the sphere P7 remains outside (see FIG. 21B). It is formed in a manner of pushing out toward the tip (the entrance of the third groove 313 is formed at a position facing the tip convex portion 342a). Therefore, the ball P7 can be pushed out to the inner side of the third groove 313, and it is possible to prevent the ball P7 from staying near the entrance of the third groove 313. Thereby, for example, even when the distribution device 340 is set in such a manner that the distribution device 340 immediately returns to the initial state from the changed state, the ball P7 is prevented from entering the distribution device 340 (without being properly pushed into the third groove 313). can do.

As shown in FIG. 21 (c), the ball P6 enters the detection port 312d with the sorting device 340 as a boundary, and the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d after flowing down the third groove 313. Here, as described above, the third period T3, which is the period during which the balls P7 flow down the third groove 313, is set to 3 seconds, and that period is selected after the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is maximized. Since the fluctuation period (3 seconds) of 1 or more is set, even if the ball P6 enters the detection port 312d when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 3, the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d. By this time, one fluctuation will end. Therefore, when the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the winning port 64.

In the present embodiment, if another ball enters the detection port 312d within 3 seconds after the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d, the ball is configured to overflow at the winning port 64. To. As a result, it is possible to construct a flow path in which overflow can be suppressed when the number of balls entering in a short period of time is up to two, while overflow occurs when the number of balls entering in a short period of time is three. Therefore, it is possible to make the player carefully consider the firing intensity of the ball and the firing frequency of the ball in order to obtain more chances of lottery at the winning opening 64, and improve the playability regarding the mode of launching the ball. Can be made to.

Since the sorting device 340 rotates from the initial state to the changing state only by the weight of the sphere, the sphere P6 and the sphere P7 are arranged between the side wall portion 312e and the tip convex portion 342a. It is possible to solve the problem that occurs only when the sorting device 340 operates electrically, such as the sorting device 340 operating and causing ball clogging.

In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 21C, for example, the ball reaches the sorting device 340 at the timing when the sorting device 340 returns to the initial state within 1 second after reaching, and the next ball further reaches the sorting device 340. If the 340 reaches the sorting device 340 one second after returning to the initial state, there is a risk that the ball that arrived earlier and the ball that arrived later may collide at the confluence position of the first groove 311 and the third groove 313. Yes, in that case, two balls enter the detection port 312d at intervals of 3 seconds or less. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 20) is three while the preceding ball passes through the third groove 313, the overflow in the winning opening 64 cannot be avoided.

This is significantly different from the case where the two balls reach the sorting device 340 when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state. That is, when the two balls reach the distribution device 340 at 2-second intervals when the distribution device 340 is in the initial state, the latter balls are guided to the third groove 313 and therefore enter the detection port 312d. It is possible to secure an interval of 3 seconds or more (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the distribution device 340 is in a changing state and the spheres reach the distribution device 340 at 2-second intervals, the front sphere is guided to the third groove 313, and the rear sphere vertically downwards the second groove 312. There is a possibility that the ball may flow down, and the interval at which the ball enters the detection port 312d may be shorter than 3 seconds.

As a result, it is possible to form a flow path that cannot always suppress overflow when two balls enter the ball entry port 64 in succession. Therefore, while providing a mechanism that can suppress overflow, basically, it is assumed that the maximum number of lottery can be obtained by performing a game of stopping when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 reaches three. The significance of hitting can be improved.

Next, the delayed floor device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 33. FIG. 22 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 22, in the delay floor device 400, a part of the spheres flowing down to the left of the center frame 86 flows in (through a so-called “warp flow path”), and the sphere rolls on the upper part. A movable device that is configured to be possible and that repeatedly reciprocates to drop a sphere whose velocity in the left-right direction has converged to 0 toward the front side. And a link member 420 (see FIG. 24) that matches the movements of the pair of fan-shaped members 410, and a fixed floor that tiltably supports the fan-shaped member 410 and allows the ball to pass through before flowing into the fan-shaped member 410. It mainly comprises a fixed floor 430.

In the initial state (see FIG. 22), the delayed floor device 400 is configured in such a manner that the sphere can be easily converged at the center position in the left-right direction (the left-right peripheral portion of the fixed floor 430 is inclined downward toward the center position). The fan-shaped member 410 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the center position in the left-right direction and the center position of the winning opening 64 coincide with each other in the vertical direction. That is, the arrangement is such that the ball can be easily inserted from the delayed floor device 400 into the winning opening 64.

Among the fan-shaped members 410 arranged in pairs in the front-rear direction, the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side tilts forward in a manner of tilting forward toward the front side, so that the ball can easily enter the winning opening 64.

The fan-shaped member 410 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. Since the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are composed of the same members, one fan-shaped member 410 will be described, and the other fan-shaped member 410 will be omitted.

23 (a) is a top view of the fan-shaped member 410, FIG. 23 (b) is a side view of the fan-shaped member 410 in the direction of arrow XXIIIb of FIG. 23 (a), and FIG. 23 (c) is a side view of the fan-shaped member 410. FIG. 23 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member 410 taken along the line XXIIIc-XXIIIc of FIG. 23 (a), and FIG. 23 (d) is a bottom view of the fan-shaped member 410 in the direction of arrow XXIIId of FIG. 23 (b).

As shown in FIG. 23, the fan-shaped member 410 includes a main body member 411 composed of a fan-shaped plate member and an extended arm portion 412 extending coaxially in the left-right direction from an intermediate position of the main body member 411. A convex fixing portion 413 having an insertion hole which is projected from the bottom surface of the main body member 411 in a pair and has an insertion hole through which the connecting rod 414 is inserted and fixed, and a connecting rod 414 which is inserted and fixed to the convex fixing portion 413. Mainly prepare.

The width of the main body member 411 is about the diameter of a sphere on the tapered side (lower side in FIG. 23A). Further, on the tapered side thereof, there is a chamfered portion 411a that is inclined downward, and an opening 411b that is formed between the convex fixing portions 413.

The connecting rod 414 is configured as a separate member from the main body member 411. When assembling, the link member 420 (see FIG. 24) is arranged between the convex fixing portions 413, and the connecting rod 414 is inserted into the adjusting elongated hole 422 of the link member 420, and the connecting rod is inserted. The 414 is fixed to the convex fixing portion 413. As a result, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 can be connected (see FIG. 25).

Next, the link member 420 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The link member 420 is a member that connects a pair of fan-shaped members 410 and has a role of determining the operating direction thereof.

24 (a) is a side view of the link member 420, and FIG. 24 (b) is a bottom view of the link member 420 in the direction of arrow XXIVb of FIG. 24 (a). As shown in FIG. 24, the link member 420 has a main body member 421 formed of a plate-shaped member having an L-shaped cross section and a constant thickness (see FIG. 24 (b)), and a pair of front and rear members on the upper portion of the main body member 421. It mainly includes an adjustment elongated hole 422 drilled in the thickness direction and extended in the front-rear direction, and a support elongated hole 423 drilled in the thickness direction and extended in the vertical direction at the lower part of the main body member 421. ..

The adjustment elongated hole 422 is a hole through which the connecting rod 414 (see FIG. 23) of the fan-shaped member 410 is inserted. That is, the link member 420 and the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are connected via the adjustment elongated hole 422. The support elongated hole 423 is an elongated hole through which the support convex portion 434 (see FIG. 26) of the fixed floor 430 is inserted, and acts in a manner of designating the moving direction of the link member 420 in one direction (vertical direction).

The fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the pre-assembled state will be described with reference to FIG. 25. 25 (a) is a top view of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420, and FIG. 25 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the XXVb-XXVb line of FIG. 25 (a). .. The pre-assembled state shown in FIG. 25 refers to the sub-assembled state before assembling to the fixed floor 430. In the manufacturing process, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are assembled to the fixed floor 430 after the pre-assembled state is configured.

In the pre-assembled state, the connecting rod 414 of the fan-shaped member 410 is fixed to the convex fixing portion 413 in a state of being inserted into the adjusting elongated hole 422 of the link member 420, whereby the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are connected to each other. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 25, since the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are connected by the link member 420, when one fan-shaped member 410 operates, the operation is transmitted to the other fan-shaped member 410 via the link member 420. Consists of aspects.

Next, the fixed floor 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. 26 is a top view of the fixed floor 430, FIG. 27 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the fixed floor 430 in line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 26, and FIG. 27 (b) is XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the fixed floor 430 in line. Note that FIGS. 26 and 27 show a state in which the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are removed. Further, in FIG. 26, the support portion 432 is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 26, 27 (a) and 27 (b), in the fixed floor 430, the fan-shaped member 410 is arranged in the assembled state (see FIG. 22), and the upper surface of the fan-shaped member 410 and the fixed floor 430 are formed. The portion between the rotating shafts of the fan-shaped member 410 is recessed corresponding to the thickness of the fan-shaped member 410 so as to be formed at the surface position, and the outer portion thereof is recessed in such a manner that it does not interfere with the movement of the fan-shaped member 410. The recessed floor 431 to be formed, the support portion 432 on which the extension arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410 is supported when the recessed floor 431 is arranged, and the central portion of the recessed floor 431 are opened in the vertical direction. At the hollow portion 433, which is a cavity, the support convex portion 434 which is projected from the side wall forming the hollow portion 433 in the left-right direction, and the position where the fan-shaped member 410 is deviated from the closest position to the left and right in the assembled state. It mainly includes an inflow port 435 that is recessed with a size that allows the ball to flow in, and a delay flow path 436 that communicates from the inflow port 435 and allows the ball to flow down.

The support portion 432 includes a support groove portion 432a having a groove shape for supporting the extended arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410, and a support lid portion 432b that covers the support groove portion 432a from above and covers the support groove portion 432a.

The hollow portion 433 is a cavity in which the link member 420 is housed, and the support convex portion 434 is a protrusion inserted into the support elongated hole 423 of the link member 420. When assembling the link member 420, the link member 420 is inserted into the gap between the hollow portion 433 and the tip of the support convex portion 434, and then the link member 420 is slid in the left-right direction to support the convex portion. The portion 434 can be inserted through the support elongated hole 423.

The inflow port 435 is composed of a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the member is covered above the inflow port 435 in a manner of blocking a part of the inflow port 435, it is impossible for the ball to flow into the inflow port 435.

The delay flow path 436 is a flow path for delaying the entry of the ball into the winning opening 64 with respect to the ball directly entering the winning opening 64 from the fan-shaped member 410. For example, by making the period required for the ball to pass through the delay flow path 436 longer than the fluctuation period of 1 that occurs when the ball enters the winning opening 64, an overflow occurs at the winning opening 64. It can be suppressed.

For example, by setting the period required for the balls to pass through the delay flow path 436 to be longer than the variable period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 4, the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 can be increased. Even if the first ball that has fallen from the fan-shaped member 410 directly enters the winning opening 64 and the second ball enters the inflow port 435 in the three states, the two balls Since the fluctuation of 1 is completed by the time the eye ball enters the winning opening 64, it is possible to suppress the overflow at the winning opening 64 due to the second ball entering the winning opening 64. it can.

A method of assembling the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 (see FIG. 25) to the fixed floor 430 will be described. First, of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the pre-assembled state described above, the link member 420 is inserted into the cavity portion 433, and the support elongated hole 423 (see FIG. 25) is inserted into the support convex portion 434 by the above method. After fitting, the extended arm portion 412 (see FIG. 25) of the fan-shaped member 410 is placed on the support groove portion 432a, and the support lid portion 432b is covered and fitted over the support groove portion 432a, whereby the fan-shaped member 410 is fitted with the support portion of the fixed floor 430. The link member 420 is supported by the 432 so as to be tiltable, and the link member 420 is supported so as to be movable up and down (along the extending direction of the support elongated hole 423). As a result, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are assembled to the fixed floor 430 to form the delayed floor device 400.

The state change of the delayed floor device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. 28 (a) is a partial top view of the delayed floor device 400, FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a), and FIG. 28 (c). ) Is a partial top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 28 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 on the line XXVIIId-XXVIIId of FIG. 28 (c).

In the initial state shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are in a parallel posture, and in the tilted state shown in FIGS. 28 (c) and 28 (d), the fan-shaped members are in a parallel posture. It is assumed that 410 is tilted by about 45 ° from the initial state.

The major difference between the initial state and the tilted state is whether or not the ball can enter the inflow port 435 and whether or not the ball can pass through the intermediate position of the pair of fan-shaped members 410. Regarding the former, in the initial state, a part of the fan-shaped member 410 is covered on the upper part of the inflow port 435, so that the ball cannot enter the inflow port 435. Since the fan-shaped member 410 retreats from the upper part of the inflow port 435 (because it is tilted to the retreating position), the ball can enter the inflow port 435.

Regarding the latter, in the initial state, the fan-shaped member 410 is in a parallel posture so that the sphere can pass through the upper part between the fan-shaped members 410, but in the tilted state, the fan-shaped member 410 is at a position where the sphere passes. The ball that has flowed into the portion between the fan-shaped members 410 collides with the fan-shaped member 410 and is prevented from passing through. Since the inflow port 435 is arranged between the fan-shaped members 410 in the tilted state, the ball colliding with the fan-shaped member 410 does not bounce (such as when it vibrates in the vertical direction) and stays above the inflow port 435. In this case, it is possible to drop the ball directly into the inflow port 435.

With reference to FIG. 29, the operation mode of the delay floor device 400 due to the difference in position when the ball falls from the fixed floor 430 to the front side will be described. 29 (a) is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 29 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), FIG. 29 (c). Is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 29 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 on the XXIXd-XXIXd line of FIG. 29 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d), the delay floor device 400 is used to move the ball when the ball P11 previously on the delay floor device 400 falls to the front side of the fixed floor 430. Along (using the weight of the sphere), the fan-shaped member 410 operates. Therefore, a drive source such as a motor for operating the delay floor device 400 can be eliminated.

29 (a) and 29 (b) show a state in which the sphere P11 is about to fall from a position away from the fan-shaped member 410, and in FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d), the sphere P11 is fan-shaped. A state in which the member 410 is about to fall from the center position to the front side of the fixed floor 430 is shown.

Here, it is possible to configure the delay floor device 400 to move each time the ball passes over the delay floor device 400, but in that case, the delay floor device 400 does not depend on how the ball passes. There is a risk that the entry into the winning opening 64 will be unnecessarily delayed due to the influence of. In that case, the start of the fluctuation triggered by the entry of the ball into the winning opening 64 is delayed, which causes dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the ball P11 falls from the state where the ball P11 is on the fan-shaped member 410, which is a position where the ball P11 can easily enter the winning opening 64 as it is, to the front side of the fixed floor 430. When the delay floor device 400 is tilted in the leaning state, while the ball P11 falls from a position away from the fan-shaped member 410, which is a position unlikely to enter the winning opening 64 even if the ball P11 falls. The delayed floor device 400 is configured to maintain the initial state. Therefore, the delayed floor device 400 can be operated only when the falling ball P11 is likely to enter the winning opening 64.

As a result, the delayed floor device 400 operates even when it is not necessary, and it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the winning opening 64 from being unnecessarily delayed. It is possible to avoid delaying the start of the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As shown in FIG. 29 (d), the chamfered portion 411a is formed at the tip of the fan-shaped member 410, so that the tip of the fan-shaped member 410 is inclined while protruding from the front surface of the game board 13 in the initial state. In the state, it can be configured to be pulled backward from the front surface of the game board 13. As a result, the ball can be rolled to a position where it can easily fall into the winning opening 64 (front side of the front surface of the game board 13) and then dropped. Therefore, the ball falling from the state shown in FIG. 29 (d) can be dropped. It is possible to improve the probability of entering the winning opening 64.

With reference to FIG. 30, the relationship between the ball P11 previously on the delayed floor device 400 and the ball P12 newly entered in the delayed floor device 400 will be described. 30 (a) is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 30 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a).

30 (a) and 30 (b) show a state in which the sphere P11 flows down to the front side of the fan-shaped member 410, the fan-shaped member 410 is tilted, and then the sphere P12 is inserted from the left-right direction. To.

A predetermined ball reaches the center of the floor portion arranged above the winning opening 64, and another ball rolls on the floor portion from the left-right direction at the timing when it is about to fall to the winning opening 64 and collides with the predetermined ball. However, the predetermined ball may come off from the winning opening 64, which has been a source of deteriorating the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, when the sphere P21 rolls at the timing when the sphere P11 falls from the front side of the fan-shaped member 410, the delay floor device 400 is tilted and the delay floor device 400 is tilted. By colliding the sphere P12 with the fan-shaped member 410, it is possible to prevent the sphere P11 from colliding with the sphere P12.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 30A, the gap formed by the tip portions of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 is tapered toward the traveling direction of the sphere P12 (to the right in FIG. 30A). Therefore, even if the sphere P12 rolls at a position slightly deviated from the intermediate portion of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 in the front-rear direction and collides with the fan-shaped member 410, the speed direction of the spheres P12 is paired along the tapered shape of the gap. It can be modified in the direction toward the intermediate position of the fan-shaped member 410. Therefore, the rolling path of the sphere P12 can be limited, and it is possible to easily avoid the collision between the sphere P12 and the sphere P11.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, two balls P11 and P12 enter the delayed floor device 400 at intervals, and the delayed floor device 400 in a state where the reciprocating motion is repeated and the velocity in the left-right direction converges to 0. The action of is described.

31 (a) is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 31 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in the line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a). Is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 31 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 on the line XXXId-XXXId of FIG. 31 (c).

In FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the delayed floor device 400 is in the initial state, and the sphere P11 rides on the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side and the sphere P12 rides on the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side. Illustrated, in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), the sphere P11 flows down to the front side from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), and the delayed floor device 400 is tilted. ..

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (d), in the sphere P12 on the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side, the sphere P11 flows down from the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side, and the delay floor device 400 is in an inclined state. As a result, the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is pushed back in the back direction (to the right in FIG. 31B) along the inclination of the fan-shaped member 410.

After that, the ball P11 falls and the delay floor device 400 returns to the initial state, so that the ball P12 can pass over the delay floor device 400 again and roll above the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side. .. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a), as compared with the case where the sphere P11 and the sphere P12 continuously enter the winning opening 64, the sphere P11 is pushed back by the amount that the sphere P11 and the sphere P12 enter. The intervals can be separated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball P11 and the ball P12 from entering the winning opening 64 and causing an overflow at the winning opening 64.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, two spheres P11 and P12 enter the delay floor device 400, and the spheres P11 and P12 move in the front-rear direction in a state where the reciprocating motion is repeated and the velocity in the left-right direction converges to 0. The operation of the delayed floor device 400 when arranged in a row will be described.

32 (a) is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 32 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). Is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 32 (d) is a front view of the delayed floor device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXIId of FIG. 32 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), when the two spheres P11 and P12 are arranged in a row, the spheres P11 are on the front side (front side) of the extended arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side. In the state of being arranged on the left side of FIG. 32 (b), the sphere P12 is arranged near the intermediate position of the pair of front and rear fan-shaped members 410 (see FIG. 32 (b)).

From this state, when the sphere P11 falls from the front side of the delay floor device 400 and the delay floor device 400 is tilted, the sphere P12 is attached to the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410 when the tip portion (arc portion) is raised. Can be lifted. In the present embodiment, since the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410 has an arc shape, the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410 supporting the sphere P12 tilts downward as it goes outward in the left-right direction in the tilted state (FIG. 32 (d)). reference). Therefore, the sphere P12 does not continue to be maintained at the center of the left and right sides of the fan-shaped member 410, but flows down to the left and right outside along the shape of the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410. As a result, the sphere P12 flows from the fan-shaped member 410 into the inflow port 435. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball P12 from entering the winning opening 64 in succession with the ball P11.

33 (a) and 33 (b) are cross-sectional views of the delayed floor device 400 on line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (c). In FIG. 33 (a), the state in which the spheres P11 and P12 are flowing down from the state shown in FIG. 32 (c) is in the process of flowing down, and in FIG. 33 (b), the spheres P11 and P11 are further changed from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a). The state in which P12 flows down and the ball P11 enters the winning opening 64 is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), when the spheres P11 and P12 flow down in succession on the delayed floor device 400, the sphere P11 falls on the front side of the game board 13 and the sphere P12 is delayed. It flows down the flow path 436. That is, since the flow paths of the two balls P11 and P12 are separated and the delayed floor device 400 is composed of a long flow path, the timing at which the two balls P11 and P12 win the winning opening 64 is shifted. Can be done.

Therefore, for example, even if the information is acquired immediately after entering the winning opening 64 and the fluctuation is started by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the winning opening 64 may overflow. Can be suppressed.

That is, the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 4 during the period from the position of the sphere P12 shown in FIG. 33 (b) until the sphere P12 flows down to the winning opening 64 by flowing down the remaining portion of the delay flow path 436. By setting a period longer than the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) that is likely to be selected in the case of individual pieces, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow at the winning opening 64.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. In the first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 340 changes the posture only by moving the center of gravity has been described, but in the delay device 2300 in the second embodiment, the locking device 2315 arranged in the main body member 2310 has a long hole. It is supported by 2316 and is configured to maintain the posture of the sorting device 2340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

34 (a) to 34 (c) are partial front views of the delay device 2300 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the spheres P21 and P22 reach the sorting device 2340 in the initial state in a row, and FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the sorting device 2340 changes depending on the weight of the spheres P21. The state in which the sphere P22 flows down the third groove 313 is shown as the state changes to, and in FIG. 34 (c), the sphere P22 is released from the locking device 2315, and the sorting device 2340 returns to the initial state. The state in which the movement is started is shown in the figure. In the present embodiment, the second adjusting device 350 is not arranged in the sorting device 2340, and the sorting device 2340 is urged toward the initial state by a spring mechanism (not shown).

In the sorting device 2340, the first wall portion 2341 is composed of about half the length of the second wall portion 342. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball P22 flowing down from the third groove 313 from colliding with the first wall portion 2341, and to prevent the ball P22 from interfering with the return operation of the sorting device 2340.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the locking device 2315 has a length extending in the left-right direction on the wall portion on the back side (back side in the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIG. 34) of the main body member 2310 at the lower end portion of the side wall portion 312e. A hook member 2315a that is slidably and rotatably supported by a long hole 2316, which is a hole, and a torsion spring 2315b that generates an elastic force that urges the hook member 2315a to the right and clockwise in the front view. , Equipped with. In the present embodiment, a space is formed in the lower end portion of the side wall portion 312e so that the hook member 2315a can pass through the space.

The hook member 2315a includes a shaft portion 2315a1 supported by an elongated hole 2316 extending in the left-right direction in a wall portion formed between a pair of upper and lower third grooves 313, and a shaft portion 2315a1 thereof. The contact portion 2315a2 is integrally formed with the shaft portion 2315a1 and is formed so as to penetrate the side wall portion 312e and project to the upper right side (upper right side of FIG. 34) of the shaft portion 2315a1. It mainly includes a release portion 2315a3 formed by projecting inward of the third groove 313 on the side.

The contact portion 2315a2 is arranged at a position where it interferes with the movement locus of the tip convex portion 342a of the sorting device 2340. The shape of the abutting portion 2315a2 is such that the upper surface portion suddenly descends and inclines toward the right, and the lower surface portion has a shape along the left-right direction (a shape that makes surface contact with the tip convex portion 342a). When the state changes from the initial state to the changing state, the resistance applied to the sorting device 2340 can be suppressed and the moving speed thereof can be improved, while when the sorting device 2340 changes from the changed state to the initial state, the state changes. , The resistance applied to the sorting device 2340 can be increased to facilitate locking of the sorting device 2340 in a changed state.

Further, since the shaft portion 2315a1 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction along the elongated hole 2316, the hook member 2315a can be moved in a state immediately before the sorting device 2340 changes (immediately before FIG. 34B). You can escape to the left. As a result, as compared with the case where the hook member 2315a is pivotally supported, it is possible to prevent the sorting device 2340 from colliding with the locking device 2315 and engaging with the locking device 2315, resulting in malfunction.

In the torsion spring 2315b, the torsion portion is wound around the shaft portion 2315a1, one end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 34 (a)) is locked to the main body member 2310, and the other end portion (FIG. 34 (a)). ) The right end) is configured to be locked to the hook member 2315a.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the distribution device 2340 is changed by the weight of the sphere P21, the tip convex portion 342a is locked to the contact portion 2315a2. As a result, the sorting device 2340 is maintained in a changed state. In the present embodiment, as long as the locking device 2315 does not change its posture, the sorting device 2340 maintains the changed state.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the sphere P22 flowing down the third groove 313 comes into contact with the release portion 2315a and the hook member 2315a changes its posture counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the distribution device 2340 by the hook member 2315a (The contact portion 2315a2 is arranged outside the movement locus of the sorting device 2340), and the sorting device 2340 can be returned to the initial state.

According to this, in a state where the urging force in the front-view clockwise direction is always applied to the distribution device 2340, a time delay is formed from the state change of the distribution device 2340 to the change state to the start of movement toward the initial state. can do. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the spheres P21 and P22 can be reliably distributed to separate flow paths.

Although the case where the spheres P21 and P22 flow down in succession is described in FIG. 34, the effect of the present embodiment is that the spheres P21 and P22 are effective in light of the fact that the locking device 2315a is released by the flow of the spheres P22. It is exhibited regardless of the arrival interval of the sorting device 2340.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the delay device 300 is changed by the action of a sphere flowing down the upstream side of the detection port 312d has been described, but the delay device 3300 in the third embodiment has a downstream side of the detection port 312d. It is composed of a mode in which the state changes due to the action of a flowing sphere. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the detection port 312d is arranged so as to have an opening facing in the left-right direction.

35 (a), 35 (b), 35 (c), 36 (a), 36 (b) and 36 (c) show the time in which the spheres P31 and P32 flow through the delay device 3300. It is a partial front view of the delay device 3300 in the third embodiment illustrated in series.

In addition, in FIG. 35A, a state in which the stop device 3340 is set to the initial state and the balls P31 and P32 continuously enter the winning opening 64 and reach the stop device 3340 is shown in FIG. 35B. In FIG. 35 (a), a state in which the stop device 3340 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 35 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 35 (c), a state in which the stop device 3340 is in a changed state is shown.

Further, FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the preceding sphere P31 passes through the detection port 312d in the left-right direction and abuts on the maintenance device 3360 to change the posture of the maintenance device 3360, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state in which the posture of the maintenance device 3360 is changed. , The state in which the stop device 3340 is changed in posture from the changed state to the initial state and a gap is provided between the stop device 3340 and the second groove 3312 so that one sphere can pass through is illustrated. In FIG. 36 (c), the rear sphere is shown. The state in which P32 flows down toward the detection port 312d is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the delay device 3300 includes a main body member 3310 having a flow path for guiding a ball that has entered the winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and a ball that flows down inside the main body member 3310. When the stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the action and the stop device 3340 are in the changed state (see FIG. 35 (c)), the state is maintained and the posture changes due to the action of the ball passing through the detection port 312d. Along with this, a maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state of the stop device 3340 is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the main body member 3310 constitutes a flow path that inclines downward, and guides a ball that has entered from the winning opening 64 to a vertically upward position of the detection opening 312d, and a first groove 3311 thereof. It mainly includes a second groove 3312 extending vertically from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 to the detection port 312d, and a post-detection flow path 3313 in which a ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided. The first groove 3311 and the second groove 3312 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and in the assembled state, the open portion is closed by the game board 13 to provide a passage through which the ball flows down. It is formed.

The second groove 3312 has an accommodating recess 3312f in which the side wall portion 312e extends to the detection port 312d and is formed as a recess having a size capable of accommodating half of the balls between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e. Be prepared.

Further, a receiving wall portion 3312c is provided on the opposite side of the side wall portion 312e, and a housing recess 3312c1 is recessed in the receiving wall portion 3312c toward the rear. The accommodating recess 3312c1 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the magnet portion 3346 can be accommodated when the stopping device 3340 is in a changed state (see FIG. 35A).

The accommodating recess 3312f extends along a straight line on which the lower wall surface for receiving the ball passes through the central hole 345 of the stopping device 3340. As a result, the direction in which the ball P32 waiting in the accommodating recess 3312f starts to flow down due to gravity can be set to the direction toward the stop device 3340. Therefore, when the sphere P32 is in a state where it can flow down, the sphere P32 can be smoothly flowed down.

The post-detection flow path 3313 is a flow path through which the ball passing through the detection port 312d flows down, is arranged directly under the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360, and is a bearing portion 3313a that pivotally supports the shaft portion 3361a of the maintenance device 3360. The opening 3133b, which is an opening that allows the contact portion 3363 to enter and exit, and the main body rod are projected from the upper wall of the flow path 3313 after detection toward the lower side surface of the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360. It includes a locking portion 3313c that locks the movement of the 3361, and a delay flow path 3313d that extends from the detection port 312d to the opening 3313b.

The stop device 3340 does not include the second adjusting device 350 configured to be movable at the position of the center of gravity described in the first embodiment, and the center of gravity G3 is a line extending the second wall portion 342 and the stop device 3340. It is fixedly placed at the intersection with the circumference of. In the second wall portion 342, the formation of the tip convex portion 342a is omitted.

Further, the stop device 3340 includes a magnet portion 3346 that extends from the first wall portion 341 of the stop device 3340 toward the opposite side of the second wall portion 342 and is made of a magnetic material.

The maintenance device 3360 is a pendulum-shaped device rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3313a, and is a rod-shaped member having a shaft portion 3361a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 3313a at an intermediate position, and a main body rod 3361 thereof. The posture of the main body rod 3361, which is arranged at the end of the main body rod 3361 on the side close to the receiving wall portion 312c and is arranged at the end of the magnet portion 3362 made of a magnetic material and the magnet portion 3362 on the opposite side. It mainly includes a contact portion 3363 that is arranged at a position where it can enter the inside of the flow path 3313 after detection due to a change and is arranged so that it can come into contact with a ball that flows down.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35A, the posture in which the main body rod 3361 is supported by the locking portion 3313c is the initial state of the maintenance device 3360. That is, in the initial state, the magnet portion 3362 is arranged so as to face the accommodating recess 3312c1, the contact portion 3363 projects inward of the flow path 3313 after detection, and the weight of the contact portion 3363 causes the maintenance device 3360 to extend. Posture is maintained.

The end face of the magnet portion 3362 is a straight line drawn vertically from the end face, and the upper portion of the straight line is omitted with the straight line passing through the shaft portion 3361a as a boundary.

That is, the end face portion that is drawn vertically from the end face and through which the straight line passing through the shaft portion 3361a passes is closest to the receiving wall portion 3312c in the initial state, and the upper portion (main body rod 3361 is viewed from the front). Since the portion that moves closer to the receiving wall portion 3312c by rotating counterclockwise) is omitted, the same portion is closest to the receiving wall portion 3312c even after the maintenance device 3360 changes its posture from the initial state. (All portions of the end face of the magnet portion 3362 are configured to be away from the receiving wall portion 3312c).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the maintenance device 3360 is changed in posture by the action of a sphere from the state where the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 is close to the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 and a magnetic force in the attraction direction is generated. As a result, the end face of the magnet portion 3362 can be separated from the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340.

Further, since the magnet portion 3362 is not moved in the direction perpendicular to the suction surface, but is separated while tilting the posture with respect to the suction surface, the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 can be attracted by a weak force. It can be released.

The change in the state of the delay device 3300 when the spheres P31 and P32 pass through the main body member 3310 will be described in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 35A, when the balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64, the balls P31 and P32 reach the stop device 3340 through the first groove 3311 and the second groove 3312. In the present embodiment, the space between the first wall portion 341 and the second wall portion 342 of the stop device 3340 is set to a size capable of accommodating one sphere, so that only the former sphere P31 is accommodated and the latter sphere P31 is accommodated. The sphere P32 is maintained outside the stop device 3340.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the stop device 3340 is rotated from the initial state by the weight of the front sphere P31, and the rear sphere P32 is pushed by the outer end portion of the second wall portion 342 into the accommodating recess 3312f. The left part is housed. Since the position accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312f is the lowermost position on the upstream side of the stop device 3340 of the second groove 3312, the sphere P32 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 35 (b) by the action of gravity. To.

As shown in FIG. 35 (c), in a state where the sphere P31 flows down to the detection port 312d, the first wall portion 341 of the stop device 3340 and the receiving wall portion 3312c come into contact with each other, and the magnet portion 3346 is accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312c1. Will be done. In this state, the magnet portion 3346 is close to the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 and a magnetic force in the suction direction is generated, so that the state of the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. Therefore, even if the ball P31 flows down to the outside of the stop device 3340, the ball P32 remains stopped.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), after the previous sphere P31 has passed through the delay flow path 3313d, it comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, whereby the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 rotates, and the magnet portion 3362 becomes It is separated from the magnet portion 3346.

As a result, the magnetic force acting on the stop device 3340 is sharply reduced, and the force for stopping the rotation of the stop device 3340 is released. Therefore, the center of gravity G3 of the stop device 3340 is moved downward by the action of gravity. , The stop device 3340 starts rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In the present embodiment, the distance between the shaft portion 3361a and the contact portion 3363 is several times (about 5 times) longer than the distance between the shaft portion 3361a and the magnet portion 3362. The maintenance device 3360 can be rotated with a small load of the weight of the sphere P31.

Further, since the moving width on the magnet portion 3362 side is smaller than the moving width on the contact portion 3363 side with respect to the shaft portion 3361a, the magnet portion 3362 is positioned by the vibration transmitted to the game board 13. It is possible to prevent the posture of the stop device 3340 from changing due to insufficient magnetic force applied to the stop device 3340 due to the deviation.

As shown in FIG. 36B, when the sphere P31 passes through and the sphere P31 and the abutting portion 3363 are separated from each other, the maintenance device 3360 returns to the initial state due to the weight of the abutting portion 3363.

As shown in FIG. 36B, the stop device 3340 rotates in such a manner that the opening area of the portion facing the sphere P32 housed in the housing recess 3312f gradually increases in the operation of returning from the changed state to the initial state. To do. That is, the sphere P32 can be accommodated in the stop device 3340 before the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state. Thereby, for example, when two balls are deposited on the upstream side of the stop device 3340, it is possible to prevent both of the two balls from flowing into the stop device 3340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the stop device 3340 from being clogged and causing an operation failure or a slowdown in the operation speed.

As shown in FIG. 36 (c), the ball P32 housed in the storage recess 3312f is housed in the stop device 3340, the stop device 3340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P32, and the ball P32 flows down to the detection port 312d. Will be done.

In this way, even when a plurality of balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64 in a row, until the previous ball P31 changes the posture of the maintenance device 3360 and passes through the position where the state maintenance of the stop device 3340 is released. , The flow of the later sphere P32 can be stopped. In the present embodiment, since the sphere P31 is designed to pass through the delay flow path 3313d for 3 seconds, the sphere P32 for at least 3 seconds after the sphere P31 passes through the detection port 312d and the fluctuation starts. However, it can be prevented from passing through the detection port 312d.

Therefore, when the shortest period of fluctuation that can be obtained by entering the winning opening 64 (the fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is four) is 3 seconds, it is shown in FIG. 35 (a). Even if the balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64 in succession (the balls enter at intervals shorter than 3 seconds), after the fluctuation started by the ball P31 passing through the detection opening 312d is completed. , The state in which the sphere P32 passes through the detection port 312d can be configured. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring when balls enter the winning opening 64 in a row.

Further, since the period from when the ball P31 passes through the detection port 312d to when the maintenance device 3360 changes its posture can be secured, overflow occurs as compared with the case where the posture maintenance of the stop device 3340 is released upstream of the detection port 312d. Can be reliably prevented from occurring.

For example, when the posture of the maintenance device 3360 is changed by using the ball before passing through the detection port 312d, the operation of the stop device 3340 is performed in order to secure the distance between the ball passing through the detection port 312d and the ball after that. It should be designed to be slow. That is, it is necessary to leave a space between the balls during the period from the change state to the return of the stop device 3340, and if the operation speed of the stop device 3340 changes due to aged deterioration or the like, there is a risk that overflow cannot be prevented.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, only the sphere operates in the delay device 3300 after the sphere passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere comes into contact with the maintenance device 3360. Therefore, the operation timing of the stop device 3340 can be managed in relation to the sphere and the fixed flow path.

In the present embodiment, since the period required for fluctuation (3 seconds) has elapsed before the ball reaches the maintenance device 3360, the overflow occurs regardless of the period until the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state. Can be prevented. That is, regardless of whether the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state in 10 seconds or returns to the initial state in 0.5 seconds, it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64 regardless of that.

Further, as compared with the case where the stop device 3340 is electrically operated constantly, the period from when the ball P31 passes through the winning opening 64 to when it passes through the detection port 312d is secured to be shorter, and after the ball P31. Only the ball P32 that enters the ball can be stopped, and it is possible to prevent the period from the time when the previous ball P31 passes through the winning opening 64 to the start of the fluctuation is extended. This can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable (for example, the feeling that the ball has entered the winning opening 64 but the fluctuation does not start, so that the player may be doing something wrong). it can.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by the action of the convex portion 321a1 of the delay device 300 has been described, but the delay device 4300 in the fourth embodiment decelerates the ball by the sprocket 4340 that separates the balls at equal intervals. .. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

37 (a), 37 (b), 37 (c), 38 (a), 38 (b) and 38 (c) show how the spheres P41, P42 and the like flow through the delay device 4300. It is a front view of the delay device 4300 in the 4th Embodiment illustrated in chronological order. Note that FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which the sprocket 4340 is in the initial state and the balls P41 and 42 continuously enter the winning opening 64 and reach the sprocket 4340. FIG. 37 (b) shows the state. A state in which the sprocket 4340 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 37 (a) is shown, and a state in which the magnet member 4351 of the magnet device 4350 is arranged at the locking position is shown in FIG. 38 (c). In a), the state in which the sprocket 4340 is rotating due to the weight of the sphere P42 is shown, and in FIG. 38 (b), the state immediately before the sphere P42 enters the detection port 312d is shown. The state in which the sprocket 4340 rotates clockwise in the front view and the magnet member 4351 of the magnet device 4350 is moving toward the initial position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the delay device 4300 includes a main body member 4310 having a flow path for guiding a ball that has entered the winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and a ball that flows down inside the main body member 4310. It mainly includes a sprocket 4340 whose state changes by action, and a magnet device 4350 having a magnet member 4351 configured to be relatively movable along a rotation locus of the sprocket 4340.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the main body member 4310 includes a first groove 3311, a second groove 4312 extending vertically from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 to the detection port 312d, and a second groove 4312 thereof. A cylindrical shaft rod 4313 extending in the front-rear direction in the right portion of the groove 4312 is mainly provided. The first groove 3311 and the second groove 4312 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and in the assembled state, the open portion is closed by the game board 13 to provide a passage through which the ball flows down. It is formed.

The second groove 4312 has a configuration in which the receiving wall portion 3312c (see FIG. 35 (a)) is removed from the second groove 3312 in the third embodiment. Therefore, the contact wall 312a, the recessed portion 312b, the detection port 312d, the side wall portion 312e, and the accommodating recess 3312f are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The sprocket 4340 is a gear-shaped member that rotates by the weight of a sphere flowing down the main body member 4310, and is a disk-shaped disk member 4341 whose center position is rotatably supported by a shaft rod 4313, and a circle thereof. It mainly includes a storage wall portion 4342 which is extended to the front side of the plate member 4341 and is formed so as to be able to store a sphere in a gap between the walls.

Since the disc member 4341 is arranged at a position that is in a surface position with the wall portion on the back side of the main body member 4310 (the wall portion on the back side in the vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 37 (a)), it flows down the inside of the disc member 4341. The sphere passes through the front side of the disk member 4341.

Further, the disk member 4341 divides the striped magnetic poles (the region between each plate-shaped portion 4342a to 4342e into three equal parts along the outer peripheral surface, the central portion thereof is the north pole, and the outer portion is the south pole. It is provided with a magnet portion 4341a having a striped magnetic pole). The rotation speed of the sprocket 4340 is adjusted by the interaction between the magnet portion 4341a and the magnet device 4350.

In order to make it easy to determine that the disk member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 have moved relative to each other, a triangular mark M is formed near the outer peripheral position of the disk member 4341.

The accommodating wall portion 4342 is a plate-shaped portion extending radially outward from the center of the disk member 4341 to prevent the passage of a sphere in the circumferential direction, and is at equal intervals (72 °). It is composed of five plate-shaped portions 4342a to 4342e arranged at intervals). Each gap between the plate-shaped portions 4342a to 4342e is configured to have a width capable of accommodating only one sphere. Further, the outer peripheral surfaces of the plate-shaped portions 4342a to 4342e (the radial outer peripheral surfaces of the sprocket 4340) are formed from an arc shape formed coaxially with the central axis of the disk member 4341.

As shown as an example in FIG. 37 (a), the first plate-shaped portion 4342a is arranged at a position on which the sphere P41 rides, and from there, the second plate-shaped portion 4342b and the third plate-shaped portion are arranged in the clockwise direction in the front view. 4342c, the fourth plate-shaped portion 4342d, and the fifth plate-shaped portion 4342e are arranged.

The magnet device 4350 is formed of a magnetic material and is formed in an arc shape having a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 4341 of the sprocket 4340, and the shaft rod 4313 is formed via a rotating arm (not shown). A magnet member 4351 axially supported by the magnet member and an arc wall portion extending from the main body member 4310 at a position separated by a predetermined distance below the disk member 4341 as an arc-shaped wall surface along the shape of the lower surface of the magnet member 4351. It mainly includes a 4352 and a stopper portion 4353 that projects toward the magnet member 4351 at an end portion of the arc wall portion 4352 that is opposite to the side close to the main body member 4310.

The magnet member 4351 has striped magnetic poles (striped magnetic poles in which the arc region is divided into three equal parts, the central portion thereof is the south pole, and the outer portion is the north pole) on the inner peripheral side of the arc shape. The sprocket 4340 is arranged with a slight gap from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 4341, and the position is corrected in relation to the magnetic poles of the disk member 4341.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (a) (the state before the weight of the sphere P41 is applied to the sprocket 4340), the central position of the region between each plate-shaped portion 4342a to 4342e and the central position of the arc of the magnet member 4351. Is maintained at a position that matches.

One end (the left end of FIG. 37 (a)) of the magnet member 4351 abuts on the outer surface of the main body member 4310 at the initial position shown in FIG. 37 (a), and the magnet member 4351 is engaged as shown in FIG. 37 (c). At the stop position (the position rotated counterclockwise by 72 ° from the initial position about the shaft rod 4313), the other end (the upper end in FIG. 37 (c)) comes into contact with the stopper 4353.

The arc wall portion 4352 is a wall portion arranged outside the magnet member 4351, and is arranged at a position where a gap is left between the arc wall portion 4352 and the magnet member 4351 when the magnet member 4351 is attracted to the disk member 4341. Will be done.

For example, even if for some reason the game board 13 vibrates and an impact is applied to the magnet member 4351 and the attraction between the disk member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 is temporarily released, the magnet member 4351 has an arc. Since it is supported by the wall portion 4352, it is possible to prevent the magnet member 4351 from being largely displaced.

The stopper portion 4353 is arranged at a position that blocks the movement of the magnet member 4351. In the present embodiment, the magnet member 4351 and the stopper portion 4353 come into contact with each other in a locked state in which the magnet member 4351 is rotated by a predetermined angle (72 ° in the present embodiment) from the initial position shown in FIG. 37 (a). It is configured in an embodiment (see FIG. 37 (c)), and in this locked state, the sphere P41 flows down to the detection port 312d.

The change in the state of the delay device 4300 when the spheres P41 and P42 pass through the main body member 4310 will be described in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the balls P41 and P42 enter the winning opening 64, the balls P41 and P42 reach the sprocket 4340 through the first groove 3311 and the second groove 4312. In the present embodiment, the space between the first plate-shaped portion 4342a and the second plate-shaped portion 4342b of the sprocket 4340 is set to a size capable of accommodating one sphere, so that only the front sphere P41 is accommodated and the rear sprocket 4340 is accommodated. Ball P42 is maintained on the outside of the sprocket 4340.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the sprocket 4340 is rotated from the initial state (see FIG. 37 (a)) by the weight of the front sphere P41, and the rear sphere P42 is pushed to the tip of the second plate-shaped portion 4342b. The left side portion is accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312f. Since the position accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312f is the lowermost position of the second groove 4312 on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340, the sphere P42 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b) by the action of gravity. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 37 (b), the magnet member 4351 moves integrally with the disk member 4341 of the sprocket 4340. Therefore, the weight of the magnet member 4351 is loaded on the disk member 4341 as a rotation resistance.

As shown in FIG. 37 (c), in a state where the sprocket 4340 is rotated 72 ° counterclockwise from the initial state (a state in which the sphere P31 can flow down to the detection port 312d), the magnet member 4351 and the stopper portion 4353 (The magnet member 4351 is arranged at the locking position).

Therefore, when the sprocket 4340 further rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the magnet member 4351 is maintained in the locked position, and only the sprocket 4340 rotates. In this case, a magnetic force acts between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351, and the magnetic force is applied to the resistance to rotation of the sprocket 4340.

As shown in FIG. 37 (c), the sprocket 4340 is rotated 72 ° from the initial state in a state where the sphere P41 flows down to the detection port 312d while rubbing against the side wall portion 312e and the first plate-shaped portion 4342a. It becomes. That is, the passage of the ball causes the sprocket 4340 to be adjusted to a predetermined posture. Since the shape of the sphere is precisely made, it is possible to reliably rotate the sprocket 4340 by 72 ° by utilizing the precision of the shape of the sphere.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the first plate-shaped portion 4342a inclines downward in the direction of pressing the sphere P41 against the side wall portion 312e, so that the velocity of the sphere P41 is directed toward the side wall portion 312e. It is possible to prevent the first plate-shaped portion 4342a from rotating too much due to the momentum of the ball P41.

In the state shown in FIG. 37 (c), the ball P42 enters the sprocket 4340, and after the ball P41 is thrown toward the detection port 312d, the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P42.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), when the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the sphere P42, the disk member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 of the sprocket 4340 move relative to each other as shown by the position of the mark M. Therefore, the magnetic force generated between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is applied to the sprocket 4340 as a rotation resistance.

Further, in FIG. 38 (a), following the ball P42, the ball P43 and the ball P44 enter the winning opening 64 and stay on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340.

In the present embodiment, the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 by the magnetic force applied between the magnet member 4351 and the sprocket 4340 is much larger than the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 by the weight of the magnet member 4351. It is configured in a mode (the magnet member 4351 is configured in a mode in which the weight is reduced while the generated magnetic force is increased).

As a result, for example, the period from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 37 (c) is set to 0.5 seconds, while the period shown in FIG. 37 (c) is set to FIG. 38 (a). ) Can be set to 5 seconds (the period required to rotate the sprocket 4340 by a predetermined angle can be changed).

In the present embodiment, the period from the state shown in FIG. 37 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 38 (a) is set to 5 seconds, so that, for example, the ball P41 passes through the detection port 312d. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 becomes 4, and if the fluctuation selected at that time is a fluctuation of 3 seconds, the ball P42 passes through the detection port 312d after the fluctuation is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball P42 from overflowing at the winning opening 64 when passing through the detection opening 312d.

As shown in FIG. 38A, when a plurality of balls P43 and balls P44 stay on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340, the load applied from the balls P43 and the balls P44 to the sprocket 4340 is the outer circumference of the accommodating wall portion 4342. Due to the effect of the shape of the surface (arc), the load is applied in the direction (diameter direction) toward the shaft rod 4313.

Therefore, the load applied from the spheres P43 and the spheres P44 in the rotational direction of the sprocket 4340 can be limited to the load generated by the rubbing between the spheres P43 and the sprocket 4340, and is compared with the weights of the spheres P43 and P44 that stay. Therefore, the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 can be reduced.

38 (b) shows a state in which the ball P42 is sent to the detection port 312d and the ball P43 enters the sprocket 4340 (from the initial state shown in FIG. 37 (a), the sprocket 4340 is 144 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. ° Rotated state) is shown.

When the sprocket 4340 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 38 (b), the relative movement between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is accompanied by the relative movement of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 as in the case where the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P42. This also applies when the sphere P44 after the sphere P43 is housed in the sprocket 4340 and the sprocket 4340 rotates.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the number of balls entering the winning opening 64 in succession is 4 or more (regardless of the number of balls), the interval at which each ball is sent to the detection opening 312d is constant. The interval is maintained, and the period until the ball P41, which is entered into the winning opening 64 as the first ball, passes through the detection opening 312d is compared with the throwing interval between the balls opened by the sprocket 4340. Can be shortened.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable (for example, the feeling that the ball has entered the winning opening 64 but the fluctuation does not start, so that the player thinks that he / she is doing something wrong). ..

As shown in FIG. 38 (c), after the ball P44 (see FIG. 38 (b)) is thrown toward the detection port 312d, the next ball (the ball entered into the winning opening 64) becomes the sprocket 4340. When not riding, the sprocket 4340 rotates clockwise in the front view due to the weight of the magnet member 4351.

In the present embodiment, since the magnet member 4351 is composed of a light member, the rotation speed of the sprocket 4340 is reduced, and the period until the magnet member 4351 returns from the locked position to the initial position is set to 5 seconds.

Therefore, the sprocket 4340 is further rotated from the timing when the sphere P41 shown in FIG. 37 (a) passes through the detection port 312d and the state shown in FIG. 38 (c), and immediately after the magnet member 4351 is arranged in the initial position, the sprocket 4340 is used. There is a gap of 5 seconds or more between the timing at which the ball to be entered passes through the detection port 312d. The 5 seconds is a period longer than the shortest fluctuation period (3 seconds) that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 4.

Therefore, when the ball passes through the sprocket 4340 immediately after the sprocket 4340 returns to the initial state, it is possible to easily prevent an overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

In the state shown in FIG. 38 (c), the relative positions of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 do not change in appearance from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), but as shown in the mark M, in reality, FIG. 37 Compared to the state shown in (a), the magnet member 4351 is arranged at a position relative to the shaft rod 4313 by 72 °.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the magnet member 4351 is arranged at the locking position, the sprocket 4340 is placed between the plate-shaped portions of the accommodating wall portion 4342 with respect to the magnet member 4351 each time the ball passes through the second groove 4312. It is configured so that the position is displaced by an angle of one gap (that is, 72 °).

Therefore, the relative movement of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is limited to a relative movement such that, for example, the first plate-shaped portion 4342a moves to the position of the second plate state 4342b, and after the relative movement, the sprocket 4340 and the sprocket 4340 The overall shape of the magnet member 4351 and the magnet member 4351 does not change from that before the relative movement.

Therefore, regardless of the number of balls passing through the second groove 4312, the overall shape of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 after the balls are discharged from the sprocket 4340 can be made unchanged, and thus the winning opening 64 It is possible to eliminate the need to dispose a device for moving the magnet member 4351 at the position of the mark M of the sprocket 4340 when the inflow of the sphere to the sprocket 4340 disappears for a certain period of time (Fig. 38 (c)). As described above, even if the relative positional relationship between the mark M and the magnet member 4351 has changed from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), it can be left as it is).

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the second groove 3312 when the stop device 3340 is in the changed state also passes through the stop device 3340 and is discharged through the flow path 3313 after detection has been described, but the fifth embodiment has been described. The delay device 5300 in the above is configured such that a ball flowing down the second groove 5312 flows down the continuous passage groove 5314 when the stop device 3340 is in a changing state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the delay device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment. Note that FIG. 39 shows a state in which the balls P51 to P54 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is in a changed state. Further, since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 5300 are configured as devices having a symmetrical shape with the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the third embodiment, they have the same reference numerals as those described in the third embodiment. , And the description of the part overlapping with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39, the delay device 5300 has a main body member 5310 having a flow path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and the action of the ball flowing down inside the main body member 5310. When the stop device 3340 and the stop device 3340 are in a changed state (see FIG. 39), the state is maintained and the posture is changed by the action of a ball passing through the detection port 312d. It mainly includes a maintenance device 3360 that releases the maintenance of the state of the device 3340, and a stop device 5500 that acts on a ball flowing down the continuous passage groove 5314 to stop the ball. Regarding the stop device 5500, in order to facilitate understanding, only the movable plate portion 5510 is shown and the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the movable plate portion 5510 can be visually recognized through the stop portion 5314b in a front view. The part is shown by a solid line, and the other part is shown by a hidden line (broken line). Further, the rotation resistance of the stop device 3340 and the position of the center of gravity G3 are set in such a manner that it takes about 1 second for the stop device 3340 to change from the changed state to the initial state.

As shown in FIG. 39, the main body member 5310 constitutes a flow path that inclines downward, and guides a ball that has entered from the first winning opening 64 to a position vertically above the detection port 312d, and a first groove 5311 and a first groove thereof. From the intermediate position between the second groove 5312 extending vertically from the lower end of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 in which the ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and the second groove 5312. It mainly includes a continuous passage groove 5314 formed as a groove branching to the side (right side in FIG. 39).

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313, and the continuous passage groove 5314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is formed on the game board 13 in the assembled state. By closing, a passage through which the sphere flows is formed.

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 have a symmetrical shape with the configuration having the same name in the third embodiment (first groove 3311, second groove 3312, and post-detection flow path 3313). The description of the part that overlaps with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

The second groove 5312 is a side wall that is arranged to face the recessed portion 312b (in other words, a wall portion that extends to the front side and extends in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left end portion of the recessed portion 312b). The unit 312e extends to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 5314 that forms a branch passage through which a ball can be thrown is arranged between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e.

The position where the continuous passage groove 5314 is connected to the second groove 5312 is formed to be the same as the position where the accommodating recess 3312f is arranged in the third embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball that has reached the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 35 (a)) (the ball that entered at the beginning of the balls P51 to P54, that is, the ball P51). Is guided to the detection port 312d while rotating the stop device 3340 to change the state, and reaches the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the change state (see FIG. 39). The spheres P52 to P54) flow down the continuous passage groove 5314.

Further, a receiving wall portion 3312c is provided on the opposite side of the side wall portion 312e, and a housing recess 3312c1 is recessed in the receiving wall portion 3312c toward the rear. The accommodating recess 3312c1 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the magnet portion 3346 can be accommodated when the stopping device 3340 is in a changed state (see FIG. 39).

The post-detection flow path 5313 has the same configuration as the post-detection flow path 3313 of the third embodiment because it is formed in a symmetrical shape. That is, the post-detection flow path 5313 is a flow path through which the ball passing through the detection port 312d flows down, and is arranged directly below the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360, and is a bearing that pivotally supports the shaft portion 3361a of the maintenance device 3360. The portion 3313a, the opening 3313b which is an opening that allows the contact portion 3363 to enter and exit, and the post-detection flow path 5313 are projected from the upper wall toward the lower side surface of the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360. It includes a locking portion 3313c that locks the movement of the main body rod 3361, and a delay flow path 3313d that extends from the detection port 312d to the opening 3313b.

As in the third embodiment, the delay flow path 3313d is designed to have a length through which a sphere flowing down due to the action of gravity passes over a time of at least 3 seconds or more. Therefore, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state for at least 3 seconds, and the balls that have entered during that period can be continuously entered into the continuous passage groove 5314.

In this case, the stop device 3340 has a timing of changing the state toward the changing state due to the flow of the ball P51 entering the first winning opening 64 (the beginning of the period during which the ball can be introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314) and the changing state. The period for maintaining the is specified.

The period during which the stop device 3340 is maintained in this changed state (at least 3 seconds after the state change of the stop device 3340) and the time for the stop device 3340 to return from the changed state to the initial state (about 1 second in the present embodiment) are added up. During this period, it becomes easy for the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 to continuously pass through the second detection port 5314c arranged downstream of the continuous passing groove 5314.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of balls P51 and P52 enter the first winning opening 64 without requiring the transition of the gaming state, they are the same as the detection opening 312d and the second detecting opening 5314c. Switching between a state in which it is easy to pass through (a state in which alternate winnings are made) and a state in which it is easier to pass through the second detection port 5314c (a state in which the ball continuously enters the second detection port 5314c) as compared with the detection port 312d. Can be done.

Generally, the minimum firing interval of balls allowed in the pachinko machine 10 is 0.6 seconds, so the upper limit of balls that can normally enter within 3 seconds is 4 or 5 balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of balls entering within 3 seconds is assumed to be 5 balls (ignoring the possibility of entering balls after the 6th ball), and the description will be given.

The continuous passage groove 5314 is connected to the introduction groove 5314a to which the balls are first introduced by being connected to the second groove 5312, and is connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a, and a predetermined number of balls are provided (one ball at a time in the present embodiment). It is connected to an intermediate position between the stop portion 5314b to be stopped, the second detection port 5314c which is arranged directly under the stop portion 5314b and allows the ball to pass through, and the second detection port 5314c to detect the passage of the ball, and the introduction groove 5314a. A branch flow path 5314d arranged on the back surface side of the introduction groove 5314a, and a third detection port 5314e arranged in the branch flow path 5314d and provided with a through hole through which the ball can pass and detecting the passage of the ball. Mainly prepare.

The introduction groove 5314a is a groove that inclines downward to the right in the front view as a whole, bends in the vicinity of the lower end position, and extends vertically downward, assuming that a plurality of spheres stay from the lower end. An upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is provided in a region on the back surface side of the third ball counting from the lower end, which is formed to penetrate through the ball with a size that allows the ball to pass through and to which the upper end of the branch flow path 5314d is connected.

The upper end of the branch flow path 5314d is connected to the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 as described above. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is guided by the branch flow path 5314d and is detected by passing through the third detection port 5314e. The branch flow path 5314d is shown by a hidden line (broken line) in order to facilitate understanding that the branch flow path 5314d is arranged on the back surface side of the introduction groove 5314a.

On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the introduction groove 5314a is detected by passing through the second detection port 5314c via the stop portion 5314b. Therefore, the ball introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after being detected by either the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e.

In the present embodiment, the length of the introduction groove 5314a is set in such a manner that it takes at least 2 seconds or more for the sphere to flow down the introduction groove 5314a due to the action of gravity. Therefore, it is possible to reliably shift the passing timing between the ball P51 that passes vertically downward through the stop device 3340 and passes through the detection port 312d and the ball P52 that flows down the introduction groove 5314a and passes through the second detection port 5314c. it can.

For example, when two balls (balls P51 and P52) enter the first winning opening 64 in succession when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (FIG. 35 (a)), the leading ball P51 is the stop device. While changing the state of the 3340 from the initial state to the changed state, it flows down vertically and passes through the detection port 312d immediately after the state of the stop device 3340 is changed. On the other hand, the trailing ball P52 is introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314 by rolling the arc wall portion 343 of the stop device 3340, flows down the introduction groove 5314a for at least 2 seconds, and then flows down the second detection port 5314c. Pass through.

In the present embodiment, the introduction groove 5314a has a longer flow path length than the delay flow path 3313d (see FIG. 39), but compared with the time required for the sphere to pass through the delay flow path 3313d. The time required for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a is shorter. This is because the inclination angle of the introduction groove 5314a with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the delay flow path 3313d with respect to the horizontal plane.

The time required for the stop device 3340 to change state from the initial state to the change state is set to be negligibly short (about 0.1 seconds) until the ball that has changed the state of the stop device 3340 passes through the detection port 312d. When the length of the side wall portion 312e is set in such a manner that the time required for the sphere P51 is extremely short (about 0.1 second), the timing at which the sphere P51 is detected by passing through the detection port 312d and the timing at which the sphere P52 is detected are second. The timing of detection can be shifted by passing through the detection port 5314c.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the path length from the first winning opening 64 to the second detection opening 5314c is larger than the path length from the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d. Set long. As a result, visually, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 passes through the first winning opening 64 rather than the time required from passing through the first winning opening 64 to passing through the detection opening 312d. It can be determined that the time required to pass through the second detection port 5314c is longer.

In the present embodiment, when a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c (also referred to as starting winning or entering a ball; the same applies to other embodiments). With that as a trigger, the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol), and when the sphere passes through the third detection port 5314e, the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The variable display is executed. In other words, the variable display is still displayed from the time the ball enters the first winning opening 64 until it passes through the detection sensor (detection port 312d, the first winning opening switch (not shown in the first embodiment, etc.)). Is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball enters the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. Due to the turning on of the winning opening switch, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a big hit of the second special symbol, and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. Further, unless otherwise specified, this display is similarly performed in other embodiments.

Here, the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the present embodiment (common to the first embodiment) will be described. That is, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 (in the case of the big hit lottery of the first special symbol) and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 (in the case of the big hit lottery of the second special symbol). So, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 (the jackpot of the second special symbol), it goes to the first winning opening 64. It is set higher than when the ball wins (the jackpot of the first special symbol).

In the following, the detection port in which the detection sensor is arranged may be simply referred to as a detection port (or a winning port, a ball entry port, etc.) (the description of the detection sensor may be omitted), and the ball is detected. The description that the lottery is performed (variation is executed) due to passing through the mouth (or the winning opening, the winning opening, etc.) is omitted, and the ball is simply the detection opening (or the winning opening, etc.). It may be briefly explained when passing through the entrance (such as the entrance).

The data of the first symbol acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c can be stored up to four (can be stored in the four holding areas in order), while the number of stored items and the data thereof. Can independently acquire the data of the second symbol at the timing when the sphere passes through the third detection port 5314e.

In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate the number of holdings among the number of passages of the first winning opening 64 (the detection opening 312d and the second detection opening 5314c) and the second winning opening 640. Along with this (at the same time), the first symbol hold mark as a decorative display indicating the number of holds is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the first symbol hold mark is displayed at the same time as the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64, the ball enters the detection opening 312d or the second. When the detection port 5314c is passed, the display of the first symbol hold mark is started. Further, this display start is similarly executed in other embodiments.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set so as to win with a probability of about 1/1 regardless of the game state (normal, probable change, time saving). To. Therefore, when the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2). be able to.

In order to throw the ball toward the third detection port 5314e, as will be described later, it is sufficient to frequently insert the ball into the first winning opening 64, so that the ball is sent to the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to motivate a player who aims to enter the ball to frequently enter the ball into the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, as will be described later, if the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 at a reduced frequency, the ball passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c instead of the third detection port 5314e. Therefore, by adjusting the frequency of ball entry into the first winning opening 64, the player may execute the variation of the first symbol with the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or the variation of the second symbol. You can choose whether to execute.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the variation display of the first special symbol is always started before the variation display of the normal symbol is executed, and the variation display is performed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the timing at which the variable display of the normal symbol is started may be overlooked because the display of the third symbol display device 81 is too quiet. Further, by performing the variable display of the first special symbol together with the variable display of the normal symbol, it is possible to improve the attention to the variable display as compared with the case where only the variable display of the normal symbol is performed.

In the present embodiment, as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate the number of hold times among the number of passages of the through gate 67 (at the same time), the third symbol display device 81 is decorated to indicate the number of hold times. The second symbol hold mark is displayed as a typical display.

Next, the stop portion 5314b will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a partially enlarged front view of the continuous passage groove 5314. For ease of understanding, the branch flow path 5314d and the stop device 5500 are not shown.

The retaining portion 5314b is a hole-shaped incomplete flow path through which the wall portion on the back surface side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 40) is removed and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is formed from a pair of plates extending in the vertical direction. The ball storage plate portion 5314b1 and the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 which is a through hole extending in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface) at the upper end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 and the ball storage plate. The lower end portion 5314b1 is mainly provided with a lower end elongated hole 5314b3 which is a through hole extending in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The ball storage plate portion 5314b1 is formed so that the length in the vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter R of the sphere. Therefore, the number of balls that can be stopped at one time is limited to one in the stop portion 5314b formed by the ball storage plate portion 5314b1.

The upper end elongated hole 5314b2 and the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 are set to have the same extension length, while the left and right end positions are shifted in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 is arranged so that its center position in the left-right direction coincides with the right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b2 in the front view. That is, the right end portion of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 is arranged at a position separated from the right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the right by a length H1 which is half the total length of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2. Therefore, the left end portion of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 is from the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the left, from the length H1 to the width length of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 (the length between the plates of the pair of plates, that is, the diameter). It is arranged at a position separated by a length obtained by subtracting a width length HR slightly longer than R).

On the other hand, the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 is arranged so that its center position in the left-right direction coincides with the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b2 in the front view. That is, the left end portion of the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 is arranged at a position separated from the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 by a length H1 to the left. Therefore, the right end portion of the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 is from the right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the right, from the length H1 to the width length of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 (the length between the plates of the pair of plates, that is, the diameter). It is arranged at a position separated by a length obtained by subtracting a width length HR slightly longer than R). That is, the right end positions of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 and the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 are separated from each other by the width length HR in the left-right direction, and the left end positions of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 and the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 are similarly separated from each other by the width length HR. Only separated in the left-right direction.

Similar to the introduction groove 5314a, the game board 13 is arranged on the front side of the stop portion 5314b in the assembled state. As a result, the opening on the front side is closed by the game board 13, so that a groove shape is formed in which the passage of the ball is restricted except for the opening on the back side and the upper and lower openings.

The remaining rear opening is closed by the movable plate portion 5510 (see FIG. 39) that is slidably supported by the upper end slot 5314b2 and the lower end slot 5314b3, so that the ball can pass through except for the upper and lower openings. It constitutes a regulated flow path shape. Hereinafter, the stopping device 5500 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

41 (a) is a front view of the stop device 5500, and FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the stop device 5500 in the direction of arrow XLIb of FIG. 41 (a). As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the stop device 5500 has a movable plate portion 5510 slidably supported by the stop portion 5314b in the assembled state, and a driving force for operating the movable plate portion 5510. 5520, a rod-shaped transmission member 5530 that transmits the driving force generated by the drive device 5520 to the movable plate portion 5510, and a detection device 5540 that detects the position of the transmission member 5530. ..

The movable plate portion 5510 includes a main body plate portion 5511 formed of a plate member having a rectangular shape in a front view, and an upper extension plate 5512 and a lower extension plate extending in pairs from the main body plate portion 5511 to the front side. It mainly includes a 5513 and a connecting convex portion 5514 that is projected from the back surface of the main body plate portion 5511 toward the transmission member 5530.

The upper extension plate 5512 and the lower extension plate 5513 have a length H1 in the left-right direction, a vertical dimension (thickness) shorter than the vertical width dimension of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2, and a front-rear dimension (extension length). Is formed as a thin plate having a length such that the distance from the game board 13 is less than the diameter R in the assembled state. Further, the upper extension plate 5512 and the lower extension plate 5513 are arranged so as to be parallel to each other and the left and right ends are offset from each other by the width and length HR.

The drive device 5520 has a rotary drive motor 5521 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) and a disk shape that rotates with the rotation of the drive motor 5521 and transmits the drive force to the transmission member 5530. The rotary disk 5522 and the base member 5523, which is a base-like member fixed to the game board 13 and to which the case of the drive motor 5521 is fastened and fixed, are mainly provided.

The rotary disk 5522 has a drive shaft 5521a of the drive motor 5521 inserted and fixed in the center of the circle, and is convex in a columnar shape from an eccentric position separated from the center of the circle by the width and length HR toward the transmission member 5530. The transmission convex portion 5522a to be provided is provided.

The base member 5523 has a flat surface whose upper surface is formed substantially horizontally, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and includes a plurality of sandwiching portions 5523a for sandwiching the first rod portion 5531 from the front and back in the assembled state.

The sandwiching portion 5523a is a plurality of rib-shaped portions that are arranged in parallel with each other separated from each other by the front-rear width dimension of the first rod portion 5531 and are scattered on a straight line facing left and right. Two are arranged before and after the rod portion 5531. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 5530 from being displaced back and forth, and it is possible to facilitate the sliding operation in the left-right direction due to the guiding effect.

The transmission member 5530 is a rod-shaped portion that is formed in an L shape extending in the left-right direction and the up-down direction starting from the lower right portion in the front view and is placed on the flat upper surface of the base member 5523. The first rod portion 5531 connected to the movable plate portion 5510 at the end portion of the side), the rod-shaped second rod portion 5532 extending vertically upward from the other end portion of the first rod portion 5531, and the first rod portion 5532 thereof. It mainly includes a long hole-shaped connecting long hole 5533 that penetrates the two-rod portion 5532 in the front-rear direction and is long in the vertical direction.

The first rod portion 5531 is supported by the flat upper surface of the base member 5523 so that it can move in the left-right direction along the flat upper surface thereof, and one end of the movable plate portion 5510 can accept the connecting convex portion 5514. A receiving recess 5531a recessed in the portion and a detected portion 5531b projecting toward the detection device 5540 side (upward) at an intermediate position in the left-right direction are mainly provided.

The receiving recess 5531a has substantially the same length (or slightly longer) in the left-right direction than the size of the connecting convex portion 5514, and the vertical dimension allows some rattling (a gap is formed). It is said to be the length.

As a result, the positional deviation between the receiving recess 5531a and the connecting convex portion 5514 in the left-right direction is suppressed, and when a load is applied from the connecting convex portion 5514 to the receiving concave portion 5531a, the positional deviation in the vertical direction is generated. , The load can be released.

Here, when the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 are formed by integral molding, the positional deviation in the left-right direction does not occur, but it becomes difficult to release the load, so that the durability tends to be low. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by forming the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 as separate members, it is possible to improve the durability against a load while suppressing the positional deviation in the left-right direction.

In the present embodiment, the vertical position of the movable plate portion 5510 does not change due to the drive of the driving device 5520. Therefore, even if the vertical positional deviation between the connecting convex portion 5514 and the receiving recess 5531a is allowed, the vertical position is allowed. It does not affect the performance described later (the function of sliding the movable plate portion 5510 left and right to open or close the flow path).

The extension length of the connecting elongated hole 5533 in the vertical direction is set to be at least twice the width and length HR, and the connecting elongated hole 5533 can receive and connect the transmission convex portion 5522a of the drive device 5520. As the arrangement of the transmission convex portion 5522a changes with the rotation of the rotating disk 5522, the arrangement of the connecting elongated holes 5533 connected to the transmission convex portion 5522a changes, so that the transmission member 5530 slides (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 43).

The detection means 5540 is a sensor for detecting the support member 5541 fixed to the base member 5523 and the detection groove facing the side (lower side) where the detection groove is arranged to face the first rod portion 5531, and is a front view of the support member 5541. It mainly includes a first sensor 5542 fixed to the right end portion and a second sensor 5543 which is the same type of sensor as the first sensor 5542 and is fixed to the left end portion of the support member 5541 in the same posture in the front view.

The first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are transmissive sensors including a light emitter and a light receiver arranged so as to face each other with the detected unit 5531b sandwiched in the front-rear direction, and detect the detected unit 5531b that slides left and right. That is, by arranging the detected portion 5531b between the light emitter and the light receiver (arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction at the lower end position in FIG. 41 (a)), the light emitted by the light emitter toward the light receiver is blocked. Then, the detected portion 5531b is detected by the first sensor 5542 or the second sensor 5543.

Next, the operation mode of the stopping device 5500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. 42 (a), 42 (b), 43 (a) and 43 (b) are front views of the stop portion 5314b and the stop device 5500. In addition, in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, the main body plate portion 5511 of the movable plate portion 5510 which is arranged on the back side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 42) of the plate portion constituting the outer shape of the continuous passage groove 5314 so as to overlap the plate portion. However, it is simply illustrated by a solid line including the overlapping portion.

In FIG. 42 (a), the rotating disk 5522 is in the initial phase (both closed states of the stopping device 5500), and in FIG. 42 (b), the rotating disk 5522 is clockwise from the initial phase. In FIG. 43 (a), the rotating disk 5522 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the second phase in the state of the second phase (upward open state of the stopping device 5500) when the rotation is 90 degrees. In FIG. 43 (b), the state of the third phase at the time point (both closed states of the stopping device 5500) is the fourth phase at the time when the rotating disk 5522 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the third phase. The states (states in which the stop device 5500 is open downward) are shown in the drawings.

The displacements in the states shown in FIGS. 42 (a), 42 (b), 43 (a), and 43 (b) occur at equal time intervals, and are from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b). As time passes, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). That is, the changes in the states shown in FIGS. 42 (a), 42 (b), 43 (a), and 43 (b) are repeated at regular intervals from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In this embodiment, the drive motor 5521 is controlled at an operating speed at which the rotating disk 5522 makes one rotation in about 6 seconds.

In the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches above the stop portion 5314b in the state shown in FIG. 42A, the ball P52 is restricted from entering the stop portion 5314b. Further, the lower opening of the stop portion 5314b is also closed by the lower extension plate 5513 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere).

From the state shown in FIG. 42 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the lower opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the lower extending plate 5513 (gap of the continuous passage groove 5314). Is less than the diameter of the sphere). On the other hand, the upper extension plate 5512 is retracted and opened from the upper opening of the stop portion 5314b (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the sphere P52 reaches above the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the sphere P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. Balls are allowed, but discharge from the stop 5314b is restricted.

From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is a sphere). Is less than the diameter of). Further, the lower opening of the stop portion 5314b is also closed by the lower extension plate 5513 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the sphere P52 reaches above the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the sphere P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. The ball is regulated.

From the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is a sphere). Is less than the diameter of). On the other hand, the lower extension plate 5513 is retracted and opened from the lower opening of the stop portion 5314b (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the sphere P52 reaches above the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the sphere P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. The ball is regulated. Further, this regulation is similarly maintained until the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) is restored to the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). On the other hand, the sphere arranged in the stop portion 5314b in the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) is discharged toward the second detection port 5314c in the state shown in FIG. 43 (b).

Therefore, since there is no time when the stop portion 5314b opens at the same time in the series of operations of the movable plate portion 5510, the ball P52 reaching the stop portion 5314b can be reliably stopped.

In the present embodiment, the rotating disk 5522 is rotated clockwise in the front view, but even when the rotating disk 5522 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the same repetitive operation can be performed with a half cycle deviation. That is, since the rotation direction is not limited, the degree of freedom in designing the drive mode can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the transmission member 5530 that slides left and right with the rotation of the rotating disk 5522 can always be detected by the detection device 5540. That is, in the initial phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 42 (a), both the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 detect it, and the second rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 42 (b) is detected. In the phase, it is detected by the first sensor 5542 but not by the second sensor 5543, and in the third phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 43 (a), the first sensor is similar to the initial phase. It is detected by both the 5542 and the second sensor 5543, and is not detected by the first sensor 5542 in the fourth phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 43 (b), but is detected by the second sensor 5543.

Therefore, when the transmission member 5530 is operating normally, the outputs of the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are switched at regular intervals, so that the outputs of the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are switched. By confirming the mode, it is possible to immediately determine whether the operation is normal or whether some abnormality (for example, the device has stopped due to a malfunction) has occurred.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a ball may ride on the upper surface of the upper extension plate 5512 or the lower extension plate 5513. In this case, the extension plates 5512 and 5513 may be tilted toward the front side due to the weight of the sphere, but as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the upper extension plate 5512 is placed in the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 on the lower side. The extension plate 5513 is inserted into the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 from the back surface side, and the movement in the vertical direction is restricted. Therefore, the tilt angle of each of the extension plates 5512 and 5513 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 are composed of separate members and are configured to allow some rattling in the vertical direction, the movable plate portion 5510 is tilted toward the front side. It is possible to suppress the degree of tilting operation (transmission degree) of the transmission member 5530 that accompanies the operation.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 5530 from tilting back and forth, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in resistance generated at the connection position (contact position) with the rotating disk 5522, and it is possible to prevent the transmission member 5530 from tilting back and forth. It is possible to prevent the member 5530 from coming into contact with the sensors 5542 and 5543 in the front-rear direction and applying a load to the sensors 5542 and 5543.

Next, the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the main body member 5310 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of each part when a ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected, and is a timing chart of FIGS. 45 (a), 45 (b), and 46 (a). And FIG. 46 (b) is a partial front view of the continuous passage groove 5314 and the stopping device 5500 showing an example of the movement of the ball in the continuous passage groove 5314. Regarding the stop device 5500, in order to facilitate understanding, only the movable plate portion 5510 is shown and the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the movable plate portion 5510 can be visually recognized through the stop portion 5314b in a front view. The part is shown by a solid line, and the other part is shown by a hidden line (broken line).

In FIG. 44, the timing at which the output pulse of the detection port 312d, the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e is turned on is such that the ball passes through the detection port 312d, the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e. The waveform is illustrated in a timing-indicating manner. In the timing chart of the introduction groove 5314a, a pulse is generated upward at the timing when the ball enters the introduction groove 5314a from the first groove 5311, and a pulse is generated downward at the timing when the ball is discharged from the introduction groove 5314a to the stop portion 5314b. In aspects, the waveform is illustrated. Although the waveform of the timing chart of the stopping device 5500 shows the change of the state, it is simplified and shown as a rectangular wave for easy understanding.

In the timing chart illustrated in FIG. 44, balls P51 to P55 continuously enter the first winning opening 64 at intervals of about 0.2 seconds. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered in a row at one time is assumed to be 5, and therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 44, the upper limit number of balls is entered in a row in the first winning opening 64. Corresponds to the case of a ball.

Among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64, the ball P51 that has entered at the beginning passes through the detection port 312d while changing the stop device 3340 from the initial state to the changing state. After the stop device 3340 changes to the changed state, it takes at least 3 seconds for the maintenance of the state to be released by the action of the ball P51. Therefore, the following balls P52 to P55 hit the stop device 3340 in the changed state. Enter the continuous passage groove 5314 while touching.

In FIG. 44, a case where the balls P52 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64 in succession after the ball P51 is shown, but the ball entry mode is not limited to this. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, it takes 3 seconds for the maintenance of the changed state of the stop device 3340 to be released by the action of the sphere P51, and after the release, the stop device 3340 is in the initial state. Since it takes about 1 second until the ball P51 changes from the initial state to the changed state by the action of the ball P51, the ball flows down into the continuous passage groove 5314 by the stop device 3340 for about 4 seconds. The flow path is switched to. That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the balls that have continuously entered the first winning opening 64, but also the first winning opening within about 4 seconds after the ball P51 has entered the first winning opening 64. The ball that has entered the 64 can be entered into the continuous passage groove 5314 by the action of the stop device 3340.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 44, the stopping device 5500 is in the upper open state at the timing when the trailing balls P52 to P55 reach the lower end of the continuous passage groove 5314. The sphere P52, which is a sphere, enters the stop portion 5314b, and the other spheres P53 to P55 stay in the continuous passage groove 5314 (see FIG. 45A).

As shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, when the number of follow-up balls is large (in this example, four balls P52 to P55), the balls P55 staying in the continuous passage groove 5314 are present. It may stop at the front side position of the upper limit discharge port 5314a1.

In this case, the ball P55 is pushed out toward the upper limit discharge port 5314a1 by the collision with the ball P54 that stays earlier (the velocity component toward the back side is increased), enters the branch flow path 5314d, and enters the third branch flow path 5314d. It passes through the detection port 5314e. Therefore, the upper limit number (dynamic upper limit number) of balls that can stay in the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 5314b where the balls can be stopped in the continuous passage groove 5314 is set to 3, and when there are more balls. Even so, those spheres do not stay and are flown into the branch flow path 5314d and later pass through the third detection port 5314e (see FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (a)).

As a result, even when the frequency of entering the first winning opening 64 is adjusted to be excessively high, it is possible to prevent the number of balls staying in the continuous passage groove 5314 from becoming excessively large, so that the flow path can be increased. It is possible to prevent clogging.

As shown in FIG. 44, the spheres P52 to P54 later pass through the second detection port 5314c. That is, among the plurality of balls P51 to P55 that entered the first winning opening 64, the leading ball P51 passed through the detection port 312d, and the following balls P52 to P54 passed through the second detecting port 5314c and overflowed. The sphere P55 passes through the third detection port 5314e.

Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the game is started, the ball P51 inevitably passes through the detection port 312d before the ball P55 passes through the third detection port 5314e. Therefore, at the timing when the ball P55 enters the third detection port 5314e, it is possible to execute at least the variation display started due to the ball passing through the detection port 312d. As a result, the variation display executed due to the sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e can be naturally noticed.

That is, the variation display (variation display of the first symbol or the accompanying variation display on the third symbol display device 81) started due to the ball passing through the detection port 312d shifts the gaming state to the jackpot state. Since it is a variable display related to whether or not to make it, the player's attention naturally attracts, while the variable display started due to the ball passing through the third detection port 5314e (ordinary symbol (No. 1) The variation display of 2 symbols) or the accompanying variation display on the 3rd symbol display device 81) is not a variation display directly related to the transition to the jackpot state, so it is difficult to attract attention.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation display (variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) or the accompanying third symbol display device 81) is started due to the sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e. (Variation display) is always performed, and the variation display (variation display of the first symbol or the accompanying variation display on the third symbol display device 81) is started due to the ball passing through the detection port 312d. ) Is executed, the fluctuations of the first symbol can be displayed at the same time on the third symbol display device 81, and the attention of the fluctuation display of the first symbol or the accompanying fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81. By using this, it is possible to pay attention to the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) or the accompanying variable display on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the normal symbol (second symbol) fluctuates and that the symbol displayed as a stop is a symbol indicating a hit (for example, a symbol of "○"). Therefore, even though the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit and the electric accessory 640a is opened so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, the player does not notice it. Can be prevented from occurring.

The upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b varies depending on the timing of entering the balls. That is, as described above, if the stop device 5500 is in the upper open state when the leading ball P52 reaches the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a among the balls that have entered the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P52 is placed in the stop portion 5314b. Since the third ball P55 counted from the ball P53 is discharged to the branch flow path 5314d, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 5314b is 3 of the balls P52 to P54. It becomes an individual.

On the other hand, if the stopping device 5500 is in the both closed state or the lower open state when the leading ball P52 reaches the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P52 does not enter the stopping portion 5314b and the introduction groove 5314a It stops at the lower end position (see FIG. 46 (b)). In this case, since the third ball P54 counting from the ball P52 is discharged to the branch flow path, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 5314b is the balls P52 and P53. It becomes two of.

In this case, if the stop device 5500 changes to the upper open state before the ball P54 stops in the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P53 also descends as the ball P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. Since there is a gap between the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 and the sphere P53, the sphere P54 can stay in the introduction groove 5314a (see FIG. 45A). As a result, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b is three balls P52 to P54.

In this way, by changing the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b depending on the timing, even when the balls enter the first winning opening 64 with the same number and frequency, the result is obtained. The profit given to the player can be changed depending on the timing of entering the ball. This makes it possible to provide a fresh game (a game that never gets tired of).

The timing interval at which the spheres P51 to P54 pass through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c will be described. The period required from when the ball P51 enters the first winning opening 64 to when it passes through the detection opening 312d is set to be invariant.

On the other hand, the period from when the leading ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d to when the trailing ball P52, which has entered immediately after the ball P51, passes through the second detection port 5314c, varies depending on the situation.

This is because, in order for the ball P52 to pass through the second detection port 5314c, the ball P52 must enter the stop portion 5314b in the upper open state of the stop device 5500, and then the stop device 5500 needs to change to the lower open state. However, depending on how many seconds after the stop device 5500 changes to the upper open state, the ball P52 enters the stop 5314b and then the stop device 5500 is in the lower open state. It depends on the time until.

In the present embodiment, the period from when the first ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d to when the trailing ball P52, which has entered immediately after that, passes through the second detection port 5314c, is the first winning opening 64. The shape of the introduction groove 5314a is designed so as to be longer than the fluctuation period (3 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as the lower limit period for holding digestion) that is easily selected when the number of holding balls is 3 or 4. Unless otherwise specified, the holding digestion lower limit period, which is a variable period that is easily selected when the number of holding balls is 3 or 4, is the same in other embodiments (for example, the first embodiment). Will be done.

That is, the ball that has entered the continuous passage groove 5314 passes through the second detection port 5314c after passing through the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 5314b. In the present embodiment, the ball that acts on the ball that reaches the stop portion 5314b is stopped. It takes a minimum of 1.5 seconds for the device 5500 to change its state from the upper open state to the lower open state.

Therefore, when a ball enters the stop portion 5314b immediately before the state of the stop device 5500 changes from the upper open state to the closed state (the ball can enter the stop portion 5314b, and then the stop device 5500 is in the lower open state. Even if the time required to change the state is the shortest), it takes 1.5 seconds for the ball to be discharged from the stop 5314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c.

In the present embodiment, the lower limit period for holding digestion is defined as 3 seconds. Therefore, if the time required for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a is 1.5 seconds or more, the ball enters the continuous passage groove 5314. It is possible that the pending digestion lower limit period elapses from the time until the passage through the second detection port 5314c. In the present embodiment, the introduction groove 5314a is designed in a shape (length, inclination, etc.) that requires 2 seconds for the sphere flowing down due to gravity to pass through the introduction groove 5314a in consideration of the margin.

As a result, even if a plurality of balls P51 to P55 are entered into the first winning opening 64 when the number of the first special symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is three, the spheres P52 Since the fluctuation (the fluctuation corresponding to the case where the first special symbol is held for three) can be completed by the time the player passes through the second detection port 5314c, the number of balls entered in the first winning opening 64 is increased. On the other hand, it is possible to secure the maximum chance of lottery (the opportunity of the lottery of the first symbol or the second symbol) that the player can obtain.

The intervals at which the trailing balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c are equally spaced according to the operating speed of the stopping device 5500. This is because no matter how many balls P52 to P54 that follow up flow down the introduction groove 5314a, only one ball can enter the stop portion 5314b.

That is, the timing at which the balls P53 and P54 that have entered the first winning opening 64 after the ball P52 enter the stop portion 5314b is specified regardless of the state of the stop device 5500. More specifically, when the ball P53 reaches the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a when the stop device 5500 is in the upper open state, the ball P52 is restricted from flowing down by the ball P52 which is stopped in advance in the stop portion 5314b, and the ball P52 is restricted from the stop portion 5314b. It is impossible for the ball P53 to enter the stop 5314b until it is discharged.

Therefore, regardless of the state of the stopping device 5500 when the ball P53 reaches the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a, the stopping device 5500 is opened up next (if it is in the upper open state at the time of arrival, it is next). The ball P53 is located above the upper extension plate 5512 and does not enter the stop 5314b until the state changes to the state.

After that, the ball P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c immediately after the stop device 5500 changes its state to the downward open state. After that, each time the stop device 5500 is in the upper open state, the balls P53 and P54 enter the stop portion 5314b one by one, and each time the stop device 5500 changes to the lower open state through both closed states. It passes through the second detection port 5314c.

Therefore, since the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c one by one each time the stopping device 5500 is opened downward, the interval at which the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c is kept constant. can do. In the present embodiment, since the stopping device 5500 is controlled so as to repeatedly operate at intervals of 6 seconds, the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c at intervals of 6 seconds.

Therefore, the interval at which the balls P52 to P54 are detected can be set to be equal to or longer than the reserved digestion lower limit period. Therefore, the balls P52 to P54 are detected before the reserved digestion lower limit period elapses, so that the first winning opening 64 is reached. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the lottery opportunity for the number of balls entered cannot be obtained.

As described above, since the timing at which the ball P52 that has entered the first winning opening 64 immediately after the leading ball P51 enters the stopping portion 5314b can change depending on the state of the stopping device 5500, the ball P51 is the detection port 312d. The timing at which the sphere P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be changed from time to time (the passage interval can be changed). Therefore, even when the balls are continuously entered into the first winning opening 64 at the same interval, the timing (interval) at which the first symbol is held and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed depending on the time. , Can give freshness to the game.

In particular, when the ball continuously enters the first winning opening 64 while the ball stays in the continuous passage groove 5314, the ball newly enters the continuous passage groove 5314 due to the action of the ball staying in the continuous passage groove 5314. The ball is prevented from entering the stop portion 5314b. Therefore, since the timing at which the ball newly entered in the continuous passage groove 5314 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be delayed, the occurrence of overflow caused by the ball newly entered in the first winning opening 64 can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed as two, the case where the balls P51 to P55 enter in the manner shown in FIG. 44 will be described. At this time, the current fluctuation display (variation display for 6 seconds) ends before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52 and ends after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52. Since there may be cases where this is done, the explanations will be given separately in order.

When the variation display ends before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the number of reserved spheres is three because the sphere P51 has passed the detection port 312d before the passage of the sphere P52. The variation display is started, and the variation display (3 seconds) and the next variation display (3 seconds) end before the sphere P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Therefore, since two empty spaces for the number of reserved balls are secured before the balls P53 and P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c, the first special trigger is that the balls P53 and P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c. It is possible to execute variable display of symbols. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

When the variation display ends after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the spheres P51 and P52 pass through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c after the passage of the sphere P52 and before the passage of the sphere P53. As a result, the fluctuation display (3 seconds) in the state where the number of reserved balls is four is started, and the fluctuation display ends before the balls P53 pass through the second detection port 5314c. After that, the ball P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c while the variation display (3 seconds) started when the number of reserved balls is 3, and then started when the number of reserved balls is 4. The sphere P54 passes through the second detection port 5314c after the fluctuation display (3 seconds) is completed. Therefore, the variation display of the first special symbol can be executed by using the spheres P52 to P54 as a trigger to pass through the second detection port 5314c. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed as one, the case where the balls P51 to P55 enter in the manner shown in FIG. 44 will be described. At this time, the current fluctuation display (variation display for 10 seconds) ends before the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51, and after the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51 and the second of the sphere P52. There are cases where the process ends before the passage of the detection port 5314c and cases where the process ends before the passage of the second detection port 5312c of the ball P52 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the ball P53. It will be explained in order. In the present embodiment, the variation display time, which is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is 0, is set to 15 seconds.

When the variation display ends before the ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d, the variation display started when the number of reserved balls is 0 is executed before the ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d. Therefore, since four free areas of the reserved sphere of the first special symbol are secured, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed with the spheres P51 to P54 passing through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c as a trigger. can do. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

If the variation display ends after the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the variation display executed when the sphere P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c is The fluctuation display (6 seconds) started when the number of reserved balls is 2. Therefore, since this variation display ends before the sphere P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c, there are two free areas of the reserved sphere of the first special symbol before the sphere P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Since it is secured, it is possible to execute the variation display of the first special symbol by using the spheres P51 to P54 passing through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c as a trigger. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

If the variation display ends after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the ball P52 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the ball P53, the variation display started after the end of the variation display has 3 reserved balls. It becomes a fluctuation display (3 seconds) that starts at the time of the number. Therefore, since the variation display ends before the ball P54 passes through the second detection port 5314c, the empty area of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is filled before the ball P54 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Since one can be secured, it is possible to execute the variation display of the first special symbol triggered by the passage of the spheres P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0, the free area of the number of reserved balls is sufficient (more than the number of data acquired by passing through the detection ports 312d or the second detection port 5314c of the balls P51 to P54). Since it is secured, the variation display of the first special symbol can be executed by triggering the passage of the spheres P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c regardless of the end timing of the variation display. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, not only when the number of reserved balls is 3, but also when the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, as shown in FIG. 44, the first winning opening 64 It is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by continuously entering the balls P51 to P55.

Here, a sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e will be described. For example, a detection port A in which a ball entering the first winning opening 64 executes a variation display of the first special symbol by passing the ball, and a detection port B in which a variation display of a normal symbol is executed by the passage of the ball. In the case of a gaming machine that is sorted in order, if the previous game ends immediately after the ball passes through the detection port A, the first winning opening 64 is the first of the balls launched by the player who plays the next game. The ball that has entered the ball passes through the detection port B. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute the variable display of the normal symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the period required for the player to win the jackpot is extended.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is difficult to determine whether the ball to be entered next is directed to the detection port A or the detection port B, so that the ball first entering the first winning opening 64 Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the variable display of the first special symbol is performed or the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and there is a problem that the motivation to start the game may be impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at least, the ball that first enters the first winning opening 64 after the start of the game inevitably passes through the detection opening 312d (the detection opening that executes the variable display of the first special symbol). It is configured in such a manner that it does not pass through the third detection port 5314e (a detection port that executes variable display of a normal symbol). On the other hand, by inserting a predetermined number or more of balls into the first winning opening 64 within a predetermined period, the balls are configured to enter the third detection opening 5314e.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the gaming machine when the player starts the game has the advantage that the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed depending on the mode of entering the ball into the first winning opening 64. Regardless of the situation, it is possible to maintain the function of executing the variable display of the first special symbol triggered by the ball first entering the first winning opening 64. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play.

According to the present embodiment, when the balls P51 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64 in a short period of time, the trailing ball (for example, the ball P53) is blocked from flowing down by the stopping device 5500, and the second detection opening. In addition to delaying the passage of the 5314c, it also has a function of damming the flow of the ball that has passed through the continuous passage groove 5314 among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 as a follow-up. That is, for example, eight seconds after the ball P51 shown in FIG. 44 enters the first winning opening 64 (almost at the same time as the timing at which the ball P53 passes the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a), two more balls. When the balls enter the first winning opening 64 in succession, the leading ball moves to the detection port 312d after changing the stop device 3340 as in the ball P51, while the trailing ball is the same as the ball P52. Enter the continuous passage groove 5314.

At this time, in the continuous passage groove 5314, the balls P53 and P54 are stopped at the stopping device 5500. Therefore, the trailing ball is dammed down by the ball P54 on the upstream side of the ball P54. That is, even if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 at intervals (for example, at intervals longer than the period required for the stop device 3340 to return to the initial state), the ball flows down. Can be dammed by the ball that first entered the first winning opening 64. Therefore, the timing at which the trailing ball passes through the second detection port 5314c can be delayed by the action caused by the balls P53 and P54 that have entered earlier (after the balls P53 and P54 have passed through the second detection port 5314c). , The follow-up ball can pass through the second detection port 5314c).

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stopping device 5500 performs a constant operation by a single driving device 5520 has been described, but in the delay device 6300 in the sixth embodiment, the stopping device 6500 is operated by a plurality of driving devices 6520. That is, unlike the fifth embodiment, the interval at which the sphere that has passed through the introduction groove 5314a of the continuous passage groove 6314 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be created in a plurality of modes. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the description of this embodiment, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

47 (a) and 47 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the balls P61 and P62 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is in a changed state. .. Further, FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which a pair of movable plate portions 6510 of the stopping device 6500 project inside the continuous passage groove 6314 (both closed states), and FIG. 47 (b) shows a pair of movable plates. A state in which the portion 6510 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both open states) is shown.

The pair of balls P61 and P62 shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) are shown in the case where they enter the first winning opening 64 with a slight interval. In the present embodiment, after the detection, the sphere P61 passes through the flow path 5313 (passes over 3 seconds), and the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state (returns over 1 second) to the stop device 3340. The abutted sphere flows down the continuous passage groove 6314 in the same manner as the sphere P62. That is, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 within about 4 seconds after the previous ball P61 has entered the first winning opening 64 passes through the continuous passage groove 6314 in the same manner as the ball P62. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 in a continuous state but also the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 at intervals cause the continuous passage groove 6314 to flow down. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 47, the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 6300 are configured as devices having a symmetrical shape with the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals as those in the description will be given, and the description will be omitted for the parts that overlap with the description in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 47, the delay device 6300 has a main body member 6310 having a flow path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and the action of the ball flowing down inside the main body member 6310. When the stop device 3340 and the stop device 3340 are in a changed state (see FIG. 39), the state is maintained and the posture is changed by the action of a ball passing through the detection port 312d. It mainly includes a maintenance device 3360 that releases the maintenance of the state of the device 3340, and a stop device 6500 that acts on a ball flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 to stop the ball, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the main body member 6310 constitutes a flow path that inclines downward, and guides a ball that has entered from the first winning opening 64 to a vertically upward position of the detection opening 312d, and a first groove 5311 and a first groove thereof. From the intermediate position between the second groove 5312 extending vertically from the lower end of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 in which the ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and the second groove 5312. It mainly includes a continuous passage groove 6314 formed as a groove branching to the side (right side in FIG. 47).

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313, and the continuous passage groove 6314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is formed on the game board 13 in the assembled state. By closing, a passage through which the sphere flows is formed.

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 have a symmetrical shape with the configuration having the same name in the third embodiment (first groove 3311, second groove 3312, and post-detection flow path 3313). The description of the part that overlaps with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

In the second groove 5312, the side wall portion 312e extends to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 6314 that forms a branch passage through which a ball can be thrown is arranged between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e.

The continuous passage groove 6314 of the delay device 6300 includes a stop portion 6314b connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is arranged directly below the stop portion 6314b.

Similar to the stop portion 5314b of the fifth embodiment, the stop portion 6314b is configured as a groove portion in which only one ball can be stopped and the ball can flow down. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the ball that has reached the stop portion 6314b may stop at the stop portion 6314b or may pass through the stop portion 6314b (do not stop).

The stopping device 6500 of the delay device 6300 is a drive composed of a pair of movable plate portions 6510 and a pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 (one of solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 6510. It mainly includes a device 6520.

The movable plate portion 6510 is located at a position separated by one ball on the downstream side of the upper movable plate 6511 that appears and disappears inside the continuous passage groove 6314 at the boundary between the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 6314b. Mainly includes a lower movable plate 6512 that appears and disappears inside the continuous passage groove 6314.

The upper movable plate 6511 regulates the flow of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the continuous passage groove 6314 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding inside the continuous passage groove 6314 (the upper surface of the sphere is raised). It is stopped on the side), and the ball is allowed to flow down in the retracted state where the continuous passage groove 6314 is retracted from the inside to the outside.

The lower movable plate 6512 extends in the extending direction of the continuous passage groove 6314 of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the continuous passage groove 6314 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding inside the continuous passage groove 6314. The flow along the (vertical direction) is restricted, and the flow along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the continuous passage groove 6314 of the sphere is allowed in the retracted state in which the continuous passage groove 6314 is retracted from the inside to the outside.

In the present embodiment, the time required from the center of the ball P62 passing through the upper movable plate 6511 (after invading the stop portion 6314b) to passing through the lower movable plate 6512 (discharging from the stop portion 6314b). The flow path resistance of the stop portion 6314b is set so that the NT stays within 0.1 to 0.2 seconds.

The drive device 6520 has an upper drive solenoid 6521 that is fastened and fixed to the delay device 6300 and generates a driving force that causes the upper movable plate 6511 to move up and down, and a lower movable plate 6512 that is fastened and fixed to the delay device 6300. It mainly includes a lower drive solenoid 6522 that generates a driving force.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the upper movable plate 6511 is driven by the upper drive solenoid 6521 and the lower movable plate 6512 is driven by the lower drive solenoid 6522, each operation can be made independent. Hereinafter, an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 will be described.

FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation modes of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512. The drive device 6520 is driven and controlled in a manner in which the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated in a constant operation pattern illustrated in FIG. 48. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the movable plate portion 6510 that changes depending on the timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 48, the operation patterns of the movable plate portion 6510 are the operation of the chain opening period T6a, the operation of the upper closing period T6b following the chain opening period T6a, and the operation of both opening following the upper closing period T6b. It is composed of an operation of the period T6c and an operation of the lower closing period T6d following the both opening periods T6c.

During the chain opening period T6a, the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 alternately open and close. After the upper movable plate 6511 projects to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after closing), the lower movable plate 6512 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (opens the continuous passage groove 6314) with a slight delay. In the present embodiment, the operation of the upper movable plate 6511 is controlled so as to change the state at intervals of 1.5 seconds, and the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the retracted state for 0.8 seconds and then in the protruding state of 2.2. The operation is controlled in such a manner that the operation is maintained for 2 seconds and the state is repeatedly changed to the retracted state, and the chain opening period T6a is set to 30 seconds.

Thereby, in the chain opening period T6a, the number of balls passing through the upper movable plate 6511 can be limited while the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the inside of the continuous passing groove 6314. In the present embodiment, since the number of balls anchored between the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 is one, the upper movable plate 6511 can move upward while retracting from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314. The maximum number of spheres that pass through the plate 6511 can be limited to one.

Further, after the upper movable plate 6511 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314, for 0.05 seconds (from the period required for the ball to pass through the lower movable plate 6512 (0.1 seconds to 0.2 seconds)). The lower movable plate 6512 projects (closes) inward of the continuous passage groove 6314 (also in front).

As a result, it is possible to ensure that the ball that has passed through the upper movable plate 6511 is stopped above the lower movable plate 6512, and it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through. In the present embodiment, the lower movable plate 6512 is switched from the protruding state to the retracted state 0.75 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state (intermediate timing of the maintenance period of the protruding state). In the embodiment, the drive device 6520 is driven.

Here, since the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state for 0.75 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the protruding state, the ball P62 is released immediately before the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state. Even when passing through the upper movable plate 6511 (entering the stop portion 6314b), the ball P62 can be reliably maintained above the lower movable plate 6512 for at least 0.75 seconds.

Further, since the period from the upper movable plate 6511 in the retracted state to the lower movable plate 6512 in the protruding state is shorter than the time NT, the ball immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the protruding state to the retracted state. Even when P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stop 6314b), the ball P62 is kept on the lower movable plate 6512 while the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state (2.2 seconds). It can be reliably maintained on the upper side.

As a result, the ball P62 passes through the stop portion 6314b (flows down without stopping on the upper side of the lower movable plate 6512) regardless of the timing when the ball P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stop portion 6314b). ) Can be prevented.

In the upper closing period T6b, the upper movable plate 6511 overhangs the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 for a period longer than the period during which the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the overhang (for example, 6 seconds) in the chain opening period T6a described above. This prevents the ball flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 from passing through the upper movable plate 6511. In this case, the ball is more likely to stay above the upper movable plate 6511 as compared with the chain opening period T6a.

Therefore, as compared with the chain opening period T6a, in the upper closing period T6b, when the ball is continuously entered into the continuous passage groove 6314, the ball is detected from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 through the branch flow path 5314d. It becomes easier to pass through the mouth 5314e.

In the present embodiment, a variable display of a normal symbol (an electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) that regulates the entry of a ball into the second winning opening 640 is displayed by using a ball passing through the third detection port 5314e as a trigger. It is configured to execute the variable display of the lottery to be opened. Therefore, as compared with the chain opening period T6a, it is easier to obtain an opportunity to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640 by continuously entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 during the upper closing period T6b. Can be done.

As a result, for example, as a look-ahead effect of the upper closing period T6b, a little before the start of the upper closing period T6b, the third symbol display device 81 "inserts five balls into the first winning opening 64 in 5 seconds". If this is possible, by displaying "Is the electric accessory 640a open?", The player is notified that a special benefit can be obtained by continuously entering the ball into the first winning opening 64. Can be done. As a result, the quality of the profit given to the player by continuously entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 can be changed depending on the timing of entering the ball, thus preventing the player from inadvertently launching the ball. can do.

Further, the change in the quality of the profit given to the player by the ball entry timing is repeated at regular intervals regardless of the game mode of the player. In the present embodiment, the content of the quality of profit related to the ball entry timing is set in a mode of displaying on the third symbol display device. Therefore, since the player can launch the ball at a desired timing, the player can play the game after recognizing the difference in the quality of profit given to the player depending on the timing of entering the ball.

That is, in exchange for the advantage that the electric accessory 640a can be easily opened by continuously entering the ball into the continuous passage groove 6314 during the upper closing period T6b, the third lottery for opening the electric accessory 640a is related. Since the prize balls are not given to the player when the balls pass through the detection port 5314e, there is a drawback that the number of prize balls is likely to decrease with respect to the number of balls entered in the first prize opening 64.

On the other hand, in the chain opening period T6a described above, since the balls are sent to the stop portion 6314b at shorter intervals than the upper closing period T6b, the balls are less likely to stay on the upper movable plate 6511 and the continuous passage groove. The ball flowing down the 6314 can be easily passed through the second detection port 5314c without leaking. Therefore, there is a drawback that it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a, but there is an advantage that the number of prize balls can be secured with respect to the number of balls that have entered the first winning opening 64.

Therefore, if the player does not expect the electric accessory 640a to be released and wants to surely obtain the prize ball, the player launches the ball so as to continuously enter the ball during the chain opening period T6a, and even if the prize ball is reduced. When the game is to be performed in anticipation of the opening of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to easily obtain the desired profit by launching the ball so that the ball is continuously entered during the upper closing period T6b.

During the double-opening period T6c, the stopping device 6500 is maintained in the double-opening state (see FIG. 47B). In this case, the ball flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 passes through the stop portion 6314b and passes through the third detection port 5314e without stopping at the stop portion 6314b.

Therefore, since the ball that has passed through the continuous passage groove 6314 does not enter the branch flow path 5314d from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1, the ball is prevented from passing through the third detection port 5314e. In this embodiment, both open periods T6c are set to 6 seconds.

Although the ball does not stop at the stop portion 6314b, it takes 2 seconds for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a, while the ball whose state has changed the stop device 3340 immediately presses the detection port 312d. Since it can pass through, in the balls P61 and P62 that have continuously entered the first winning opening 64, the timing at which the ball P61 passes through the detection port 312d and the timing at which the ball P62 passes through the second detection port 5314c are surely confirmed. It can be shifted.

In the present embodiment, since the upper closing period T6b is set to 6 seconds, the variation display is started at the same time as the start timing of the upper closing period T6b (when the start timing of the variation display is the latest). In addition, it is possible to secure two free areas for the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the start timing of the subsequent double opening period T6c.

That is, for example, even in the most severe case (when the number of reserved balls is 4,) the fluctuation display (3 seconds) which starts when the number of reserved balls is 4, and the start when the number of reserved balls is 3. The variable display (3 seconds) to be performed can be completed by the start timing of both open periods T6c, and two free areas for the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the start timing of both open periods T6c must be secured. Can be done.

Here, since the number of balls that can be stopped above the upper movable plate 6511 during the upper closing period T6b is two, the balls that are stopped above the upper movable plate 6511 during the upper closing period T6b are the first in both opening periods T6c. 2 The variation display of the first special symbol can be executed by passing through the detection port 5314c as a trigger. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by having a plurality of balls enter the first winning opening 64.

In the lower closing period T6d, the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the continuous passage groove 6314 to allow the ball to pass, while the lower movable plate 6512 projects inward of the continuous passage groove 6314 to restrict the passage of the ball.

The lower closing period T6d is the same as the upper closing period T6b in that the balls are stopped by the action of the movable plate portion 6510, but the number of balls that can be stopped is different. That is, in the lower closing period T6d, in addition to the number of balls stopped in the upper closing period T6b (2 in the present embodiment), the number of balls stopped in the stopping portion 6314b (1 in the present embodiment). Can be stopped.

Therefore, in order for the balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 to flow through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 to the branch flow path 5314d and pass through the third detection port 5314e, in addition to the number of balls entering in the upper closing period T6b. Therefore, it is necessary to enter one more ball into the first winning opening 64. That is, the difficulty level of passing the ball through the third detection port 5314e is higher than the case where the ball is passed through the third detection port 5314e during the upper closing period T6b.

On the other hand, since the chain opening period T6a follows the lower closing period T6d, the ball stopped at the stopping device 6500 during the lower closing period T6d is one ball in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 during the chain opening period T6a. It passes through the second detection port 5314c one by one. This ensures a longer period for the subsequent ball to pass through the second detection port 5314c, as compared with the ball stopped at the upper closing period T6b passing through the second detection port 5314c at once during both opening periods T6c. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from passing through the second detection port 5314c when the number of reserved spheres in the variation display of the first special symbol is the maximum (4 spheres) (the sphere is the second). It is possible to easily prevent a situation in which a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even though the lottery has passed through the detection port 5314c).

Therefore, for example, as a look-ahead effect of the lower closing period T6d, a little before the start of the lower closing period T6d, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with "5 balls in the first winning opening 64 in 5 seconds + 1 piece. If it can be inserted, the electric accessory 640a will be opened? (High difficulty, high security) "is displayed.

As a result, a special benefit can be obtained by allowing the player to continuously enter the ball into the first winning opening 64, but while the difficulty of obtaining the special benefit is high, the continuous entry of the ball is obtained. It is possible to inform that the degree of security that the profit (the number of prize balls and the opportunity of lottery) given to the player by the ball is secured is high. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the frequency with which the ball enters the first winning opening 64, and it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently launching the ball.

In the present embodiment, the lower closing period T6d is set to 8 seconds (a period longer than the upper closing period T6b). As a result, the number of balls entering the first winning opening 64 required for the balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 to flow through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 to the branch flow path 5314d and to pass through the third detection port 5314e. Although the period is longer than that of the upper closing period T6b, a sufficient period for allowing a large number of balls to enter the first winning opening 64 can be secured, and the balls pass through the third detection port 5314e. You can create many opportunities.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the continuous opening period T6a (30 seconds), the upper closing period T6b (6 seconds), both opening periods T6c (6 seconds), and the lower closing period T6d (8 seconds) are arranged in this order. At the same time, the drive device 6520 is driven and controlled so as to loop at intervals of 50 seconds.

As a result, the stop device 6500 operates in an operation mode corresponding to the continuous opening period T6a for more than half of the operation time. During that time, the balls are discharged one by one from the stop portion 6314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c. While making it possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol by using this as a trigger (while making the game mode easy to execute the variable display of the first special symbol), at other times, the first winning opening 64 is entered. A period during which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is possible using a part of the incoming ball (upper closing period T6b, lower closing period T6d), a period during which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is impossible (both open periods T6c), and Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to realize a sharp playability, and the player can realize a favorite playability by adjusting the launch timing.

That is, for example, when it is desired to insert a ball into the first winning opening 64 specially for executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the ball is directed toward the first winning opening 64 only during the chain opening period T6a. May be fired, the launch of the ball may be stopped during other periods (T6b to T6d), and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will pass through the third detecting opening 5314e.

On the other hand, for example, if you want to get the opportunity to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol even if you sacrifice the opportunity to display the fluctuation of the first special symbol, you can aim at the upper closing period T6b and the lower closing period T6d and win the first prize. The ball may be launched toward the mouth 64, the launch of the ball may be stopped during other periods (T6a and T6c), and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the possibility of passing through the third detection port 5314e when the balls continuously enter the first winning opening 64 is increased as compared with the case where the ball is always launched toward the first winning opening 64. Can be done.

Next, a modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls anchored in the retaining portion 6314b is limited to one has been described, but the delay device 6300b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment is between the plates of the pair of movable plate portions 6510. The region (corresponding to the stop portion 6314b2) is composed of a size capable of accommodating a plurality of balls (two in the present embodiment). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the description of this embodiment, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

49 (a) and 49 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 6300b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b) show a state in which the balls P61 and P62 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is in a changed state. .. Further, FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which a pair of movable plate portions 6510 of the stopping device 6500b project inside the continuous passage groove 6314 (both closed states), and FIG. 49 (b) shows a pair of movable plates. A state in which the portion 6510 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both open states) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 49, the delay device 6300b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment has a size such that the retaining portion 6314b can accommodate two balls in comparison with the configuration of the delay device 6300 of the sixth embodiment. There are two differences, that is, the upper movable plate 6511 and the upper drive solenoid 6521 of the stopping device 6500b are moved upward, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same reference numerals as those described in the sixth embodiment are given, and the description of the parts that overlap with the description in the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

The continuous passage groove 6314 of the delay device 6300b includes a stop portion 6314b2 connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is arranged directly below the stop portion 6314b2.

The stop portion 6314b2 is formed from a size capable of containing a plurality of balls (two in the present embodiment), unlike the stop portion 6314b of the sixth embodiment in which only one ball can be inserted, and the balls are formed. It is configured as a groove that can flow down.

In the present embodiment, as described above in the sixth embodiment, the ball that has reached the stop portion 6314b2 can be formed either when it stops at the stop portion 6314b2 or when it passes through the stop portion 6314b2 (does not stop). The drive device 6520 is driven so as to be.

The stopping device 6500b of the delay device 6300b is a drive composed of a pair of movable plate portions 6510 and a pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 (one of solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 6510. It mainly includes a device 6520.

The movable plate portion 6510 is located at a position separated by two balls on the downstream side of the upper movable plate 6511 that appears and disappears inside the continuous passage groove 6314 at the boundary between the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 6314b2. Mainly includes a lower movable plate 6512 that appears and disappears inside the continuous passage groove 6314.

That is, the upper movable plate 6511 in the present embodiment is arranged at a position raised by one ball as compared with the upper movable plate 6511 in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, when the ball is stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the protruding state, the second ball from the end of the continuous passage groove 6314 on the stopping portion 6314b side is the front side of the upper limit discharge hole 5314a. (FIG. 49 (a), the front side in the vertical direction of the paper surface), the sphere is guided to the branch flow path 5314d through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1.

Therefore, when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the protruding state, the number of balls that can be stopped above the upper movable plate 6511 is set to one. Therefore, only one ball parked on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 can be dropped immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 changes from the protruding state to the retracted state.

Further, when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state and the ball stopped on the upper side falls and the subsequent ball reaches the end of the continuous passage groove 6314 on the stop portion 6314b2 side, the ball enters the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1. There is a possibility that the ball will be guided to the stop 6314b2 following the ball ahead.

However, in the present embodiment, the upper movable plate is formed after the previous ball starts flowing down the stop portion 6314b2 and before a space for one ball is formed on the upper side thereof (0.2 seconds to 0.3 seconds elapse). The operation of the upper movable plate 6511 is controlled in an operation mode in which the 6511 is in a protruding state (see FIG. 50). As a result, while the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the retracted state, the ball that first entered the stop portion 6314b2 prevents the trailing ball from entering the stop portion 6314b2, so that the pair of balls It is possible to prevent the balls from entering the stop portion 6314b2 in succession. That is, in the chain opening period T62a, it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down in a row on the stop portion 6314b2 immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state.

In the present embodiment, the time required from the center of the ball P62 passing through the upper movable plate 6511 (after invading the stop portion 6314b2) to passing through the lower movable plate 6512 (discharging from the stop portion 6314b2). The flow path resistance of the stop portion 6314b is set so that the NTb is contained within 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds. Hereinafter, an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 will be described.

FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512. The drive device 6520 is driven and controlled in a manner in which the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated in a constant operation pattern illustrated in FIG. 50. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the movable plate portion 6510 that changes depending on the timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 50, the operation pattern of the movable plate portion 6510 is the operation of the chain opening period T62a, the operation of the upper closing period T6b following the chain opening period T62a, and the operation of both opening following the upper closing period T6b. It is composed of an operation of the period T6c and an operation of the lower closing period T6d following the both opening periods T6c. Since the upper closing period T6b, both opening periods T6c, and the lower closing period T6d are the same as those described above in the sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

During the chain opening period T62a, the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 alternately open and close. After the upper movable plate 6511 projects to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after closing), the lower movable plate 6512 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (opens the continuous passage groove 6314) with a slight delay. In the present embodiment, the upper movable plate 6511 is maintained in the retracted state for 0.2 seconds (a time during which one ball can pass through, but it is difficult for two balls to pass through), and then the upper movable plate 6511 stays in a protruding state of 3. The operation is controlled in such a manner that the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained for a second and then changed to the retracted state again, and the lower movable plate 6512 is changed to the protruding state at the timing when the upper movable plate 6511 changes to the retracted state, and the protruding state is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, the operation is controlled in such a manner that the evacuation state is maintained for 0.2 seconds (a time during which one ball can pass while two balls are difficult to pass), and the state is repeatedly changed to the protruding state. The chain opening period T62a is set to 30 seconds.

According to such an operation mode, in the present embodiment, the number of balls anchored between the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 is set to 2, while the upper movable plate 6511 is formed in the continuous passage groove 6314. The number of balls passing through the upper movable plate 6511 while retracting from the inside can be limited to one.

Further, at the same time that the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314, the lower movable plate 6512 projects to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (becomes a protruding state), and then until the lower movable plate 6512 is retracted. In addition, 2.8 seconds, which is a period longer than the time NTb, elapses. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the ball that has passed through the upper movable plate 6511 is stopped above the lower movable plate 6512, and it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through.

In addition, since the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state for 2.6 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the protruding state, the ball P62 is released immediately before the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state. Even when passing through the upper movable plate 6511 (entering the stop portion 6314b2), the ball P62 can be reliably maintained above the lower movable plate 6512 for at least 2.6 seconds.

As a result, the ball P62 passes through the stop portion 6314b2 (flows down without stopping on the upper side of the lower movable plate 6512) regardless of the timing when the ball P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stop portion 6314b2). ) Can be prevented.

Further, after the ball is stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511, the stopped ball enters the stopping portion 6314b2 when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state, and then the lower movable plate 6512 Is more than 3 seconds (a fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4 (shortest fluctuation period)) before it flows down and passes through the second detection port 5314c due to the evacuation state. It takes a long time. Therefore, when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c through the stopping device 6500b, the ball overflows at the first winning port 64 (the ball passes through the detection port (for example, the second detection port 5314c) in the first winning port 64). Despite this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lottery opportunity).

In the upper closing period T6b, by inserting two balls into the continuous passage groove 6314, the second ball enters the branch flow path 5314d through the upper limit discharge port hole 5314a, and the third detection port 5314e Pass through. As a result, the number of balls that need to enter the continuous passage groove 6314 in order to create a situation in which the balls pass through the third detection port 5314e can be reduced as compared with the case described in the sixth embodiment, and the balls can be reduced. Can easily create a situation in which is passing through the third detection port 5314e.

In both opening periods T6c and lower closing period T6d, the state of the continuous passage groove 6314 is the same as in both opening periods T6c and lower closing period T6d in the sixth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, unlike the sixth embodiment, when a plurality of balls are guided to the continuous passage groove 6314 during the lower closing period T6b, and then when the chain opening period T62a is entered, the two balls are accommodated in the stop portion 6314b2. In this state, the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 in the chain opening period T62a is started.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the period during which the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the retracted state in the chain opening period T62a is 0.2 seconds (one ball can pass through, but it is difficult for two balls to pass through). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls (two in the present embodiment) stopped at the stop portion 6314b from passing through the second detection port 5314c in succession.

That is, each ball passes through the second detection port 5314c in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 during the chain opening period T62a. As a result, when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c via the stopping device 6500b, the ball overflows at the first winning port 64 (for example, the ball passes through the detection port (for example, the second detection port 5314c) in the first winning port 64). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even though the game has passed.

Therefore, for example, as a look-ahead effect of the lower closing period T6d, a little before the start of the lower closing period T6d, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with "5 balls in the first winning opening 64 in 5 seconds + 1 piece. If it can be inserted, the electric accessory 640a will be opened? (High difficulty, high security) "is displayed.

As a result, a special benefit can be obtained by allowing the player to continuously enter the ball into the first winning opening 64, but the difficulty of obtaining the special benefit is high (it is possible to continuously enter the ball). (The required number is large), but the degree of security that the profit (number of prize balls and lottery opportunity) given to the player by the consecutively entered balls is secured is high. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the frequency with which the ball enters the first winning opening 64, and it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently launching the ball.

In the present embodiment, the continuous opening period T62a (30 seconds), the upper closing period T6b (6 seconds), both opening periods T6c (6 seconds), and the lower closing period T6d (8 seconds) are arranged in order and 50 seconds. The drive device 6520 is driven and controlled so as to loop at intervals.

As a result, the stop device 6500 operates in an operation mode corresponding to the continuous opening period T62a for more than half of the operation time. During that time, the balls are discharged one by one from the stop portion 6314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c. While making it possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol by using this as a trigger (while making the game mode easy to execute the variable display of the first special symbol), at other times, the first winning opening 64 is entered. A period during which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is possible using a part of the incoming ball (upper closing period T6b, lower closing period T6d), a period during which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is impossible (both open periods T6c), and Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to realize a sharp playability, and the player can realize a favorite playability by adjusting the launch timing.

That is, for example, when it is desired to insert a ball into the first winning opening 64 specially for executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the ball is directed toward the first winning opening 64 only during the chain opening period T62a. May be fired, the launch of the ball may be stopped during other periods (T6b to T6d), and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will pass through the third detecting opening 5314e.

On the other hand, for example, if you want to get the opportunity to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol even if you sacrifice the opportunity to display the fluctuation of the first special symbol, you can aim at the upper closing period T6b and the lower closing period T6d and win the first prize. The ball may be launched toward the mouth 64, the launch of the ball may be stopped during other periods (T62a and T6c), and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the possibility of passing through the third detection port 5314e when the balls continuously enter the first winning opening 64 is increased as compared with the case where the ball is always launched toward the first winning opening 64. Can be done.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stopping device 5500 is arranged on the downstream side of the introduction groove 5314a has been described, but the delay device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is between the introduction groove 5314a and the second detection port 5314c. The stop device 5500 is not arranged. That is, unlike the fifth embodiment, the ball that has passed through the introduction groove 5314a passes through the second detection port 5314c without stopping. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the delay device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 51 shows a state in which the balls P71 and P72 continuously enter the winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is in a changed state.

As shown in FIG. 51, the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 6300 are configured as devices having a symmetrical shape with the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals as those in the description will be given, and the description will be omitted for the parts that overlap with the description in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51, the delay device 7300 has a main body member 7310 having a flow path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and the action of the ball flowing down inside the main body member 7310. When the stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the above and the stop device 3340 are in the changed state (see FIG. 51), the state is maintained and the posture is changed by the action of the ball passing through the detection port 312d. It mainly includes a maintenance device 3360 that releases the maintenance of the state of the device 3340.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main body member 7310 constitutes a flow path that inclines downward, and guides a ball that has entered from the first winning opening 64 to a vertically upward position of the detection opening 312d, and a first groove 5311 and a first groove thereof. From the intermediate position between the second groove 5312 extending vertically from the lower end of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 in which the ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and the second groove 5312. It mainly includes a continuous passage groove 7314 formed as a groove branching to the side (right side in FIG. 51).

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313, and the continuous passage groove 7314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is formed on the game board 13 in the assembled state. By closing, a passage through which the sphere flows is formed.

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 have a symmetrical shape with the configuration having the same name in the third embodiment (first groove 3311, second groove 3312, and post-detection flow path 3313). The description of the part that overlaps with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

In the second groove 5312, the side wall portion 312e extends to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 7314 that forms a branch passage through which a ball can be thrown is arranged between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e.

The continuous passage groove 7314 of the delay device 7300 includes a vertically extending groove 7314b connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is arranged at the lower end of the vertically extending groove 7314b.

The vertical extension groove 7314b is extended in the vertical direction and is configured as a groove portion through which a ball can flow down. In the present embodiment, the length of the vertical extension groove 7314b is designed so that it takes 1 second for the ball to pass (free fall) through the vertical extension groove 7314b.

Next, the game playability in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the detection port 312d (starting prize is won), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variable display of the first special symbol and two prize balls as a trigger. Is paid out, and when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variable display of the second special symbol and four pieces are triggered by the start. The prize ball will be paid out.

That is, after the ball P71 enters the first winning opening 64, the ball P72 is the first winning opening with a sufficient time interval (time interval of about 4 seconds or more) for the stop device 3340 to return to the initial state. When entering the ball 64, since the ball enters only the detection port 312d, the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. On the other hand, if the ball P72 is inserted into the first winning opening 64 while the stop device 3340 maintains the changing state (for about 4 seconds or less), the following ball P72 enters the second detection opening 5314c. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot is distributed so that the jackpot of the second special symbol can obtain more profit than the jackpot of the first special symbol (the distribution is such that it is easier to obtain a larger profit). ). As a result, the profit given to the player at the time of a big hit can be changed depending on whether the balls P71 and P72 enter the first winning opening 64 with a sufficient interval or at short intervals. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the ball entering the first winning opening 64.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, the variation display of the first special symbol is always started before the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol, which attracts a lot of attention from the player, from starting immediately after the ball has passed through the second detection port 5314c. That is, when the sphere P72 passes through the second detection port 5314c, the period of the variation display of the first special symbol that has already been executed due to the passage of the sphere P71 through the detection port 312d is set to the period of the second special symbol. It can be used as a waiting time until the variable display is started.

Therefore, after a rare event that the balls P71 and P72 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, the variation display on the side advantageous to the player (the distribution of the jackpot is the first special for the player). It is possible to secure a time until the start of the second special symbol variation display, which is more advantageous than the symbol (a waiting period can be inserted).

Therefore, the time for paying attention to the flow of the balls P71 and P72 that have entered the first winning opening 64 and the third symbol display device due to the fact that the balls P71 and P72 have passed through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c. Of the variation display performed in 81, the time during which the variation display on the side advantageous to the player (second special symbol) is performed can be clearly separated. As a result, it is not necessary for the player to move his / her line of sight between the first winning opening 64 and the third symbol display device 81 in a hurry, so that the player's feeling of fatigue can be reduced.

Further, after having the player confirm that the ball P72 passes through the second detection port 5314c, it is possible to start the variation display caused by the ball P72 passing through the second detection port 5314c.

Therefore, as compared with the gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol occur alternately, the ball has passed through the second detection port 5314c, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable display of the second special symbol is started as a series of flows.

This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the variation display next performed by the third symbol display device 81 is the variation display on the side that is advantageous to the player (second special symbol). it can.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the delay device 300 is connected to the downstream side of the first winning opening 64 has been described, but the delay device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is connected to the downstream side of the V winning device 800. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the present embodiment, for each of the above-described embodiments, the second winning opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a are provided below the first winning opening 64, and the V winning device 800 replaces the first variable winning device 65. The first variable winning device 8065 (device having the same function as the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment) provided in the lower right portion is provided in the lower part of the V winning device 800, and the ball rolls on the upper surface. A point where a rolling plate 8091, which is formed as a movable overhang plate and discharges the rolling ball to the upper part of the electric accessory 640a when the electric accessory 640a is open, is provided on the right side of the second winning opening 640. Is different.

Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The first embodiment also includes a warp passage port 87 for allowing some of the spheres flowing to the left of the center frame 86 to flow into the delayed floor device 400 (through a so-called "warp flow path"). It is the same as the form.

The V winning device 800 is different in that the delay device 8300 is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the above-described embodiments, and has the same structure in other points.

The first variable winning device 8065 operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the solenoids 209) (not shown). The first variable winning device 8065 does not guide the ball to the specific winning opening 65a (does not enter) by extending forward (closing), while retracting backward (opening). By doing so, it functions to guide the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

A ball that has reached the first variable winning device 8065 but has not been guided to the specific winning opening 65a due to the closure of the first variable winning device 8065 is connected to the left side of the first variable winning device 8065. It rolls on the rolling surface and reaches the upper surface of the rolling plate 8091.

The rolling plate 8091 inclines downward as it goes to the left in front view. Therefore, the ball that has reached the rolling plate 8091 rolls with its upper surface directed to the left in the front view, and is discharged from the left end portion.

The ball discharged from the left end portion of the rolling plate 8091 falls downward and is discharged from the out port 71 if the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 52). On the other hand, if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it rolls on the upper surface (inner surface) of the electric accessory 640a and is guided to the second winning opening 640 so that the ball can enter.

On the right side of the V winning opening 800a, similarly to the specific winning opening 65a of the first embodiment described above, a front-view triangular opening / closing plate covering the V winning opening 800a and opening / closing to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. A V inlet solenoid (one of the solenoids 209) for driving is provided, and the V winning opening 800a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. If the lottery accompanying the entry of the second winning opening 640 is a small hit, the V inlet solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right, and the open state where the ball can easily win the V winning opening 800a is temporarily opened. Acts to form.

A delay device 8300 is provided as a device for forming a flow path through which the ball that has entered the V winning device 800 passes. The V winning device 800 is provided with a V winning opening 800a, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening 800a, the entry of the game ball is detected, and a predetermined game is played for the player. Balls (eg, 3 balls) are paid out. That is, the V winning opening 800a is a detection port that also serves as a detection sensor. Further, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a passes through the V winning switch 8315d, which will be described later, a big hit game is given.

In the present embodiment, unlike the function in the first embodiment, the detection port 312d functions not as a detection port for performing detection accompanied by a lottery, but as a detection port for purely detecting the passage of a sphere. That is, the number of balls detected by the V winning opening 800a is compared with the number of balls detected by the detection port 312d, and if an abnormality is found in the difference between the numbers, an error notification is performed. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make a hole in the range on the front side of the branch delay groove 8314 of the glass unit 16 and to easily detect an error in inserting the ball directly into the branch delay groove 8314 from the front side.

A first variable winning device 8065 is provided below the V winning device 800. The first variable winning device 8065 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) in a jackpot game, and when a game ball enters the first variable winning device 8065a, a predetermined game ball (for example, for example). 15 balls) will be paid out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the configuration of the delay device 8300 in which the ball that has passed through the V winning opening 800a flows down will be described. FIG. 53 is a partial front view of the delay device 8300. Since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 8300 have the same configuration as the device of the third embodiment, they are designated by the same reference numerals as those described in the third embodiment, and in the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given. The explanation is omitted for the part that overlaps with the explanation of.

As shown in FIG. 53, the delay device 8300 includes a main body member 8310 that allows the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a to flow down, and a stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the action of the ball that flows down inside the main body member 8310. A maintenance device 3360 that maintains the state when the stop device 3340 is in a changed state and releases the maintenance of the state of the stop device 3340 as the posture changes due to the action of a ball flowing down inside, which will be described later. It mainly includes a stopping device 8500 that acts on a ball flowing down the annex 8315 to stop the ball.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main body member 8310 forms a downwardly inclined flow path and guides the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a in the first groove 3311 and the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311. The second groove 3312 extending in the second groove 3312, the inclined flow path 8313 extending in the direction of descending to the right from the lower end of the second groove 3312, and the side from the intermediate position of the second groove 3312 (FIG. It is formed as a groove that branches to the left side of 53) and extends vertically downward from the region including the branch delay groove 8314 that rejoins the lower end of the second groove 3312 and the lower bottom opening 8313b of the inclined flow path 8313. It is mainly provided with an annexed groove 8315 composed of a pair of grooves attached to the left and right.

The first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, the inclined flow path 8313, the branch delay groove 8314, and the side-by-side groove 8315 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is a game in the assembled state. By being closed by the board 13, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

The position where the branch delay groove 8314 is connected to the second groove 3312 is formed in the same position as the position where the accommodating recess 3312f is arranged in the third embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sphere (the leading sphere, the sphere P81 in FIG. 53) that has reached the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 53) is vertical while rotating the stop device 3340 to change the state. The ball that flows downward and is guided to the inclined flow path 8313, while the ball that reaches the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in a changing state (the second and subsequent follow-up balls, the ball P82 in FIG. 53) is a branch delay groove. It flows down 8314.

The inclined flow path 8313 is formed as a straight flow path that inclines downward as it goes to the right, and is a flow path that extends to the point where the sphere in contact with the contact portion 3363 is further advanced by one sphere. (When two spheres stay from the extended end, the second sphere from the extended end comes into contact with the abutting portion 3363), and the sphere from the extended end 8313a is an opening that is arranged on the back side of the second sphere counting from the extended end and allows the sphere to pass through, and extends to the communication opening 8313a. It is provided with a lower bottom opening 8313b which is opened downward at a position deviated by one sphere in the installation direction. The inclined flow path 8313 is formed from a shape in which 4 seconds elapse from when the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a until it flows straight down the second groove 3312 and reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

The communication opening 8313a is formed as a flow path extending in a U shape with its end facing the front side. That is, the ball that has entered the connecting opening 8313a from the inclined flow path 8313 flows down the U-shaped flow path of the communication opening 8313a and is discharged to the upper end portion of the second groove 8315b. After that, the ball flows down the second groove 8315b.

Since the branch delay groove 8314 is connected to the lower end of the second groove 3312 at its lower end, the ball flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 enters the inclined flow path 8313 via the lower end of the second groove 3312 ( It joins the flow path where the first ball flows down). In the present embodiment, the shape of the branch delay groove 8314 is designed so that the time required for the sphere to pass through the branch delay groove 8314 is 5 seconds or more.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time required for the ball P81 that first entered the V winning opening 800a to reach the lower base opening 8313b after entering the V winning opening 800a, and the V winning after the ball P81. There is an interval of 5 seconds between the time required for the ball P82 that has entered the mouth 800a to reach the lower base opening 8313b after the ball P82 has entered the V winning opening 800a. As a result, even when a plurality of balls P81 and P82 enter the V winning opening 800a together, the timing at which the balls P81 and P82 reach the lower base opening 8313b is shifted, and the respective balls P81 and P82 are respectively. The falling operation of the V winning switch 8315d can be easily shown to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rushing flow of the balls, such as the balls P81 and P82 flowing down together and it is unknown which ball has passed the V winning switch 8315d.

The sphere that has passed through the inclined flow path 8313 abuts on the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and then flows down the annex groove 8315. The side-by-side groove 8315 is connected to the first groove 8315a extending vertically downward from the lower base opening 8313b and the flow path connected to the communication opening 8313a so that the ball passing through the communication opening 8313a can flow down, and at the upper end portion of the groove 8315. More than the second groove 8315b provided on the left side of the first groove 8315a, the gap 8315c formed as a gap through which a sphere can pass from the first groove 8315a to the second groove 8315b, and the gap 8315c of the first groove 8315a. It mainly includes a V winning switch 8315d arranged so that a ball can pass on the downstream side, and a discharge switch 8315e through which a ball flowing down the first groove 8315a or the second groove 8315b passes.

The ball flowing down the delay device 8300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after passing through the discharge switch 8315e.

The sphere that has reached the annex groove 8315 flows down to the lower base opening 8313b when the sphere does not stay from the lower base opening 8313b, and then starts flowing down along the first groove 8315a.

On the other hand, when the sphere is stagnant starting from the lower base opening 8313b, it is dammed by the stagnant sphere and does not flow down to the lower end portion, but passes through the communication opening 8313a and along the second groove 8315b (in the velocity direction backward). (Switched) Starts flowing down. In this way, the flow path of the sphere that has reached the annexed groove 8315 can be changed depending on whether or not the sphere is retained starting from the lower base opening 8313b. Next, the stopping device 8500 capable of stopping the ball starting from the lower bottom opening 8313b will be described.

The stopping device 8500 includes a drive device 8520 composed of a pair of movable plate portions 8510 and a pair of drive solenoids 8521 and 8522 (one of solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 8510. Mainly prepared.

The movable plate portion 8510 includes an upper movable plate 8511 that appears and disappears inside the first groove 8315a at the boundary between the lower bottom opening 8313b and the first groove 8315a, and a gap 8315c on the downstream side of the upper movable plate 8511. Mainly includes a lower movable plate 8512 that appears and disappears inside the first groove 8315a at a position along the lower end side of the above.

The upper movable plate 8511 regulates the flow of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the first groove 8315a is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding inside the first groove 8315a. It is stopped on the side), and the ball is allowed to flow down in the retracted state where the first groove 8315a is retracted from the inside to the outside.

The upper movable plate 8511 is set so that the upper surface position thereof is lower than the lower surface position of the lower bottom opening 8313b. Therefore, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state, it can be prevented from flowing down to the lower base opening 8313b and returning (riding) to the inclined flow path 8313 when the ball on the upper movable plate 8511 bounces to the left. it can.

The lower movable plate 8512 protrudes to a position where the gap formed in the first groove 8315a is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding inside the first groove 8315a, so that the extension direction of the first groove 8315a of the sphere is extended. The flow along the (vertical direction) is regulated, and the flow along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the first groove 8315a of the sphere is allowed in the retracted state in which the first groove 8315a is retracted from the inside to the outside.

The lower movable plate 8512 is formed from a curved shape whose upper surface shape is inclined downward toward the second groove 8315b. As a result, the period during which the ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the lower movable plate 8512 stays on the upper surface of the lower movable plate 8512 can be shortened, and the ball can be sent to the second groove 8315b in a short time.

The lower movable plate 8512 passes through the lower movable plate 8512 (left side, see FIG. 55) in the retracted state after the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state and the ball stopped at the upper movable plate 8511 starts to fall. It is arranged at a position where the time required for the evacuation is less than 0.1 seconds.

The drive device 8520 is fastened and fixed to the delay device 8300 and is fastened and fixed to the delay device 8300 to generate a driving force for generating a driving force to move the upper movable plate 8511. It mainly includes a lower drive solenoid 8522 that generates a driving force.

In the present embodiment, the upper drive solenoid 8521 is an operation pattern set based on the small hit type of the small hit caused by the ball being entered into the second winning opening 640, and the upper movable plate 8511 is used. It is excited in a mode of haunting operation.

On the other hand, the lower drive solenoid 8522 is excited in such a manner that the lower movable plate 8512 is moved in and out in a constant operation pattern from the time when the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, as an example, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in a protruding state (a state that restricts the passage of a ball) for 2.5 seconds, and then maintained in a retracted state (a state that allows the passage of a ball) for 0.5 seconds. The lower drive solenoid 8522 is driven by an operation pattern that repeats the above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the upper movable plate 8511 is driven by the upper drive solenoid 8521 and the lower movable plate 8512 is driven by the lower drive solenoid 8522, each operation can be made independent. Hereinafter, an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 will be described.

FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of each part when a ball entering the V winning opening 800a is detected. In FIG. 54, the waveform is shown in such a manner that the timing at which the output pulse of the V winning opening 800a is turned on indicates the timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a.

The waveform shown as the inclined flow path 8313 is added for easy understanding, and the output pulse rises at the timing when the spheres P81 and P82 passing through the V winning opening 800a reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. It is illustrated in an aspect (which is said to reach the lower end).

As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, after the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and becomes a small hit, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. As a result, the ball can pass through the V winning opening 800a. In the present embodiment, the shortest fluctuation time of the second winning opening 640 is set to 15 seconds, and the movable member inside the delay device 8300 is driven during that 15 seconds (see FIG. 54).

In FIG. 54, the case where the two balls P81 and P82 pass through the V winning opening 800a is shown. That is, the balls P81 and P82 are shown as balls that have passed through the V winning opening 800a at a ball entry interval of 1.8 seconds or less. Among the balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the ball P81 that has entered at the beginning flows down the inclined flow path 8313 after changing the stop device 3340 from the initial state to the changed state. After the stop device 3340 changes to the changed state, it takes at least 3 seconds for the maintenance of the state to be released by the action of the ball P81, so that the trailing ball P82 is in contact with the stopped device 3340 in the changed state. Enter the branch delay groove 8314.

In this way, the ball P81 that entered the ball at the beginning and the ball P82 that follows the ball flow down the different flow paths and reach the lower base opening 8313b. The time required to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b can be defined by the shape of the flow path. In the present embodiment, it takes 4 seconds for the ball P81 to reach the lower base opening 8313b after passing through the V winning opening 800a, and the ball P82 is added by the amount (5 seconds) of flowing down the branch delay groove 8314. It takes 9 seconds.

The timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a is limited to the time (1.8 seconds) when the V winning device 800 is opened. Therefore, the first arrival period T81, which is 1.8 seconds starting from 4 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened, and 1.8 seconds starting from 9 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened. In a period other than the second arrival period T82, the spheres P81 and P82 cannot reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. In addition, the first arrival period T81 and the second arrival period T82 are separated.

As a result, the timing at which the ball P81 and the ball P82 flow down the side-by-side groove 8315 can be clearly separated. That is, the V winning device 800 is clearly distinguished from the case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a during the opening period of the V winning device 800. It is possible to form a case in which the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on whether or not a plurality of balls have entered the V winning opening 800a during the opening period of.

Further, the falling operation of the balls P81 and P82 onto the V winning switches 8315d can be easily shown to the player. That is, when the balls P81 and P82 flow down together toward the V winning switch 8315d, one passes through the V winning switch 8315d, and the other deviates from the V winning switch 8315d, which ball (enters first). It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down in a hurry, such as not knowing whether the ball P81 that has been balled or the ball P82) that has been balled in later has passed the V winning switch 8315d.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 54 is shown with the time point at which the V winning device 800 is opened as the left end. The upper movable plate 8511 is switched to the retracted state at the first opening time T83 7 seconds after the opening of the V winning device 800 and at the second opening time T84 12 seconds after the opening of the V winning device 800. (Opened) and switched to the protruding state (closed) after 1 second. The first opening time point T83 and the second opening time point T84 are defined before the ball entry timing regardless of the ball entry timing to the V winning opening 800a.

As shown in FIG. 54, the first opening time point T83 corresponds to the timing 1.2 seconds after the end of the first arrival period T81, and the second opening time point T84 is 1. Corresponds after 2 seconds.

Therefore, the period until the ball that has passed through the V winning opening 800a reaches the lower base opening 8313b and the arrangement of the ball is stabilized (for example, the period during which the slight vibration after colliding with the side wall is contained, or the period for entering three or more balls). (Period for discharging the second and subsequent balls from the communication opening 8313a) can be secured. As a result, the ball can be dropped immediately after the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state (the deviation between the operation timing of the upper movable plate 8511 and the fall start timing of the ball can be minimized. ). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from irregularly winning the V winning switch 8315d by flowing down in an unintended flow mode.

Regarding this point, in the present embodiment, the period until the arrangement of the sphere becomes stable after the leading sphere P81 reaches the lower base opening 8313b, and after the trailing sphere P82 reaches the lower base opening 8313b, the sphere It can be shortened compared to the period until the arrangement stabilizes.

That is, according to the present embodiment, when the leading sphere P81 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the distance between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is shortened, and a sufficient attractive force acts. On the other hand, when the trailing ball P82 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 are separated from each other and the attractive force becomes weak, so that the leading ball P81 The load received from the contact portion 3363 can be made larger than the load received from the contact portion 3363 by the trailing ball P82.

As a result, the load applied to the ball P81 from the contact portion 3363 can be used as a braking force, and the ball P81 can be decelerated in advance before the ball P81 reaches the lower base opening 8313b. As a result, the degree of rebound caused by the sphere P81 colliding with the lower end of the inclined flow path 8313 can be reduced, so that the period from when the sphere P81 reaches the lower base opening 8313b until the arrangement of the sphere becomes stable. Therefore, the interval between the end of the first arrival period T81 and the first opening time point T83 can be set short. As a result, it is easier to close (switch to the protruding state) the upper movable plate 8511, which has started switching (opening) to the retracted state at the first opening time T83, before the trailing ball reaches the lower base opening 8313b. Can be done (with time to spare).

On the other hand, the load (braking force) given to the ball P82 from the contact portion 3363 is smaller than the load (braking force) given to the ball P81 from the contact portion 3363, so that the ball P82 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. The period until the arrangement of the spheres becomes stable can be made longer than that of the sphere P81. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the effect performed by utilizing the period until the arrangement of the balls P82 becomes stable. For example, a long-time production can be performed.

The waveform shown as the lower movable plate 8512 shows the operation modes of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing as an example of the opening / closing operation of the lower movable plate 8512 from the time when the V winning device 800 is opened. .. Although the waveforms of the timing charts of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 show changes in the state, they are simplified and shown as rectangular waves for easy understanding.

At the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T83. Therefore, if at least one ball has entered the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 will be in the retracted state at T83 at the time of the first opening, and the ball entered at the beginning will fall from the lower bottom opening 8313b. Then, the V winning switch 8315d is passed, and then the discharge switch 8315e is passed.

At the second timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in a protruding state at the first opening time T83 and the second opening time T84. Therefore, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, the ball falling from the lower base opening 8313b is guided to the second groove 8315b along the lower movable plate 8512, so that it does not pass through the V winning switch 8315d and is discharged. It passes through the switch 8315e.

At the third timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is brought into the protruding state at the first opening time T83, while the lower movable plate 8512 is brought into the retracted state at the second opening time T84. Therefore, when there is only one ball entering the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state at T83 at the time of the first opening, so that the ball entered at the beginning is from the lower bottom opening 8313b. Since the ball falls and is guided to the second groove 8315b along the lower movable plate 8512, the ball passes through the discharge switch 8315e without passing through the V winning switch 8315d.

On the other hand, when there are two or more balls entering the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is retracted at T84 at the time of the second opening, so that the balls fall from the lower bottom opening 8313b. It passes through the V winning switch 8315d and then the discharge switch 8315e.

As a result, it is possible to create a playability in which the profit given to the player is clearly changed depending on whether one ball is inserted or a plurality of balls are inserted in the V winning opening 800a. This prescribes that the timing of reaching the inclined flow path 8313 is included in the first arrival period T81 regardless of whether the ball is entered at an early timing or at a late timing when the V winning device 800 is opened. As is clear from this, it is clearly different from the playability in which the profit given to the player changes depending on the timing of entering the V winning opening 800a.

According to the playability of the present embodiment, the profit given to the player changes depending on how many balls enter the V winning opening 800a by one opening operation of the V winning device 800. Therefore, the V winning opening 800a It is possible to improve the attention to the mode of entering the ball.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the sphere that has reached the lower base opening 8313b when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state stays above the upper movable plate 8511 has been described, but the delay device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is above. It is provided with a discharge detection port 9313a for discharging the ball that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313b as it is when the movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 55, the configuration of the delay device 9300 in which the ball passing through the V winning opening 800a flows down will be described. FIG. 55 is a partial front view of the delay device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment. Since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 9300 have the same configuration as the device of the third embodiment, they are designated by the same reference numerals as those described in the third embodiment, and in the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given. The explanation is omitted for the part that overlaps with the explanation of.

A delay device 9300 is provided as a device for forming a flow path through which the ball that has entered the V winning device 800 passes. The V winning device 800 is provided with a V winning opening 800a, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening 800a, the entry of the game ball is detected, and a predetermined game is played for the player. Balls (eg, 3 balls) are paid out. That is, the V winning opening 800a is a detection port that also serves as a detection sensor. Further, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a passes through the V winning switch 8315d, which will be described later, a big hit game is given.

In the present embodiment, unlike the function in the first embodiment, the detection port 312d functions not as a detection port for performing detection accompanied by a lottery, but as a detection port for purely detecting the passage of a sphere. That is, the number of balls detected by the V winning opening 800a is compared with the number of balls detected by the detection port 312d, and if an abnormality is found in the difference between the numbers, an error notification is performed. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make a hole in the range on the front side of the branch delay groove 8314 of the glass unit 16 and to easily detect an error in inserting the ball directly into the branch delay groove 8314 from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 55, the delay device 9300 flows down the inside of the main body member 9310, which allows the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a to flow down, and the delay device 8300 described in the eighth embodiment. The stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the action of the sphere, and the stop device 3340 that maintains the state when the stop device 3340 changes and changes its posture due to the action of the ball flowing down inside. It mainly includes a maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state, and a stop device 8500 for stopping the ball by acting on the ball flowing down the annexed groove 8315, which will be described later. That is, the delay device 9300 of the present embodiment is different from the delay device 8300 of the eighth embodiment only in the main body members 8310 and 9310, and has the same configuration in other parts.

As shown in FIG. 55, the main body member 9310 includes a first groove 3311, a second groove 3312, a branch delay groove 8314, and a lower bottom opening 8313b having the same configuration as the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment. It is mainly provided with an annexed groove 8315 extending vertically downward from the including area and composed of a pair of grooves attached to the left and right, and in addition, the configuration is different from that of the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment. The inclined flow path 9313 is provided. That is, the main body member 9310 of the present embodiment is different from the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment only in the inclined flow paths 8313 and 9313, and has the same configuration in other parts.

The first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, the inclined passage 9313, the branch delay groove 8314, and the side-by-side groove 8315 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is used for gaming in the assembled state. By being closed by the board 13, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

The inclined flow path 9313 is formed as a linear flow path that inclines downward toward the right starting from the lower end of the second groove 3312, and the spheres in contact with the abutting portion 3363 are further advanced by two spheres. It is a flow path that extends up to that point (when three balls stay from the extended end, the third ball counts from the extended end comes into contact with the contact portion 3363. The lower bottom opening 8313b arranged at the same position as in the eighth embodiment and the position shifted by one sphere along the extending direction of the inclined flow path 9313 with respect to the lower bottom opening 8313b (there is). The discharge detection port 9313a is mainly provided at the extended end of the inclined flow path 9313) so as to be opened so that the ball can be guided to the back side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 55). The inclined flow path 9313 is formed from a shape in which 4 seconds elapse from when the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a until it flows straight down the second groove 3312 and reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

The discharge detection port 9313a is an opening that guides a ball that has reached its front side (front side in the vertical direction of FIG. 55) and guides it to a ball discharge path (not shown). Further, the discharge detection port 9313a is configured as a switch (a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4)) for detecting the passage of the ball.

The sphere that flows down the inclined flow path 9313 and passes through the lower base opening 8313b flows down the annex groove 8315. Since the formation of the communication opening 8313a is omitted in the present embodiment, the second groove 8315b of the side-by-side groove 8315 is formed as a groove in which the sphere is guided only via the first groove 8315a.

That is, the side-by-side groove 8315 includes a first groove 8315a extending vertically downward from the lower base opening 8313b, a second groove 8315b provided on the left side of the first groove 8315a, and a first groove 8315a to a second groove. A gap 8315c formed as a gap through which the ball can pass through the 8315b, a V winning switch 8315d arranged so that the ball can pass downstream from the gap 8315c in the first groove 8315a, and the first groove 8315a or It mainly includes a discharge switch 8315e through which a ball flowing down the second groove 8315b passes.

The ball flowing down the delay device 9300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after passing through the discharge switch 8315e.

The flow mode of the sphere that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313b will be described. First, if the upper movable plate 8511 is in a protruding state when the ball reaches the lower base opening 8313b, the ball does not stay at the lower base opening 8313b and continues to flow along the same flow direction, and the discharge detection port After reaching the front side of 9313a, it passes through the discharge detection port 9313a and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

On the other hand, if the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state when the ball reaches the lower base opening 8313b, the ball passes through the lower base opening 8313b and falls, and then is attached along the first groove 8315a. Start flowing down the groove 8315. After flowing down the annexed groove 8315, the ball passes through the discharge switch 8315e and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

In this way, when the ball flowing down the inclined flow path 9313 reaches the lower base opening 8313b, the subsequent flow path of the ball may be different depending on whether the upper movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state or the retracted state. it can.

In the present embodiment, the lower drive solenoid 8522 is excited in such a manner that the lower movable plate 8512 appears and disappears in a constant operation pattern from the time when the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, as an example different from the eighth embodiment, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in a protruding state (a state of restricting the passage of a ball) for 5.5 seconds, and then in a retracted state (a state of allowing the passage of a ball). ) Is repeatedly maintained for 0.5 seconds, and the lower drive solenoid 8522 is driven. Next, an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 will be described.

FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of each part when a ball entering the V winning opening 800a is detected. In FIG. 56, the waveform is shown in such a manner that the timing at which the output pulse of the V winning opening 800a is turned on indicates the timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a.

The waveform shown as the inclined flow path 8313 is added for ease of understanding, and the output pulse rises at the timing when the spheres P91 and P92 passing through the V winning opening 800a reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. Illustrated in aspects.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, after the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and becomes a small hit, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. As a result, the ball can pass through the V winning opening 800a. In FIG. 56, the case where the two balls P91 and P92 pass through the V winning opening 800a is shown. That is, the balls P91 and P92 are shown as balls that have passed through the V winning opening 800a at a ball entry interval of 1.8 seconds or less.

Among the balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the ball P91 that has entered at the beginning flows down the inclined flow path 9313 after changing the stop device 3340 from the initial state to the changed state. After the stop device 3340 changes to the changing state, it takes at least 3 seconds (longer than the opening time of the V winning device 800) until the maintenance of the state is released by the action of the ball P91. P92 enters the branch delay groove 8314 while abutting on the stop device 3340 in the changing state.

In this way, the ball P91 that entered the ball at the beginning and the ball P92 that follows the ball flow down the different flow paths and reach the lower base opening 8313b. The time required to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b can be defined by the shape of the flow path. In the present embodiment, it takes 4 seconds for the ball P91 to reach the lower base opening 8313b after passing through the V winning opening 800a, and the ball P92 is added by the amount (5 seconds) of flowing down the branch delay groove 8314. It takes 9 seconds.

The timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a is limited to the time (1.8 seconds) when the V winning device 800 is opened. Therefore, the first arrival period T81, which is 1.8 seconds starting from 4 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened, and 1.8 seconds starting from 9 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened. In a period other than the second arrival period T82, the spheres P91 and P92 cannot reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. In addition, the first arrival period T81 and the second arrival period T82 are separated.

That is, the timing at which the sphere P91 and the sphere P92 reach the lower base opening 8313b can be clearly separated. That is, the V winning device 800 is clearly distinguished from the case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a during the opening period of the V winning device 800. It is possible to form a case in which the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on whether or not a plurality of balls have entered the V winning opening 800a during the opening period of.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 56 is shown with the time point at which the V winning device 800 is opened as the left end. The upper movable plate 8511 is switched from the protruding state to the retracted state (opened) at the first opening time T93 9 seconds after the opening time of the V winning device 800, and is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state after 2 seconds (opened). Will be closed). The first opening time T93 is defined before the ball entering timing regardless of the ball entering timing into the V winning opening 800a.

As shown in FIG. 56, the first opening time point T93 corresponds to the beginning of the second arrival period T82. Therefore, no matter when the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a while the V winning device 800 is open, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in the retracted state at the timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower base opening 8313b. be able to.

On the other hand, during the period corresponding to the first arrival period T81, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in a protruding state, so that when the ball P91 enters the V winning opening 800a while the V winning device 800 is open. Even if there is, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in the protruding state at the timing when the ball P91 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball P91 that has entered the V winning opening 800a at the beginning from invading the annexed groove 8315, and the same opening as the opening of the V winning device 800 when the ball P91 enters the V winning opening 800a. Inside, the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a after the ball P91 that has entered the V winning opening 800a can be guided to the annexed groove 8315. As a result, during the same opening of the V winning device 800, the ball P91 is compared with the profit given to the player by the ball P91 that first enters the V winning opening 800a. It is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the profit given to the player by the ball P92 that enters the V winning opening 800a after the above is larger. In other words, it is possible to form a gaming machine in which the ball P91 can be prevented from passing through the V winning switch 8315d and the ball P92 can pass through the V winning switch 8315d.

For this purpose, it is necessary to prevent the sphere P91 from colliding with the extending end of the inclined flow path 9313 and rebounding, causing the sphere P91 to be returned to the bottom opening 8313b. In the present embodiment, the ball P91 can be decelerated by the braking action generated by the contact (rubbing) between the ball P91 and the contact portion 3363, so that even when the ball P91 vigorously flows through the inclined flow path 9313. , It is possible to prevent the ball P91 from colliding with the extended end of the inclined flow path 9313 and bouncing back to the lower bottom opening 8313b. Therefore, the speed of the sphere flowing down the inclined flow path 9313 increases in the setting range of the inclination angle of the inclined flow path 9313 until the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane becomes large (until it reaches the contact portion 3363). Can be spread to the side).

The braking action of the ball P91 utilizes the contact between the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360, which is arranged to release the maintenance of the stop device 3340 in the changed state, and the ball P91, and is individual. It is not a new addition to the braking device of. That is, in the present embodiment, the maintenance device 3360 can be used for both the switching of the state of the stop device 3340 and the deceleration of the ball P91.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the deceleration action generated on the trailing ball P92 can be reduced as compared with the deceleration action generated on the leading ball P91 due to the contact with the contact portion 3363.

That is, according to the present embodiment, when the leading sphere P91 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the distance between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is shortened, and a sufficient attractive force acts. On the other hand, when the trailing ball P92 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 are spaced apart from each other and the attractive force becomes weak, so that the leading ball P91 The load received from the contact portion 3363 can be made larger than the load received from the contact portion 3363 by the trailing ball P92.

Therefore, while the sphere P91 is sufficiently decelerated, the deceleration degree of the sphere P92 can be suppressed as compared with the deceleration degree of the sphere P91. As a result, the flow of the inclined flow path 9313 of the ball P92 can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction from the player who visually follows the flow of the ball P92.

For example, when the degree of deceleration of the ball P92 by the contact portion 3363 is large, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state when the ball flowing down the inclined flow path 9313 starts to contact the contact portion 3363. While the ball is in contact with the contact portion 3363 and decelerating, the event that the lower movable plate 8512 is in a protruding state is likely to occur. In this case, there is no basis from the player such as "Isn't it possible that a wind is generated inside and the ball P92 is intentionally decelerated to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 8315d?" Speculation was easy to spread, and there was a risk that the player's willingness to play would be diminished.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball P92 capable of entering the annex groove 8315 is in contact with the contact portion 3363 as compared with the ball P91 which cannot enter the annex groove 8315. Since the degree of deceleration can be reduced, the flow of the sphere P92 near the contact portion 3363 can be smoothed, and the possibility of spreading unfounded speculation can be reduced.

Further, when the leading ball P91 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363 and a distance is provided between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360, the contact portion 3363 is moved upward with the shaft portion 3361a as an axis. Rotate towards. After that, the contact portion 3363 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 55 again due to gravity, but the time required to reach the state shown in FIG. 55 changes depending on the weight balance of the maintenance device 3360 and the like. That is, the lighter the weight of the contact portion 3363, the longer it takes to reach the state shown in FIG. 55.

Here, if the sphere P92 passes below the abutting portion 3363 after the abutting portion rotates upward and before reaching the state shown in FIG. 55, the sphere P92 abuts on the abutting portion 3363. Since it is never decelerated and is not decelerated, it can flow down the path to the bottom opening 8313b purely according to the shape of the flow path (without deceleration for other special reasons). In this case, it is possible to make it easier to accurately set the period until the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a reaches the lower base opening 8313b.

Therefore, in a single opening of the V winning device 800, the spheres P92 are connected to the sphere P91 as compared with the case where the spheres P91 and P92 are separated and pass through the V winning opening 800a immediately after opening and immediately before closing. When passing through the V winning opening 800a, the period from when the contact portion 3363 rotates upward due to the contact with the ball P91 until the ball P92 reaches the lower part of the contact portion 3363 can be shortened. In this case, since it is easy to create a situation in which the ball P92 flows down without contacting the contact portion 3363, the timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower base opening 8313b (9 seconds after entering the V winning opening 800a). ) Can be easily set by the flow path shape of the main body member 9310.

Therefore, when the drive control of the stopping device 8500 is performed in consideration of the timing (see FIG. 56), the sphere P92 and the sphere P91 are brought together by connecting the sphere P92 to the sphere P91 and entering the V winning opening 800a. The maximum profit given to the player by the ball P92 (the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d) as compared with the case where the ball enters the V winning opening 800a at intervals (up to about 1.8 second intervals). It is possible to make it easier for the player to acquire the big hit.

The waveform shown as the lower movable plate 8512 shows the operation modes of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing as an example of the opening / closing operation of the lower movable plate 8512 from the time when the V winning device 800 is opened. .. Although the waveforms of the timing charts of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 show changes in the state, they are simplified and shown as rectangular waves for easy understanding.

In the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the protruding state for 2 seconds from the first opening time T93, that is, during the period when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the balls are prevented from passing through the V winning switch 8315d, and the balls that deviate from the V winning switch 8315d pass through the discharge switch 8315e.

At the second timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the protruding state until the end of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, and the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state just before the end of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. It can be switched to the evacuation state. Therefore, the closer the timing at which the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a to the timing at which the V winning device 800 is switched to the closed state, the easier it is for the ball P92 to flow down the first groove 8315a in the retracted state of the lower movable plate 8512. , The profit given to the player is increased.

At the third timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T93, so that the lower movable plate 8512 is in the protruding state at least in the latter half of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is retracted. Be maintained. Therefore, the closer the timing at which the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a to the timing at which the V winning device 800 is switched to the open state, the easier it is for the ball P92 to flow down the first groove 8315a in the retracted state of the lower movable plate 8512. , The profit given to the player is increased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, only the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a after the ball P91 can reach the lower bottom opening 8313b of the inclined flow path 9313 when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. The timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b and falls (the timing when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a by back calculation) and the timing when the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state match well. Thereby, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d.

That is, the condition for passing a ball through the V winning switch 8315d is that two or more balls are passed through the V winning opening 800a within a single opening operation of the V winning device 800, and the second ball is V winning in a timely manner. It can be two points of passing through the mouth 800a.

As a result, it is possible to create a playability in which the profit given to the player is clearly changed depending on whether one ball is inserted or a plurality of balls are inserted in the V winning opening 800a. According to the playability of the present embodiment, the profit given to the player changes depending on how many balls enter the V winning opening 800a by one opening operation of the V winning device 800. Therefore, the V winning opening 800a It is possible to improve the attention to the mode of entering the ball. On the premise of this playability, an example of an effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 52) will be described as an effect suggesting the magnitude of the possibility of a big hit.

In the third symbol display device 81, various effects related to the magnitude of the jackpot expectation are executed in conjunction with the variable display. The magnitude of the jackpot expectation degree referred to here refers to the magnitude of the probability that a ball that has passed through the V winning opening 800a will pass through the V winning switch 8315d.

For example, when the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the protruding state when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, so that the ball P92 can pass through the V winning switch 8315d. The sex is extremely low. Therefore, in this case, in the present embodiment, for example, by displaying characters such as "Don't expect" or "Send off this time" on the third symbol display device 81, the player has an excessive expectation. It is controlled by the MPU 221 so as to give a non-stop notification. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be based on the voice emitted from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, an extremely short voice or a voice with a very common negative image may be emitted), or from the lamp display device 227. It may be due to the emitted light (for example, in a setting where the degree of expectation increases as the color changes to blue, green, or red, blue light may be emitted, etc.), or a movable mechanism near the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged, and it may be due to the operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in the operation mode in which the intensity of the movement is set to be strong or weak, the intensity may be weakened).

On the other hand, in both the case where the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the second timing and the case where the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the third timing, ideally, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Since the ball P92 can reach the lower bottom opening 8313b, there is a possibility that the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d. However, in the present embodiment of the game property in which the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a afterwards passes through the V winning switch 8315d, there is a clear difference in the jackpot expectation.

This is because, in the present embodiment as well, as in the conventional model, the ball firing interval is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, and from the arrangement of the V winning opening 800a shown in FIG. 52, the V winning opening 800a is launched after firing. This is because the period until entering the ball does not change significantly from ball to ball. Since the firing interval is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, it is assumed that the interval at which the ball enters the V winning opening 800a is about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the ball immediately after the V winning device 800 is opened. It becomes difficult for P92 to pass through the V winning opening 800a.

That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing than when it operates at the third timing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, a notification suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high is given, while when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the third timing, the notification is given. Is controlled by the MPU 221 to give a lively notification suggesting that the jackpot expectation is medium.

For example, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, in the present embodiment, the player displays characters such as "great chance" and "make a look" on the third symbol display device 81. It is controlled by the MPU 221 so as to give a notification that gives the expectation of a big hit. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be the sound emitted from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, the sound of a long version of the image song of the model, the sound of a very common plus image, etc. may be emitted). , It may be due to the light emitted from the lamp display device 227 (for example, in a setting where the degree of expectation increases as the color changes to blue, green, red, etc., red light may be emitted), or the third symbol. A movable mechanism may be arranged in the vicinity of the display device 81, and may be based on the operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in an operation mode in which the intensity of the movement is set to be strong or weak, the intensity may be increased).

On the other hand, for example, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the third timing, in the present embodiment, characters such as "something" or "I do not know until the end" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the MPU 221 controls the player to give a notification that gives the player some expectation. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be the sound emitted from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, the sound of a short version of the image song of the model, the sound of a very common intermediate image, etc. may be emitted). , It may be due to the light emitted from the lamp display device 227 (for example, in a setting where the expectation becomes higher as the color changes to blue, green, red, etc., it may generate green light emission, etc.), or the third symbol. A movable mechanism may be arranged in the vicinity of the display device 81, and may be based on the operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in an operation mode in which the intensity of the movement is provided with strength or weakness, the intensity may be moderate). ..

In the other operation timings of the lower movable plate 8512 (fourth timing (not shown)), the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the second timing and the lower movable plate 8512 is retracted at the third timing. In the meantime, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state.

In this case, the ball P92 may pass through the V winning switch 8315d when the ball P92 enters the ball at an intermediate timing during the opening of the V winning device 800. On the other hand, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, the ball P92 is arranged on the upper side of the opening / closing plate of the V winning device 800 in the open state, and it is unknown when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a. Even if there is, the ball P92 can be forcibly inserted into the V winning opening 800a by the operation of the opening / closing plate accompanying the switching of the V winning device 800 to the closed state, so that the operation timing of the V winning device 800 can be used. Minutes, it is possible to easily form a situation in which the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d.

Therefore, as another example (or an example of adding) of the above-mentioned notification, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, the operation timing at which the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Of these, it may be set as the case where the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the corresponding notification may be performed.

For example, as another example of the case where the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, in the present embodiment, characters such as "Big hit confirmed !?" and "Congratulations" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This is controlled by the MPU 221 to notify the player to maximize the expectation of a jackpot. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be based on the sound emitted from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, the sound of the fixed sound of the model may be emitted), or it may be based on the light emitted from the lamp display device 227. Good (for example, the higher the color changes to blue, green, and red, the higher the expectation, and in a setting where the rainbow color is a big hit, rainbow-colored light may be generated, etc.), and the third symbol display device 81 A movable mechanism may be arranged in the vicinity, and the movement mode of the movable mechanism may be used (for example, in a movement mode in which the intensity of the movement is set to be strong or weak, the intensity may be the strongest).

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 is convexly provided on the slide moving member 321 and the projecting portion 321a1 projects inward of the first groove 311 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of wall portions forming an S-shaped path are arranged on the slide moving member 321 and the slide moving member 321 moves to complete an S-shaped path in which a sphere flows down inside the first groove 311. It may be composed of. In this case, since the path itself through which the sphere flows can be lengthened by the pair of wall portions, the deceleration effect can be maintained for a long period of time as compared with the case where the convex portion 321a1 reduces the deceleration effect due to wear. .. Further, the slide moving member 321 may be configured in such a manner that the region where the convex portion 321a1 is formed and the region where the S-shaped path is formed are continuously provided.

In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 projecting inward of the first groove 311 moves by the kinetic energy of the sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the convex portion 321a1 moves by the driving force of a drive motor that constantly operates constantly and projects inward of the first groove 311 (a state in which the degree of deceleration becomes large) and a state in which the convex portion 321a1 retracts from the first groove 311. (A state in which the degree of deceleration becomes small) may be switched (may function as a deceleration device for constant operation). In this case, the degree of deceleration of the ball flowing down the first groove 311 can be changed according to the drive pattern of the drive motor.

Further, the speed reducing device having a constant operation described above may be arranged in the post-detection flow path 5313 according to the fifth embodiment, for example. In this case, the period required for the sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d to pass through the flow path 5313 after detection can be changed depending on the state of the speed reducer, so that the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. You can have variations in the period. More specifically, it is necessary for a ball that has passed through the detection port 312d to pass through the post-detection flow path 5313 when the speed reducer is retracted from the post-detection flow path 5313 (same as the state of only the post-detection flow path 5313). Compared to the period, the period required for the ball that has passed through the detection port 312d to pass through the detection flow path 5313 when the speed reducer is in a state of projecting inside the detection flow path 5313 can be lengthened. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the ball P51 enters the first winning opening 64, the state of the speed reducer when the ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d changes, and the ball P51 passes through the flow path 5313 after detection. Since the period changes, a plurality of patterns can be set for the period in which the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state due to the difference in the timing at which the ball P51 enters the first winning opening 64.

In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 of the speed reducing device 320 projects upward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the convex portion 321a1 may project downward into the first groove 311 or the convex portion 311a1 may project downward into the first groove 311. In this case, it is possible to prevent the slide moving member 321 from moving to the outside of the first groove 311 due to the weight of the sphere.

In the first embodiment, the case where the balls P1 and P2 can be distributed even when the balls P1 and P2 enter the distribution device 340 in the initial state in succession has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, before the spheres reach the allocating device 340, after arranging an interval load means for surely spacing the connected spheres, the spheres enter the allocating device 340 and a while later, the state of the allocating device 340. May be configured in such a manner that In this case, since it is not necessary to strictly control the timing of the state change of the distribution device 340, the distribution device 340 can be loosely supported and the load required for the state change can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the portion of the sorting device 340 where the spheres collide is formed of an arc shape (arc wall portion 343) is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be composed of a flat plate-like portion of a portion corresponding to the arc wall portion 343. In this case, if a ball enters the sorting device 340 while the sorting device 340 is returning to the initial state, the sorting device 340 is rotated by the load given from the ball and returned to the changed state. As a result, the period during which the sorting device 340 is maintained in the changed state can be extended.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 340 is operated to return by changing the center of gravity has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 340 is returned by using a product whose urging force changes depending on the moving direction (moving resistance is applied only in one direction) or a cylinder product that changes the moving resistance in each direction using an orifice. It may be operated. In this case, maintainability can be improved by using a commercially available product. Further, by configuring the rotation resistance of the rotation shaft of the distribution device 340 to be small in the forward rotation and large in the reverse rotation, a constant urging force is applied to the distribution device 340, so that the return operation of the distribution device 340 takes time. Delays can occur.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere flowing from the fan-shaped member 410 to the inflow port 435 is guided through the delay flow path 436 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming another floor surface below the inflow port 435 (by forming a floor on which the sphere can roll in two stages), the sphere that has flowed into the inflow port 435 from the fan-shaped member 410 is again in the floor. The surface may be rolled to enter the first winning opening 64. In this case, since the period during which the ball rolls on the floor surface can be extended, the player can pay attention to the movement of the ball and extend the period during which the launch of the ball is stopped. Therefore, the fluctuation of the winning amount held during that period can be digested, and the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the fan-shaped member 410 is tilted with the rotation axis aligned in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis may be tilted along the front-rear direction. In this case, the ball can be dropped toward the first winning opening 64 along the inclination of the arc portion of the fan-shaped member 410 (the position in the left-right direction can be corrected).

In the first embodiment, the case where the fan-shaped member 410 operates under the weight of a sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped member 410 may be electrically operated in a constant repetitive operation mode. In this case, a plurality of types of combinations of operations of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 can be configured. For example, the front side fan-shaped member 410 is in a raised position and the back side fan-shaped member 410 is in a lying position, and the front side fan-shaped member 410 is in a raised position and the back side fan-shaped member 410. The member 410 is in a raised position, the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side is in a lying position, and the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is in a lying position, and the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side is lying down. It is possible to configure a posture in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is in a raised posture and a posture in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is raised, and it is possible to increase the combination of the states of the pair of fan-shaped members 410.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are formed of the same shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped member on the back side may be configured to have a longer width in the left-right direction as compared with the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side. In this case, even for a sphere located at a position away from the center position in the left-right direction of the fan-shaped member 410 and above the fan-shaped member on the back side, an action (push-back action) associated with the inclination of the fan-shaped member is exerted. Can be caused.

In the first embodiment, the case where the outlet of the delay flow path 436 is displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning opening 64 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the delay flow paths 436 below the pair of left and right inlets 435 may merge at the center of the left and right, and the outlets thereof may be arranged directly above the first winning opening 64. In this case, it is possible to improve the rate at which the balls discharged from the exit of the delay flow path 436 into the game area enter the first winning opening 64.

In the first embodiment, the initial state and the changed state of the sorting device 340 have been described as one of the postures taken by the sorting device 340, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the initial state is a posture in which the ball reaching the sorting device 340 is received by the first wall portion 341, and the changing state is a posture in which the ball reaching the sorting device 340 is sent to the third groove 313. The state may be defined by the function of the sorting device 340. In the first embodiment, the ball can be received by the first wall portion 341 only in the initial state of the sorting device 340, and the ball reaching the sorting device 340 between the initial state and the changing state is exclusively the third groove 313. Since the ball is thrown into the changing state (dimensional relationship), the sorting device 340 is set to the changing state regardless of whether the initial state and the changing state are defined by the function or one of the postures. The time required to return to the initial state can be the same. This also applies to the sorting device 2340 and the stopping device 3340 in each of the above embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the fluctuation period that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or 4 is 3 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3, the variable period which is easy to be selected is set to 5 seconds, and when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4, the variable period which is easy to be selected is set to 3 seconds. May be done. In this case, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 while the variable display when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three continues to display the detection port 312d before the continuous variable display ends. It may pass (the number of reserved balls will be 4). On the other hand, since the ball entering interval between the following balls is 3 seconds or more and the fluctuation display when the number of reserved balls is 4 is 3 seconds, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 after that is detected. Before passing through mouth 312d, ongoing fluctuations can be terminated to free up storage space.

In the first embodiment, a ball that rolls on the delay floor device 400 and falls from the chamfered portion 411a and then enters the delayed floor device 400, and the fan-shaped member 410 is caused by the ball falling from the chamfered portion 411a. The case where it is temporarily pushed back by operating has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped member 410 may be driven regardless of the fall of the ball, and the ball that has entered the delay device 400 later may be temporarily stopped in one state during the operation. In this case, it is possible to give the possibility of temporarily stopping on the delay device 400 to all the balls entering the delay device 400.

In the first embodiment, the case where the delay device 300 is connected to the first winning opening 64 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the delay device 300 may be connected to the second winning opening 640.

In the first embodiment, the period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d to when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d is longer when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d and then the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d. By being set longer than the period until passing through 312d, there is a possibility that the sphere P2 will pass through the detection port 312d before the variation display of the first symbol is completed after the sphere P1 has passed through the detection port 312d. Has been described when it can be lowered, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d and the period from when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d. And may be set to substantially the same length. In this case, since the hold display of the first symbol occurs after a period of substantially the same period, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

Further, for example, from the period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d to when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d until when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d. The period of may be set to be longer. In this case, since the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d at an early stage, it is possible to easily increase the number of reserved spheres when the currently ongoing fluctuation ends, and the duration of the subsequent fluctuation display is shortened. Since it is possible to easily make the ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an overflow will occur at the first winning opening 64 due to a subsequent ball entry.

In the first embodiment, the fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is four is set to 3 seconds, and the fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is one is mentioned. I explained the case where it is not done, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is 1, the variable period that is likely to be selected is 10 seconds, and if the number of balls is 2, the variable period that is likely to be selected is 6 seconds, and the variable period is selected when 3 or 4 balls. The variable period that is likely to occur may be set to 3 seconds.

In this case, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is three, when the balls are fired so as to allow the balls to enter the first winning opening 64 (variation display when the number of reserved balls is three is executed). (When a ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64), the variation display when the number of reserved balls is 3 ends before the ball P1 passes through the detection port 312d, and the number of reserved balls is 2. The variable display in the case of is started.

The ball P3 does not pass through the detection port 312d while the variation display when the number of reserved balls is two is executed (6 seconds, that is, less than 9 seconds after entering the ball). Therefore, since the sphere P3 can be made to pass through the detection port 312d after the current fluctuation is completed, the spheres P1 to P3 are detected in the three storage areas secured by the end of the current fluctuation. Data acquired by passing through 312d can be stored.

In this way, under the condition that the fluctuation period that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4, the fluctuation period when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 7.5 seconds. Less than (ball P3 passes through the detection port 312d (10.5) even if the variation display (3 seconds) when the number of reserved balls is 3 is started at the same time when the ball P1 enters the first winning opening 64. By setting (a fluctuation period) in which the fluctuation ends before (seconds later), it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring in the first winning opening 64 even if three balls enter the first winning opening 64 in a row. it can.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is two, when the balls are fired so as to enter the first winning opening 64 (after the variable display when the number of reserved balls is two is executed). (When a ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64), the variation when the number of reserved balls is two after the ball P1 has passed through the detection port 312d and before the ball P2 has passed through the detection port 312d. The display ends, and the variable display when the number of reserved balls is two (after the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of the ball P1) is started again. After that, since the spheres P2 and P3 can be made to pass through the detection port 312d, the data acquired by the spheres P2 and P3 passing through the detection port 312d is stored in the remaining two storage areas. Can be done.

Further, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is one and the ball is launched so as to allow the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the balls P1 to P3 must pass through the first winning opening 64. Since the area for storing the data acquired by the above is sufficiently free, the data acquired by the spheres P1 to P3 passing through the detection port 312d can be stored without any problem.

In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is 3 or less, the overflow occurs in the first winning opening 64. This is to explain that, and does not cause an overflow suppressing effect even when a ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is 4 (maximum).

In the third embodiment, the case where the stop device 3340 is maintained in the posture by the magnetic force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the locking member projects from the lower surface of the first wall portion 341, the overhanging tip is bent toward the center hole 345, and the tip of the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 is bent downward. The posture of the stop device 3340 may be maintained by hooking the bent portions to each other. In this case, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state regardless of the magnitude of the load applied to the stop device 3340.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the second groove 4312 is extended in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second groove 4312 may be inclined along the front-rear direction immediately before the sprocket 4340 (immediately before the upstream side). In this case, even if the number of balls staying above the sprocket 4340 increases, the load applied to the sprocket from the balls can be reduced, and problems such as poor rotation of the sprocket 4340 can be suppressed. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is won at about 1/1 regardless of the gaming state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be about 1/10 during the normal period, and the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be about 1/1 during the probability change.

In the fifth embodiment, when a plurality of balls P51 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed at the timing when the following balls P52 to P53 pass through the second detecting port 5314c. The case where the first special symbol is displayed on hold has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when there is a ball (a ball waiting to pass) after entering the first winning opening 64 but before passing through the second detection port 5314c, the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When there is a vacancy in the hold display area of (when the ongoing fluctuation ends), the ball waiting to pass is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance even before it passes through the second detection port 5314c. The hold display may be performed in such a manner as to fill the empty area of the hold display of the first special symbol.

In this case, even though there is a ball waiting to pass, there is a vacancy in the hold display of the first special symbol regardless of it, and the player who sees it launches a new ball toward the first winning opening 64. After that, the ball waiting to pass passes through the second detection port 5314c to fill the empty area of the hold display, and after all, even if the newly launched ball enters the first winning opening 64, the first special symbol It is possible to prevent the player from being given the disadvantage that the variable display is not executed.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the ball that has passed through the stopping device 5500 passes through the second detection port 5314c immediately after that has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball that has passed through the stopping device 5500 may pass through a member such as a crune that can make the flow of the ball non-uniform before passing through the second detection port 5314c. In this case, the period from when the ball passes through the stopping device 5500 to when it passes through the second detection port 5314c can be varied, and the randomness of the timing when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c is guaranteed. can do. Further, a member such as a crune may be arranged on the upstream side of the stopping device 5500.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stop device 3340 is released from the changed state by the action of the ball that has entered the ball at the beginning has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stop device 3340 may be released from the changed state with a follow-up ball. As a result, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state until the follow-up ball enters the first winning opening 64.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the continuous passage groove 5314 is extended to the right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the continuous passage groove 5314 may be extended to the back side. In this case, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be effectively utilized.

In the fifth embodiment, the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is arranged on the upstream side of the stop device 5500, and when the frequency of flow of the ball toward the stop device 5500 becomes excessive, the ball is discharged from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1. The case where the ball can be prevented from being clogged (for example, the ball stays up to the first winning opening 64) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a sprocket capable of arranging the sphere at each angle position may be disposed and rotationally driven at a constant speed in a manner of partially projecting into the flow path on the upstream side of the stopping device 5500. In this case, until the sprocket is full, the balls flowing down toward the stopping device 5500 can be accommodated at each angle position, so that the ball clogging can be prevented. The rotation axis of the sprocket is not limited at all. For example, it may rotate about an axis extending along the front-rear direction, or may rotate around an axis extending along the vertical direction.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated by the pair of independently driven drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 and the flow mode of the sphere flowing down the stop portion 6314b changes for each period has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of movable plate portions 6510 may be operated in such a manner that the flow mode of the sphere flowing down the stop portion 6314b is always constant. In this case, it is possible to easily grasp the flow mode of the sphere.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the chain opening period T6a is set in 30 seconds while the upper closing period T6b is set in 6 seconds, which is 1/5 of the chain opening period T6a, has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the chain opening period T6a may be set in 6 seconds, while the upper closing period T6b may be set in 30 seconds, which is five times that. In this case, since the period during which the ball stays on the upper surface of the upper movable plate 6511 can be lengthened, the number of stays can be easily increased, and the ball can be easily passed through the third detection port 5314e. It is possible to realize the game property in which the electric accessory 640a is frequently opened in the game state in which the ball is launched toward the winning opening 64.

In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the case where the retaining portion 6314b2 has a size capable of accommodating two balls has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be large enough to accommodate three or four pieces. Further, the method of accommodating the ball is not limited to the vertical packing. For example, the stop portion may be a horizontally long region and the spheres may be arranged side by side, or the shape may be similar to that of a funnel so that the space for arranging the spheres is narrowed toward the bottom.

In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the case where the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is arranged limits the number of balls anchored on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 to one has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 may be omitted. In this case, the upper limit of the number of balls parked on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 can be removed.

In the modified examples of the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, and 6500b are arranged in one of the flow paths branched downstream of the first winning opening 64. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b may be arranged on the upstream side of the branch point (the connecting point between the second groove 5312 and the continuous passing grooves 5314, 6314) downstream of the first winning opening 64. In this case, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 is stopped at the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b, and the stopped ball can be visually recognized by the player through the glass unit 16. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 Even if it is not possible to judge at a glance whether or not the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 due to the game ball bouncing around on the upstream side of the, whether or not there is a ball stopped in the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b. By confirming whether or not, it is possible to grasp that the ball has entered the first winning opening 64. In this case, it is not necessary to form a branch flow path on the downstream side of the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b. That is, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b may be arranged in the middle of the flow path formed by a single road from the first winning opening 64 to the ball discharge path (not shown).

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state by the action of the flowing sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the ball does not come into contact with the stop device 3340 for a certain period of time after the change state, the return to the initial state may be started. In this case, if the ball continues to come into contact with the stop device 3340 at regular time intervals, the ball can continue to enter the continuous passage groove 7314. Further, the return may be started within a certain time after the stop device 3340 is in the changed state.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the length from the first winning opening 64 to the second detecting opening 5314c is longer than the length from the first winning opening 64 to the detection opening 312d has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, when the length from the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d and the length from the first winning opening 64 to the second detection port 5314c are set to be the same, when the ball flows down to the detection port 312d. The flow path may be designed so that the flow resistance when the ball flows down to the second detection port 5314c is larger than the flow resistance. In this case, it is possible to specify the passing order of the spheres while suppressing the arrangement space of the flow path.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction of the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363 is the direction along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower surface of the contact portion 3363 may be configured so as to be inclined upward toward the back surface side. In this case, the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363 can include a directional component along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed and a directional component facing the back surface side.

In this case, depending on the magnitude of the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363, the sphere can easily flow down continuously in the direction along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed, or the sphere can easily flow down toward the back surface side. It is possible to switch between.

For example, when the stop device 3340 is in a changed state and the contact portion 3363 and the sphere come into contact with each other when the moving resistance of the contact portion 3363 is increased due to the attractive force of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362, the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 are attracted. Since a large amount of energy is consumed to peel off and the sphere decelerates rapidly, the velocity in the extending direction of the inclined flow path 8313 becomes extremely small, and the sphere is along the inclination of the abutting portion 3363 that abuts. Flows to the back side and flows down the second groove 8315b from the communication opening 8313a.

On the other hand, for example, when the stop device 3340 rotates from the changed state, the attractive force of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 becomes weak, and the contact portion 3363 and the ball come into contact with each other when the movement resistance of the contact portion 3363 is weakened. In this case, since the deceleration action given to the sphere by the load from the abutting portion 3363 becomes small, the sphere flows down along the extending direction of the inclined flow path 8313 while pushing away the abutting portion 3363. Therefore, the sphere reaches the lower base opening 8313b and starts flowing down the first groove 8315a.

Therefore, when the balls P81 and P82 pass through the V winning opening 800a in succession, the leading ball P81 flows down the second groove 8315b, while the trailing ball P82 is arranged in the first groove 8315a (V winning switch 8315d). The groove) can be made to flow down. Thereby, regardless of the operation mode of the stopping device 8500, when there is one ball passing through the V winning opening 800a, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the V winning switch 8315d.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the period in which the V winning device 800 is opened may be 0.5 seconds, 1.0 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not a plurality of balls easily pass through the V winning opening 800a depending on the length of the opening period of the V winning device 800, and it is possible to pay attention to the mode in which the balls pass through the V winning opening 800a. ..

In this case, it may be controlled to set the length of the opening period of the V winning device 800 depending on whether or not the ball can pass through the V winning switch 8315d by passing a plurality of V winning openings 800a. .. For example, when a plurality of balls can pass through the V winning switch 8315d by passing through the V winning opening 800a, there is an 80% probability that the opening period of the V winning device 800 will be 0.5 seconds. By controlling to, the frequency of occurrence of the phenomenon itself that a plurality of balls pass through the V winning opening 800a while creating a situation in which the balls pass through the V winning switch 8315d if a plurality of balls pass through the V winning opening 800a. Can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to create a game property in which the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 8315d and does not actually pass through.

In the eighth embodiment, when a plurality of balls do not enter the V winning device 800, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not those balls pass through the V winning switch 8315d. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by interspersing a plurality of LEDs in the extending direction of the side-by-side groove 8315 and causing the LEDs to emit light in order, control is performed so as to indicate the arrangement of the spheres that flow down when the spheres enter the V winning opening 800a. Then, by visually recognizing the light emitting LED, the arrangement of the flowing balls when the balls enter the V winning opening 800a may be grasped. In this case, for example, even if a plurality of balls do not enter the V winning opening 800a, how the plurality of balls flow down if they have entered the V winning opening 800a is determined by the light emission of the LED. Since it is possible to notify whether or not a ball has passed through the V winning switch 8315d, the player's interest (motivation to enter a plurality of balls into the V winning opening 800a) is improved. Can be made to.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where all the balls flowing down the inclined flow path 8313 come into contact with the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and the stop device 3340 can be returned from the changed state to the initial state has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, the contact portion 3363 may be arranged on the downstream side of the V winning switch 8315d, and the stop device 3340 may be returned from the changed state to the initial state only when the ball passes through the V winning switch 8315d. In this case, after all the balls flowing down the main body member 8310 deviate from the V winning switch 8315d and pass only the discharge switch 8315e, the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. Therefore, even if only one ball enters the main body member 8310, the ball can flow into the branch delay groove 8314. Thereby, for example, the opening / closing pattern of the V winning device 800 sets the opening time of the V winning device 800 when the stopping device 8500 operates so that the ball flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 can pass through the V winning switch 8315d. Even if the length is controlled to be shortened (the length is rare for two balls to enter), even if there is only one ball passing through the V winning opening 800a, the stopping device 3340 maintains the changing state. Since the ball can flow into the branch delay groove 8314, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball passes through the V winning switch 8315d. That is, after the opening operation of the V winning device 800 that the ball did not pass through the V winning switch 8315d, when the V winning device 800 is opened again, the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a presses the V winning switch 8315d. The possibility of passing through can be increased.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where only the first variable winning device 8065 operates in the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the jackpot game, in addition to the first variable winning device 8065, the V winning device 800 may open and close. In this case, the first variable winning device 8065 and the V winning device 800 are not opened at the same time, and the number of jackpot rounds in the big hit game is the opening operation (constant opening and closing) of the first variable winning device 8065 and the V winning device 800. It is set to match the total number of operations). In this case, the drive device 8520 operates differently depending on the jackpot type, and when the ball passes through the V winning switch 8315d during the jackpot game, the gaming state is set to a high probability state after the jackpot game is completed. It may be set. It should be noted that this high-probability state may be continued until the start of the next jackpot game, or may be continued until a predetermined number of fluctuations of the first symbol (for example, 100 fluctuations) are completed. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 8315d during the jackpot game, the gaming state may be shortened after the jackpot game is completed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Suppress overflow by turning the second and subsequent balls to another route and delaying them>
Opportunity for lottery even if the game ball enters in the first state where the opportunity for lottery is given when the game ball enters and the state where the game ball is switched by entering the ball in the first state. In a gaming machine provided with a detection slot that can be configured with a second state in which is not given, and after switching to the second state, a predetermined return period elapses to return to the first state. , When a plurality of gaming balls are inserted, the period from when the first gaming ball, which is one of the plurality of gaming balls, is entered to when the ball is thrown into the detection slot is compared. Then, a delay means for delaying the period from when the second game ball, which is another game ball, enters the ball to when the ball is thrown to the detection entry port is provided, and the period delayed by the delay means is equal to or longer than the return period. A game machine A1 characterized by being said to be.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, information is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball and the entry of the game ball into the entrance, and the display means based on the information. There is a gaming machine that dynamically displays the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information acquired based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entrance, and it is impossible to store any more information. Although it is configured, if multiple gaming balls enter the entrance in succession at short intervals, the upper limit of the number of memorable balls will be reached (the second state), and there is a risk of so-called overflow. There was a problem. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to make a self-judgment to reduce the number of balls to be continuously launched, or to play while checking the number of balls that constantly store information, which puts a burden on the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the period from when the first gaming ball enters the detection entry slot to when the second gaming ball enters the detection entry slot by the delay means is longer than the return period. Since the length is increased and the second game ball is prevented from entering the detection entry port in the second state, the detection entry port is in the second state when the first game ball enters the detection entry port. Even in the case of, it is possible to form a memorable number of vacant spaces before the second game ball enters the detection entrance, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

The period delayed by the delay means is at least longer than the period of one dynamic display mode performed by the dynamic display means such as a liquid crystal device, and is the longest when the number of stored information storage means is the upper limit. It is desirable that the period is longer than the period of the dynamic display mode of.

The configuration of the delay means is not particularly limited, and various modes can be considered. For example, the flow path of the game ball may be distributed by a movable member, or the flow path of the game ball may be distributed according to the relationship between the shape of the flow path and the collision of the ball.

In the game machine A1, the delay means distributes the game ball to a plurality of paths and changes the posture from the first posture to the second posture by passing the game ball, and the distribution means thereof. The urging means that generates an urging force that changes the posture from the second posture to the first posture and the first game ball that has passed through the sorting means when the sorting means is in the first posture are guided and the detection is entered. The first guide flow path for throwing balls to the ball mouth and the second game ball that has passed through the distribution means between the time when the distribution means returns from the second posture to the time immediately before returning to the first posture are guided to the detection entry port. A second guide flow path for throwing balls to the ball is provided, and the period during which the second game ball passes through the second guide flow path is compared with the period during which the first game ball passes through the first guide flow path. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the delay period is configured as a difference between the delay periods.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the delay means includes the sorting means, the first guide flow path in which the game ball is sorted by the sorting means, the second guide flow path, and the sorting means. It is equipped with an urging means for returning the posture, and is compared with the period until the first gaming ball, which first passes through the sorting means and is guided through the first guide flow path, reaches the detection entry port, and then after that. It is possible to prolong the period until the second gaming ball that has passed through the sorting means and is guided through the second guide flow path reaches the detection entry port by the time immediately before the sorting means returns to the first posture by the urging means. Since the delay period is configured as the difference between these periods, the period during which the game ball flows down is assured as compared with the case where the flow path of the game ball is randomly determined as in the case where the game ball collides with a nail. It can be lengthened to, and the timing at which the game ball reaches the detection entrance can be reliably shifted.

In addition, since the posture of the sorting means is restored by the urging means, the game balls are sorted even when the game balls reach the sorting means at intervals (when it is not necessary to delay the game ball that came later). It is possible to prevent the second guide flow path from being distributed by the means.

In the gaming machine A2, the sorting means uses the first wall portion facing the gaming ball in the flow direction and the gaming ball in contact with the first wall portion in the case of the first posture. A second wall portion is provided at a sandwiched position, and the second wall portion receives a load along the flow direction from the game ball, so that the first one from the second posture of the sorting means. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a change in posture in a direction toward a posture is suppressed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the second wall portion arranged at a position sandwiching the gaming ball colliding with the sorting means with the first wall portion is along the flow direction from the gaming ball. By receiving the load, it is suppressed that the sorting means changes its posture from the second posture to the first posture. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the sorting means first passes through the sorting means later. The action of the sphere can prevent the flow from being hindered and the flow from being delayed.

In the gaming machines A2 or A3, the sorting means includes a dividing means for dividing the gaming balls flowing down in a row and guiding only one ball to the first guide flow path, and the posture changes depending on the weight of the gaming balls. The gaming machine A4 having a configuration, wherein the dividing means functions by changing the posture of the sorting means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the dividing means of the sorting means divides the spheres flowing down in succession, and a plurality of spheres are guided to the first guide flow path. This can be prevented without the addition of a drive source.

As the dividing means, a means for pushing the game balls toward the second guide flow path by projecting inward of the flow path, or a means for pushing the game balls in a row by projecting toward the inside of the flow path. An example is a means of inserting the game balls in between and separating the game balls from each other.

In the gaming machine A4, the sorting means uses the first wall portion facing the gaming ball in the flow direction and the gaming ball in contact with the first wall portion in the first posture. It is provided with a second wall portion arranged at a sandwiched position, and when the sorting means changes its posture from the first posture to the second posture, the second wall portion becomes the second gaming ball in the moving direction. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the gaming ball is introduced into the second guide flow path by colliding with the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, when the sorting means collides with the second game ball in the moving direction during the posture change, the game is played between the sorting means and the first guide flow path. It is possible to prevent the ball from being pinched and causing the sorting means to malfunction.

Here, for example, when the sorting means operates electrically, the sorting means operates regardless of the position of the game ball, so that the game ball is at a position away from the entrance of the second guide flow path and also with the sorting means. When the sorting means operates in a direction in which the distance between the sorting means and the side wall of the first guide flow path is narrowed in a state of being arranged at a position between the side wall of the first guide flow path, the sorting means and the first The game ball may be caught between the guide flow path and the sorting means may malfunction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A5, since the operation of the sorting device is generated by the weight of the game ball instead of being electric, the sorting means does not operate in a state where the sorting means malfunctions due to the arrangement of the game ball. The positional relationship and the shape relationship can be designed in advance. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the sorting means.

In the gaming machine A5, a position where a plurality of gaming balls reach the sorting means, one gaming ball abuts on the first wall portion, and the other gaming ball abuts in the moving direction of the second wall portion. In the connected ball introduction state in which the distribution means has changed its posture, it is a side surface forming the inlet of the one game ball and the second guide flow path from the first guide flow path, and is the first guide flow. The gaming machine A6, which is the distance between the end faces with the side surface on the downstream side of the road, and the distance along the extending direction of the first guide flow path is equal to or less than the radius of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, when the other gaming ball is connected to one gaming ball and reaches the sorting means in the connected ball introduction state, the center of the other gaming ball is the second. Since it is arranged in the area inside the second guide flow path when the guide flow path is extended, the game ball can be pushed along the side surface of the second guide flow path, and the game ball can be used as the second guide flow path. Can be introduced.

A7, wherein in the gaming machines A4 to A6, the sorting means performs a returning operation from the second posture to the first posture over a period longer than the returning period.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A4 to A6, it is surely prevented that the second gaming ball is entered into the detection entry slot during the period when the entry detection port is in the second state. be able to.

When the dynamic display mode of the display device is such that the larger the number of memory of the detection entry port is, the easier it is to select a short-term display mode, the length of the predetermined dynamic display mode is at least the detection input. It is desirable that the length of the shortest dynamic display mode or more when the memory number of the ball mouth is the upper limit value or more.

<Overflow suppression by making the stage movable by the weight of the sphere>
Opportunity for lottery even if the game ball enters in the first state where the opportunity for lottery is given when the game ball enters and the state where the game ball is switched by entering the ball in the first state. In a gaming machine provided with a detection inlet that can be configured with a second state in which is not given, and returns to the first state after a predetermined return period elapses after being switched to the second state. , A rolling means configured to have an optimum drop portion, which is a descending start position at which the game ball can easily enter the detection entry port, and to roll on the upper surface in a manner in which the game ball passes through the optimum drop portion. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the rolling means operates in a mode in which the gaming ball is started to descend from the optimum falling portion at intervals equal to or longer than the return period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the game ball has an optimum drop portion arranged as a descent start portion where the game ball can easily enter the detection entry port, and the game ball arranged on the upper surface provides the optimum drop portion. There are gaming machines provided with rolling means (so-called "stages") that are configured to be rollable in a passing manner (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156508). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second gaming ball rides on the rolling means before the first gaming ball on the rolling means first descends from the rolling means, and the first gaming ball and the first gaming ball are on the rolling means. The two gaming balls may descend from the optimum drop portion in a short period of time, and in that case, there is a problem that an overflow may occur at the detection entry port.

This is different from the state in which the game balls flow down while colliding with the nails, and when the game balls reciprocate in the left-right direction in a manner of passing the optimum drop portion (the game balls reciprocate on a specific path), the game balls are reciprocated with each other. Is a problem peculiar to the rolling means that tends to collide frequently.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the rolling means operates in such a manner that the gaming balls are started to descend one by one at intervals from the optimum falling portion, so that the gaming machines can be played at the detection slot in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the balls from entering all at once. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls are placed on the rolling means, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the detection entry port.

The gaming machine B1 includes an introduction flow path for introducing the game ball into the rolling means, and the rolling means guides the game ball to the optimum falling portion while the game ball is introduced from the introduction flow path. A floor member is provided, and the first floor member is formed to be movable by the weight of a rolling game ball, and the movement reduces the speed of the game ball arriving later toward the first floor member. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it operates in a mode.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, when the gaming ball rides on the first floor member of the rolling means, the first floor member operates by the weight of the gaming ball, so that the game is played. Since the speed of the ball toward the first floor member can be reduced, the distance between the game ball on the first floor member and the game ball toward the first floor member can be widened. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the detection entry port.

The speed of the game ball toward the first floor member may be reduced, for example, the speed of the game ball toward the first floor member may be reduced (braking), or the game ball may be stopped. , The case where the game ball is moved (runs in the opposite direction) in the direction opposite to the direction toward the first floor member is exemplified.

Further, as a method of reducing the speed of the game ball toward the first floor member, for example, a method of making the first floor member descend and incline in a direction away from the first floor member, or an upper surface of the first floor member. Examples thereof include a method of projecting a deceleration protrusion and a method of projecting a magnet at a position where a magnetic force can act on a game ball on the first floor member.

In the gaming machine B2, the optimum falling portion is arranged on the first floor member, and the first floor member is configured to operate when the game ball is dropped from the optimum falling portion. The moving means is placed in the vicinity of the first floor member before and after the game ball falls from the optimum drop portion, and the optimum drop of another game ball heading toward the optimum drop portion within a predetermined period of time. The gaming machine B3, which is provided with a preventive means for preventing the player from reaching the unit.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the first floor member operates when the gaming ball falls from the optimum falling portion, and the rolling means is the gaming ball from the optimum falling portion. Is placed on the first floor member before and after the fall, and other game balls heading toward the optimum drop portion are prevented by the preventive means within a predetermined period, so that a plurality of game balls are continuously introduced into the optimum drop portion. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent other gaming balls from continuously falling from the optimum falling portion after the earliest gaming ball has fallen from the optimum falling portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the detection entry port.

In the game machine B3, the prevention means can configure a preventive state in which the game ball can be prevented and a passing state in which the game ball cannot be prevented, and the optimum immediately after the game ball falls from the optimum drop portion. As the state of the falling portion, a preferable falling state in which the game ball has fallen in a manner in which the game ball can be easily entered into the detection entry port, and a game ball being inserted into the detection entry port as compared with the preferable falling state. A normal falling state in which the game ball has fallen in a mode that is difficult to cause is configured, and the preventing means is set to the preventing state when the suitable falling state is set, and the preventing means is set to the preventing state when the game ball is set to the normal falling state. The gaming machine B4, which is characterized in that the player is in a passing state.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, when the optimum falling portion is in a suitable falling state, the preventive means is set in a preventive state, and the optimum falling portion is set in a normal falling state. Since the prevention means is passed through the ball, it is possible to suppress the prevention of the game ball even when the game ball falling from the optimum drop portion does not enter the detection entry port, and the game ball is placed at the detection entry port. It is possible to prevent the timing of entering the ball from being unnecessarily delayed.

The gaming machine B3 or B4 is provided with a throwing means for throwing a game ball prevented by the preventing means in a direction away from the optimum falling portion.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3 or B4, the gaming ball prevented by the preventing means by the throwing means is thrown in the direction away from the optimum falling portion, thereby intensifying the movement of the gaming ball. Since it is possible to increase the period until the game ball reaches the optimum drop portion again, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow at the detection entrance while improving the interest of the player.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, an intermediate floor member for introducing a game ball into the first floor member is provided, the intermediate floor member is made operable, and the operation causes the player to descend in a direction away from the first floor member. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the intermediate floor member changes state in an inclined state.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the intermediate floor member inclines downward in the direction away from the first floor member, so that the gaming ball reaches the intermediate floor member. , The gravitational acceleration can be generated in the direction away from the first floor member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the game ball arranged on the first floor member and the game ball that will reach the intermediate floor member from being reduced.

The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the intermediate floor members are arranged in pairs on both sides of the first floor member, and the posture changes of the intermediate floor members occur alternately in the pair of intermediate floor members.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the intermediate floor members are arranged in pairs on both sides of the first floor member, and the posture changes of the intermediate floor members occur alternately in the pair of intermediate floor members. When the gaming balls are directed toward both of the pair of intermediate floor members, the timing at which the gaming balls are decelerated can be shifted, and the timing at which the gaming balls reach the first floor member can be shifted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being congested in the vicinity of the optimum drop portion.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, in the rolling means, the gaming ball that has reached the optimum drop portion after the reciprocating motion in the left-right direction has converged, and the gaming ball that has passed through the introduction flow path to the first floor member. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it is configured in a manner of preventing a collision with a gaming ball flowing down toward it.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, in the rolling means, the reciprocating motion in the left-right direction is completed and the gaming ball reaches the optimum drop portion and passes through the introduction flow path. Since it is configured to prevent a collision with a game ball flowing down toward the first floor member, the game ball immediately before falling from the optimum drop portion collides with another game ball and is detected as a ball entry port. It is possible to prevent the pachinko balls from falling in a direction away from the ball and from passing the colliding game balls in a row and passing through the detection entry port.

<Overflow suppression by decelerating the second and subsequent balls and shifting the winning timing>
Opportunity for lottery even if the game ball enters in the first state where the opportunity for lottery is given when the game ball enters and the state where the game ball is switched by entering the ball in the first state. In a gaming machine provided with a detection inlet that can be configured with a second state in which is not given, and after switching to the second state, the game returns to the first state after a predetermined return period elapses. , When a plurality of game balls enter, the flow speed of the second game ball that enters after that is compared with the flow speed of the first game ball that enters first among the plurality of game balls. The pachinko ball is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the speed, and the game ball thrown from the deceleration means enters the detection entry port. The period required for the ball to enter the ball opening is longer than the period required for the first gaming ball to enter the detection entry port after the first gaming ball enters the deceleration means. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is configured to be longer than that.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, information is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball and the entry of the game ball into the entrance, and the display means based on the information. There is a gaming machine that dynamically displays the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information acquired based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entrance, and it is impossible to store any more information. However, there is a problem that if a plurality of game balls continuously enter the ball entrance at short intervals, the upper limit of the number of memorable balls may be reached and a so-called overflow may occur. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to make a self-judgment to reduce the number of balls to be continuously launched, or to play while checking the number of balls that constantly store information, which puts a burden on the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of gaming balls enter the deceleration means, the speed is compared with the flow speed of the first gaming ball in which the deceleration means enters the first of the plurality of gaming balls. Then, the second gaming ball that has entered after that is decelerated, and the second gaming ball is placed in the detection entry slot until the return period elapses after the first gaming ball enters the detection entry slot. Since the ball is prevented from entering, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

The period from when the second game ball enters the deceleration means to when the ball enters the detection entry port is the period from when the first game ball enters the deceleration means to when the ball enters the detection entry port. The length is at least longer than the length of the period (return period) of one dynamic display mode performed by the dynamic display means, and in particular, the detection entrance is set to the second state. It is desirable that the period be longer than the period of the longest dynamic display mode in the case of.

Further, the deceleration of the game ball means that the velocity component along the path toward the detection entry port is reduced. For example, the game ball flows in the direction away from the detection entry port (negative speed). The deceleration means has a preventive means for temporarily preventing the ball from being thrown, such as when the ball is reciprocated (moves in a zigzag pattern) in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the detection entry port, and the ball is thrown by the preventive means. Until the prevention is released, the case where the game ball reciprocates in front of the prevention means, the case where the game ball temporarily stops, and the like are included.

As means for decelerating the game ball, a method of projecting an abutting member which faces and abuts in the flow direction of the game ball into the flow path, a method of applying a magnetic force to the flowing game ball, or a game ball. An example is a method of arranging a sprocket in a passage through which the sprocket passes and rotating the sprocket on a game ball.

In the gaming machine C1, the deceleration means decelerates the gaming ball by intermittently applying a load in the direction opposite to the flow direction to the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the deceleration means intermittently applies a load in the opposite direction of the flow direction to the gaming ball to reduce the rotation speed of the gaming ball, and as a result. Since the game ball is decelerated, the game ball can be effectively decelerated.

When decelerating by friction with the wall surface, it is necessary to increase the contact area in order to improve the deceleration efficiency, but if the target is a sphere such as a game ball, it is difficult to sufficiently increase the contact area. Is. On the other hand, in the mode in which the load is intermittently applied in the direction opposite to the flow direction, the deceleration efficiency does not depend on the target shape, so that the game ball can be effectively decelerated.

In the gaming machine C2, the deceleration means is arranged so as to be relatively movable with respect to the deceleration flow path for guiding the entering game ball and the deceleration flow path, and is configured to be able to apply a load to the game ball. It is provided with a moving means having an acting portion, and the moving means can configure a first state and a second state which is a state after relative movement from the first state to the deceleration flow path. The action unit is configured to apply a load to the gaming ball flowing down the deceleration flow path in the second state, and the moving means is such that the first game ball passes through the deceleration flow path. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the state changes from the first state to the second state, and in the second state, the acting unit applies a load to the second gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the moving means having the acting portion can configure the first state and the second state, and the moving means is the first gaming ball passing through the deceleration flow path. The state is changed to the second state by the action of, and the second game ball is given a load from the action part in the second state, so that the second game ball can be decelerated without separately preparing a drive device. The distance between the first game ball and the second game ball can be separated.

Examples of the acting portion include a rib portion extending in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the deceleration flow path and projecting into the deceleration flow path, a magnet portion for applying a magnetic force to the game ball, and the like. When the acting part is a rib part, there are a mode in which the speed of the game ball is gradually reduced so that the game ball can pass through, a mode in which the game ball overhangs so as not to pass, and a mode in which the game ball is stopped. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine C3, the moving means is configured in such a manner that the deceleration degree of the second gaming ball is increased as the number of balls that the acting unit enters the deceleration means within a predetermined period increases. Characteristic gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, as the number of balls entering the deceleration means within a predetermined period increases, the acting unit increases the deceleration degree of the second gaming ball. When the number of balls flowing in the deceleration flow path becomes three within the period, the third game ball can be decelerated more than the second game ball, so that the second game ball can be decelerated more. And the third game ball can be widened. As a result, even when the second game ball enters the detection entry port and the detection entry port is in the second state, before the third game ball enters the ball. It is possible to earn a period (return period) in which the dynamic display of 1 is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow due to the passage of the third game ball through the detection means.

In addition, as a mode in which the action unit increases the deceleration degree of the second game ball, for example, a mode in which the load acting on the second game ball increases and a length (duration) in which the load acts on the second game ball are used. An embodiment in which the amount of work applied to the second game ball increases due to the expansion is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the deceleration means includes a miniaturization means configured to be movable relative to the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the miniaturization means is the first game ball. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that, upon passing, the second gaming ball moves in a direction that narrows the inner peripheral shape of the flow path before the second gaming ball passes through.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the miniaturization means changes the shape of the inner circumference of the flow path before the second gaming ball passes by the passage of the first gaming ball. Since it moves in the narrowing direction, it is possible to increase the resistance of the flow path when the second game ball passes through. As a result, the second game ball can be decelerated.

By matching the position where the inner peripheral shape of the flow path is narrowed with the position where the flow path changes direction (the position where the velocity component in the direction in which the game ball has flowed down disappears), the game ball flows down until then. It is possible to apply a large resistance at the timing of stopping along the direction in which the game ball was in place, to prevent the game ball from passing by with force, and to increase the action of decelerating the game ball.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a release means for releasing the deceleration effect generated on the second game ball by the deceleration means by changing the state is provided, and the state change of the release means is a game that has passed through the deceleration means. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that the ball passes through a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a releasing means for canceling the deceleration effect is provided, and the releasing by the releasing means causes the gaming ball that has passed through the deceleration means to pass through a predetermined position. Since it is performed by doing so, it is possible to eliminate the need for another driving means for changing the state of the releasing means.

In the gaming machine C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the releasing by the releasing means is performed by the gaming ball after passing through the detection entrance.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the release by the release means is performed by the game ball after passing through the detection entrance, so that it is easy to manage the release timing by the release means. Can be.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the deceleration means is configured in a mode in which the state changes between an initial state and a change state different from the initial state, and in the initial state, the deceleration means is used by the gaming ball. It changes to the changed state by passing through, and in the changed state, it is configured to change to the initial state by not passing the deceleration means through the deceleration means for a predetermined period, and the game ball passes through the deceleration means. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the period of passing through the decelerating means in the changing state is set longer than the period of passing through the decelerating means in the initial state.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the passing period of the gaming ball passing through the deceleration means in the initial state is shortened, and then the deceleration means is passed. As long as the interval between the gaming balls does not become longer than a predetermined period, the deceleration means can always be maintained in a changing state, and the period during which the gaming balls pass through the deceleration means can be maintained for a long time.

In the gaming machine C8, when the gaming balls enter the deceleration means at intervals shorter than the predetermined interval while the deceleration means is in the changing state, the number of the entering game balls does not matter. The gaming machine C9, wherein the deceleration means throws a gaming ball at a constant interval longer than the predetermined interval.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, when the deceleration means is in a changing state, even if a plurality of game balls are entered into the deceleration means, the number of balls is constant regardless of the number of balls entered. Since the game balls can be thrown at intervals, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the detected ball entry port regardless of the number of balls entered.

As the deceleration means, a sprocket-shaped device configured to accommodate a game ball in a recess on the peripheral surface is exemplified.

<A big concept that delays the follow-up ball after continuous entry. Confluence, branch, both included>
A game area in which a game ball is formed so as to be able to flow down, a detection means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the game ball flowing down the game area, and the game area and the detection means are provided by the game ball. The connecting flow path is provided with a connecting flow path that allows the game to flow down and a switching means that can switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path, and the connecting flow path includes at least one flow path. The gaming machine D0 is characterized in that the period required for the game ball to flow down the connecting flow path changes depending on which flow path of the flow path formed by the connecting flow path.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a storage device capable of storing game balls is provided in a plurality of taxiways that are guided to the starting winning opening, and the game balls are stored in the storage device. After the game ball that has arrived is guided to another taxiway, it is guided toward the start winning opening, and the game ball stored in the storage device is released from storage by any operation of the player, and the start winning prize is obtained. There are gaming machines that are guided toward the mouth (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176547). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the discharge timing of the gaming balls stored in the storage device depends on the operation of the player, for example, when a plurality of gaming balls are guided in one taxiway. , When a game ball is guided to another taxiway, the storage of the storage operation is released without noticing it, and there is a risk that multiple game balls will be discharged in succession toward the starting winning opening. There was a problem. In this case, since the player needs to follow the flow mode of the plurality of game balls with his / her eyes, he / she may feel the flow of the game balls in a hurry, which may be confusing to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D0, it is possible to switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path, and the gaming ball flows down the connecting flow path depending on which flow path formed by the connecting flow path. Since the period required for flowing down changes, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gaming balls are continuously discharged from the connecting flow path.

In the gaming machine D0, the detecting means detects the passage of at least a part of the gaming balls flowing down the connecting flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by detecting the passage of the gaming balls. The first flow path, which is provided with at least one and is connected to one of the detection means, and the first flow path thereof are at least partially different from each other and of the detection means. A second flow path connected to one of the two is provided, and the second flow path is used for a period required for the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. In comparison, the gaming machine D1 is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the gaming ball to flow down from the gaming area to the detecting means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D0, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connecting flow path in a row from the gaming area, the detection means flows down the first flow path. A difference can be provided in the timing of entering the pachinko ball between the pachinko ball that has passed and the pachinko ball that has flowed down the second flow path and passed through the detection means. That is, even when a plurality of game balls are connected to each other and enter the connecting flow path, the timing at which the entered game balls pass through the detection means can be shifted.

The mode of lengthening the period is not limited at all. For example, the second flow path may be formed in such a manner that the flow resistance is larger than that of the first flow path (difference depending on the velocity), and the second flow path is the first flow path. It may be formed longer along the flow direction of the game ball (difference depending on the distance).

In the gaming machine D1, the switching means is switched to a changing state in which the gaming ball flows down the second flow path due to the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path, and is in the changing state. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the period to be maintained is defined regardless of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, a gaming ball flowing down the second flow path during a period in which the switching means is maintained in the changed state, unlike the case where the distribution member of the alternating distribution is used. By defining independently of, it is possible to continuously enter the game ball into the second flow path during this period. As a result, for example, when the entry into the second flow path sets a larger benefit to the player than the entry into the first flow path, the game ball continuously enters the second flow path. This can enhance the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine D2, the switching means is characterized in that the maintenance of the changed state is released by the gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, the maintenance of the changed state of the switching means is released by the gaming ball passing through the first flow path, so that the gaming ball passing through the first flow path is released. By making the flow mode of the above constant, the period for maintaining the switching means in the changed state can be made constant. As a result, it is possible to facilitate a game in which the game ball is aimed to enter the second flow path.

On the other hand, by making it possible to change the flow mode of the game ball that has passed through the first flow path, it is possible to change the period for which the switching means is maintained in the changed state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the game ball is entered into the second flow path from being always the same, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the detection means includes a first detection port connected to the first flow path and a second detection port connected to the second flow path. The gaming machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second detection port is set so that the profit obtained by the player is larger than that of the first detection port. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player when continuous ball entry occurs. For example, a game ball that has passed through the first detection port can be used to obtain a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, while a game ball that has passed through the second detection port can be used to obtain a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. You can do it.

In this case, the distribution of the jackpot of the second special symbol can be set so that the profit given to the player is higher than the distribution of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the player for continuous entry. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when passing through the second detection port is set to be larger (for example, 4) than the prize balls to be paid out when passing through the first detection port (for example, 1 piece). As a result, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the profit given to the player by continuous ball entry can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved.

In other words, the present invention includes a game ball that is finally determined to pass through the first detection port and enables the ball to enter the second detection port. As a result, for example, when a game ball other than the game ball passing through the first detection port enables continuous entry into the second detection port (for example, the second detection port can acquire the second special symbol). It is possible to improve the attention to the game ball passing through the first detection port as compared with the case where the detection port of the normal symbol is arranged on the left side of the game area.

The second detection port connected to the second flow path may be arranged as a detection port through which all the game balls that have entered the second flow path pass, or the game that has entered the second flow path. It may be arranged as a detection port through which a part of the sphere passes. In this case, it may be specified how many of the game balls that have entered the second flow path pass through the second detection port due to the frequency of the game balls entering the connecting flow path. Further, even if the frequency of entering the game balls into the connecting flow path is the same, a movable device capable of changing the number of game balls passing through the second detection port may be arranged in the connecting flow path.

Further, even if a plurality of game balls continuously flow down toward the detection means, if the game balls that have passed through the first detection port cancel the maintenance of the changed state of the switching means, until then. , The game ball can flow down toward the second detection port connected to the second flow path.

As a result, when the first detection port and the second detection port are start ports capable of obtaining a lottery for fluctuations of the same special symbol, it is easy to create a situation in which the game ball passes through the second detection port after the fluctuation is completed. be able to.

In the gaming machine D4, the connecting flow path is provided with a passage port through which the game ball can pass on the upstream side of the switching means, and the game ball that has passed through the passing port is guided to the switching means and passes through the passing port. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, among the gaming balls that have passed through and guided to the switching means, the gaming balls that deviate from the first flow path can enter the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the gaming ball that has passed through the passing port of the connecting flow path is guided to the switching means, so that the gaming ball can be continuously launched aiming at the passing opening. , The state change of the switching means and the striking of the game ball into the first flow path and the second flow path can be executed. This makes it easy to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the second detection port is a detection port capable of obtaining a lottery of a type different from the lottery that can be obtained by a game ball passing through the first detection port.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4 or D5, at least one game ball passes through the first detection port before the game ball passes through the second detection port. Using the notification related to the lottery of the detection port as a mark, it is possible to prevent overlooking that the game ball has passed through the second detection port.

The combination of lottery types that can be obtained by passing the game ball through the first detection port and the second detection port is not limited in any way. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different from each other, or the first special symbol and the normal symbol may be different from each other.

In the game machine D6, the second detection port is a detection port capable of obtaining a lottery more advantageous than the lottery that can be obtained by the game ball passing through the first detection port.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connecting flow path at the same time, the second after the gaming balls pass through the first detection port. Since it is possible for the game ball to pass through the detection port, it is possible to forcibly create a waiting time until the advantageous lottery variation display is started.

In the gaming machine D6, the second detection port is an advantageous detection that starts a fluctuation more advantageous than the fluctuation started due to the passage of the game ball due to the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine D8 is characterized by being a detection port capable of initiating fluctuations for forming a state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the mouth.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the action of the gaming ball entering the connecting flow path can open and close the movable device at a position different from that of the connecting flow path, thereby opening and closing the movable device. It is possible to form a gaming state in which the profit given to the player is large. In this case, in the gaming state in which the profit given to the player is large, a notification prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the movable device in the open state is notified. It is possible to naturally elapse the time during which the fluctuation started due to the passage of the game ball.

<Concept of placing a constant drive stop device in the second flow path>
A game area in which a game ball is formed so as to be able to flow down, a detection means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the game ball flowing down the game area, and the game area and the detection means are provided by the game ball. It is provided with a connecting flow path that allows the game ball to flow down and a switching means that can switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path, so that the game ball flows down inside the connecting flow path. The detection means includes two movable members that change the state between a first state that regulates and a second state that allows the game ball to flow down, and a drive means that drives the movable member. It detects the passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the connecting flow path and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by detecting the passage of the game balls, and is provided with at least one of the above two. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the movable members are arranged at intervals capable of accommodating at least one gaming ball.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a storage device capable of storing game balls is provided in a plurality of taxiways that are guided to the starting winning opening, and the game balls are stored in the storage device. After the game ball that has arrived is guided to another taxiway, it is guided toward the start winning opening, and the game ball stored in the storage device is released from storage by any operation of the player, and the start winning prize is obtained. There are gaming machines that are guided toward the mouth (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176547). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the discharge timing of the gaming ball stored in the storage device depends on the operation of the player. Therefore, for example, while the gaming ball is being guided to another taxiway, this is the case. There is a problem that the storage of the storage device is released without noticing the above, and a plurality of game balls may be discharged at the same time toward the starting winning opening.

In this case, since the player needs to follow the flow mode of the plurality of game balls with his / her eyes, he / she may feel the flow of the game balls in a hurry, which may be confusing to the player. In addition, when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of fluctuation in the starting winning opening is 0, even if a plurality of game balls enter the starting winning opening, a lottery will be drawn by entering some of the game balls. Only the opportunity will be obtained, which may be disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, two movable members that are driven by the driving means and allow or regulate the flow of the gaming ball flowing down the connecting flow path can accommodate at least one gaming ball in between. Since the game balls are arranged at various intervals, the game ball can be stopped in the connecting flow path while at least one of the movable members maintains the first state. Therefore, depending on the driving mode of the two movable members, the connecting flow An interval can be provided at the timing when the game ball is discharged from the road.

In the gaming machine E1, the two movable members include a first movable member and a second movable member arranged on the downstream side of the connecting flow path as compared with the first movable member, and the first movable member thereof is provided. The 2 movable member is a gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball that has passed through the first movable member in the second state is driven so as to be able to form the first state when it reaches at least the second movable member. E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the first movable member and the second movable member are arranged along the flow direction of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball that has passed through the first movable member is at least. Since it is driven so that it can be formed in the first state when it reaches the second movable member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through (passing without stopping). Therefore, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need for complicated control such as detecting the arrangement of the game ball flowing down the connecting flow path and changing the movable member to the first state immediately before the game ball reaches the movable member.

In the gaming machine E2, a predetermined game ball entering the connecting flow path is regulated to flow down by the first movable member or after being restricted from flowing down by the second movable member. The gaming machine E3 is provided with an upper limit passing means formed so that a gaming ball can pass when the number of balls exceeds the upper limit.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the number of gaming balls that need to be entered into the connecting flow path in order for the upper limit passing means to pass the gaming balls is a state of two movable members. Therefore, the number of game balls that need to enter the second flow path in order to pass the game balls to the upper limit passing means can be changed depending on the case.

Further, when more game balls than the upper limit number enter the connecting flow path, the game balls pass through the upper limit passing means and are discharged to another flow path, so that an excessively large number of game balls flow in the connecting flow path. When the ball enters the road, it is possible to prevent the ball from being jammed.

It should be noted that when the game balls are accumulated starting from the second movable member (when the flow is restricted by the second movable member), when the game balls are accumulated starting from the first movable member (flowing down to the first movable member). The upper limit number is increased by the number that can be accommodated between the first movable member and the second movable member.

Further, when both the first movable member and the second movable member are in the second state, the upper limit number is not specified (becomes infinite) because the game balls are not accumulated.

In the game machine E3, the detection means includes an upper limit passage port in which a game ball that has flowed down through the upper limit passing means is arranged so as to be able to pass through, and the upper limit passage port is a game ball due to the passage of the game ball. Fluctuations for forming a state in which the gaming ball can easily enter the advantageous detection port, which initiates fluctuations that are more favorable than the fluctuations that are initiated due to the passage of the pachinko ball through the detection means. The gaming machine E4, which is configured as a detection port capable of starting the above.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, when the gaming ball passes through the upper limit passage port, a state in which the gaming ball can pass through the advantageous detection port is formed, so that there are many in the connecting flow path. It is possible to motivate the player to continuously enter the game ball.

In addition, the type of fluctuation started by the game ball that has entered the connected flow path can be switched depending on the matter that the player can change whether or not to execute the ball in the connected flow path. Can be done. Therefore, the detection port through which the game ball passes is switched according to the order in which the game ball enters the connecting flow path, and the game ball is inserted into the connecting flow path as compared with the case where the type of fluctuation to be started is switched. This makes it possible to increase the proportion of the player's will in determining the type of variation that is initiated.

In the gaming machine E4, the dynamic upper limit number, which is the number at which the gaming balls can pass through the upper limit passing port by inserting a predetermined number of gaming balls into the connecting flow path according to the state of the movable member, is set. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it can be set.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, the dynamic upper limit number can be set according to the state of the movable member (including the operating speed), so that the state of the movable member during the game is different. Thereby, it is possible to change the number of game balls to be entered into the connecting flow path to pass through the upper limit passage port. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball that has entered the connecting flow path.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the driving mode of the driving means is a first storage state in which the game balls can be stored in the two movable members, and the game balls are less likely to be stored than in the first storage state. The gaming machine E6 characterized in that it can be switched between the second storage state and the second storage state.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, even when the number of gaming balls sent to the second flow path is the same, the driving mode of the driving means is the first storage. Depending on whether it is in the state or the second storage state, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball is easily stored by the two movable members and a state in which it is difficult to store the game ball.

As a result, there is a profit that the player can obtain even if the game ball is put into the connecting flow path in the same manner depending on whether the game is played in a state where the game ball is easily stored or when the game is played in a state where it is difficult to store the game ball. Since it changes, the player can be made to select which state to play the game by displaying the change in the profit obtained on the display device.

The first storage state includes a state in which all the balls reaching the two movable members are stored, and the second storage state does not store all the balls reaching the two movable members. The state to pass is included.

<Type 1 Type 2 V (or V probability). V with multiple balls (initially, an image of a flow path that can be covered)>
A game area in which a game ball is formed so as to be able to flow down, a detection means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the game ball flowing down the game area, and the game area and the detection means are provided by the game ball. The detection means includes at least a part of the connecting flow path that is connected so as to be able to flow down and a switching means that is configured to be able to switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path. At least one of the above-mentioned switching means is provided, which detects the passage of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined benefit by detecting the passage of the game ball. Of the plurality of gaming balls that have entered the connecting flow path, the succeeding gaming ball that has entered afterwards is more likely to pass through the detection means than the earliest gaming ball that has entered first. The gaming machine F1 characterized in that the connecting flow path is switched in such an manner.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a taxiway in which a game ball passing through a through gate is guided to a starting winning opening, and the ratio of winning from the guiding path to the starting winning opening can be changed periodically. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-70526). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the ratio of winning from the taxiway to the starting winning opening does not change depending on the entry mode of the gaming ball, and even if the gaming ball enters the taxiway in a single shot, a plurality of gaming balls Even if you try to enter the taxiway together, there is no big change in the profit given to the player. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of improving the attention to the game ball entering the taxiway is insufficient.

According to the gaming machine F1, when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connecting flow path within a predetermined period, the subsequent gaming balls that enter after that are compared with the earliest gaming ball that entered first. Since the switching means acts so that the ball easily passes through the detecting means, it is possible to improve the attention to the following game balls, and the motivation to put a plurality of game balls into the connecting flow path collectively. It is possible to suppress the player from making a single shot.

In the gaming machine F1, the switching means functions by an action given by the flow of a gaming ball that has entered the connecting flow path.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the switching means functions due to the action given by the flow of the gaming ball, and the succeeding gaming ball is easier to pass through the detecting means. It is not necessary to control the operation of the electric movable device by predicting the flow time of the first game ball and the subsequent game ball, and it is possible to facilitate the operation control.

The mode in which the switching means functions by the action of the game ball is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the posture of the switching means may be changed by the collision of the game balls, or the switching means may be driven by detecting the passage of the game balls.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the connecting flow path is connected to one of the detecting means while having at least a part different from the first flow path connected to the detecting means and the first flow path thereof. The second flow path is provided with a second flow path, and the second flow path is the game area as compared with the period required for the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. The switching means is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the game ball to flow down from the detection means to the detection means, and the switching means is caused by the first game ball flowing down the first flow path. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that is changed to a state of passing through the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, even when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the connecting flow path collectively, there is a timing interval at which they can pass through the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing down in a hurry, as in the case where a plurality of game balls pass through the detection means at substantially the same time. As a result, it is possible to easily identify the game ball passing through the detecting means, and it is also possible to easily prevent an unexpected game ball from passing through the detecting means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means is arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means of the connecting flow path, and the first state of restricting the entry of the gaming ball into the detecting means and the gaming ball. The discharge controlling means is provided with a second state that allows the ball to enter the detecting means, and the discharge controlling means is set to the first state at least when the first gaming ball arrives, and the subsequent state is set. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it can be switched in the mode of the second state when the gaming ball arrives.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there may be a case where only the succeeding gaming ball can pass through the detecting means depending on the mode of the state change of the emission controlling means. Even after the first game ball has passed without passing through the detection means, the player's expectation can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the subsequent game ball.

In the embodiment in which the distance between the first game ball and the succeeding game ball is forcibly separated, the emission control means for switching the difficulty level of entering the detection means between the first game ball and the succeeding game ball. The switching timing of the state change can be loosened.

In addition, various modes are exemplified as the mode in which the discharge to the detection means is difficult by the discharge control means. For example, the game ball may be discharged to another discharge path other than the detection means, or the game ball may be temporarily stopped on the upstream side of the discharge control means.

The gaming machine F4 includes a ball entry regulating means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter the connecting flow path and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the connecting flow path. The gaming machine F5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, the timing of entering the ball into the connecting flow path can be limited to the time when the entry controlling means is in the first state, so that the state of the emission controlling means can be controlled. Can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine F5, the emission controlling means is compared with other cases when the state changes in such a manner that the first gaming ball cannot pass through the detecting means and the succeeding gaming ball can pass through the detecting means. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the period during which the ball entry restricting means is maintained in the first state is shortened.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, it is difficult to allow the gaming ball to enter the connecting flow path within a predetermined period in a situation where the succeeding gaming ball can pass through the detection means. Can be done.

As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the situation while actually forming a situation in which the succeeding game ball can pass through the detection means, so that the player can frequently appeal the self-made game. can do.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the switching means includes a deceleration means for decelerating a gaming ball flowing down the connecting flow path, and the degree of deceleration by the deceleration means is switched between the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball. A gaming machine F7 characterized by being made possible.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball can be decelerated by the deceleration means, and the degree of deceleration can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the connecting flow path as compared with the case where the arrangement of the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball is defined only by the shape of the flow path through which the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball flow down. it can.

In the gaming machine F7, the action of deceleration by the deceleration means is smaller than the action given to the first gaming ball. ..

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the degree of deceleration given to the succeeding gaming ball by the deceleration means is suppressed, so that the flow mode of the succeeding gaming ball becomes awkward or stops in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the flow mode of the subsequent gaming ball.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the switching means is formed so as to prevent the gaming ball of the detecting means from passing through within a predetermined period, and at the beginning of the predetermined period, the succeeding gaming ball is connected to the connecting flow path. A gaming machine F9 characterized in that it is set regardless of when entering the ball.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the start of a predetermined period can be set without being involved in the timing when the succeeding gaming ball enters the connecting flow path.

That is, when a movable member capable of switching whether or not the game ball can enter is arranged at the entrance of the connecting flow path, the start of a predetermined period is set regardless of the timing at which the subsequent game ball passes through the movable member. can do.

The criteria for setting the start of a predetermined period are not particularly limited. For example, it may be set according to the flow mode of the first game ball, or may be set based on the opening timing of the movable mechanism that opens and closes the inlet of the connecting flow path.

A gaming machine F1 in any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (part of the game area)
64 Winning opening (part of detection entry opening, part of passing opening)
87 Warp passage (part of the passage)
300, 2300 Delay device (delay means)
311 1st groove (part of deceleration flow path)
312 2nd groove (part of the 1st guide flow path)
312d detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entry port, first detection port)
312e Side wall (part of connecting flow path, part of first flow path)
313 Third groove (part of the second guide flow path)
321 Slide moving member (moving means, miniaturizing means)
321a1 Convex part (acting part)
340, 2340 Sorting device (sorting means)
341, 2341 1st wall part (1st wall part)
342 2nd wall (2nd wall)
342a Convex tip (part of dividing means)
350 2nd adjustment device (urging means)
400 Delayed floor device (rolling means)
410 Fan-shaped member (first floor member, part of prevention means, part of ball throwing means, intermediate floor member)
411a Chamfered part (optimal falling part)
436 Delayed flow path (part of throwing means)
800 V winning device (part of ball entry regulation means)
3340 Stop device (part of deceleration means, part of switching means)
3360 Maintenance device (release means, part of deceleration means)
3363 Contact part (part of deceleration means)
4340 sprocket (part of deceleration means)
5310, 6310, 7310, 8310, 9310 Main body member (part of connecting flow path)
5311 1st groove (part of connecting flow path, part of 1st flow path, part of 2nd flow path)
5312 Second groove (part of the connecting flow path, part of the first flow path, part of the second flow path)
5314, 6314, 7314 Continuous passage groove (part of connecting flow path, part of second flow path)
5314a1 Upper limit discharge hole (upper limit passing means)
5314c 2nd detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entry port)
5314e Third detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entry port, second detection port, upper limit passage port)
5510 Movable plate (movable member)
5512 Upper extension plate (first movable member)
5513 Lower extension plate (second movable member)
5520, 6520 Drive device (part of drive means)
6510 Movable plate (movable member)
6511 Upper movable plate (first movable member)
6512 Lower movable plate (second movable member)
8313, 9313 Inclined flow path (part of connecting flow path, part of first flow path, part of second flow path)
8314 Branch delay groove (part of connecting flow path, part of second flow path)
8315d V winning switch (detection means, detection entry port)
8511 Upper movable plate (part of emission control means)
8512 Lower movable plate (part of emission control means)
P1, P4, P6, P21, P31, P41 balls (first game ball)
P2, P5, P7, P22, P32, P42 balls (second game ball)
P11, P12 balls (game balls, other game balls)
P81, P91 Game ball (first game ball)
P82, P92 game ball (subsequent game ball)

The present invention relates to a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine in which the ratio of winning from the taxiway to the starting winning opening can be changed on a regular basis (Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2001-70526

However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the attention of the gaming ball entering the taxiway. The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving attention to a gaming ball entering a taxiway.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 can detect the passage of a gaming area in which a gaming ball is formed so as to be able to flow down and at least a part of the gaming balls that have flowed down the gaming area. The detection means, a connecting flow path that connects the gaming area and the detecting means so that the game ball can flow down, and a switching means that can switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path are provided. The detection means detects the passage of at least a part of the gaming balls flowing down the connecting flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by detecting the passage of the gaming balls, and at least. One of the switching means is provided, and the switching means is inserted after the earliest gaming ball, which is the first gaming ball among the plurality of gaming balls that have entered the connecting flow path within a predetermined period. The connecting flow path is switched in such a manner that the following game ball that has been balled makes it easier for the ball to pass through the detection means.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, the attention to the gaming ball entering the taxiway can be improved.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the electric structure of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of a game board. It is a front view of a delay device. FIG. 6 is a cross-sectional view of the delay device in line VII-VII of FIG. FIG. 6 is a partial cross-sectional view of the delay device on line VIII-VIII of FIG. It is a front perspective view of the slide moving member. (A) is a front view of the slide moving member, (b) is a side view of the slide moving member in the direction of arrow Xb of FIG. 10 (a), and (c) is a side view of FIG. 10 (a). It is a top view of the slide moving member in the direction of arrow Xc, and FIG. 10D is a partial cross-sectional view of the slide moving member in line Xd-Xd of FIG. 10A. It is a front perspective view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device. (A) is a front view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device, (b) is a side view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device in the direction of arrow XIIb of FIG. 12 (a), and (c) is 12 (a) is a top view of the sorting device and the second adjusting device in the direction of arrow XIIc in FIG. 12 (a), and (d) is the sorting device and the second adjusting device in the XIId-XIid line of FIG. 12 (a). It is a partial sectional view. It is a front view of a delay device. It is a front view of a delay device. (A) to (c) are cross-sectional views of the second adjusting device in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis. (A) to (d) are cross-sectional views of the functional disk device which is a cross-sectional view of the functional disk device in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device. It is a partial front view of a delay device. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the delay device. It is a partial front perspective view of a game board. (A) is a top view of the fan-shaped member, (b) is a side view of the fan-shaped member in the direction of arrow XXIIIb of FIG. 23 (a), and (c) is a side view of the fan-shaped member of FIG. 23 (a). It is sectional drawing of the fan-shaped member in line XXIIIc, (d) is the bottom view of the fan-shaped member in the direction view of arrow XXIIId of FIG. 23 (b). (A) is a side view of the link member, and (b) is a bottom view of the link member in the direction of arrow XXIVb of FIG. 24 (a). (A) is a top view of a fan-shaped member and a link member, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member and the link member in line XXVb-XXVb of FIG. 25 (a). It is a top view of a fixed floor. (A) is a cross-sectional view of a fixed floor in line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 26, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of a fixed floor in line XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. 26. (A) is a partial top view of the delayed floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delayed floor device in line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a), and (c) is a portion of the delayed floor device. Top view, (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device in line XXVIIId-XXVIIId of FIG. 28 (c). (A) is a top view of the delayed floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delayed floor device in the line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delayed floor device. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device in the XXIXd-XXIXd line of FIG. 29 (c). (A) is a top view of the delayed floor device, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a). (A) is a top view of the delayed floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delayed floor device in the line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delayed floor device. (D) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device on the XXXId-XXXId line of FIG. 31 (c). (A) is a top view of the delayed floor device, (b) is a sectional view of the delayed floor device in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a), and (c) is a top view of the delayed floor device. (D) is a front view of the delayed floor device in the direction of arrow XXXIId in FIG. 32 (c). (A) and (b) are sectional views of the delayed floor device in the line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (c). (A) to (c) are partial front views of the delay device according to the second embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the delay device according to the third embodiment. (A) to (c) are partial front views of the delay device. (A) to (c) are front views of the delay device according to the fourth embodiment. (A) to (c) are front views of the delay device. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 5th Embodiment. It is a partially enlarged front view of a continuous passage groove. (A) is a front view of the stopping device, and (b) is a top view of the stopping device in the direction of arrow XLIb of FIG. 41 (a). (A) and (b) are the front view of the stop portion and the stop device. (A) and (b) are the front view of the stop portion and the stop device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of each part when the ball which entered the 1st prize opening is detected. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the continuous passage groove and the stopping device showing an example of the movement of the sphere in the continuous passage groove. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the continuous passage groove and the stopping device showing an example of the movement of the sphere in the continuous passage groove. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device according to the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate and the lower movable plate. (A) and (b) are partial front views of the delay device in the modified example of the sixth embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate and the lower movable plate. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 7th Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in 8th Embodiment. It is a partial front view of a delay device. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of each part when the ball which entered the V winning opening is detected. It is a partial front view of the delay device in 9th Embodiment. It is a timing chart which shows an example of the operation mode of each part when the ball which entered the V winning opening is detected.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. First, with reference to FIGS. 1 to 33, as a first embodiment, an embodiment when the present invention is applied to a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter, simply referred to as “pachinko machine”) 10 will be described. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

A game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, winning openings 63, 64, etc. is detachably attached to the inner frame 12 from the back surface side. A ball game is performed by a ball (game ball) flowing down in front of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides a ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. In order to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, metal hinges 19 are attached to the upper and lower two places on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the side on which the hinges 19 are provided is used as an opening / closing axis for the front frame. The 14 and the lower plate unit 15 are supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two flat glass sheets is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 16.

In the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project toward the front side, and prize balls, rental balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side of the front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) by the inclination. Further, a frame button 22 is provided on the upper surface of the upper plate 17. The frame button 22 is operated by the player, for example, when changing the stage of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) or changing the effect content of the super reach. To.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the gaming state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window portion 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back side so that the back side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) can be visually recognized from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin, which is chrome-plated, is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without going through a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located below the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface in the central portion thereof. There is. On the right side of the lower plate 50, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front of the game board 13 is arranged.

Inside the operation handle 51, there is a touch sensor 51a for permitting the driving of the ball launch unit 112a, a launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball during the pressing operation period, and a rotation of the operation handle 51. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown) that detects the amount of dynamic operation (rotation position) by the change in electrical resistance. When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the amount of rotation operation, and the resistance value of the variable resistor is changed. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to (launch intensity), whereby the ball is driven into the front of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the firing stop switch 51b are turned off.

A ball pulling lever 52 for operating the ball stored in the lower plate 50 when the ball stored in the lower plate 50 is discharged downward is provided in the lower front portion of the lower plate 50. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened, and the bottom opening is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed in a state where a box (generally referred to as "Senryobako") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 is placed below the lower plate 50. An operation handle 51 is arranged on the right side of the lower plate 50 as described above, and an ashtray 53 is attached to the left side of the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in front view, a large number of nails and windmills (not shown) for ball guidance, rails 61 and 62, and a general prize. It is configured by assembling a mouth 63, a first winning mouth 64, a second winning mouth 640, a first variable winning device 65, a second variable winning device (not shown), a through gate 67, a variable display device unit 80, and the like. The peripheral edge portion is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12 (see FIG. 1). The base plate 60 is made of a light-transmitting resin material, and is formed so that the player can visually recognize various structures arranged on the rear surface side of the base plate 60 from the front side thereof. The general winning opening 63, the first winning opening 64, the second winning opening 640, the first variable winning device 65, the second variable winning device (not shown), and the variable display device unit 80 are formed on the base plate 60 by router processing. It is arranged in the through hole, and is fixed by a tapping screw or the like from the front side of the game board 13.

The front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 in the same manner as the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the front outer circumference of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back of the game board 13. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is the area in front of the game board 13 that is partitioned by the two rails 61 and 62 and the resin outer edge member 73 that connects the rails (a winning opening or the like is arranged and fired). This is the area where the sphere flows down).

The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 4) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center.

In the lower left side of the front view (lower left side of FIG. 2) of the game area, first symbol display devices 37A and 37B including a plurality of LEDs as light emitting means and a 7-segment display are arranged. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display according to each control performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), and mainly display the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B are configured to be used properly depending on whether the ball has won the first winning opening 64 or the second winning opening 640. Specifically, when the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first symbol display device 37A operates, while when the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the first The symbol display device 37B is configured to operate.

Further, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B use LEDs to indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the probable change, the time reduction, or the normal state by the lighting state, or indicate whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the changing state or not by the lighting state. , Whether the stop symbol is a symbol corresponding to the probability variation jackpot, a symbol corresponding to the normal jackpot, or a missed symbol is indicated by the lighting state, the number of reserved balls is indicated by the lighting state, and the round during the jackpot is indicated by the 7-segment display device. Display the number and error. It should be noted that the plurality of LEDs are configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, blue) of the respective LEDs are different, and the combination of the emission colors may suggest various gaming states of the pachinko machine 10 with a small number of LEDs. it can.

In the pachinko machine 10, a lottery is performed when the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 have won a prize. In the lottery, the pachinko machine 10 determines whether or not it is a big hit (big hit lottery), and if it is determined to be a big hit, it also determines the type of the big hit. As the jackpot type determined here, 15R probability variation jackpot, 4R probability variation jackpot, and 15R normal jackpot are prepared. The first symbol display devices 37A and 37B not only indicate whether or not the result of the lottery is a big hit as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a big hit, a symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is shown. ..

Here, the "15R probability variation jackpot" is a probability variation jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds shifts to a high probability state after the jackpot of 15 rounds, and the "4R probability variation jackpot" is a jackpot with a maximum number of rounds of 4 rounds. It is a probabilistic jackpot that shifts to a high probability state after. Further, "15R normal jackpot" is a jackpot in which the maximum number of rounds is 15 rounds, and then the jackpot shifts to a low probability state, and the time is shortened during a predetermined number of fluctuations (for example, 100 fluctuations). is there.

In addition, the "high probability state" refers to a state in which the probability of a jackpot is increased as an added value after the end of the jackpot, that is, during a so-called probability fluctuation (probability change). It is the state of. The high-probability state (during probabilistic change) in the present embodiment includes a game state in which the winning probability of the second symbol, which will be described later, is increased and the ball is likely to win the second winning opening 640. The "low probability state" refers to a state in which the probability change is not in progress, and a state in which the jackpot probability is normal, that is, a state in which the jackpot probability is lower than that in the probability change state. In addition, in the "low probability state", the time saving state (time saving medium) is a state in which the jackpot probability is a normal state, and the jackpot probability remains the same and only the hit probability of the second symbol is increased to increase the second winning opening 640. It refers to the state of the game in which the ball is easy to win. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state, it is a state of the game in which neither the probability change nor the time reduction is performed (the jackpot probability and the hit probability of the second symbol are not increased).

During the probability change and the time reduction, not only the probability of hitting the second symbol increases, but also the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened is changed, which is a longer time than during normal times. Set. When the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (open state), the ball wins the second winning opening 640 as compared with the case where the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (closed state). It will be easy. Therefore, during the probability change or the time reduction, it becomes easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640, and the number of times the big hit lottery is performed can be increased.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is not changed, or in addition to changing the opening time, electric power is applied at one time. The change may be made so that the number of times that the accessory 640a is opened is increased from the normal time. Further, during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability of the second symbol is not changed, and the electric accessory 640a is opened at the time when the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is opened and at one hit. At least one of the times may be changed. In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 and the number of times for opening the electric accessory 640a at one time are not performed, and the second symbol is hit. Only the probability may be changed so as to be higher than the normal one.

In the game area, a plurality of general winning openings 63 are arranged in which 5 to 15 balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls win a prize. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is triggered by winning a prize (starting prize) in the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640, and is synchronized with the variable display in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, and has a third symbol. It is composed of a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter simply abbreviated as "display device") that performs variable display, and an LED that variablely displays the second symbol triggered by the passage of a sphere of a through gate 67. A second symbol display device (not shown) is provided. Further, in the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of a large 9-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 (see FIG. 4), for example, the upper, middle, and lower 3 Two symbol columns are displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols (third symbol), and these third symbols are horizontally scrolled for each symbol row, and the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. It has become like. In the third symbol display device 81 of the present embodiment, the game state is displayed by the control of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4), whereas the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B display the game state. A decorative display is performed according to the display of the symbol display devices 37A and 37B. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81.

The second symbol display device alternately lights the “○” symbol and the “×” symbol as the display symbol (second symbol (not shown)) each time the sphere passes through the through gate 67 for a predetermined time. It is a variable display. When the pachinko machine 10 detects that the ball has passed through the through gate 67, a winning lottery is performed. As a result of the winning lottery, if it is a winning, the symbol "○" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the second symbol. Further, if the result of the winning lottery is a failure, the symbol "x" is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device after the variation display of the third symbol.

In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display in the second symbol display device is stopped at a predetermined symbol (in the present embodiment, the symbol “○”), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be activated (opened) only.

The time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter during the probability change or the time reduction than when the game state is normal. As a result, during the probability change and the time reduction, the variation display of the second symbol is performed in a short time, so that the winning lottery can be performed more than during the normal time. Therefore, since the chances of winning in the winning lottery increase, it is possible to give the player many opportunities to open the electric accessory 640a of the second winning opening 640. Therefore, it is possible to make it easy for the ball to win the second winning opening 640 during the probability change and the time saving.

In addition, during the probability change or the time reduction, the second winning opening 640 can be reached during the probability change or the time reduction by other methods such as increasing the opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a per hit. When the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize, the time required for the variable display of the second symbol may be constant regardless of the gaming state. On the other hand, when the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is set to be shorter than the normal time during the probability change or the time reduction, the hit probability may be constant regardless of the gaming state, or one hit. The opening time and the number of times of opening the electric accessory 640a may be constant regardless of the gaming state.

The through gate 67 is assembled to the game board on the right side in the area below the variable display device unit 80, and among the balls fired on the game board, a part of the balls flowing down to the right side of the game board can pass through. It is configured in. When the ball passes through the through gate 67, a winning lottery for the second symbol is performed. After the winning lottery, variable display is performed on the second symbol display device, and if the winning lottery result is a winning symbol, a symbol "○" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display, and if the winning lottery result is incorrect. For example, a symbol of "x" is displayed as a stop symbol of the variable display.

The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate 67 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and on the second symbol holding lamp (not shown). Is also lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the second symbol is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device as in the present embodiment, as well as the first symbol display devices 37A, 37B and the third. It may be performed by using a part of the symbol display device 81. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls for the passage of the balls of the through gate 67 is not limited to 4, but may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, the number of through gates 67 assembled is not limited to one, and may be a plurality (for example, two). Further, the assembly position of the through gate 67 is not limited to the right side of the variable display device unit 80, and may be, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol holding lamp.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first winning opening 64 in which a ball can win a prize is arranged. When the ball wins the first winning opening 64, the first winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the first winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and the display according to the lottery result is shown by the first symbol display device 37A.

On the other hand, on the right side of the front view of the first winning opening 64, a second winning opening 640 in which the ball can win is arranged. When the ball wins the second winning opening 640, the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the main control device 110 is caused by the turning on of the second winning opening switch. A big hit lottery is made in (see FIG. 4), and a display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B.

The number of times the ball has passed through the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is held up to a total of four times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display devices 37A and 37B. Further, for example, the larger the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64, the easier it is to select a shorter period as the variable display period on the display device. Similarly, the second winning opening 640 is also controlled.

Further, each of the first winning opening 64 and the second winning opening 640 is also one of the winning openings in which five balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls are won. In the present embodiment, the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640 are configured to be the same. , The number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and the number of prize balls paid out when a ball wins in the second winning opening 640, for example, a ball to the first winning opening 64 The number of prize balls to be paid out when a prize is won may be three, and the number of prize balls to be paid out when a ball is won to the second winning opening 640 may be configured to be five.

An electric accessory 640a is attached to the second winning opening 640. The electric accessory 640a is configured to be openable and closable, and normally the electric accessory 640a is in a closed state (reduced state), making it difficult for the ball to win a prize in the second winning opening 640. On the other hand, when the symbol "○" is displayed on the second symbol display device as a result of the variation display of the second symbol performed when the ball passes through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged). State), and the ball is in a state where it is easy to win a prize in the second winning opening 640.

As described above, during the probability change and the time reduction, the probability of hitting the second symbol is higher than during the normal time, and the time required for the variation display of the second symbol is short. ”Is easy to display, and the number of times the electric accessory 640a is in the open state (enlarged state) increases. Further, during the probability change and the time reduction, the time during which the electric accessory 640a is released is also longer than during the normal operation. Therefore, during the probability change and the time reduction, it is possible to create a state in which the ball can easily win the second winning opening 640 as compared with the normal time.

Here, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is higher when the ball wins the second winning opening 640 than when the ball wins the first winning opening 64. It is set. On the other hand, the first winning opening 64 does not have an electric accessory as in the second winning opening 640, and the ball is in a state where it can always win a prize.

Therefore, in normal times, the electric accessory attached to the second winning opening 640 is often in a closed state, and it is difficult to win the second winning opening 640. Then, the ball is fired so that the ball passes to the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (so-called "left-handed"), and by winning the first winning opening 64, many chances of a big hit lottery are obtained and the big hit is obtained. It is advantageous for the player to aim at that.

On the other hand, during the probability change or the time reduction, by passing the ball through the through gate 67, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second winning opening 640 is likely to be opened, and the second winning opening 640 is likely to be won. Therefore, the ball is launched toward the second winning opening 640 so that the ball passes to the right of the variable display device 80 (so-called "right-handed"), and the electric accessory is opened by passing through the through gate 67. At the same time, it is advantageous for the player to aim for a 15R probability variation jackpot by winning the second winning opening 640.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment fires a ball at the player according to the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 (whether it is in the probabilistic change, in the time saving, or in the normal state). You can change the method of "left-handed" and "right-handed". Therefore, the player can enjoy the game because the way of hitting the ball can be changed.

A first variable winning device 65 is arranged on the upper right side of the first winning opening 64, and a specific winning opening 65a is provided in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the jackpot lottery performed due to winning the first winning slot 64 or the second winning slot 640 becomes a jackpot, after a predetermined time (variable time) has elapsed, the jackpot stop symbol is displayed. The first symbol display device 37A or the first symbol display device 37B is turned on so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state transitions to a special gaming state (big hit) where the ball is easy to win. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

The specific winning opening 65a is closed after a lapse of a predetermined time, and after the closing, the specific winning opening 65a is opened again for a predetermined time. The opening / closing operation of the specific winning opening 65a can be repeated up to 15 times (15 rounds), for example. The state in which this opening / closing operation is performed is a form of a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player, and a larger amount of prize balls than usual is paid out to the player as a game value (game value). Is done.

Specifically, the first variable winning device 65 includes a front-view triangular opening / closing plate that covers the specific winning opening 65a, and a large opening solenoid (shown) for driving the opening / closing to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. It is equipped with. The specific winning opening 65a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. At the time of a big hit, the large opening solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right to temporarily form an open state in which the ball can easily win a prize in the specific winning opening 65a. It operates so as to alternately repeat the state of.

The special gaming state is not limited to the above-described form. A large opening that opens and closes separately from the specific winning opening 65a is provided in the game area, and when the LED corresponding to the big hit is turned on in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the specific winning opening 65a is opened for a predetermined time. A special game in which a large opening provided separately from the specific winning opening 65a is opened a predetermined number of times for a predetermined time when the ball wins a prize in the specific winning opening 65a while the specific winning opening 65a is open. It may be formed as a state. Further, the specific winning opening 65a is not limited to one, and one or two or more (for example, three) may be arranged, and the arrangement position is also the lower right side of the first winning opening 64 or the first. Not limited to the lower left side of the winning opening 64, for example, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 may be used.

In the right corner on the lower side of the game board 13, a sticking space K1 for sticking a certificate stamp, an identification label, etc. is provided, and the certificate stamp, etc. attached to the sticking space K1 is a small window of the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through 35 (see FIG. 1).

The game board 13 is provided with a first out port 71. A ball that flows down the game area and does not win any of the winning openings 63, 64, 65a, 640 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the first out opening 71. The first out opening 71 is arranged below the first winning opening 64.

A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged. In the present embodiment, one of the wind turbines (referred to as a movable member 310) is arranged on the upper left side of the game board 13 when viewed from the front, and is shown in FIG.

As shown in FIG. 3, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the rear surface side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc. is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This sealing seal is made of a brittle material, and if the sealing seal is to be peeled off in order to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if the board boxes 100 and 102 are forcibly opened, the box base side and the box cover are used. Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls are appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erase switch 122. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 4). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch 122 is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In the main control device 110, the MPU 201 is used to perform main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display settings in the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B and the third symbol display device 81, and a lottery of display results in the second symbol display device. To execute.

In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The RAM 203 includes various areas, counters, flags, a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags, counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which values are stored. The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. Writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (not shown) when the power is cut off, and restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (not shown) at the time of turning on the power. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (not shown) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 is centered on the lower side of the payout control device 111, the voice lamp control device 113, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, the second symbol display device, the second symbol hold lamp, and the opening / closing plate of the specific winning opening 65a. A solenoid 209 consisting of a large opening solenoid for driving the opening and closing and a solenoid for driving an electric accessory (including a drive motor 5521, solenoids 6521, 6522, 8521, 8522) is connected to the front side, and the MPU 201 is connected. , Various commands and control signals are transmitted to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group (not shown), a sensor group including a slide position detection sensor S and a rotation position detection sensor R, and a RAM erasing switch circuit 253 provided in the power supply device 115, which will be described later. Is connected, and the MPU 201 executes various processes based on the signals output from the various switches 208 and the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the RAM erase switch circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

The RAM 213 of the payout control device 111, like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as, I / O, etc. are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU211, an NMI interrupt process (not shown) as a power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a payout motor 216, a launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. .. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the operation is performed on condition that the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch of the ball is off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the rotation operation amount (rotation position) of the handle 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the operation amount of the operation handle 51.

The audio lamp control device 113 is an audio output in an audio output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an on / off output in a lamp display device (illumination units 29 to 33, indicator lamp 34, etc.) 227, and a variation effect (variation). It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display) and the advance notice effect. The arithmetic unit MPU 221 has a ROM 222 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221 and a RAM 223 that is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, other devices 228, a frame button 22, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively. The other device 228 includes a drive motor 472.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 based on various commands (variation pattern command, stop type command, etc.) received from the main control device 110, and commands the determined display mode. The display control device 114 is notified by (display fluctuation pattern command, display stop type command, etc.). Further, the voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the frame button 22, and when the frame button 22 is operated by the player, the stage displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed or the super reach can be changed. The display control device 114 is instructed to change the effect content of the time. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the rear surface image is an image displayed on the rear surface side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The display control device 114 displays various images on the third symbol display device 81 according to a command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113.

Further, the voice lamp control device 113 receives a command (display command) indicating the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the display control device 114. Based on the display command received from the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs the voice corresponding to the display content according to the display content of the third symbol display device 81 from the voice output device 226, and also outputs the voice corresponding to the display content. The lighting and extinguishing of the lamp display device 227 are controlled according to the display content.

In the display control device 114, the voice lamp control device 113 and the third symbol display device 81 are connected, and based on the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the third symbol variation effect of the third symbol display device 81 and the like are performed. It controls the display. Further, the display control device 114 appropriately transmits a display command for notifying the display content of the third symbol display device 81 to the voice lamp control device 113. The voice lamp control device 113 outputs voice from the voice output device 226 according to the display content indicated by this display command, thereby matching the display of the third symbol display device 81 with the voice output from the voice output device 226. be able to.

The power supply device 115 is provided with a power supply unit 251 for supplying power to each part of the pachinko machine 10, a power failure monitoring circuit 252 for monitoring power failure due to a power failure, and a RAM erasing switch 122 (see FIG. 3). It has an erasing switch circuit 253. The power supply unit 251 is a device that supplies the required operating voltage to each of the control devices 110 to 114 and the like through a power supply path (not shown). As an outline, the power supply unit 251 takes in a voltage of 24 volt AC supplied from the outside, and has a voltage of 12 volt for driving various switches such as various switches 208, a solenoid such as a solenoid 209, and a motor. A 5 volt voltage for logic, a backup voltage for RAM backup, and the like are generated, and these 12 volt voltage, 5 volt voltage, and backup voltage are supplied to each control device 110 to 114 and the like.

The power failure monitoring circuit 252 is a circuit for outputting a power failure signal SG1 to each NMI terminal of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 and the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. The power failure monitoring circuit 252 monitors the DC stable 24 volt voltage, which is the maximum voltage output from the power supply unit 251 and determines that a power failure (power cutoff, power supply cutoff) has occurred when this voltage becomes less than 22 volt. Then, the power failure signal SG1 is output to the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111. By the output of the power failure signal SG1, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 recognize the occurrence of the power failure and execute the NMI interrupt process. The power supply unit 251 outputs a voltage of 5 volts, which is the drive voltage of the control system, for a sufficient period of time to execute the NMI interrupt process even after the voltage of DC stable 24 volts becomes less than 22 volts. Is configured to maintain a normal value. Therefore, the main control device 110 and the payout control device 111 can normally execute and complete the NMI interrupt process (not shown).

The RAM erase switch circuit 253 is a circuit for outputting the RAM erase signal SG2 for clearing the backup data to the main control device 110 when the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 3) is pressed. When the RAM erase signal SG2 is input when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on, the main control device 110 clears the backup data, and the payout control device 111 issues a payout initialization command for clearing the backup data. It transmits to the device 111.

Next, the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5 to 21. FIG. 5 is an exploded perspective view of the back of the game board 13. FIG. 5 shows a state in which the delay device in which the ball flowing down the game area and flowing into the first winning opening 64 flows down is disassembled from the game board 13.

The ball that has flowed into the first winning opening 64 flows down the inside of the delay device 300, is thrown from the detection port 312d arranged at the lower end thereof, and passes through a detection sensor (not shown), so that a lottery is performed. That is, the lottery has not yet been performed from the time the ball enters the first winning opening 64 until it passes through the detection sensor.

Next, the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7. FIG. 6 is a front view of the delay device 300, and FIG. 7 is a cross-sectional view of the delay device 300 on the VII-VII line of FIG. Note that in FIG. 7, the game board 13 is partially illustrated for ease of understanding.

As shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a groove is formed in the delay device 300, and the groove and the game board 13 that hits the surface form a path through which the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 flows down. A speed reducing device 320 having a main body member 310 and a sliding moving member 321 that slides and moves with respect to the main body member 310, a first adjusting device 330 for adjusting the return operation of the speed reducing device 320, and rotation with respect to the main body member 310. It mainly includes a distribution device 340 that operates and distributes balls to different flow paths, and a second adjustment device 350 that is coaxial with the rotation axis of the distribution device 340 and adjusts the return operation of the distribution device 340.

The main body member 310 is a member that constitutes a groove in which the side arranged to face the game board 13 is opened, and the first groove 311 and the first groove 311 in which the ball entering from the first winning opening 64 first flows down. A path extending laterally from the connecting portion between the second groove 312 extending vertically downward from the lower end of the passage 311 and the connecting portion between the first groove 311 and the second groove 312 and longer than the extending length of the second groove 312. A third groove 313 connected to the detection port 312d and a support plate extending in a plate shape from the front side of the bottom plate opening 311b toward the lower side of the first groove 311 and supporting the slide moving member 321. A unit 314 and a section 314 are mainly provided.

The first groove 311 is a ball in the main passage 311a that lowers the ball entered from the first winning opening 64 in a straight line diagonally downward, and in the central portion of the bottom plate of the main passage 311a in the depth direction (the central portion in the depth direction of the ball). The bottom plate opening 311b, which is an opening formed with a width shorter than the radius of the above, and the top plate opening 311c, which allows the wind turbine member 322 of the speed reducer 320 to be extended inward in the top plate portion, and the top plate portion opening 311c. A pair of bearings 311d, which are arranged in pairs in the depth direction with the plate opening 311c in between, and which serve as bearings for the wind turbine member 322, and a back recessed in a size that allows the ball to roll from the main passage 311a to the back side. Mainly includes a side recessed portion 311e.

The recessed portion 311e on the back side is a recessed portion connected near the entrance of the main passage 311a, and the bottom surface is set to the same height as the bottom surface of the main passage 311a near the entrance, and the main passage 311a is directed toward the downstream side. It is configured in a manner of ascending and tilting.

The second groove 312 is a recess formed in the plate portion on the back side (back side in FIG. 6) and is divided into a contact wall 312a that gives a load to bounce the ball that has reached the lower end of the first groove 311 in the left-right direction. The recessed portion 312b, which is recessed in an arc shape so that the device 340 can be arranged, and the receiving wall portion 312c, which receives the ball flowing in from the third groove 313 and acts as a detent for the sorting device 340, and throws the ball. It mainly includes a detection port 312d and a side wall portion 312e that is arranged to face the recessed portion 312b.

The support plate portion 314 includes a pair of elongated holes 314a through which the guide rod portion 321c of the slide moving member 321 is inserted. The elongated hole 314a is configured in the same direction as the elongated hole 331a of the first adjusting device 330 (consisting of overlapping in the front-rear direction).

The speed reducing device 320 mainly includes a slide moving member 321 that slides when the ball passes through the first groove 311 and a wind turbine member 322 that is meshed with the slide moving member 321 and is brought into contact with the ball to rotate. Prepare for.

The slide moving member 321 is guided by the elongated hole 314a of the main body member 310 and the elongated hole 331a of the first adjusting device 330, which will be described later, so that the slide moving member 321 can operate linearly.

The wind turbine member 322 has a main body gear portion 322a having a gear portion that is pivotally supported by the bearing portion 311d and meshed with the slide moving member 321 at the rear end portion, and the wind turbine member 322 radially from the shaft portion of the main body gear portion 322a. It mainly includes a first extending wing portion 322b and a second extending wing portion 322c which are extended in pairs and form an angle of 90 ° with each other.

As shown in FIG. 7, the first extending vane portion 322b and the second extending vane portion 322c are configured so as to be able to project from the top plate opening 311c toward the inside of the first groove 311a, and at the same time. The first extending vane portion 322b is arranged at a position where it can come into contact with the ball in the initial state in which the slide moving member 321 is maintained at the lower end position by gravity when the slide moving member 321 is brought into contact with the ball flowing down the groove 311a.

The second extending vane portion 322c includes a convex portion 322c1 of the tip end portion in the extending direction, which is projected in a tapered shape in a direction close to the first groove 311 from the state shown in FIG. The convex portion 322c1 acts in a manner of separating the spheres when the spheres flow down the first groove in succession.

The first adjusting device 330 includes a main body plate member 331 which is a plate-shaped member sandwiching the main body member 310 between the game board 13 and a main body gear portion 322a of the wind turbine member 322 while being pivotally supported by the main body plate member 331. It mainly includes a rotary urging device 332 having a fixed gear portion 332a to be meshed with each other. The gear ratio of the fixed gear portion 332a to the main body gear portion 322a of the wind turbine member 322 is about 2. That is, as the wind turbine member 322 rotates by 90 °, the rotary urging device 332 rotates by 45 °.

The main body plate member 331 is provided with a pair of elongated holes 331a for guiding the slide moving member 321 and is also formed on the support plate portion 314 in which the elongated holes 314a having the same shape are arranged to face each other. The slide moving member 321 is configured to be slidable in the straight direction by being guided by these elongated holes 314a and 331a.

The rotary urging device 332 mainly includes a fixed gear portion 332a pivotally supported by the main body plate member 331 and a functional disk device 332b fixed to the fixed gear portion 332a at the axial end and having a recessed groove inside. Prepare for.

The sorting device 340 is a device that is pivotally supported by the central hole 345 in the main body member 310 on the right side of the second groove 312 of the main body member 310, and is a sphere that flows in from the second groove 312b in the initial state shown in FIG. The first wall portion 341 that receives the first wall portion 341, the second wall portion 342 that is arranged above the first wall portion 341 with one sphere separated from each other, and the sorting device 340 from the tip of the second wall portion 342. The arc wall portion 343 formed along the arc shape centered on the rotation axis, the concave portion 312 formed from the disk shape, and the concave portion 312 of the second groove 312 are arranged at the surface position and on the back side of the second groove 312. It mainly includes a complementary plate portion 344 formed in a manner of complementing a part of the plate portion, and a central hole 345 which is a through hole pivotally supported by the main body member 310.

The second wall portion 342 includes a tip convex portion 342a that is radially projected on the extending tip. The sphere that abuts on the arc wall portion 343 and flows down by the tip convex portion 342a can apply a load counterclockwise (counterclockwise in FIG. 6) to the sorting device 340, which is intended by the action of the sphere. It is possible to prevent the distribution device 340 from returning to the initial position side.

The initial position of the sorting device 340 is defined by the stopper portion S1 projecting rearward of the game board 13. That is, at the initial position, the tip of the arc wall portion 343 is stopped by the stopper portion S1, so that the sorting device 340 is stopped. The driving force for rotating the sorting device 340 clockwise in the front view (clockwise in FIG. 6) is generated by the second adjusting device 350.

The second adjusting device 350 is a device fixed to the complementary plate portion 344 of the sorting device 340 and has a flow path in which the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB that changes the center of gravity is movable. It will be described later in 15.

FIG. 8 is a partial cross-sectional view of the delay device 300 on line VIII-VIII of FIG. As shown in FIG. 8, the slide moving member 321 is arranged at the central portion of the main passage 311a. As a result, when the slide moving member 321 projects inside the main passage 311a, the convex portion 321a1 can be reliably brought into contact with the sphere flowing down the first groove 311.

The sphere flowing down the passage 311a may flow into the recessed portion 311e on the back side due to its shape. The recessed portion 311e on the back side has a return wall portion 311e1 configured so as to be closer to the main passage 311a side toward the downstream side (left side in FIG. 8). As a result, the ball that has flowed into the recessed portion 311e on the back side cannot be returned to the main passage 311a, and it is possible to prevent the ball from being clogged.

Next, the slide moving member 321 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10. 9 is a front perspective view of the slide moving member 321. FIG. 10A is a front view of the slide moving member 321. FIG. 10B is a view in the direction of arrow Xb in FIG. 10A. 10 (c) is a side view of the slide moving member 321, FIG. 10 (c) is a top view of the slide moving member 321 in the direction of arrow Xc of FIG. 10 (a), and FIG. 10 (d) is a view of FIG. 10 (a). It is a partial cross-sectional view of the slide moving member 321 in the Xd-Xd line of.

As shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, the slide moving member 321 includes a long plate-shaped first overhanging plate portion 321a that overhangs the central portion of the main passage 311a of the delay device 300 in a plane parallel to the main passage. The second overhanging plate portion 321b, which is continuously provided at one end of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and is extended downward with respect to the extending direction of the first overhanging plate portion 321a, and each overhanging plate portion 321b. A pair of round bar-shaped guide rods 321c extending in parallel at both ends of the protruding plates 321a and 321b in the long direction, and a depth direction with respect to the respective overhanging plates 321a and 321b (paper surface in FIG. 10A). It mainly includes a rack gear portion 321d extending in a straight line and forming rack gear teeth at a position offset in the vertical direction).

The first overhanging plate portion 321a is a plate portion extending in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the main passage 311a in the assembled state (see FIG. 6), and is arranged at intervals of the diameters of the spheres. A convex portion 321a1 is provided so as to be convex from the upper surface in a semicircular shape. When the convex portion 321a1 comes into contact with the sphere, the velocity of the sphere passing through the main passage 311a (see FIG. 8) is reduced.

The second overhanging plate portion 321b includes a convex portion 321b1 that has the same function as the convex portion 321a1, and an inclined surface 321b2 (see FIG. 10D) that inclines downward toward the back side. When the second overhanging plate portion 321b overhangs the inside of the main passage 311a, the inclined surface 321b2 makes it easy for the flowing ball to face the back side recessed portion 311e (see FIG. 8). Therefore, the passage period of the sphere can be lengthened as compared with the case where the sphere flows down in a straight line along the extending direction of the passage 311a.

Since the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the second overhanging plate portion 321b have different extension directions, the first extending plate portion 321a overhangs the inside of the main passage 311a, while the second overhanging plate portion 321b is a book. A state arranged outside the passage 311a can be formed. That is, the degree of deceleration of the sphere can be changed by arranging the slide moving member 321. The details will be described later.

The guide rod portion 321c is inserted into the elongated hole 331a of the first adjusting device 330 (see FIG. 6). As a result, the slide moving member 321 is supported so as to be slidable along the extending direction of the elongated hole 331a.

The rack gear portion 321d is extended in parallel with the extending direction of the elongated hole 331a, and the rack gear teeth are meshed with the main body gear portion 322a of the wind turbine member 322 (see FIG. 6). As a result, the wind turbine member 322 rotates, so that the rack gear portion 321d is slid in the linear direction (extending direction of the elongated hole 331a).

Next, the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350 will be described with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12. 11 is a front perspective view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350, FIG. 12A is a front view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350, and FIG. 12B is a diagram. 12 (a) is a side view of the sorting device 340 and the second adjusting device 350 in the direction of arrow XIIb of FIG. 12 (a), and FIG. 12 (c) shows the sorting device 340 and the second adjustment in the direction of arrow XIIc of FIG. 12 (a). It is a top view of the apparatus 350, and FIG. 12D is a partial cross-sectional view of the sorting apparatus 340 and the second adjusting apparatus 350 in the XIId-XIid line of FIG. 12A. Note that FIG. 12D shows a state in which the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is on the deceleration wall portion 351d.

As shown in FIGS. 11 and 12, the front side of the complementary plate portion 344 is opened except for the portion occupied by each wall portion 341, 342, 343, and is used as a side wall of the passage through which the ball flows down (see FIG. 6). ..

The second adjusting device 350 is a center of gravity changing device 351 fixed to the back surface side of the complementary plate portion 344 and having a recessed flow path for flowing the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB inside, and a recessed portion of the center of gravity changing device 351. A lid member 352 fixed to the center of gravity changing device 351 in a manner of covering the lid is mainly provided.

The center of gravity changing device 351 includes a disk-shaped main body member 351a having a shallow recessed portion, a recessed groove portion 351b in which the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is recessed in the main body member 351a with a width that allows the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB to flow down, and the recessed groove portion. A partition wall 351c that allows the passage of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB only at the tip, and a deceleration mechanism that extends to one side of the flow path partitioned by the partition wall 351c and decelerates the flow of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere. It is oscillatingly supported by one end (lower end of FIG. 12 (a)) of the deceleration wall portion 351d and the partition wall 351c, and is oscillatingly supported in one direction of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB (FIG. 12 (a) rightward direction). ) Is mainly provided with a directional valve 351e that allows only passage of.

The position of the center of gravity of the second adjusting device 350 excluding the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is set to be the same as the center of rotation. That is, the stable posture of the distribution device 340 is determined by the position where the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is arranged with respect to the center of rotation.

Here, the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB is composed of a sphere having a weight equal to or less than the weight of the sphere. For example, if the weight of the sphere is 5 grams, it is desirable to select a spherical object having a weight of about 2 to 4 grams as the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. As a result, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the forces of the ball flowing into the sorting device 340 and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB are balanced, and the sorting device 340 can be rotated by the weight of the sphere.

The deceleration mechanism of the deceleration wall portion 351d will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (d). The deceleration wall portion 351d is a portion that supports both sides of the sphere from below and rolls the sphere in that state. As shown in FIG. 12 (d), the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB does not roll at the portion (the central portion in the left-right direction in FIG. 12 (d)) where the length from the rotation axis is the maximum diameter (radius r1). At a portion where the length from the rotation axis has a radius (radius r'1) shorter than the maximum diameter, the ball comes into contact with the deceleration wall portion 351d and rolls. Therefore, when the rotation speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is the same, the speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is decelerated as compared with the speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB when the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB rolls on the partition wall 351c (rolls with a radius r1). It is possible to slow down the speed of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB when rolling (rolling with a radius r'1) on the wall portion 351d.

That is, the translational movement distance per rotation of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB can be shortened. When the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is decelerated by this method, the deceleration can be performed while maintaining the rotational energy of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB, so that the braking is too effective and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB stops at an unintended position. The situation can be avoided.

Further, since the degree of deceleration of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB can be arbitrarily set by setting the contact position (rolling radius of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB) between the deceleration wall portion 351d and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB, a special material (high friction) can be set. The pseudo center of gravity sphere GB can be sufficiently decelerated even when the forming distance of the deceleration wall portion 351d is short.

Next, the operation of the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. 13 and 14 are front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 13 shows a state immediately after the sphere has flowed through the main body member 310 in the initial state shown in FIG. 6, and FIG. 14 shows a state immediately after the sphere has flowed through the main body member 310 in the state of FIG. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the sorting device 340 changes its posture between the initial state (see FIG. 6) and the changed state (see FIG. 13) due to the passage of the sphere, and the speed reducing device 320 has the number of passing spheres. The state (arrangement in the height direction) changes depending on the initial state (see FIG. 6), the intermediate state (see FIG. 13), and the ascending state (see FIG. 14).

Each state of the speed reducer 320 will be described. When the speed reducing device 320 is in the intermediate state, the slide moving member 321 moves and is arranged at a position where the convex portion 321a projects from the bottom surface of the main passage 311a. Therefore, in this state, the sphere that has flowed into the main passage 311a comes into contact with the convex portion 321a and flows down while being decelerated. In the intermediate state, the second overhang plate portion 321b is arranged outside the first groove 311.

When the speed reducing device 320 is in the raised state, the slide moving member 321 further overhangs the inside of the main passage 311a, and the second overhanging plate portion 321b is arranged above the bottom surface of the back side recessed portion 311e. Since the second overhanging plate portion 321b has an inclined surface 321b (see FIG. 10) on the upper surface, the sphere flowing into the main passage 311a in this state is a recessed portion 311e on the back side along the inclination of the inclined surface 321b. After flowing to the lower end of the recessed portion 311e on the back side, it merges with the main passage 311a again.

When the speed reducing device 320 is in the raised state, the road width (width in the height direction) of the main passage 31a is narrowed by the first overhang plate portion 321a projecting inside the main passage 311a. Further, in the present embodiment, the slide moving member 321 slides in a direction in which the slide moving member 321 is inclined with respect to the extending direction of the passage 311a, so that the contact wall 312a of the second groove 312 and the first overhanging plate portion 321a The width with the end is narrowed. Therefore, the deceleration of the ball can be performed by narrowing the road width of the main passage 311a and increasing the flow path resistance by narrowing the road width of the connecting portion between the first groove 311 and the second groove 312.

Each state of the sorting device 340 will be described. When the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the ball flowing into the sorting device 340 is received by the first wall portion 341. Then, the distribution device 340 rotates to the changed state (see FIG. 13) due to the weight of the sphere, and the sphere flows into the detection port 312d.

Here, in the present embodiment, since the side wall portion 312e is configured to project above the first wall portion 341 (overhang at a height equal to or greater than the radius of the sphere), the sphere flows into the third groove 313 side. Is suppressed. Therefore, when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state, the sphere that has flowed into the sorting device 340 can flow down vertically with a high probability (it can flow down in the shortest period of time).

When the sorting device 340 is in a changed state (see FIG. 13), the sphere flowing into the sorting device 340 comes into contact with the arc wall portion 343 and flows into the third groove 313. Since the arc wall portion 343 is formed from an arc shape centered on the center hole 345 of the sorting device 340, a load when a sphere collides is applied in a direction toward the rotation axis of the sorting device 340. It is suppressed that a load in the rotation direction is applied to the sorting device 340.

Therefore, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the sorting device 340 unintentionally returns to the initial state due to the impact of the ball flowing into the sorting device 340 in the changing state on the sorting device 340, and the sorting device 340 changes for a predetermined period. It can be ensured that the condition is maintained.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, adjustment of the posture change timing of the sorting device 340 will be described. 15 (a) to 15 (c) are cross-sectional views of the second adjusting device 350 in a plane orthogonal to the rotation axis. 15 (a) to 15 (c) show that the internal structure of the center of gravity changing device 351 is visible, and FIG. 15 (a) shows the case where the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6). In FIG. 15B, the case where the sorting device 340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 13) is shown, and in FIG. 15C, the state immediately before the sorting device 340 returns from the changed state to the initial state. Is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the second adjusting device 350, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB moves inside the recessed groove portion 351b as the posture changes. As a result, the position of the center of gravity of the second adjusting device 350 changes, and the second adjusting device 350 repeats stopping and rotating.

The operation of the second adjusting device 350 will be described. As shown in FIG. 15A, when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB is arranged on the right side of the central hole 345. A load is applied in the direction of rotating the second adjusting device 350 clockwise in the front view (clockwise in FIG. 15). As a result, even if the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) vibrates slightly, the sorting device 340 can maintain the posture at the initial position.

As shown in FIG. 15B, when the sorting device 340 is in the changed state (see FIG. 13), the inclination formed by the partition wall 351c and the directional valve 351e is inclined downward toward the left. At the same time, the inclination formed by the deceleration wall portion 351d is set to be downwardly inclined toward the right. Therefore, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB rolls on the upper side of the partition wall 351c and flows to the left along the arrow L1, falls on the deceleration wall portion 351d at the end, rolls on the upper side of the deceleration wall portion 351d, and the arrow L2. It operates to flow to the right along.

As a result, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB can be sent to the left of the central hole 345, so that the second adjusting device 350 is rotated counterclockwise in front view (counterclockwise in FIG. 15) by the weight of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. A load is applied in the direction. As a result, the sorting device 340 can be maintained in a changed state for a certain period of time (the period until the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB passes to the right of the central hole 345).

The period for maintaining the changed state can be arbitrarily changed depending on the degree of deceleration of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB by the deceleration wall portion 351d. For example, if the flow speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is halved by the deceleration wall portion 351d, the period for maintaining the distribution device 340 in the changed state can be doubled.

As the mode of the deceleration wall portion 351d, various modes are exemplified. For example, a method of decelerating the translational movement speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB by reducing the radius of gyration at the point where the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB comes into contact with the deceleration wall portion 351d is exemplified (see FIG. 12 (d)). That is, by receiving the rotation of the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB not at the maximum diameter portion (center portion) but at the portion where the diameter becomes smaller (near the end portion), the translational movement distance per rotation of the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB is obtained. This is a method of shortening and decelerating the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB without reducing the number of rotations. According to this method, the translational speed of the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB after passing through the deceleration wall portion 351d can be increased as compared with the case of reducing the rotation speed of the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB.

Therefore, immediately after reaching the right end of the deceleration wall portion 351d, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB can be thrown to the right at a large speed, and immediately after the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB reaches the right end of the deceleration wall portion 351d, FIG. It is possible to shorten the period until the state changes to the state shown in (c).

As shown in FIG. 15 (c), the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB passes through the directional valve 351e before and after the state of the distribution device 340 changes from the changed state to the initial state. As shown in FIG. 15C, the directional valve 351e is configured to allow the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB to flow to the right, while preventing the pseudo-center-of-gravity sphere GB from flowing to the left. This makes it possible to prevent the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB from bouncing back to the left of the central hole 345.

In the present embodiment, the period from when the sorting device 340 changes to the changed state to when it returns to the initial state is a variable period which is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 2) is four. It is set to a longer period than (shortest fluctuation period).

Therefore, when a ball is inserted into the distribution device when the distribution device 340 is in the initial state, and the ball enters the detection port 312d (see FIG. 6), the number of reserved balls in the winning port 64 becomes four. In addition, the balls that have entered the distribution device 340 before the end of the fluctuation that is started after that (before the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is vacant) are all distributed to the third groove 313 (see FIG. 13). Then, while the ball passes through the third groove 313, the fluctuation of 1 of the winning opening 64 ends, and the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 becomes vacant, so that the winning opening 64 overflows (the state in which the number of reserved balls is the maximum). By entering the ball into the detection port 312d, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even though the ball has entered.

The degree of deceleration of the ball in the third groove 313 can be set by various methods. For example, the ball may be decelerated by attaching a high-friction sheet to the bottom wall on which the ball rolls.

Here, as a first setting example, the period until the balls pass through the third groove 313 is easily selected when, for example, the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 4, the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period). By setting the period longer than that, when two balls enter the sorting device 340 in succession, the second ball enters the detection port 312d and the second ball enters the third groove. The period from passing through 313 to entering the detection port 312d can be made longer than the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is four. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

Further, as a second setting example, the period until the ball passes through the third groove 313 is, for example, a variable period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 3, and the number of reserved balls is 4. By setting a period longer than the total period of the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) that is likely to be selected in the case of individual balls, even if two balls are continuously inserted into the third groove 313, one ball is inserted. Since the two fluctuations are digested in the period from when the eyeball enters the detection port 312d until the second ball passes through the third groove 313 and enters the detection port 312d, after that, Even if two balls enter the detection port 312d, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

Next, the functional disk device 332b will be described with reference to FIG. In the functional disk device 332b, the position of the center of gravity changes as in the case of the second adjusting device 350 by moving the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB arranged between the functional disk device 332b and the main body plate member 331 (see FIG. 7). It is a device that changes the direction of the load applied to the 332b.

16 (a) to 16 (d) are cross-sectional views of the functional disk device 332b, which is a cross-sectional view of the functional disk device 332b in a plane perpendicular to the rotation axis. FIG. 16A shows the case where the speed reducer 320 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), and FIG. 16B shows immediately after the speed reducer 320 changes from the initial state to the intermediate state (see FIG. 13). 16 (c) shows immediately after the speed reducer 320 changes its state from the intermediate state to the ascending state (see FIG. 14), and FIG. 16 (d) shows the speed reducer 320 from the intermediate state to the initial state. The state immediately after the state change is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIG. 16, the functional disk device 332b is a partition that limits the portion through which the sphere can pass from the recessed groove portion 332b1 that is recessed from the back side at a depth at which the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB can move. The wall 332b2 and the partition wall 332b2 are arranged as a rollable plate portion on the lower side of the partition wall 332b2, and are formed so as to project a predetermined width from the end of the partition wall 332b2 and slow down the flow of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. The first deceleration wall portion 332b3, the second deceleration wall portion 332b4 that is arranged on the opposite side of the partition wall 332b2 with the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 sandwiched between them and decelerates the flow of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB, and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. It is mainly provided with a directional valve 332b5 that limits the passage of the vehicle in one direction from the left side to the right side.

For convenience, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB uses the same reference numerals as the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB accommodated in the second adjusting device 350, and is limited to those having the same shape and weight as the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB. Not the purpose.

The functional disk device 332b can allow the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB to flow down at the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 to pass through the directional valve 332b5, or can pass through the directional valve 332b5 to flow down at the second deceleration wall portion 332b4. .. Hereinafter, the operation of the functional disk device 332b will be described in detail. In addition, FIG. 6, FIG. 13 and FIG. 14 are referred to as appropriate.

As shown in FIG. 16A, when the speed reducer 3420 is in the initial state (see FIG. 6), the partition plate 332b is tilted downward to the right, and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is a functional disk device. It is maintained on the right side of 332b. As a result, a load for maintaining the slide moving member 321 downward is applied from the rotary urging device 332 to the slide moving member 321 (see FIG. 6). Therefore, when the gaming machine 10 (see FIG. 1) vibrates, it is possible to prevent the slide moving member 321 from moving up and down.

As shown in FIG. 16B, when the reduction gear 3420 is in the intermediate state (see FIG. 13), the partition plate 332b2 is in a mode of inclining downward to the left, while the first reduction wall portion 332b3 is It is considered to be a downward slope to the right. Therefore, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB rolls the upper surface of the partition plate 332b2 to the left along the arrow L3, and then rolls to the right on the upper surface of the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 along the arrow L4. The center of gravity sphere GB is sent to the right side of the rotation center of the functional disk device 332b, and a load is applied in the direction of returning the functional disk device 332b to the initial state (direction of rotating clockwise in FIG. 16).

In the middle of the flow of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB, as shown in FIG. 16 (b), in a state where the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is arranged on the left side of the center of rotation, yesterday the disk device 332b was counterclockwise in FIG. 16 (b). Since the load is applied in the direction of rotating the slide moving member 321 due to gravity, the lowering of the slide moving member 321 can be stopped. Further, the weight of the sphere can prevent the slide moving member 321 from descending (even if the sphere descends, it is possible to form a state in which the slide moving member 321 immediately rises when the sphere arrives).

As shown in FIG. 16 (c), when the speed reducer 3420 is in the ascending state (see FIG. 14), the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 is in a mode of descending and tilting to the left, while the second deceleration wall. The portion 332b4 is in a mode of inclining downward to the right. Therefore, the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB rolls the upper surface of the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 to the left along the arrow L5, and then rolls to the right on the upper surface of the second deceleration wall portion 332b4 along the arrow L6. As a result, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is sent to the right side of the rotation center of the functional disk device 332b, and a load is applied in the direction of returning the functional disk device 332b to the initial state (direction of rotating clockwise in FIG. 16).

When the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is rolling on the upper surface of the first deceleration wall portion 332b3, the sphere passes through the main passage 311a and the deceleration device 320 moves to the ascending state, and the functional disk device 332b is shown in FIG. 16 (c). In the posture shown in the above, the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is subsequently decelerated by the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 and further decelerated by the second deceleration wall portion 332b4, so that the reduction gear 320 is placed in the intermediate state. Compared with the case (see FIG. 13), the period until the pseudo-center of gravity sphere GB is arranged to the right of the center of rotation is lengthened. Therefore, the speed reducer 320 can be maintained in the ascending state (see FIG. 14) longer than the period in which it is maintained in the intermediate state (see FIG. 13).

As shown in FIG. 16D, when the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB arranged on the first deceleration wall portion 332b3 or the second deceleration wall portion 332b4 is arranged to the right of the center of the functional circle device 332b, the slide moving member The reduction device 320 operates due to the weight of 321 to bring the functional disk device 332b into the same posture as the initial state, and the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB is discharged from the first reduction wall portion 332b3 or the second reduction wall portion 332b4 and is recessed. Roll 332b1. When the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB passes through the directional valve 332b5, the functional disk device 332b returns to the initial state (see FIG. 16A).

A flow pattern of a sphere flowing down inside the delay device 300 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 and 18. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 300. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b) show a case where three balls P1 to P3 are inserted in a row from the winning opening 64, and FIG. In a), the state in which the spheres P1 to P3 are arranged in front of the wind turbine member 322 is shown, and in FIG. 17 (b), the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 are separated from the second extending vane portion 322c of the wind turbine member 322. In FIG. 18A, the state in which the sphere P2 pushed the second extending wing portion 322c and reached the sorting device 340 was illustrated, and in FIG. 18B, the sphere P3 was the first. The state in which the two grooves 312 begin to invade is illustrated.

In addition, in FIG. 17 (a), FIG. 17 (b), FIG. 18 (a) and FIG. 18 (b), after the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 in the lower right space of the structural drawing. A graph showing the situation of is illustrated. In addition, the timing at which the balls P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 actually deviates slightly (about 0.2 seconds), but in the graph, the balls P1 to P3 win the prize in order to facilitate understanding. It is illustrated as having entered the mouth 64 at the same time, and the horizontal axis is configured as the elapsed time T.

In the graph, the timing when the spheres P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 (“IN”) and the timing when the spheres P1 to P3 enter the detection opening 312d (“OUT”) are shown, and when the spheres P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 (“OUT”). Which section is flowing down is illustrated by a code. Further, in the corresponding drawing, which timing of the graph the state shown in FIGS. 17 (a), 17 (b), 18 (a) and 18 (b) represents is indicated by a triangular mark.

As shown in FIG. 17A, the spheres P1 to P3 flow down the first groove 311 under the same conditions until they reach the wind turbine member 322, and there is no difference in their velocities.

As shown in FIG. 17B, the first ball P1 pushes forward the first extending blade portion 322b of the wind turbine member 322, and the second ball P2 is separated from the second extending blade portion 322c. Then, the preceding sphere P1 flows down to the convex portion 321a1 without being decelerated, while the convex portion 321a1 projects into the main passage 311a on the downstream side of the sphere P2. Therefore, when the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 come into contact with the convex portion 321a1, a load in the direction opposite to the flow direction is intermittently applied and the sphere P3 decelerates. As a result, a space can be provided between the spheres P1 and the spheres P2. Therefore, for example, it is possible to prevent the spheres from being clogged and malfunctioning due to the two spheres being simultaneously entered into the sorting device 340. be able to.

In the present embodiment, the first period of passing through the first groove required for the ball P1 to pass through the first groove 311 is set to 2 seconds (T11 = 2s), and after the ball P1 has passed, the speed reducer 320 ( The deceleration return first start period, which is the period from the intermediate state to the start of returning to the initial state, is set to 5 seconds, and the speed reducer is set to return to the initial state 1 second after the start of return.

Further, the second period T2, which is the period from when the ball P1 enters the second groove 312 to when it enters the detection port 312d, is 1.5 seconds (T2 = 1.5s). The second period T2 is the first half T2a (T2a = 1s) of the second period, which is one second before reaching the sorting device 340, and the second half of the second period, which is 0.5 seconds after passing through the sorting device 340. It is divided into T2b (T2b = 0.5s), and the period during which the ball passes through the second groove 312 is invariant regardless of the state of the sorting device 340.

As shown in FIG. 18A, when the second ball P2 pushes the second extending blade portion 322c of the wind turbine member 322, the preceding ball P2 flows into the second groove, while the ball P3 , Flows into the recessed portion 311e on the back side along the inclined surface 321b2 of the slide moving member 321. As a result, in addition to being decelerated by the convex portion 321a1, the flow path of the sphere P3 is extended by the amount passing through the inner recessed portion 311e, so that the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 can be spaced apart from each other.

In the present embodiment, the first groove passage second period T12 required for the sphere P2 to pass through the first groove 311 is set to 3 seconds (T12 = 3s), and the sphere P3 passes through the first groove 311. The third period T13 required for passing through the first groove is set to 6 seconds (T13 = 6s). Further, the deceleration return second start period, which is the period from the passage of the ball P2 to the start of the deceleration device 320 returning to the initial state (from the ascending state), is set to 7 seconds, and the deceleration device is set to 2 seconds after the start of the return. It is set to return to the initial state.

Further, since the sphere P2 comes into contact with the arc wall portion 343 of the sorting device 340 and flows into the third groove 313, the path to the detection port 312d is extended as compared with the sphere P1. Therefore, the distance between the sphere P1 and the sphere P2 can be widened.

In the present embodiment, the third period T3 required for the balls P2 and P3 to pass through the third groove 313 is set to 3 seconds (T3 = 3s). Further, the speed of the pseudo center of gravity sphere GB of the second adjusting device 350 is set in such a manner that the distribution maintenance period BT1 which is the period from the change of the state of the distribution device 340 to the change state to the start of returning to the initial state is 4 seconds. It is set (BT1 = 4s).

As shown in FIG. 18B, when the speed reducer 320 is in the raised state, the distance between the end of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the contact wall 312a is about the same as the diameter of the sphere. Will be done. Therefore, the spheres P2 and P3 are subjected to a large resistance when passing between the end portion of the first overhanging plate portion 321a and the contact wall 312a, and the momentum is reduced. Thereby, the distance between the spheres P1 and the spheres P2 and P3 can be widened.

As shown in FIG. 18B, the sphere P2 flows down the third groove 313 and receives the first wall portion 341 and presses it against the wall portion 312c, so that the sorting device 340 can be easily maintained in the changed state. it can.

As shown in the graph, the distribution device 340 is maintained in the changed state even at the timing when the sphere P3 flows into the distribution device 340 (at the timing when only the distribution maintenance period BT1 has elapsed after the state of the distribution device 340 changes to the changed state. The sphere P3 reaches the sorting device 340). Therefore, the ball P3 flows into the third groove 313. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distance between the sphere P2 and the sphere P3 from being shortened.

As shown in the graph, according to the present embodiment, when the spheres P1 to P3 enter the winning opening 64 in succession, the spheres P1 and P2 enter the detection opening 312d at intervals of 4 seconds, and the spheres P2 And the ball P3 enter at intervals of 3 seconds. In the present embodiment, the fluctuation period of 1 selected after the maximum number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is set to 3 seconds. Therefore, in the case of FIGS. 17 and 18, an overflow occurs in the winning opening 64. Can be prevented.

Further, in the present embodiment, the period during which the sorting device 340 is maintained in the changed state is one variable period selected after the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is maximized when the balls flow into the detection port 312d. As shown in FIG. 18A, when the ball P2 enters the sorting device 340 during the fluctuation period, the ball P2 is surely flowed into the third groove 313. be able to. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring when the balls continuously enter the sorting device 340.

Therefore, even when three balls P1 to P3 are continuously entered into the winning opening 64, the timing at which they are entered into the detection opening 312d can be shifted, and overflow at the winning opening 64 can be suppressed. Can be done. As a result, even if the player does not pay special attention, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the ball enters the winning opening 64 but cannot receive the lottery, and the game can be performed comfortably.

In the present embodiment, when another ball is connected to the rear of the ball P3 and another ball enters the winning opening 64 (when four balls are continuously entered), the fourth ball and the ball P3 are connected. The timing of entering the detection port 312d cannot be shifted. Therefore, it is desirable to recommend a stop hit so as not to play a game in which four balls are inserted into the winning opening 64 while the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is three.

Further, as shown in the graph, when the balls P1 to P3 continuously enter the winning opening 64, for example, the ball P3 wins a prize at an interval of 1 second or more after entering the winning opening 64 of the ball P1. When entering the mouth 64, by the time the ball P3 reaches the sorting device 340, the sorting device 340 has been returned to the initial state, so that the ball P3 flows down the second groove 312 in the vertical direction and the detection port 312d. Enter the ball. In this case, the delay period of the ball P3 is not sufficient, and the overflow at the winning opening 64 cannot be suppressed.

Therefore, the effect of suppressing overflow when the third ball enters the winning opening 64 is limited to a limited situation (after the ball P1 and the ball P2 continuously enter the winning opening 64, the ball P1 enters the ball. Since it can be played only in the situation where the ball P3 enters the winning opening 64 within 1 second from the above, it happens to be stopped (holding the winning opening 64) while leaving the need for the player to make a stop. If you forget to stop launching the ball when the number of balls is 3, you can fortunately create a situation where the winning opening 64 does not overflow if the situation is met.

This makes it possible to form a clear difference in the number of lottery opportunities for the number of balls entered into the winning opening 64 between the player who makes a stop and the player who does not make a stop. In a rare situation where three balls enter the winning opening 64 in a row when the number of reserved balls in the opening 64 is 3, the third ball P3 does not overflow at the winning opening 64. It is possible to make the conditions strict (limit the ball entry interval) and produce the value when overflow does not occur.

As a result, it is possible to make the player who makes a stop hit more carefully (because it is possible to pay attention to the number of reserved balls and stop the launch at an early stage), so there is an opportunity for a lottery. It is possible to enthusiastically operate the handle 51 (see FIG. 1) in order to acquire more of the above, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

Next, a case where the balls P4 and P5 enter the delay device 300 at intervals will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 and 20. 19 (a), 19 (b) and 20 are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 19 (a) shows a state in which the ball P4 reaches the wind turbine member 322 when the speed reducer 320 is in the initial state, and FIG. 19 (b) shows the speed reducer 320 in the intermediate state and the distribution device 340. The case where the ball P5 enters the winning opening 64 0.5 seconds after the ball P4 enters the detection port 312d (4 seconds after the ball P4 enters) is shown in the figure. In 20, the state immediately before the ball P5 is entered into the sorting device 340 is illustrated. In FIGS. 19 (a), 19 (b), and 20, in the lower right space of the structural drawing, a graph showing the situation after the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 has a horizontal axis. It is shown as an elapsed time T.

In the graph, the timing when the spheres P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 (“IN”) and the timing when the spheres P4 and P5 enter the detection opening 312d (“OUT”) are shown, and when and which of the spheres P4 and P5 Whether it flows down the section is indicated by a symbol. Further, which timing of the graph the state shown in FIGS. 19A, 19B, and 20 represents is indicated by a triangular mark in the corresponding drawing.

In the state shown in FIG. 20, the ball P5 does not enter the third groove 313, flows vertically downward through the second groove 312, and enters the detection port 312d. Here, if the ball P5 enters the detection port 312d before the fluctuation immediately after the ball P4 enters the detection port 312d is completed, overflow may occur.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first groove passage second period T12 required for the ball P5 to pass through the speed reducer 320 in the intermediate state is the period of fluctuation when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is four (3). The mode is set to be longer than (seconds) (the first groove passage second period T12 is set to 3 seconds). In this case, even if the sphere P5 does not flow into the third groove 313 (flows down the second groove 312 in the vertical direction), the fluctuation ends before the sphere P5 passes over the slide moving member 321. It is possible to prevent the overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64. In this case, since the ball P5 does not flow down the third groove 313, the timing of the lottery by the ball P5 can be advanced, and the player can be prevented from getting bored.

Further, since the distribution maintenance period BT1 from the state change of the distribution device 340 to the start of returning to the initial state is set to 4 seconds, it is 3 seconds after the ball P4 enters the winning opening 64 (winning opening). It is possible to reliably enter the ball that has entered the third groove 313 (the period of fluctuation when the number of reserved balls of 64 is four). Further, since the ball can be entered into the third groove 313 until immediately before the sorting device 340 returns to the initial state, the ball P4 enters within less than 4 seconds after entering the winning opening 64. The ball can be reliably entered into the third groove 313. As a result, even when the balls P4 and P5 enter the winning opening 64 at intervals of 3 seconds or less, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

Next, with reference to FIG. 21, a case where balls continuously enter the sorting device 340 will be described. In the present embodiment, for example, when the speed reducer 320 is in the ascending state (see FIG. 14), it is a state that occurs when two additional balls enter the winning opening 64 in succession (for example, FIG. 17 (see FIG. 14). This is a state that occurs when the balls P1 and P2 shown in a) are inserted, and after the balls P2 enter the second groove 312, two balls continuously enter the winning opening 64). 21 (a) to 21 (c) are partial front views of the delay device 300. FIG. 21 (a) shows a state in which the sorting device 340 is in the initial state and the ball P6 enters the sorting device 340. In FIG. 21 (b), the sorting device 340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P6 to rotate the ball. The state in which P7 is extruded is illustrated, and in FIG. 21 (c), the state in which the sphere P6 flows down the second groove 312 and the sphere P7 flows down the third groove 313 is shown.

As shown in FIG. 21A, the sorting device 340 is provided with a space capable of accommodating only one ball between the first wall portion 341 and the second wall portion 342. Therefore, when two balls reach the sorting device 340 in a row, the first ball P6 is housed in the sorting device 340, but the second ball P7 remains without being housed. Therefore, only the sphere P6 can flow down to the detection port 312d alone.

The tip convex portion 342a arranged at the tip of the second wall portion 342 of the sorting device 340 moves the sphere P7 to the entrance of the third groove 313 in a posture in which the sphere P7 remains outside (see FIG. 21B). It is formed in a manner of pushing out toward the tip (the entrance of the third groove 313 is formed at a position facing the tip convex portion 342a). Therefore, the ball P7 can be pushed out to the inner side of the third groove 313, and it is possible to prevent the ball P7 from staying near the entrance of the third groove 313. Thereby, for example, even when the distribution device 340 is set in such a manner that the distribution device 340 immediately returns to the initial state from the changed state, the ball P7 is prevented from entering the distribution device 340 (without being properly pushed into the third groove 313). can do.

As shown in FIG. 21 (c), the ball P6 enters the detection port 312d with the sorting device 340 as a boundary, and the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d after flowing down the third groove 313. Here, as described above, the third period T3, which is the period during which the balls P7 flow down the third groove 313, is set to 3 seconds, and that period is selected after the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is maximized. Since the fluctuation period (3 seconds) of 1 or more is set, even if the ball P6 enters the detection port 312d when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 3, the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d. By this time, one fluctuation will end. Therefore, when the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the winning port 64.

In the present embodiment, if another ball enters the detection port 312d within 3 seconds after the ball P7 enters the detection port 312d, the ball is configured to overflow at the winning port 64. To. As a result, it is possible to construct a flow path in which overflow can be suppressed when the number of balls entering in a short period of time is up to two, while overflow occurs when the number of balls entering in a short period of time is three. Therefore, it is possible to make the player carefully consider the firing intensity of the ball and the firing frequency of the ball in order to obtain more chances of lottery at the winning opening 64, and improve the playability regarding the mode of launching the ball. Can be made to.

Since the sorting device 340 rotates from the initial state to the changing state only by the weight of the sphere, the sphere P6 and the sphere P7 are arranged between the side wall portion 312e and the tip convex portion 342a. It is possible to solve the problem that occurs only when the sorting device 340 operates electrically, such as the sorting device 340 operating and causing ball clogging.

In the present embodiment, in the state of FIG. 21C, for example, the ball reaches the sorting device 340 at the timing when the sorting device 340 returns to the initial state within 1 second after reaching, and the next ball further reaches the sorting device 340. If the 340 reaches the sorting device 340 one second after returning to the initial state, there is a risk that the ball that arrived earlier and the ball that arrived later may collide at the confluence position of the first groove 311 and the third groove 313. Yes, in that case, two balls enter the detection port 312d at intervals of 3 seconds or less. Therefore, if the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 (see FIG. 20) is three while the preceding ball passes through the third groove 313, the overflow in the winning opening 64 cannot be avoided.

This is significantly different from the case where the two balls reach the sorting device 340 when the sorting device 340 is in the initial state. That is, when the two balls reach the distribution device 340 at 2-second intervals when the distribution device 340 is in the initial state, the latter balls are guided to the third groove 313 and therefore enter the detection port 312d. It is possible to secure an interval of 3 seconds or more (see FIG. 21). On the other hand, when the distribution device 340 is in a changing state and the spheres reach the distribution device 340 at 2-second intervals, the front sphere is guided to the third groove 313, and the rear sphere vertically downwards the second groove 312. There is a possibility that the ball may flow down, and the interval at which the ball enters the detection port 312d may be shorter than 3 seconds.

As a result, it is possible to form a flow path that cannot always suppress overflow when two balls enter the ball entry port 64 in succession. Therefore, while providing a mechanism that can suppress overflow, basically, it is assumed that the maximum number of lottery can be obtained by performing a game of stopping when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 reaches three. The significance of hitting can be improved.

Next, the delayed floor device 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 to 33. FIG. 22 is a partial front perspective view of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 22, in the delay floor device 400, a part of the spheres flowing down to the left of the center frame 86 flows in (through a so-called “warp flow path”), and the sphere rolls on the upper part. A movable device that is configured to be possible and that repeatedly reciprocates to drop a sphere whose velocity in the left-right direction has converged to 0 toward the front side. And a link member 420 (see FIG. 24) that matches the movements of the pair of fan-shaped members 410, and a fixed floor that tiltably supports the fan-shaped member 410 and allows the ball to pass through before flowing into the fan-shaped member 410. It mainly comprises a fixed floor 430.

In the initial state (see FIG. 22), the delayed floor device 400 is configured in such a manner that the sphere can be easily converged at the center position in the left-right direction (the left-right peripheral portion of the fixed floor 430 is inclined downward toward the center position). The fan-shaped member 410 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the center position in the left-right direction and the center position of the winning opening 64 coincide with each other in the vertical direction. That is, the arrangement is such that the ball can be easily inserted from the delayed floor device 400 into the winning opening 64.

Among the fan-shaped members 410 arranged in pairs in the front-rear direction, the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side tilts forward in a manner of tilting forward toward the front side, so that the ball can easily enter the winning opening 64.

The fan-shaped member 410 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. Since the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are composed of the same members, one fan-shaped member 410 will be described, and the other fan-shaped member 410 will be omitted.

23 (a) is a top view of the fan-shaped member 410, FIG. 23 (b) is a side view of the fan-shaped member 410 in the direction of arrow XXIIIb of FIG. 23 (a), and FIG. 23 (c) is a side view of the fan-shaped member 410. FIG. 23 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member 410 taken along the line XXIIIc-XXIIIc of FIG. 23 (a), and FIG. 23 (d) is a bottom view of the fan-shaped member 410 in the direction of arrow XXIIId of FIG. 23 (b).

As shown in FIG. 23, the fan-shaped member 410 includes a main body member 411 composed of a fan-shaped plate member and an extended arm portion 412 extending coaxially in the left-right direction from an intermediate position of the main body member 411. A convex fixing portion 413 having an insertion hole which is projected from the bottom surface of the main body member 411 in a pair and has an insertion hole through which the connecting rod 414 is inserted and fixed, and a connecting rod 414 which is inserted and fixed to the convex fixing portion 413. Mainly prepare.

The width of the main body member 411 is about the diameter of a sphere on the tapered side (lower side in FIG. 23A). Further, on the tapered side thereof, there is a chamfered portion 411a that is inclined downward, and an opening 411b that is formed between the convex fixing portions 413.

The connecting rod 414 is configured as a separate member from the main body member 411. When assembling, the link member 420 (see FIG. 24) is arranged between the convex fixing portions 413, and the connecting rod 414 is inserted into the adjusting elongated hole 422 of the link member 420, and the connecting rod is inserted. The 414 is fixed to the convex fixing portion 413. As a result, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 can be connected (see FIG. 25).

Next, the link member 420 will be described with reference to FIG. 24. The link member 420 is a member that connects a pair of fan-shaped members 410 and has a role of determining the operating direction thereof.

24 (a) is a side view of the link member 420, and FIG. 24 (b) is a bottom view of the link member 420 in the direction of arrow XXIVb of FIG. 24 (a). As shown in FIG. 24, the link member 420 has a main body member 421 formed of a plate-shaped member having an L-shaped cross section and a constant thickness (see FIG. 24 (b)), and a pair of front and rear members on the upper portion of the main body member 421. It mainly includes an adjustment elongated hole 422 drilled in the thickness direction and extended in the front-rear direction, and a support elongated hole 423 drilled in the thickness direction and extended in the vertical direction at the lower part of the main body member 421. ..

The adjustment elongated hole 422 is a hole through which the connecting rod 414 (see FIG. 23) of the fan-shaped member 410 is inserted. That is, the link member 420 and the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are connected via the adjustment elongated hole 422. The support elongated hole 423 is an elongated hole through which the support convex portion 434 (see FIG. 26) of the fixed floor 430 is inserted, and acts in a manner of designating the moving direction of the link member 420 in one direction (vertical direction).

The fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the pre-assembled state will be described with reference to FIG. 25. 25 (a) is a top view of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420, and FIG. 25 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the XXVb-XXVb line of FIG. 25 (a). .. The pre-assembled state shown in FIG. 25 refers to the sub-assembled state before assembling to the fixed floor 430. In the manufacturing process, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are assembled to the fixed floor 430 after the pre-assembled state is configured.

In the pre-assembled state, the connecting rod 414 of the fan-shaped member 410 is fixed to the convex fixing portion 413 in a state of being inserted into the adjusting elongated hole 422 of the link member 420, whereby the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are connected to each other. Will be done.

As shown in FIG. 25, since the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are connected by the link member 420, when one fan-shaped member 410 operates, the operation is transmitted to the other fan-shaped member 410 via the link member 420. Consists of aspects.

Next, the fixed floor 430 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. 26 is a top view of the fixed floor 430, FIG. 27 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the fixed floor 430 in line XXVIIa-XXVIIa of FIG. 26, and FIG. 27 (b) is XXVIIb-XXVIIb of FIG. It is sectional drawing of the fixed floor 430 in line. Note that FIGS. 26 and 27 show a state in which the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are removed. Further, in FIG. 26, the support portion 432 is partially cross-sectionally viewed.

As shown in FIGS. 26, 27 (a) and 27 (b), in the fixed floor 430, the fan-shaped member 410 is arranged in the assembled state (see FIG. 22), and the upper surface of the fan-shaped member 410 and the fixed floor 430 are formed. The portion between the rotating shafts of the fan-shaped member 410 is recessed corresponding to the thickness of the fan-shaped member 410 so as to be formed at the surface position, and the outer portion thereof is recessed in such a manner that it does not interfere with the movement of the fan-shaped member 410. The recessed floor 431 to be formed, the support portion 432 on which the extension arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410 is supported when the recessed floor 431 is arranged, and the central portion of the recessed floor 431 are opened in the vertical direction. At the hollow portion 433, which is a cavity, the support convex portion 434 which is projected from the side wall forming the hollow portion 433 in the left-right direction, and the position where the fan-shaped member 410 is deviated from the closest position to the left and right in the assembled state. It mainly includes an inflow port 435 that is recessed with a size that allows the ball to flow in, and a delay flow path 436 that communicates from the inflow port 435 and allows the ball to flow down.

The support portion 432 includes a support groove portion 432a having a groove shape for supporting the extended arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410, and a support lid portion 432b that covers the support groove portion 432a from above and covers the support groove portion 432a.

The hollow portion 433 is a cavity in which the link member 420 is housed, and the support convex portion 434 is a protrusion inserted into the support elongated hole 423 of the link member 420. When assembling the link member 420, the link member 420 is inserted into the gap between the hollow portion 433 and the tip of the support convex portion 434, and then the link member 420 is slid in the left-right direction to support the convex portion. The portion 434 can be inserted through the support elongated hole 423.

The inflow port 435 is composed of a diameter slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. Therefore, when the member is covered above the inflow port 435 in a manner of blocking a part of the inflow port 435, it is impossible for the ball to flow into the inflow port 435.

The delay flow path 436 is a flow path for delaying the entry of the ball into the winning opening 64 with respect to the ball directly entering the winning opening 64 from the fan-shaped member 410. For example, by making the period required for the ball to pass through the delay flow path 436 longer than the fluctuation period of 1 that occurs when the ball enters the winning opening 64, an overflow occurs at the winning opening 64. It can be suppressed.

For example, by setting the period required for the balls to pass through the delay flow path 436 to be longer than the variable period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 4, the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 can be increased. Even if the first ball that has fallen from the fan-shaped member 410 directly enters the winning opening 64 and the second ball enters the inflow port 435 in the three states, the two balls Since the fluctuation of 1 is completed by the time the eye ball enters the winning opening 64, it is possible to suppress the overflow at the winning opening 64 due to the second ball entering the winning opening 64. it can.

A method of assembling the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 (see FIG. 25) to the fixed floor 430 will be described. First, of the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 in the pre-assembled state described above, the link member 420 is inserted into the cavity portion 433, and the support elongated hole 423 (see FIG. 25) is inserted into the support convex portion 434 by the above method. After fitting, the extended arm portion 412 (see FIG. 25) of the fan-shaped member 410 is placed on the support groove portion 432a, and the support lid portion 432b is covered and fitted over the support groove portion 432a, whereby the fan-shaped member 410 is fitted with the support portion of the fixed floor 430. The link member 420 is supported by the 432 so as to be tiltable, and the link member 420 is supported so as to be movable up and down (along the extending direction of the support elongated hole 423). As a result, the fan-shaped member 410 and the link member 420 are assembled to the fixed floor 430 to form the delayed floor device 400.

The state change of the delayed floor device 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 28. 28 (a) is a partial top view of the delayed floor device 400, FIG. 28 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in line XXVIIIb-XXVIIIb of FIG. 28 (a), and FIG. 28 (c). ) Is a partial top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 28 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 on the line XXVIIId-XXVIIId of FIG. 28 (c).

In the initial state shown in FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b), the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are in a parallel posture, and in the tilted state shown in FIGS. 28 (c) and 28 (d), the fan-shaped members are in a parallel posture. It is assumed that 410 is tilted by about 45 ° from the initial state.

The major difference between the initial state and the tilted state is whether or not the ball can enter the inflow port 435 and whether or not the ball can pass through the intermediate position of the pair of fan-shaped members 410. Regarding the former, in the initial state, a part of the fan-shaped member 410 is covered on the upper part of the inflow port 435, so that the ball cannot enter the inflow port 435. Since the fan-shaped member 410 retreats from the upper part of the inflow port 435 (because it is tilted to the retreating position), the ball can enter the inflow port 435.

Regarding the latter, in the initial state, the fan-shaped member 410 is in a parallel posture so that the sphere can pass through the upper part between the fan-shaped members 410, but in the tilted state, the fan-shaped member 410 is at a position where the sphere passes. The ball that has flowed into the portion between the fan-shaped members 410 collides with the fan-shaped member 410 and is prevented from passing through. Since the inflow port 435 is arranged between the fan-shaped members 410 in the tilted state, the ball colliding with the fan-shaped member 410 does not bounce (such as when it vibrates in the vertical direction) and stays above the inflow port 435. In this case, it is possible to drop the ball directly into the inflow port 435.

With reference to FIG. 29, the operation mode of the delay floor device 400 due to the difference in position when the ball falls from the fixed floor 430 to the front side will be described. 29 (a) is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 29 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in line XXIXb-XXIXb of FIG. 29 (a), FIG. 29 (c). Is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 29 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 on the XXIXd-XXIXd line of FIG. 29 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d), the delay floor device 400 is used to move the ball when the ball P11 previously on the delay floor device 400 falls to the front side of the fixed floor 430. Along (using the weight of the sphere), the fan-shaped member 410 operates. Therefore, a drive source such as a motor for operating the delay floor device 400 can be eliminated.

29 (a) and 29 (b) show a state in which the sphere P11 is about to fall from a position away from the fan-shaped member 410, and in FIGS. 29 (c) and 29 (d), the sphere P11 is fan-shaped. A state in which the member 410 is about to fall from the center position to the front side of the fixed floor 430 is shown.

Here, it is possible to configure the delay floor device 400 to move each time the ball passes over the delay floor device 400, but in that case, the delay floor device 400 does not depend on how the ball passes. There is a risk that the entry into the winning opening 64 will be unnecessarily delayed due to the influence of. In that case, the start of the fluctuation triggered by the entry of the ball into the winning opening 64 is delayed, which causes dissatisfaction of the player.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 29, the ball P11 falls from the state where the ball P11 is on the fan-shaped member 410, which is a position where the ball P11 can easily enter the winning opening 64 as it is, to the front side of the fixed floor 430. When the delay floor device 400 is tilted in the leaning state, while the ball P11 falls from a position away from the fan-shaped member 410, which is a position unlikely to enter the winning opening 64 even if the ball P11 falls. The delayed floor device 400 is configured to maintain the initial state. Therefore, the delayed floor device 400 can be operated only when the falling ball P11 is likely to enter the winning opening 64.

As a result, the delayed floor device 400 operates even when it is not necessary, and it is possible to prevent the ball from entering the winning opening 64 from being unnecessarily delayed. It is possible to avoid delaying the start of the fluctuation, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

As shown in FIG. 29 (d), the chamfered portion 411a is formed at the tip of the fan-shaped member 410, so that the tip of the fan-shaped member 410 is inclined while protruding from the front surface of the game board 13 in the initial state. In the state, it can be configured to be pulled backward from the front surface of the game board 13. As a result, the ball can be rolled to a position where it can easily fall into the winning opening 64 (front side of the front surface of the game board 13) and then dropped. Therefore, the ball falling from the state shown in FIG. 29 (d) can be dropped. It is possible to improve the probability of entering the winning opening 64.

With reference to FIG. 30, the relationship between the ball P11 previously on the delayed floor device 400 and the ball P12 newly entered in the delayed floor device 400 will be described. 30 (a) is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 30 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in the line XXXb-XXXb of FIG. 30 (a).

30 (a) and 30 (b) show a state in which the sphere P11 flows down to the front side of the fan-shaped member 410, the fan-shaped member 410 is tilted, and then the sphere P12 is inserted from the left-right direction. To.

A predetermined ball reaches the center of the floor portion arranged above the winning opening 64, and another ball rolls on the floor portion from the left-right direction at the timing when it is about to fall to the winning opening 64 and collides with the predetermined ball. However, the predetermined ball may come off from the winning opening 64, which has been a source of deteriorating the player's interest.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 30, when the sphere P21 rolls at the timing when the sphere P11 falls from the front side of the fan-shaped member 410, the delay floor device 400 is tilted and the delay floor device 400 is tilted. By colliding the sphere P12 with the fan-shaped member 410, it is possible to prevent the sphere P11 from colliding with the sphere P12.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 30A, the gap formed by the tip portions of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 is tapered toward the traveling direction of the sphere P12 (to the right in FIG. 30A). Therefore, even if the sphere P12 rolls at a position slightly deviated from the intermediate portion of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 in the front-rear direction and collides with the fan-shaped member 410, the speed direction of the spheres P12 is paired along the tapered shape of the gap. It can be modified in the direction toward the intermediate position of the fan-shaped member 410. Therefore, the rolling path of the sphere P12 can be limited, and it is possible to easily avoid the collision between the sphere P12 and the sphere P11.

Next, with reference to FIG. 31, two balls P11 and P12 enter the delayed floor device 400 at intervals, and the delayed floor device 400 in a state where the reciprocating motion is repeated and the velocity in the left-right direction converges to 0. The action of is described.

31 (a) is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 31 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in the line XXXIb-XXXIb of FIG. 31 (a). Is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 31 (d) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 on the line XXXId-XXXId of FIG. 31 (c).

In FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the delayed floor device 400 is in the initial state, and the sphere P11 rides on the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side and the sphere P12 rides on the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side. Illustrated, in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), the sphere P11 flows down to the front side from the state shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), and the delayed floor device 400 is tilted. ..

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (d), in the sphere P12 on the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side, the sphere P11 flows down from the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side, and the delay floor device 400 is in an inclined state. As a result, the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is pushed back in the back direction (to the right in FIG. 31B) along the inclination of the fan-shaped member 410.

After that, the ball P11 falls and the delay floor device 400 returns to the initial state, so that the ball P12 can pass over the delay floor device 400 again and roll above the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side. .. That is, from the state shown in FIG. 31 (a), as compared with the case where the sphere P11 and the sphere P12 continuously enter the winning opening 64, the sphere P11 is pushed back by the amount that the sphere P11 and the sphere P12 enter. The intervals can be separated. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball P11 and the ball P12 from entering the winning opening 64 and causing an overflow at the winning opening 64.

Next, referring to FIG. 32, two spheres P11 and P12 enter the delay floor device 400, and the spheres P11 and P12 move in the front-rear direction in a state where the reciprocating motion is repeated and the velocity in the left-right direction converges to 0. The operation of the delayed floor device 400 when arranged in a row will be described.

32 (a) is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 32 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the delayed floor device 400 in the line XXXIIb-XXXIIb of FIG. 32 (a). Is a top view of the delayed floor device 400, and FIG. 32 (d) is a front view of the delayed floor device 400 in the direction of arrow XXXIId of FIG. 32 (c).

As shown in FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), when the two spheres P11 and P12 are arranged in a row, the spheres P11 are on the front side (front side) of the extended arm portion 412 of the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side. In the state of being arranged on the left side of FIG. 32 (b), the sphere P12 is arranged near the intermediate position of the pair of front and rear fan-shaped members 410 (see FIG. 32 (b)).

From this state, when the sphere P11 falls from the front side of the delay floor device 400 and the delay floor device 400 is tilted, the sphere P12 is attached to the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410 when the tip portion (arc portion) is raised. Can be lifted. In the present embodiment, since the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410 has an arc shape, the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410 supporting the sphere P12 tilts downward as it goes outward in the left-right direction in the tilted state (FIG. 32 (d)). reference). Therefore, the sphere P12 does not continue to be maintained at the center of the left and right sides of the fan-shaped member 410, but flows down to the left and right outside along the shape of the tip portion of the fan-shaped member 410. As a result, the sphere P12 flows from the fan-shaped member 410 into the inflow port 435. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball P12 from entering the winning opening 64 in succession with the ball P11.

33 (a) and 33 (b) are cross-sectional views of the delayed floor device 400 on line XXXIIIa-XXXIIIa of FIG. 32 (c). In FIG. 33 (a), the state in which the spheres P11 and P12 are flowing down from the state shown in FIG. 32 (c) is in the process of flowing down, and in FIG. 33 (b), the spheres P11 and P11 are further changed from the state shown in FIG. 33 (a). The state in which P12 flows down and the ball P11 enters the winning opening 64 is shown in the figure.

As shown in FIGS. 33 (a) and 33 (b), when the spheres P11 and P12 flow down in succession on the delayed floor device 400, the sphere P11 falls on the front side of the game board 13 and the sphere P12 is delayed. It flows down the flow path 436. That is, since the flow paths of the two balls P11 and P12 are separated and the delayed floor device 400 is composed of a long flow path, the timing at which the two balls P11 and P12 win the winning opening 64 is shifted. Can be done.

Therefore, for example, even if the information is acquired immediately after entering the winning opening 64 and the fluctuation is started by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2), the winning opening 64 may overflow. Can be suppressed.

That is, the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 4 during the period from the position of the sphere P12 shown in FIG. 33 (b) until the sphere P12 flows down to the winning opening 64 by flowing down the remaining portion of the delay flow path 436. By setting a period longer than the fluctuation period (shortest fluctuation period) that is likely to be selected in the case of individual pieces, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow at the winning opening 64.

Next, the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 34. In the first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 340 changes the posture only by moving the center of gravity has been described, but in the delay device 2300 in the second embodiment, the locking device 2315 arranged in the main body member 2310 has a long hole. It is supported by 2316 and is configured to maintain the posture of the sorting device 2340. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

34 (a) to 34 (c) are partial front views of the delay device 2300 according to the second embodiment. Note that FIG. 34 (a) shows a state in which the spheres P21 and P22 reach the sorting device 2340 in the initial state in a row, and FIG. 34 (b) shows a state in which the sorting device 2340 changes depending on the weight of the spheres P21. The state in which the sphere P22 flows down the third groove 313 is shown as the state changes to, and in FIG. 34 (c), the sphere P22 is released from the locking device 2315, and the sorting device 2340 returns to the initial state. The state in which the movement is started is shown in the figure. In the present embodiment, the second adjusting device 350 is not arranged in the sorting device 2340, and the sorting device 2340 is urged toward the initial state by a spring mechanism (not shown).

In the sorting device 2340, the first wall portion 2341 is composed of about half the length of the second wall portion 342. As a result, it is possible to prevent the ball P22 flowing down from the third groove 313 from colliding with the first wall portion 2341, and to prevent the ball P22 from interfering with the return operation of the sorting device 2340.

As shown in FIG. 34 (a), the locking device 2315 has a length extending in the left-right direction on the wall portion on the back side (back side in the vertical direction of the paper surface of FIG. 34) of the main body member 2310 at the lower end portion of the side wall portion 312e. A hook member 2315a that is slidably and rotatably supported by a long hole 2316, which is a hole, and a torsion spring 2315b that generates an elastic force that urges the hook member 2315a to the right and clockwise in the front view. , Equipped with. In the present embodiment, a space is formed in the lower end portion of the side wall portion 312e so that the hook member 2315a can pass through the space.

The hook member 2315a includes a shaft portion 2315a1 supported by an elongated hole 2316 extending in the left-right direction in a wall portion formed between a pair of upper and lower third grooves 313, and a shaft portion 2315a1 thereof. The contact portion 2315a2 is integrally formed with the shaft portion 2315a1 and is formed so as to penetrate the side wall portion 312e and project to the upper right side (upper right side of FIG. 34) of the shaft portion 2315a1. It mainly includes a release portion 2315a3 formed by projecting inward of the third groove 313 on the side.

The contact portion 2315a2 is arranged at a position where it interferes with the movement locus of the tip convex portion 342a of the sorting device 2340. The shape of the abutting portion 2315a2 is such that the upper surface portion suddenly descends and inclines toward the right, and the lower surface portion has a shape along the left-right direction (a shape that makes surface contact with the tip convex portion 342a). When the state changes from the initial state to the changing state, the resistance applied to the sorting device 2340 can be suppressed and the moving speed thereof can be improved, while when the sorting device 2340 changes from the changed state to the initial state, the state changes. , The resistance applied to the sorting device 2340 can be increased to facilitate locking of the sorting device 2340 in a changed state.

Further, since the shaft portion 2315a1 is configured to be slidable in the left-right direction along the elongated hole 2316, the hook member 2315a can be moved in a state immediately before the sorting device 2340 changes (immediately before FIG. 34B). You can escape to the left. As a result, as compared with the case where the hook member 2315a is pivotally supported, it is possible to prevent the sorting device 2340 from colliding with the locking device 2315 and engaging with the locking device 2315, resulting in malfunction.

In the torsion spring 2315b, the torsion portion is wound around the shaft portion 2315a1, one end portion (the left end portion in FIG. 34 (a)) is locked to the main body member 2310, and the other end portion (FIG. 34 (a)). ) The right end) is configured to be locked to the hook member 2315a.

As shown in FIG. 34 (b), when the distribution device 2340 is changed by the weight of the sphere P21, the tip convex portion 342a is locked to the contact portion 2315a2. As a result, the sorting device 2340 is maintained in a changed state. In the present embodiment, as long as the locking device 2315 does not change its posture, the sorting device 2340 maintains the changed state.

As shown in FIG. 34 (c), when the sphere P22 flowing down the third groove 313 comes into contact with the release portion 2315a and the hook member 2315a changes its posture counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the distribution device 2340 by the hook member 2315a (The contact portion 2315a2 is arranged outside the movement locus of the sorting device 2340), and the sorting device 2340 can be returned to the initial state.

According to this, in a state where the urging force in the front-view clockwise direction is always applied to the distribution device 2340, a time delay is formed from the state change of the distribution device 2340 to the change state to the start of movement toward the initial state. can do. Therefore, with a simple configuration, the spheres P21 and P22 can be reliably distributed to separate flow paths.

Although the case where the spheres P21 and P22 flow down in succession is described in FIG. 34, the effect of the present embodiment is that the spheres P21 and P22 are effective in light of the fact that the locking device 2315a is released by the flow of the spheres P22. It is exhibited regardless of the arrival interval of the sorting device 2340.

Next, a third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 35 and 36. In the first embodiment, the case where the state of the delay device 300 is changed by the action of a sphere flowing down the upstream side of the detection port 312d has been described, but the delay device 3300 in the third embodiment has a downstream side of the detection port 312d. It is composed of a mode in which the state changes due to the action of a flowing sphere. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. Further, in the present embodiment, the detection port 312d is arranged so as to have an opening facing in the left-right direction.

35 (a), 35 (b), 35 (c), 36 (a), 36 (b) and 36 (c) show the time in which the spheres P31 and P32 flow through the delay device 3300. It is a partial front view of the delay device 3300 in the third embodiment illustrated in series.

In addition, in FIG. 35A, a state in which the stop device 3340 is set to the initial state and the balls P31 and P32 continuously enter the winning opening 64 and reach the stop device 3340 is shown in FIG. 35B. In FIG. 35 (a), a state in which the stop device 3340 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 35 (a) is shown, and in FIG. 35 (c), a state in which the stop device 3340 is in a changed state is shown.

Further, FIG. 36 (a) shows a state in which the preceding sphere P31 passes through the detection port 312d in the left-right direction and abuts on the maintenance device 3360 to change the posture of the maintenance device 3360, and FIG. 36 (b) shows a state in which the posture of the maintenance device 3360 is changed. , The state in which the stop device 3340 is changed in posture from the changed state to the initial state and a gap is provided between the stop device 3340 and the second groove 3312 so that one sphere can pass through is illustrated. In FIG. 36 (c), the rear sphere is shown. The state in which P32 flows down toward the detection port 312d is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the delay device 3300 includes a main body member 3310 having a flow path for guiding a ball that has entered the winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and a ball that flows down inside the main body member 3310. When the stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the action and the stop device 3340 are in the changed state (see FIG. 35 (c)), the state is maintained and the posture changes due to the action of the ball passing through the detection port 312d. Along with this, a maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state of the stop device 3340 is mainly provided.

As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the main body member 3310 constitutes a flow path that inclines downward, and guides a ball that has entered from the winning opening 64 to a vertically upward position of the detection opening 312d, and a first groove 3311 thereof. It mainly includes a second groove 3312 extending vertically from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 to the detection port 312d, and a post-detection flow path 3313 in which a ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided. The first groove 3311 and the second groove 3312 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and in the assembled state, the open portion is closed by the game board 13 to provide a passage through which the ball flows down. It is formed.

The second groove 3312 has an accommodating recess 3312f in which the side wall portion 312e extends to the detection port 312d and is formed as a recess having a size capable of accommodating half of the balls between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e. Be prepared.

Further, a receiving wall portion 3312c is provided on the opposite side of the side wall portion 312e, and a housing recess 3312c1 is recessed in the receiving wall portion 3312c toward the rear. The accommodating recess 3312c1 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the magnet portion 3346 can be accommodated when the stopping device 3340 is in a changed state (see FIG. 35A).

The accommodating recess 3312f extends along a straight line on which the lower wall surface for receiving the ball passes through the central hole 345 of the stopping device 3340. As a result, the direction in which the ball P32 waiting in the accommodating recess 3312f starts to flow down due to gravity can be set to the direction toward the stop device 3340. Therefore, when the sphere P32 is in a state where it can flow down, the sphere P32 can be smoothly flowed down.

The post-detection flow path 3313 is a flow path through which the ball passing through the detection port 312d flows down, is arranged directly under the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360, and is a bearing portion 3313a that pivotally supports the shaft portion 3361a of the maintenance device 3360. The opening 3133b, which is an opening that allows the contact portion 3363 to enter and exit, and the main body rod are projected from the upper wall of the flow path 3313 after detection toward the lower side surface of the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360. It includes a locking portion 3313c that locks the movement of the 3361, and a delay flow path 3313d that extends from the detection port 312d to the opening 3313b.

The stop device 3340 does not include the second adjusting device 350 configured to be movable at the position of the center of gravity described in the first embodiment, and the center of gravity G3 is a line extending the second wall portion 342 and the stop device 3340. It is fixedly placed at the intersection with the circumference of. In the second wall portion 342, the formation of the tip convex portion 342a is omitted.

Further, the stop device 3340 includes a magnet portion 3346 that extends from the first wall portion 341 of the stop device 3340 toward the opposite side of the second wall portion 342 and is made of a magnetic material.

The maintenance device 3360 is a pendulum-shaped device rotatably supported by the bearing portion 3313a, and is a rod-shaped member having a shaft portion 3361a pivotally supported by the bearing portion 3313a at an intermediate position, and a main body rod 3361 thereof. The posture of the main body rod 3361, which is arranged at the end of the main body rod 3361 on the side close to the receiving wall portion 312c and is arranged at the end of the magnet portion 3362 made of a magnetic material and the magnet portion 3362 on the opposite side. It mainly includes a contact portion 3363 that is arranged at a position where it can enter the inside of the flow path 3313 after detection due to a change and is arranged so that it can come into contact with a ball that flows down.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 35A, the posture in which the main body rod 3361 is supported by the locking portion 3313c is the initial state of the maintenance device 3360. That is, in the initial state, the magnet portion 3362 is arranged so as to face the accommodating recess 3312c1, the contact portion 3363 projects inward of the flow path 3313 after detection, and the weight of the contact portion 3363 causes the maintenance device 3360 to extend. Posture is maintained.

The end face of the magnet portion 3362 is a straight line drawn vertically from the end face, and the upper portion of the straight line is omitted with the straight line passing through the shaft portion 3361a as a boundary.

That is, the end face portion that is drawn vertically from the end face and through which the straight line passing through the shaft portion 3361a passes is closest to the receiving wall portion 3312c in the initial state, and the upper portion (main body rod 3361 is viewed from the front). Since the portion that moves closer to the receiving wall portion 3312c by rotating counterclockwise) is omitted, the same portion is closest to the receiving wall portion 3312c even after the maintenance device 3360 changes its posture from the initial state. (All portions of the end face of the magnet portion 3362 are configured to be away from the receiving wall portion 3312c).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 35 (c), the maintenance device 3360 is changed in posture by the action of a sphere from the state where the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 is close to the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 and a magnetic force in the attraction direction is generated. As a result, the end face of the magnet portion 3362 can be separated from the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340.

Further, since the magnet portion 3362 is not moved in the direction perpendicular to the suction surface, but is separated while tilting the posture with respect to the suction surface, the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 can be attracted by a weak force. It can be released.

The change in the state of the delay device 3300 when the spheres P31 and P32 pass through the main body member 3310 will be described in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 35A, when the balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64, the balls P31 and P32 reach the stop device 3340 through the first groove 3311 and the second groove 3312. In the present embodiment, the space between the first wall portion 341 and the second wall portion 342 of the stop device 3340 is set to a size capable of accommodating one sphere, so that only the former sphere P31 is accommodated and the latter sphere P31 is accommodated. The sphere P32 is maintained outside the stop device 3340.

As shown in FIG. 35 (b), the stop device 3340 is rotated from the initial state by the weight of the front sphere P31, and the rear sphere P32 is pushed by the outer end portion of the second wall portion 342 into the accommodating recess 3312f. The left part is housed. Since the position accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312f is the lowermost position on the upstream side of the stop device 3340 of the second groove 3312, the sphere P32 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 35 (b) by the action of gravity. To.

As shown in FIG. 35 (c), in a state where the sphere P31 flows down to the detection port 312d, the first wall portion 341 of the stop device 3340 and the receiving wall portion 3312c come into contact with each other, and the magnet portion 3346 is accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312c1. Will be done. In this state, the magnet portion 3346 is close to the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 and a magnetic force in the suction direction is generated, so that the state of the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. Therefore, even if the ball P31 flows down to the outside of the stop device 3340, the ball P32 remains stopped.

As shown in FIG. 36 (a), after the previous sphere P31 has passed through the delay flow path 3313d, it comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, whereby the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 rotates, and the magnet portion 3362 becomes It is separated from the magnet portion 3346.

As a result, the magnetic force acting on the stop device 3340 is sharply reduced, and the force for stopping the rotation of the stop device 3340 is released. Therefore, the center of gravity G3 of the stop device 3340 is moved downward by the action of gravity. , The stop device 3340 starts rotating counterclockwise when viewed from the front.

In the present embodiment, the distance between the shaft portion 3361a and the contact portion 3363 is several times (about 5 times) longer than the distance between the shaft portion 3361a and the magnet portion 3362. The maintenance device 3360 can be rotated with a small load of the weight of the sphere P31.

Further, since the moving width on the magnet portion 3362 side is smaller than the moving width on the contact portion 3363 side with respect to the shaft portion 3361a, the magnet portion 3362 is positioned by the vibration transmitted to the game board 13. It is possible to prevent the posture of the stop device 3340 from changing due to insufficient magnetic force applied to the stop device 3340 due to the deviation.

As shown in FIG. 36B, when the sphere P31 passes through and the sphere P31 and the abutting portion 3363 are separated from each other, the maintenance device 3360 returns to the initial state due to the weight of the abutting portion 3363.

As shown in FIG. 36B, the stop device 3340 rotates in such a manner that the opening area of the portion facing the sphere P32 housed in the housing recess 3312f gradually increases in the operation of returning from the changed state to the initial state. To do. That is, the sphere P32 can be accommodated in the stop device 3340 before the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state. Thereby, for example, when two balls are deposited on the upstream side of the stop device 3340, it is possible to prevent both of the two balls from flowing into the stop device 3340. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the stop device 3340 from being clogged and causing an operation failure or a slowdown in the operation speed.

As shown in FIG. 36 (c), the ball P32 housed in the storage recess 3312f is housed in the stop device 3340, the stop device 3340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P32, and the ball P32 flows down to the detection port 312d. Will be done.

In this way, even when a plurality of balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64 in a row, until the previous ball P31 changes the posture of the maintenance device 3360 and passes through the position where the state maintenance of the stop device 3340 is released. , The flow of the later sphere P32 can be stopped. In the present embodiment, since the sphere P31 is designed to pass through the delay flow path 3313d for 3 seconds, the sphere P32 for at least 3 seconds after the sphere P31 passes through the detection port 312d and the fluctuation starts. However, it can be prevented from passing through the detection port 312d.

Therefore, when the shortest period of fluctuation that can be obtained by entering the winning opening 64 (the fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is four) is 3 seconds, it is shown in FIG. 35 (a). Even if the balls P31 and P32 enter the winning opening 64 in succession (the balls enter at intervals shorter than 3 seconds), after the fluctuation started by the ball P31 passing through the detection opening 312d is completed. , The state in which the sphere P32 passes through the detection port 312d can be configured. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring when balls enter the winning opening 64 in a row.

Further, since the period from when the ball P31 passes through the detection port 312d to when the maintenance device 3360 changes its posture can be secured, overflow occurs as compared with the case where the posture maintenance of the stop device 3340 is released upstream of the detection port 312d. Can be reliably prevented from occurring.

For example, when the posture of the maintenance device 3360 is changed by using the ball before passing through the detection port 312d, the operation of the stop device 3340 is performed in order to secure the distance between the ball passing through the detection port 312d and the ball after that. It should be designed to be slow. That is, it is necessary to leave a space between the balls during the period from the change state to the return of the stop device 3340, and if the operation speed of the stop device 3340 changes due to aged deterioration or the like, there is a risk that overflow cannot be prevented.

On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, only the sphere operates in the delay device 3300 after the sphere passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere comes into contact with the maintenance device 3360. Therefore, the operation timing of the stop device 3340 can be managed in relation to the sphere and the fixed flow path.

In the present embodiment, since the period required for fluctuation (3 seconds) has elapsed before the ball reaches the maintenance device 3360, the overflow occurs regardless of the period until the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state. Can be prevented. That is, regardless of whether the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state in 10 seconds or returns to the initial state in 0.5 seconds, it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64 regardless of that.

Further, as compared with the case where the stop device 3340 is electrically operated constantly, the period from when the ball P31 passes through the winning opening 64 to when it passes through the detection port 312d is secured to be shorter, and after the ball P31. Only the ball P32 that enters the ball can be stopped, and it is possible to prevent the period from the time when the previous ball P31 passes through the winning opening 64 to the start of the fluctuation is extended. This can prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable (for example, the feeling that the ball has entered the winning opening 64 but the fluctuation does not start, so that the player may be doing something wrong). it can.

Next, a fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. In the first embodiment, the case where the ball is decelerated by the action of the convex portion 321a1 of the delay device 300 has been described, but the delay device 4300 in the fourth embodiment decelerates the ball by the sprocket 4340 that separates the balls at equal intervals. .. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

37 (a), 37 (b), 37 (c), 38 (a), 38 (b) and 38 (c) show how the spheres P41, P42 and the like flow through the delay device 4300. It is a front view of the delay device 4300 in the 4th Embodiment illustrated in chronological order. Note that FIG. 37 (a) shows a state in which the sprocket 4340 is in the initial state and the balls P41 and 42 continuously enter the winning opening 64 and reach the sprocket 4340. FIG. 37 (b) shows the state. A state in which the sprocket 4340 is rotated by a predetermined amount from the state of FIG. 37 (a) is shown, and a state in which the magnet member 4351 of the magnet device 4350 is arranged at the locking position is shown in FIG. 38 (c). In a), the state in which the sprocket 4340 is rotating due to the weight of the sphere P42 is shown, and in FIG. 38 (b), the state immediately before the sphere P42 enters the detection port 312d is shown. The state in which the sprocket 4340 rotates clockwise in the front view and the magnet member 4351 of the magnet device 4350 is moving toward the initial position is illustrated.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the delay device 4300 includes a main body member 4310 having a flow path for guiding a ball that has entered the winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and a ball that flows down inside the main body member 4310. It mainly includes a sprocket 4340 whose state changes by action, and a magnet device 4350 having a magnet member 4351 configured to be relatively movable along a rotation locus of the sprocket 4340.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the main body member 4310 includes a first groove 3311, a second groove 4312 extending vertically from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311 to the detection port 312d, and a second groove 4312 thereof. A cylindrical shaft rod 4313 extending in the front-rear direction in the right portion of the groove 4312 is mainly provided. The first groove 3311 and the second groove 4312 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and in the assembled state, the open portion is closed by the game board 13 to provide a passage through which the ball flows down. It is formed.

The second groove 4312 has a configuration in which the receiving wall portion 3312c (see FIG. 35 (a)) is removed from the second groove 3312 in the third embodiment. Therefore, the contact wall 312a, the recessed portion 312b, the detection port 312d, the side wall portion 312e, and the accommodating recess 3312f are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

The sprocket 4340 is a gear-shaped member that rotates by the weight of a sphere flowing down the main body member 4310, and is a disk-shaped disk member 4341 whose center position is rotatably supported by a shaft rod 4313, and a circle thereof. It mainly includes a storage wall portion 4342 which is extended to the front side of the plate member 4341 and is formed so as to be able to store a sphere in a gap between the walls.

Since the disc member 4341 is arranged at a position that is in a surface position with the wall portion on the back side of the main body member 4310 (the wall portion on the back side in the vertical direction of the paper surface in FIG. 37 (a)), it flows down the inside of the disc member 4341. The sphere passes through the front side of the disk member 4341.

Further, the disk member 4341 divides the striped magnetic poles (the region between each plate-shaped portion 4342a to 4342e into three equal parts along the outer peripheral surface, the central portion thereof is the north pole, and the outer portion is the south pole. It is provided with a magnet portion 4341a having a striped magnetic pole). The rotation speed of the sprocket 4340 is adjusted by the interaction between the magnet portion 4341a and the magnet device 4350.

In order to make it easy to determine that the disk member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 have moved relative to each other, a triangular mark M is formed near the outer peripheral position of the disk member 4341.

The accommodating wall portion 4342 is a plate-shaped portion extending radially outward from the center of the disk member 4341 to prevent the passage of a sphere in the circumferential direction, and is at equal intervals (72 °). It is composed of five plate-shaped portions 4342a to 4342e arranged at intervals). Each gap between the plate-shaped portions 4342a to 4342e is configured to have a width capable of accommodating only one sphere. Further, the outer peripheral surfaces of the plate-shaped portions 4342a to 4342e (the radial outer peripheral surfaces of the sprocket 4340) are formed from an arc shape formed coaxially with the central axis of the disk member 4341.

As shown as an example in FIG. 37 (a), the first plate-shaped portion 4342a is arranged at a position on which the sphere P41 rides, and from there, the second plate-shaped portion 4342b and the third plate-shaped portion are arranged in the clockwise direction in the front view. 4342c, the fourth plate-shaped portion 4342d, and the fifth plate-shaped portion 4342e are arranged.

The magnet device 4350 is formed of a magnetic material and is formed in an arc shape having a diameter slightly longer than the diameter of the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 4341 of the sprocket 4340, and the shaft rod 4313 is formed via a rotating arm (not shown). A magnet member 4351 axially supported by the magnet member and an arc wall portion extending from the main body member 4310 at a position separated by a predetermined distance below the disk member 4341 as an arc-shaped wall surface along the shape of the lower surface of the magnet member 4351. It mainly includes a 4352 and a stopper portion 4353 that projects toward the magnet member 4351 at an end portion of the arc wall portion 4352 that is opposite to the side close to the main body member 4310.

The magnet member 4351 has striped magnetic poles (striped magnetic poles in which the arc region is divided into three equal parts, the central portion thereof is the south pole, and the outer portion is the north pole) on the inner peripheral side of the arc shape. The sprocket 4340 is arranged with a slight gap from the outer peripheral surface of the disk member 4341, and the position is corrected in relation to the magnetic poles of the disk member 4341.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 37 (a) (the state before the weight of the sphere P41 is applied to the sprocket 4340), the central position of the region between each plate-shaped portion 4342a to 4342e and the central position of the arc of the magnet member 4351. Is maintained at a position that matches.

One end (the left end of FIG. 37 (a)) of the magnet member 4351 abuts on the outer surface of the main body member 4310 at the initial position shown in FIG. 37 (a), and the magnet member 4351 is engaged as shown in FIG. 37 (c). At the stop position (the position rotated counterclockwise by 72 ° from the initial position about the shaft rod 4313), the other end (the upper end in FIG. 37 (c)) comes into contact with the stopper 4353.

The arc wall portion 4352 is a wall portion arranged outside the magnet member 4351, and is arranged at a position where a gap is left between the arc wall portion 4352 and the magnet member 4351 when the magnet member 4351 is attracted to the disk member 4341. Will be done.

For example, even if for some reason the game board 13 vibrates and an impact is applied to the magnet member 4351 and the attraction between the disk member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 is temporarily released, the magnet member 4351 has an arc. Since it is supported by the wall portion 4352, it is possible to prevent the magnet member 4351 from being largely displaced.

The stopper portion 4353 is arranged at a position that blocks the movement of the magnet member 4351. In the present embodiment, the magnet member 4351 and the stopper portion 4353 come into contact with each other in a locked state in which the magnet member 4351 is rotated by a predetermined angle (72 ° in the present embodiment) from the initial position shown in FIG. 37 (a). It is configured in an embodiment (see FIG. 37 (c)), and in this locked state, the sphere P41 flows down to the detection port 312d.

The change in the state of the delay device 4300 when the spheres P41 and P42 pass through the main body member 4310 will be described in chronological order.

As shown in FIG. 37 (a), when the balls P41 and P42 enter the winning opening 64, the balls P41 and P42 reach the sprocket 4340 through the first groove 3311 and the second groove 4312. In the present embodiment, the space between the first plate-shaped portion 4342a and the second plate-shaped portion 4342b of the sprocket 4340 is set to a size capable of accommodating one sphere, so that only the front sphere P41 is accommodated and the rear sprocket 4340 is accommodated. Ball P42 is maintained on the outside of the sprocket 4340.

As shown in FIG. 37 (b), the sprocket 4340 is rotated from the initial state (see FIG. 37 (a)) by the weight of the front sphere P41, and the rear sphere P42 is pushed to the tip of the second plate-shaped portion 4342b. The left side portion is accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312f. Since the position accommodated in the accommodating recess 3312f is the lowermost position of the second groove 4312 on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340, the sphere P42 is maintained at the position shown in FIG. 37 (b) by the action of gravity. ..

In the state shown in FIG. 37 (b), the magnet member 4351 moves integrally with the disk member 4341 of the sprocket 4340. Therefore, the weight of the magnet member 4351 is loaded on the disk member 4341 as a rotation resistance.

As shown in FIG. 37 (c), in a state where the sprocket 4340 is rotated 72 ° counterclockwise from the initial state (a state in which the sphere P31 can flow down to the detection port 312d), the magnet member 4351 and the stopper portion 4353 (The magnet member 4351 is arranged at the locking position).

Therefore, when the sprocket 4340 further rotates counterclockwise when viewed from the front, the magnet member 4351 is maintained in the locked position, and only the sprocket 4340 rotates. In this case, a magnetic force acts between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351, and the magnetic force is applied to the resistance to rotation of the sprocket 4340.

As shown in FIG. 37 (c), the sprocket 4340 is rotated 72 ° from the initial state in a state where the sphere P41 flows down to the detection port 312d while rubbing against the side wall portion 312e and the first plate-shaped portion 4342a. It becomes. That is, the passage of the ball causes the sprocket 4340 to be adjusted to a predetermined posture. Since the shape of the sphere is precisely made, it is possible to reliably rotate the sprocket 4340 by 72 ° by utilizing the precision of the shape of the sphere.

At this time, as shown in FIG. 37 (c), the first plate-shaped portion 4342a inclines downward in the direction of pressing the sphere P41 against the side wall portion 312e, so that the velocity of the sphere P41 is directed toward the side wall portion 312e. It is possible to prevent the first plate-shaped portion 4342a from rotating too much due to the momentum of the ball P41.

In the state shown in FIG. 37 (c), the ball P42 enters the sprocket 4340, and after the ball P41 is thrown toward the detection port 312d, the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P42.

As shown in FIG. 38 (a), when the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the sphere P42, the disk member 4341 and the magnet member 4351 of the sprocket 4340 move relative to each other as shown by the position of the mark M. Therefore, the magnetic force generated between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is applied to the sprocket 4340 as a rotation resistance.

Further, in FIG. 38 (a), following the ball P42, the ball P43 and the ball P44 enter the winning opening 64 and stay on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340.

In the present embodiment, the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 by the magnetic force applied between the magnet member 4351 and the sprocket 4340 is much larger than the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 by the weight of the magnet member 4351. It is configured in a mode (the magnet member 4351 is configured in a mode in which the weight is reduced while the generated magnetic force is increased).

As a result, for example, the period from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 37 (c) is set to 0.5 seconds, while the period shown in FIG. 37 (c) is set to FIG. 38 (a). ) Can be set to 5 seconds (the period required to rotate the sprocket 4340 by a predetermined angle can be changed).

In the present embodiment, the period from the state shown in FIG. 37 (c) to the state shown in FIG. 38 (a) is set to 5 seconds, so that, for example, the ball P41 passes through the detection port 312d. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 becomes 4, and if the fluctuation selected at that time is a fluctuation of 3 seconds, the ball P42 passes through the detection port 312d after the fluctuation is completed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball P42 from overflowing at the winning opening 64 when passing through the detection opening 312d.

As shown in FIG. 38A, when a plurality of balls P43 and balls P44 stay on the upstream side of the sprocket 4340, the load applied from the balls P43 and the balls P44 to the sprocket 4340 is the outer circumference of the accommodating wall portion 4342. Due to the effect of the shape of the surface (arc), the load is applied in the direction (diameter direction) toward the shaft rod 4313.

Therefore, the load applied from the spheres P43 and the spheres P44 in the rotational direction of the sprocket 4340 can be limited to the load generated by the rubbing between the spheres P43 and the sprocket 4340, and is compared with the weights of the spheres P43 and P44 that stay. Therefore, the rotational resistance applied to the sprocket 4340 can be reduced.

38 (b) shows a state in which the ball P42 is sent to the detection port 312d and the ball P43 enters the sprocket 4340 (from the initial state shown in FIG. 37 (a), the sprocket 4340 is 144 counterclockwise when viewed from the front. ° Rotated state) is shown.

When the sprocket 4340 rotates from the state shown in FIG. 38 (b), the relative movement between the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is accompanied by the relative movement of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 as in the case where the sprocket 4340 is rotated by the weight of the ball P42. This also applies when the sphere P44 after the sphere P43 is housed in the sprocket 4340 and the sprocket 4340 rotates.

That is, according to the present embodiment, even if the number of balls entering the winning opening 64 in succession is 4 or more (regardless of the number of balls), the interval at which each ball is sent to the detection opening 312d is constant. The interval is maintained, and the period until the ball P41, which is entered into the winning opening 64 as the first ball, passes through the detection opening 312d is compared with the throwing interval between the balls opened by the sprocket 4340. Can be shortened.

Therefore, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable (for example, the feeling that the ball has entered the winning opening 64 but the fluctuation does not start, so that the player thinks that he / she is doing something wrong). ..

As shown in FIG. 38 (c), after the ball P44 (see FIG. 38 (b)) is thrown toward the detection port 312d, the next ball (the ball entered into the winning opening 64) becomes the sprocket 4340. When not riding, the sprocket 4340 rotates clockwise in the front view due to the weight of the magnet member 4351.

In the present embodiment, since the magnet member 4351 is composed of a light member, the rotation speed of the sprocket 4340 is reduced, and the period until the magnet member 4351 returns from the locked position to the initial position is set to 5 seconds.

Therefore, the sprocket 4340 is further rotated from the timing when the sphere P41 shown in FIG. 37 (a) passes through the detection port 312d and the state shown in FIG. 38 (c), and immediately after the magnet member 4351 is arranged in the initial position, the sprocket 4340 is used. There is a gap of 5 seconds or more between the timing at which the ball to be entered passes through the detection port 312d. The 5 seconds is a period longer than the shortest fluctuation period (3 seconds) that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls in the winning opening 64 is 4.

Therefore, when the ball passes through the sprocket 4340 immediately after the sprocket 4340 returns to the initial state, it is possible to easily prevent an overflow from occurring at the winning opening 64.

In the state shown in FIG. 38 (c), the relative positions of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 do not change in appearance from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), but as shown in the mark M, in reality, FIG. 37 Compared to the state shown in (a), the magnet member 4351 is arranged at a position relative to the shaft rod 4313 by 72 °.

In the present embodiment, in a state where the magnet member 4351 is arranged at the locking position, the sprocket 4340 is placed between the plate-shaped portions of the accommodating wall portion 4342 with respect to the magnet member 4351 each time the ball passes through the second groove 4312. It is configured so that the position is displaced by an angle of one gap (that is, 72 °).

Therefore, the relative movement of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 is limited to a relative movement such that, for example, the first plate-shaped portion 4342a moves to the position of the second plate state 4342b, and after the relative movement, the sprocket 4340 and the sprocket 4340 The overall shape of the magnet member 4351 and the magnet member 4351 does not change from that before the relative movement.

Therefore, regardless of the number of balls passing through the second groove 4312, the overall shape of the sprocket 4340 and the magnet member 4351 after the balls are discharged from the sprocket 4340 can be made unchanged, and thus the winning opening 64 It is possible to eliminate the need to dispose a device for moving the magnet member 4351 at the position of the mark M of the sprocket 4340 when the inflow of the sphere to the sprocket 4340 disappears for a certain period of time (Fig. 38 (c)). As described above, even if the relative positional relationship between the mark M and the magnet member 4351 has changed from the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), it can be left as it is).

Next, a fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46. In the third embodiment, the case where the ball flowing down the second groove 3312 when the stop device 3340 is in the changed state also passes through the stop device 3340 and is discharged through the flow path 3313 after detection has been described, but the fifth embodiment has been described. The delay device 5300 in the above is configured such that a ball flowing down the second groove 5312 flows down the continuous passage groove 5314 when the stop device 3340 is in a changing state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 39 is a partial front view of the delay device 5300 according to the fifth embodiment. Note that FIG. 39 shows a state in which the balls P51 to P54 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is in a changed state. Further, since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 5300 are configured as devices having a symmetrical shape with the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the third embodiment, they have the same reference numerals as those described in the third embodiment. , And the description of the part overlapping with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 39, the delay device 5300 has a main body member 5310 having a flow path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and the action of the ball flowing down inside the main body member 5310. When the stop device 3340 and the stop device 3340 are in a changed state (see FIG. 39), the state is maintained and the posture is changed by the action of a ball passing through the detection port 312d. It mainly includes a maintenance device 3360 that releases the maintenance of the state of the device 3340, and a stop device 5500 that acts on a ball flowing down the continuous passage groove 5314 to stop the ball. Regarding the stop device 5500, in order to facilitate understanding, only the movable plate portion 5510 is shown and the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the movable plate portion 5510 can be visually recognized through the stop portion 5314b in a front view. The part is shown by a solid line, and the other part is shown by a hidden line (broken line). Further, the rotation resistance of the stop device 3340 and the position of the center of gravity G3 are set in such a manner that it takes about 1 second for the stop device 3340 to change from the changed state to the initial state.

As shown in FIG. 39, the main body member 5310 constitutes a flow path that inclines downward, and guides a ball that has entered from the first winning opening 64 to a position vertically above the detection port 312d, and a first groove 5311 and a first groove thereof. From the intermediate position between the second groove 5312 extending vertically from the lower end of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 in which the ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and the second groove 5312. It mainly includes a continuous passage groove 5314 formed as a groove branching to the side (right side in FIG. 39).

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313, and the continuous passage groove 5314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is formed on the game board 13 in the assembled state. By closing, a passage through which the sphere flows is formed.

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 have a symmetrical shape with the configuration having the same name in the third embodiment (first groove 3311, second groove 3312, and post-detection flow path 3313). The description of the part that overlaps with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

The second groove 5312 is a side wall that is arranged to face the recessed portion 312b (in other words, a wall portion that extends to the front side and extends in the vertical direction in the vicinity of the left end portion of the recessed portion 312b). The unit 312e extends to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 5314 that forms a branch passage through which a ball can be thrown is arranged between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e.

The position where the continuous passage groove 5314 is connected to the second groove 5312 is formed to be the same as the position where the accommodating recess 3312f is arranged in the third embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ball that has reached the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 35 (a)) (the ball that entered at the beginning of the balls P51 to P54, that is, the ball P51). Is guided to the detection port 312d while rotating the stop device 3340 to change the state, and reaches the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the change state (see FIG. 39). The spheres P52 to P54) flow down the continuous passage groove 5314.

Further, a receiving wall portion 3312c is provided on the opposite side of the side wall portion 312e, and a housing recess 3312c1 is recessed in the receiving wall portion 3312c toward the rear. The accommodating recess 3312c1 is arranged in a positional relationship in which the magnet portion 3346 can be accommodated when the stopping device 3340 is in a changed state (see FIG. 39).

The post-detection flow path 5313 has the same configuration as the post-detection flow path 3313 of the third embodiment because it is formed in a symmetrical shape. That is, the post-detection flow path 5313 is a flow path through which the ball passing through the detection port 312d flows down, and is arranged directly below the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360, and is a bearing that pivotally supports the shaft portion 3361a of the maintenance device 3360. The portion 3313a, the opening 3313b which is an opening that allows the contact portion 3363 to enter and exit, and the post-detection flow path 5313 are projected from the upper wall toward the lower side surface of the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360. It includes a locking portion 3313c that locks the movement of the main body rod 3361, and a delay flow path 3313d that extends from the detection port 312d to the opening 3313b.

As in the third embodiment, the delay flow path 3313d is designed to have a length through which a sphere flowing down due to the action of gravity passes over a time of at least 3 seconds or more. Therefore, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state for at least 3 seconds, and the balls that have entered during that period can be continuously entered into the continuous passage groove 5314.

In this case, the stop device 3340 has a timing of changing the state toward the changing state due to the flow of the ball P51 entering the first winning opening 64 (the beginning of the period during which the ball can be introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314) and the changing state. The period for maintaining the is specified.

The period during which the stop device 3340 is maintained in this changed state (at least 3 seconds after the state change of the stop device 3340) and the time for the stop device 3340 to return from the changed state to the initial state (about 1 second in the present embodiment) are added up. During this period, it becomes easy for the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 to continuously pass through the second detection port 5314c arranged downstream of the continuous passing groove 5314.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when a plurality of balls P51 and P52 enter the first winning opening 64 without requiring the transition of the gaming state, they are the same as the detection opening 312d and the second detecting opening 5314c. Switching between a state in which it is easy to pass through (a state in which alternate winnings are made) and a state in which it is easier to pass through the second detection port 5314c (a state in which the ball continuously enters the second detection port 5314c) as compared with the detection port 312d. Can be done.

Generally, the minimum firing interval of balls allowed in the pachinko machine 10 is 0.6 seconds, so the upper limit of balls that can normally enter within 3 seconds is 4 or 5 balls. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of balls entering within 3 seconds is assumed to be 5 balls (ignoring the possibility of entering balls after the 6th ball), and the description will be given.

The continuous passage groove 5314 is connected to the introduction groove 5314a to which the balls are first introduced by being connected to the second groove 5312, and is connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a, and a predetermined number of balls are provided (one ball at a time in the present embodiment). It is connected to an intermediate position between the stop portion 5314b to be stopped, the second detection port 5314c which is arranged directly under the stop portion 5314b and allows the ball to pass through, and the second detection port 5314c to detect the passage of the ball, and the introduction groove 5314a. A branch flow path 5314d arranged on the back surface side of the introduction groove 5314a, and a third detection port 5314e arranged in the branch flow path 5314d and provided with a through hole through which the ball can pass and detecting the passage of the ball. Mainly prepare.

The introduction groove 5314a is a groove that inclines downward to the right in the front view as a whole, bends in the vicinity of the lower end position, and extends vertically downward, assuming that a plurality of spheres stay from the lower end. An upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is provided in a region on the back surface side of the third ball counting from the lower end, which is formed to penetrate through the ball with a size that allows the ball to pass through and to which the upper end of the branch flow path 5314d is connected.

The upper end of the branch flow path 5314d is connected to the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 as described above. Therefore, the sphere that has passed through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is guided by the branch flow path 5314d and is detected by passing through the third detection port 5314e. The branch flow path 5314d is shown by a hidden line (broken line) in order to facilitate understanding that the branch flow path 5314d is arranged on the back surface side of the introduction groove 5314a.

On the other hand, the ball that has flowed down the introduction groove 5314a is detected by passing through the second detection port 5314c via the stop portion 5314b. Therefore, the ball introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after being detected by either the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e.

In the present embodiment, the length of the introduction groove 5314a is set in such a manner that it takes at least 2 seconds or more for the sphere to flow down the introduction groove 5314a due to the action of gravity. Therefore, it is possible to reliably shift the passing timing between the ball P51 that passes vertically downward through the stop device 3340 and passes through the detection port 312d and the ball P52 that flows down the introduction groove 5314a and passes through the second detection port 5314c. it can.

For example, when two balls (balls P51 and P52) enter the first winning opening 64 in succession when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (FIG. 35 (a)), the leading ball P51 is the stop device. While changing the state of the 3340 from the initial state to the changed state, it flows down vertically and passes through the detection port 312d immediately after the state of the stop device 3340 is changed. On the other hand, the trailing ball P52 is introduced into the continuous passage groove 5314 by rolling the arc wall portion 343 of the stop device 3340, flows down the introduction groove 5314a for at least 2 seconds, and then flows down the second detection port 5314c. Pass through.

In the present embodiment, the introduction groove 5314a has a longer flow path length than the delay flow path 3313d (see FIG. 39), but compared with the time required for the sphere to pass through the delay flow path 3313d. The time required for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a is shorter. This is because the inclination angle of the introduction groove 5314a with respect to the horizontal plane is larger than the inclination angle of the delay flow path 3313d with respect to the horizontal plane.

The time required for the stop device 3340 to change state from the initial state to the change state is set to be negligibly short (about 0.1 seconds) until the ball that has changed the state of the stop device 3340 passes through the detection port 312d. When the length of the side wall portion 312e is set in such a manner that the time required for the sphere P51 is extremely short (about 0.1 second), the timing at which the sphere P51 is detected by passing through the detection port 312d and the timing at which the sphere P52 is detected are second. The timing of detection can be shifted by passing through the detection port 5314c.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 39, the path length from the first winning opening 64 to the second detection opening 5314c is larger than the path length from the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d. Set long. As a result, visually, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 passes through the first winning opening 64 rather than the time required from passing through the first winning opening 64 to passing through the detection opening 312d. It can be determined that the time required to pass through the second detection port 5314c is longer.

In the present embodiment, when a ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c (also referred to as starting winning or entering a ball; the same applies to other embodiments). With that as a trigger, the first symbol display device 37 executes variable display of the first special symbol (first symbol), and when the sphere passes through the third detection port 5314e, the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. The variable display is executed. In other words, the variable display is still displayed from the time the ball enters the first winning opening 64 until it passes through the detection sensor (detection port 312d, the first winning opening switch (not shown in the first embodiment, etc.)). Is not executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the ball enters the second winning opening 640 (starting winning), the second winning opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the second winning opening switch is turned on. Due to the turning on of the winning opening switch, the main control device 110 (see FIG. 4) draws a big hit of the second special symbol, and the display according to the lottery result is shown on the first symbol display device 37B. Further, unless otherwise specified, this display is similarly performed in other embodiments.

Here, the difference between the first special symbol and the second special symbol in the present embodiment (common to the first embodiment) will be described. That is, when the ball wins in the first winning opening 64 (in the case of the big hit lottery of the first special symbol) and when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 (in the case of the big hit lottery of the second special symbol). So, the probability of winning a jackpot is the same in both the low probability state and the high probability state. However, the probability of becoming a 15R probability variation jackpot as the type of jackpot selected in the case of a jackpot is that when the ball wins in the second winning opening 640 (the jackpot of the second special symbol), it goes to the first winning opening 64. It is set higher than when the ball wins (the jackpot of the first special symbol).

In the following, the detection port in which the detection sensor is arranged may be simply referred to as a detection port (or a winning port, a ball entry port, etc.) (the description of the detection sensor may be omitted), and the ball is detected. The description that the lottery is performed (variation is executed) due to passing through the mouth (or the winning opening, the winning opening, etc.) is omitted, and the ball is simply the detection opening (or the winning opening, etc.). It may be briefly explained when passing through the entrance (such as the entrance).

The data of the first symbol acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c can be stored up to four (can be stored in the four holding areas in order), while the number of stored items and the data thereof. Can independently acquire the data of the second symbol at the timing when the sphere passes through the third detection port 5314e.

In the present embodiment, the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate the number of holdings among the number of passages of the first winning opening 64 (the detection opening 312d and the second detection opening 5314c) and the second winning opening 640. Along with this (at the same time), the first symbol hold mark as a decorative display indicating the number of holds is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since the first symbol hold mark is displayed at the same time as the display of the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B, for example, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64, the ball enters the detection opening 312d or the second. When the detection port 5314c is passed, the display of the first symbol hold mark is started. Further, this display start is similarly executed in other embodiments.

In addition, in this embodiment, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set so as to win with a probability of about 1/1 regardless of the game state (normal, probable change, time saving). To. Therefore, when the ball passes through the third detection port 5314e, the electric accessory 640a is opened for a predetermined time, so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2). be able to.

In order to throw the ball toward the third detection port 5314e, as will be described later, it is sufficient to frequently insert the ball into the first winning opening 64, so that the ball is sent to the second winning opening 640 (see FIG. 2). It is possible to motivate a player who aims to enter the ball to frequently enter the ball into the first winning opening 64.

On the other hand, as will be described later, if the ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 at a reduced frequency, the ball passes through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c instead of the third detection port 5314e. Therefore, by adjusting the frequency of ball entry into the first winning opening 64, the player may execute the variation of the first symbol with the ball entering the first winning opening 64, or the variation of the second symbol. You can choose whether to execute.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the variation display of the first special symbol is always started before the variation display of the normal symbol is executed, and the variation display is performed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to solve the problem that the timing at which the variable display of the normal symbol is started may be overlooked because the display of the third symbol display device 81 is too quiet. Further, by performing the variable display of the first special symbol together with the variable display of the normal symbol, it is possible to improve the attention to the variable display as compared with the case where only the variable display of the normal symbol is performed.

In the present embodiment, as the first symbol display devices 37A and 37B indicate the number of hold times among the number of passages of the through gate 67 (at the same time), the third symbol display device 81 is decorated to indicate the number of hold times. The second symbol hold mark is displayed as a typical display.

Next, the stop portion 5314b will be described with reference to FIG. 40. FIG. 40 is a partially enlarged front view of the continuous passage groove 5314. For ease of understanding, the branch flow path 5314d and the stop device 5500 are not shown.

The retaining portion 5314b is a hole-shaped incomplete flow path through which the wall portion on the back surface side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 40) is removed and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and is formed from a pair of plates extending in the vertical direction. The ball storage plate portion 5314b1 and the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 which is a through hole extending in the left-right direction and penetrating in the front-rear direction (vertical direction on the paper surface) at the upper end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 and the ball storage plate. The lower end portion 5314b1 is mainly provided with a lower end elongated hole 5314b3 which is a through hole extending in a direction parallel to the extending direction of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 and penetrating in the front-rear direction.

The ball storage plate portion 5314b1 is formed so that the length in the vertical direction is slightly longer than the diameter R of the sphere. Therefore, the number of balls that can be stopped at one time is limited to one in the stop portion 5314b formed by the ball storage plate portion 5314b1.

The upper end elongated hole 5314b2 and the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 are set to have the same extension length, while the left and right end positions are shifted in the vertical direction. In the present embodiment, the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 is arranged so that its center position in the left-right direction coincides with the right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b2 in the front view. That is, the right end portion of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 is arranged at a position separated from the right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the right by a length H1 which is half the total length of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2. Therefore, the left end portion of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 is from the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the left, from the length H1 to the width length of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 (the length between the plates of the pair of plates, that is, the diameter). It is arranged at a position separated by a length obtained by subtracting a width length HR slightly longer than R).

On the other hand, the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 is arranged so that its center position in the left-right direction coincides with the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b2 in the front view. That is, the left end portion of the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 is arranged at a position separated from the left end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 by a length H1 to the left. Therefore, the right end portion of the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 is from the right end portion of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 to the right, from the length H1 to the width length of the ball storage plate portion 5314b1 (the length between the plates of the pair of plates, that is, the diameter). It is arranged at a position separated by a length obtained by subtracting a width length HR slightly longer than R). That is, the right end positions of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 and the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 are separated from each other by the width length HR in the left-right direction, and the left end positions of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 and the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 are similarly separated from each other by the width length HR. Only separated in the left-right direction.

Similar to the introduction groove 5314a, the game board 13 is arranged on the front side of the stop portion 5314b in the assembled state. As a result, the opening on the front side is closed by the game board 13, so that a groove shape is formed in which the passage of the ball is restricted except for the opening on the back side and the upper and lower openings.

The remaining rear opening is closed by the movable plate portion 5510 (see FIG. 39) that is slidably supported by the upper end slot 5314b2 and the lower end slot 5314b3, so that the ball can pass through except for the upper and lower openings. It constitutes a regulated flow path shape. Hereinafter, the stopping device 5500 will be described with reference to FIG. 41.

41 (a) is a front view of the stop device 5500, and FIG. 41 (b) is a top view of the stop device 5500 in the direction of arrow XLIb of FIG. 41 (a). As shown in FIGS. 41 (a) and 41 (b), the stop device 5500 has a movable plate portion 5510 slidably supported by the stop portion 5314b in the assembled state, and a driving force for operating the movable plate portion 5510. 5520, a rod-shaped transmission member 5530 that transmits the driving force generated by the drive device 5520 to the movable plate portion 5510, and a detection device 5540 that detects the position of the transmission member 5530. ..

The movable plate portion 5510 includes a main body plate portion 5511 formed of a plate member having a rectangular shape in a front view, and an upper extension plate 5512 and a lower extension plate extending in pairs from the main body plate portion 5511 to the front side. It mainly includes a 5513 and a connecting convex portion 5514 that is projected from the back surface of the main body plate portion 5511 toward the transmission member 5530.

The upper extension plate 5512 and the lower extension plate 5513 have a length H1 in the left-right direction, a vertical dimension (thickness) shorter than the vertical width dimension of the upper end elongated hole 5314b2, and a front-rear dimension (extension length). Is formed as a thin plate having a length such that the distance from the game board 13 is less than the diameter R in the assembled state. Further, the upper extension plate 5512 and the lower extension plate 5513 are arranged so as to be parallel to each other and the left and right ends are offset from each other by the width and length HR.

The drive device 5520 has a rotary drive motor 5521 (one of the solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) and a disk shape that rotates with the rotation of the drive motor 5521 and transmits the drive force to the transmission member 5530. The rotary disk 5522 and the base member 5523, which is a base-like member fixed to the game board 13 and to which the case of the drive motor 5521 is fastened and fixed, are mainly provided.

The rotary disk 5522 has a drive shaft 5521a of the drive motor 5521 inserted and fixed in the center of the circle, and is convex in a columnar shape from an eccentric position separated from the center of the circle by the width and length HR toward the transmission member 5530. The transmission convex portion 5522a to be provided is provided.

The base member 5523 has a flat surface whose upper surface is formed substantially horizontally, extends upward from the upper surface thereof, and includes a plurality of sandwiching portions 5523a for sandwiching the first rod portion 5531 from the front and back in the assembled state.

The sandwiching portion 5523a is a plurality of rib-shaped portions that are arranged in parallel with each other separated from each other by the front-rear width dimension of the first rod portion 5531 and are scattered on a straight line facing left and right. Two are arranged before and after the rod portion 5531. As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 5530 from being displaced back and forth, and it is possible to facilitate the sliding operation in the left-right direction due to the guiding effect.

The transmission member 5530 is a rod-shaped portion that is formed in an L shape extending in the left-right direction and the up-down direction starting from the lower right portion in the front view and is placed on the flat upper surface of the base member 5523. The first rod portion 5531 connected to the movable plate portion 5510 at the end portion of the side), the rod-shaped second rod portion 5532 extending vertically upward from the other end portion of the first rod portion 5531, and the first rod portion 5532 thereof. It mainly includes a long hole-shaped connecting long hole 5533 that penetrates the two-rod portion 5532 in the front-rear direction and is long in the vertical direction.

The first rod portion 5531 is supported by the flat upper surface of the base member 5523 so that it can move in the left-right direction along the flat upper surface thereof, and one end of the movable plate portion 5510 can accept the connecting convex portion 5514. A receiving recess 5531a recessed in the portion and a detected portion 5531b projecting toward the detection device 5540 side (upward) at an intermediate position in the left-right direction are mainly provided.

The receiving recess 5531a has substantially the same length (or slightly longer) in the left-right direction than the size of the connecting convex portion 5514, and the vertical dimension allows some rattling (a gap is formed). It is said to be the length.

As a result, the positional deviation between the receiving recess 5531a and the connecting convex portion 5514 in the left-right direction is suppressed, and when a load is applied from the connecting convex portion 5514 to the receiving concave portion 5531a, the positional deviation in the vertical direction is generated. , The load can be released.

Here, when the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 are formed by integral molding, the positional deviation in the left-right direction does not occur, but it becomes difficult to release the load, so that the durability tends to be low. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, by forming the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 as separate members, it is possible to improve the durability against a load while suppressing the positional deviation in the left-right direction.

In the present embodiment, the vertical position of the movable plate portion 5510 does not change due to the drive of the driving device 5520. Therefore, even if the vertical positional deviation between the connecting convex portion 5514 and the receiving recess 5531a is allowed, the vertical position is allowed. It does not affect the performance described later (the function of sliding the movable plate portion 5510 left and right to open or close the flow path).

The extension length of the connecting elongated hole 5533 in the vertical direction is set to be at least twice the width and length HR, and the connecting elongated hole 5533 can receive and connect the transmission convex portion 5522a of the drive device 5520. As the arrangement of the transmission convex portion 5522a changes with the rotation of the rotating disk 5522, the arrangement of the connecting elongated holes 5533 connected to the transmission convex portion 5522a changes, so that the transmission member 5530 slides (FIGS. 42 and FIG. 43).

The detection means 5540 is a sensor for detecting the support member 5541 fixed to the base member 5523 and the detection groove facing the side (lower side) where the detection groove is arranged to face the first rod portion 5531, and is a front view of the support member 5541. It mainly includes a first sensor 5542 fixed to the right end portion and a second sensor 5543 which is the same type of sensor as the first sensor 5542 and is fixed to the left end portion of the support member 5541 in the same posture in the front view.

The first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are transmissive sensors including a light emitter and a light receiver arranged so as to face each other with the detected unit 5531b sandwiched in the front-rear direction, and detect the detected unit 5531b that slides left and right. That is, by arranging the detected portion 5531b between the light emitter and the light receiver (arranged so as to overlap in the front-rear direction at the lower end position in FIG. 41 (a)), the light emitted by the light emitter toward the light receiver is blocked. Then, the detected portion 5531b is detected by the first sensor 5542 or the second sensor 5543.

Next, the operation mode of the stopping device 5500 will be described with reference to FIGS. 42 and 43. 42 (a), 42 (b), 43 (a) and 43 (b) are front views of the stop portion 5314b and the stop device 5500. In addition, in FIG. 42 and FIG. 43, the main body plate portion 5511 of the movable plate portion 5510 which is arranged on the back side (the back side of the paper surface of FIG. 42) of the plate portion constituting the outer shape of the continuous passage groove 5314 so as to overlap the plate portion. However, it is simply illustrated by a solid line including the overlapping portion.

In FIG. 42 (a), the rotating disk 5522 is in the initial phase (both closed states of the stopping device 5500), and in FIG. 42 (b), the rotating disk 5522 is clockwise from the initial phase. In FIG. 43 (a), the rotating disk 5522 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the second phase in the state of the second phase (upward open state of the stopping device 5500) when the rotation is 90 degrees. In FIG. 43 (b), the state of the third phase at the time point (both closed states of the stopping device 5500) is the fourth phase at the time when the rotating disk 5522 is rotated 90 degrees clockwise from the third phase. The states (states in which the stop device 5500 is open downward) are shown in the drawings.

The displacements in the states shown in FIGS. 42 (a), 42 (b), 43 (a), and 43 (b) occur at equal time intervals, and are from the state shown in FIG. 43 (b). As time passes, the state returns to the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). That is, the changes in the states shown in FIGS. 42 (a), 42 (b), 43 (a), and 43 (b) are repeated at regular intervals from the time when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. In this embodiment, the drive motor 5521 is controlled at an operating speed at which the rotating disk 5522 makes one rotation in about 6 seconds.

In the state shown in FIG. 42 (a), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the ball P52 reaches above the stop portion 5314b in the state shown in FIG. 42A, the ball P52 is restricted from entering the stop portion 5314b. Further, the lower opening of the stop portion 5314b is also closed by the lower extension plate 5513 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere).

From the state shown in FIG. 42 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the lower opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the lower extending plate 5513 (gap of the continuous passage groove 5314). Is less than the diameter of the sphere). On the other hand, the upper extension plate 5512 is retracted and opened from the upper opening of the stop portion 5314b (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the sphere P52 reaches above the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 42 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 42 (b), the sphere P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. Balls are allowed, but discharge from the stop 5314b is restricted.

From the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is a sphere). Is less than the diameter of). Further, the lower opening of the stop portion 5314b is also closed by the lower extension plate 5513 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is made smaller than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the sphere P52 reaches above the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 42 (b) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), the sphere P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. The ball is regulated.

From the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the upper opening of the retaining portion 5314b is closed by the upper extending plate 5512 (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is a sphere). Is less than the diameter of). On the other hand, the lower extension plate 5513 is retracted and opened from the lower opening of the stop portion 5314b (the gap of the continuous passage groove 5314 is set to be equal to or larger than the diameter of the sphere). Therefore, even if the sphere P52 reaches above the stop portion 5314b from the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) to the state shown in FIG. 43 (b), the sphere P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. The ball is regulated. Further, this regulation is similarly maintained until the state shown in FIG. 43 (b) is restored to the state shown in FIG. 42 (a). On the other hand, the sphere arranged in the stop portion 5314b in the state shown in FIG. 43 (a) is discharged toward the second detection port 5314c in the state shown in FIG. 43 (b).

Therefore, since there is no time when the stop portion 5314b opens at the same time in the series of operations of the movable plate portion 5510, the ball P52 reaching the stop portion 5314b can be reliably stopped.

In the present embodiment, the rotating disk 5522 is rotated clockwise in the front view, but even when the rotating disk 5522 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the front view, the same repetitive operation can be performed with a half cycle deviation. That is, since the rotation direction is not limited, the degree of freedom in designing the drive mode can be improved.

In the present embodiment, the arrangement of the transmission member 5530 that slides left and right with the rotation of the rotating disk 5522 can always be detected by the detection device 5540. That is, in the initial phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 42 (a), both the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 detect it, and the second rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 42 (b) is detected. In the phase, it is detected by the first sensor 5542 but not by the second sensor 5543, and in the third phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 43 (a), the first sensor is similar to the initial phase. It is detected by both the 5542 and the second sensor 5543, and is not detected by the first sensor 5542 in the fourth phase of the rotating disk 5522 shown in FIG. 43 (b), but is detected by the second sensor 5543.

Therefore, when the transmission member 5530 is operating normally, the outputs of the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are switched at regular intervals, so that the outputs of the first sensor 5542 and the second sensor 5543 are switched. By confirming the mode, it is possible to immediately determine whether the operation is normal or whether some abnormality (for example, the device has stopped due to a malfunction) has occurred.

In the present embodiment, as will be described later, a ball may ride on the upper surface of the upper extension plate 5512 or the lower extension plate 5513. In this case, the extension plates 5512 and 5513 may be tilted toward the front side due to the weight of the sphere, but as shown in FIGS. 42 and 43, the upper extension plate 5512 is placed in the upper end elongated hole 5314b2 on the lower side. The extension plate 5513 is inserted into the lower end elongated hole 5314b3 from the back surface side, and the movement in the vertical direction is restricted. Therefore, the tilt angle of each of the extension plates 5512 and 5513 can be reduced.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the movable plate portion 5510 and the transmission member 5530 are composed of separate members and are configured to allow some rattling in the vertical direction, the movable plate portion 5510 is tilted toward the front side. It is possible to suppress the degree of tilting operation (transmission degree) of the transmission member 5530 that accompanies the operation.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the transmission member 5530 from tilting back and forth, so that it is possible to prevent an increase in resistance generated at the connection position (contact position) with the rotating disk 5522, and it is possible to prevent the transmission member 5530 from tilting back and forth. It is possible to prevent the member 5530 from coming into contact with the sensors 5542 and 5543 in the front-rear direction and applying a load to the sensors 5542 and 5543.

Next, the flow-down mode of the sphere flowing down the main body member 5310 in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 44 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of each part when a ball entering the first winning opening 64 is detected, and is a timing chart of FIGS. 45 (a), 45 (b), and 46 (a). And FIG. 46 (b) is a partial front view of the continuous passage groove 5314 and the stopping device 5500 showing an example of the movement of the ball in the continuous passage groove 5314. Regarding the stop device 5500, in order to facilitate understanding, only the movable plate portion 5510 is shown and the illustration of other configurations is omitted, and the movable plate portion 5510 can be visually recognized through the stop portion 5314b in a front view. The part is shown by a solid line, and the other part is shown by a hidden line (broken line).

In FIG. 44, the timing at which the output pulse of the detection port 312d, the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e is turned on is such that the ball passes through the detection port 312d, the second detection port 5314c or the third detection port 5314e. The waveform is illustrated in a timing-indicating manner. In the timing chart of the introduction groove 5314a, a pulse is generated upward at the timing when the ball enters the introduction groove 5314a from the first groove 5311, and a pulse is generated downward at the timing when the ball is discharged from the introduction groove 5314a to the stop portion 5314b. In aspects, the waveform is illustrated. Although the waveform of the timing chart of the stopping device 5500 shows the change of the state, it is simplified and shown as a rectangular wave for easy understanding.

In the timing chart illustrated in FIG. 44, balls P51 to P55 continuously enter the first winning opening 64 at intervals of about 0.2 seconds. In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be entered in a row at one time is assumed to be 5, and therefore, in the example shown in FIG. 44, the upper limit number of balls is entered in a row in the first winning opening 64. Corresponds to the case of a ball.

Among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64, the ball P51 that has entered at the beginning passes through the detection port 312d while changing the stop device 3340 from the initial state to the changing state. After the stop device 3340 changes to the changed state, it takes at least 3 seconds for the maintenance of the state to be released by the action of the ball P51. Therefore, the following balls P52 to P55 hit the stop device 3340 in the changed state. Enter the continuous passage groove 5314 while touching.

In FIG. 44, a case where the balls P52 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64 in succession after the ball P51 is shown, but the ball entry mode is not limited to this. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, it takes 3 seconds for the maintenance of the changed state of the stop device 3340 to be released by the action of the sphere P51, and after the release, the stop device 3340 is in the initial state. Since it takes about 1 second until the ball P51 changes from the initial state to the changed state by the action of the ball P51, the ball flows down into the continuous passage groove 5314 by the stop device 3340 for about 4 seconds. The flow path is switched to. That is, according to the present embodiment, not only the balls that have continuously entered the first winning opening 64, but also the first winning opening within about 4 seconds after the ball P51 has entered the first winning opening 64. The ball that has entered the 64 can be entered into the continuous passage groove 5314 by the action of the stop device 3340.

In the example illustrated in FIG. 44, the stopping device 5500 is in the upper open state at the timing when the trailing balls P52 to P55 reach the lower end of the continuous passage groove 5314. The sphere P52, which is a sphere, enters the stop portion 5314b, and the other spheres P53 to P55 stay in the continuous passage groove 5314 (see FIG. 45A).

As shown in FIG. 44, in the present embodiment, when the number of follow-up balls is large (in this example, four balls P52 to P55), the balls P55 staying in the continuous passage groove 5314 are present. It may stop at the front side position of the upper limit discharge port 5314a1.

In this case, the ball P55 is pushed out toward the upper limit discharge port 5314a1 by the collision with the ball P54 that stays earlier (the velocity component toward the back side is increased), enters the branch flow path 5314d, and enters the third branch flow path 5314d. It passes through the detection port 5314e. Therefore, the upper limit number (dynamic upper limit number) of balls that can stay in the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 5314b where the balls can be stopped in the continuous passage groove 5314 is set to 3, and when there are more balls. Even so, those spheres do not stay and are flown into the branch flow path 5314d and later pass through the third detection port 5314e (see FIGS. 45 (b) and 46 (a)).

As a result, even when the frequency of entering the first winning opening 64 is adjusted to be excessively high, it is possible to prevent the number of balls staying in the continuous passage groove 5314 from becoming excessively large, so that the flow path can be increased. It is possible to prevent clogging.

As shown in FIG. 44, the spheres P52 to P54 later pass through the second detection port 5314c. That is, among the plurality of balls P51 to P55 that entered the first winning opening 64, the leading ball P51 passed through the detection port 312d, and the following balls P52 to P54 passed through the second detecting port 5314c and overflowed. The sphere P55 passes through the third detection port 5314e.

Therefore, regardless of the timing at which the game is started, the ball P51 inevitably passes through the detection port 312d before the ball P55 passes through the third detection port 5314e. Therefore, at the timing when the ball P55 enters the third detection port 5314e, it is possible to execute at least the variation display started due to the ball passing through the detection port 312d. As a result, the variation display executed due to the sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e can be naturally noticed.

That is, the variation display (variation display of the first symbol or the accompanying variation display on the third symbol display device 81) started due to the ball passing through the detection port 312d shifts the gaming state to the jackpot state. Since it is a variable display related to whether or not to make it, the player's attention naturally attracts, while the variable display started due to the ball passing through the third detection port 5314e (ordinary symbol (No. 1) The variation display of 2 symbols) or the accompanying variation display on the 3rd symbol display device 81) is not a variation display directly related to the transition to the jackpot state, so it is difficult to attract attention.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the variation display (variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) or the accompanying third symbol display device 81) is started due to the sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e. (Variation display) is always performed, and the variation display (variation display of the first symbol or the accompanying variation display on the third symbol display device 81) is started due to the ball passing through the detection port 312d. ) Is executed, the fluctuations of the first symbol can be displayed at the same time on the third symbol display device 81, and the attention of the fluctuation display of the first symbol or the accompanying fluctuation display on the third symbol display device 81. By using this, it is possible to pay attention to the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) or the accompanying variable display on the third symbol display device 81.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from overlooking that the normal symbol (second symbol) fluctuates and that the symbol displayed as a stop is a symbol indicating a hit (for example, a symbol of "○"). Therefore, even though the normal symbol (second symbol) is a hit and the electric accessory 640a is opened so that the ball can easily enter the second winning opening 640, the player does not notice it. Can be prevented from occurring.

The upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b varies depending on the timing of entering the balls. That is, as described above, if the stop device 5500 is in the upper open state when the leading ball P52 reaches the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a among the balls that have entered the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P52 is placed in the stop portion 5314b. Since the third ball P55 counted from the ball P53 is discharged to the branch flow path 5314d, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 5314b is 3 of the balls P52 to P54. It becomes an individual.

On the other hand, if the stopping device 5500 is in the both closed state or the lower open state when the leading ball P52 reaches the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P52 does not enter the stopping portion 5314b and the introduction groove 5314a It stops at the lower end position (see FIG. 46 (b)). In this case, since the third ball P54 counting from the ball P52 is discharged to the branch flow path, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 5314b is the balls P52 and P53. It becomes two of.

In this case, if the stop device 5500 changes to the upper open state before the ball P54 stops in the introduction groove 5314a, the ball P53 also descends as the ball P52 enters the stop portion 5314b. Since there is a gap between the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 and the sphere P53, the sphere P54 can stay in the introduction groove 5314a (see FIG. 45A). As a result, the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b is three balls P52 to P54.

In this way, by changing the upper limit of the number of balls that can be stopped in the introduction groove 5314a and the stopping portion 5314b depending on the timing, even when the balls enter the first winning opening 64 with the same number and frequency, the result is obtained. The profit given to the player can be changed depending on the timing of entering the ball. This makes it possible to provide a fresh game (a game that never gets tired of).

The timing interval at which the spheres P51 to P54 pass through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c will be described. The period required from when the ball P51 enters the first winning opening 64 to when it passes through the detection opening 312d is set to be invariant.

On the other hand, the period from when the leading ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d to when the trailing ball P52, which has entered immediately after the ball P51, passes through the second detection port 5314c, varies depending on the situation.

This is because, in order for the ball P52 to pass through the second detection port 5314c, the ball P52 must enter the stop portion 5314b in the upper open state of the stop device 5500, and then the stop device 5500 needs to change to the lower open state. However, depending on how many seconds after the stop device 5500 changes to the upper open state, the ball P52 enters the stop 5314b and then the stop device 5500 is in the lower open state. It depends on the time until.

In the present embodiment, the period from when the first ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d to when the trailing ball P52, which has entered immediately after that, passes through the second detection port 5314c, is the first winning opening 64. The shape of the introduction groove 5314a is designed so as to be longer than the fluctuation period (3 seconds, hereinafter also referred to as the lower limit period for holding digestion) that is easily selected when the number of holding balls is 3 or 4. Unless otherwise specified, the holding digestion lower limit period, which is a variable period that is easily selected when the number of holding balls is 3 or 4, is the same in other embodiments (for example, the first embodiment). Will be done.

That is, the ball that has entered the continuous passage groove 5314 passes through the second detection port 5314c after passing through the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 5314b. In the present embodiment, the ball that acts on the ball that reaches the stop portion 5314b is stopped. It takes a minimum of 1.5 seconds for the device 5500 to change its state from the upper open state to the lower open state.

Therefore, when a ball enters the stop portion 5314b immediately before the state of the stop device 5500 changes from the upper open state to the closed state (the ball can enter the stop portion 5314b, and then the stop device 5500 is in the lower open state. Even if the time required to change the state is the shortest), it takes 1.5 seconds for the ball to be discharged from the stop 5314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c.

In the present embodiment, the lower limit period for holding digestion is defined as 3 seconds. Therefore, if the time required for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a is 1.5 seconds or more, the ball enters the continuous passage groove 5314. It is possible that the pending digestion lower limit period elapses from the time until the passage through the second detection port 5314c. In the present embodiment, the introduction groove 5314a is designed in a shape (length, inclination, etc.) that requires 2 seconds for the sphere flowing down due to gravity to pass through the introduction groove 5314a in consideration of the margin.

As a result, even if a plurality of balls P51 to P55 are entered into the first winning opening 64 when the number of the first special symbols displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is three, the spheres P52 Since the fluctuation (the fluctuation corresponding to the case where the first special symbol is held for three) can be completed by the time the player passes through the second detection port 5314c, the number of balls entered in the first winning opening 64 is increased. On the other hand, it is possible to secure the maximum chance of lottery (the opportunity of the lottery of the first symbol or the second symbol) that the player can obtain.

The intervals at which the trailing balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c are equally spaced according to the operating speed of the stopping device 5500. This is because no matter how many balls P52 to P54 that follow up flow down the introduction groove 5314a, only one ball can enter the stop portion 5314b.

That is, the timing at which the balls P53 and P54 that have entered the first winning opening 64 after the ball P52 enter the stop portion 5314b is specified regardless of the state of the stop device 5500. More specifically, when the ball P53 reaches the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a when the stop device 5500 is in the upper open state, the ball P52 is restricted from flowing down by the ball P52 which is stopped in advance in the stop portion 5314b, and the ball P52 is restricted from the stop portion 5314b. It is impossible for the ball P53 to enter the stop 5314b until it is discharged.

Therefore, regardless of the state of the stopping device 5500 when the ball P53 reaches the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a, the stopping device 5500 is opened up next (if it is in the upper open state at the time of arrival, it is next). The ball P53 is located above the upper extension plate 5512 and does not enter the stop 5314b until the state changes to the state.

After that, the ball P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c immediately after the stop device 5500 changes its state to the downward open state. After that, each time the stop device 5500 is in the upper open state, the balls P53 and P54 enter the stop portion 5314b one by one, and each time the stop device 5500 changes to the lower open state through both closed states. It passes through the second detection port 5314c.

Therefore, since the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c one by one each time the stopping device 5500 is opened downward, the interval at which the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c is kept constant. can do. In the present embodiment, since the stopping device 5500 is controlled so as to repeatedly operate at intervals of 6 seconds, the balls P52 to P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c at intervals of 6 seconds.

Therefore, the interval at which the balls P52 to P54 are detected can be set to be equal to or longer than the reserved digestion lower limit period. Therefore, the balls P52 to P54 are detected before the reserved digestion lower limit period elapses, so that the first winning opening 64 is reached. It is possible to prevent a disadvantage that the lottery opportunity for the number of balls entered cannot be obtained.

As described above, since the timing at which the ball P52 that has entered the first winning opening 64 immediately after the leading ball P51 enters the stopping portion 5314b can change depending on the state of the stopping device 5500, the ball P51 is the detection port 312d. The timing at which the sphere P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be changed from time to time (the passage interval can be changed). Therefore, even when the balls are continuously entered into the first winning opening 64 at the same interval, the timing (interval) at which the first symbol is held and displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed depending on the time. , Can give freshness to the game.

In particular, when the ball continuously enters the first winning opening 64 while the ball stays in the continuous passage groove 5314, the ball newly enters the continuous passage groove 5314 due to the action of the ball staying in the continuous passage groove 5314. The ball is prevented from entering the stop portion 5314b. Therefore, since the timing at which the ball newly entered in the continuous passage groove 5314 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be delayed, the occurrence of overflow caused by the ball newly entered in the first winning opening 64 can be suppressed. Can be done.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed as two, the case where the balls P51 to P55 enter in the manner shown in FIG. 44 will be described. At this time, the current fluctuation display (variation display for 6 seconds) ends before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52 and ends after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52. Since there may be cases where this is done, the explanations will be given separately in order.

When the variation display ends before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the number of reserved spheres is three because the sphere P51 has passed the detection port 312d before the passage of the sphere P52. The variation display is started, and the variation display (3 seconds) and the next variation display (3 seconds) end before the sphere P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Therefore, since two empty spaces for the number of reserved balls are secured before the balls P53 and P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c, the first special trigger is that the balls P53 and P54 pass through the second detection port 5314c. It is possible to execute variable display of symbols. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

When the variation display ends after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the spheres P51 and P52 pass through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5314c after the passage of the sphere P52 and before the passage of the sphere P53. As a result, the fluctuation display (3 seconds) in the state where the number of reserved balls is four is started, and the fluctuation display ends before the balls P53 pass through the second detection port 5314c. After that, the ball P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c while the variation display (3 seconds) started when the number of reserved balls is 3, and then started when the number of reserved balls is 4. The sphere P54 passes through the second detection port 5314c after the fluctuation display (3 seconds) is completed. Therefore, the variation display of the first special symbol can be executed by using the spheres P52 to P54 as a trigger to pass through the second detection port 5314c. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

Further, for example, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is displayed as one, the case where the balls P51 to P55 enter in the manner shown in FIG. 44 will be described. At this time, the current fluctuation display (variation display for 10 seconds) ends before the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51, and after the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51 and the second of the sphere P52. There are cases where the process ends before the passage of the detection port 5314c and cases where the process ends before the passage of the second detection port 5312c of the ball P52 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the ball P53. It will be explained in order. In the present embodiment, the variation display time, which is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is 0, is set to 15 seconds.

When the variation display ends before the ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d, the variation display started when the number of reserved balls is 0 is executed before the ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d. Therefore, since four free areas of the reserved sphere of the first special symbol are secured, the variation display of the first special symbol is executed with the spheres P51 to P54 passing through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c as a trigger. can do. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

If the variation display ends after the passage of the detection port 312d of the sphere P51 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the sphere P52, the variation display executed when the sphere P52 passes through the second detection port 5314c is The fluctuation display (6 seconds) started when the number of reserved balls is 2. Therefore, since this variation display ends before the sphere P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c, there are two free areas of the reserved sphere of the first special symbol before the sphere P53 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Since it is secured, it is possible to execute the variation display of the first special symbol by using the spheres P51 to P54 passing through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c as a trigger. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

If the variation display ends after the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the ball P52 and before the passage of the second detection port 5314c of the ball P53, the variation display started after the end of the variation display has 3 reserved balls. It becomes a fluctuation display (3 seconds) that starts at the time of the number. Therefore, since the variation display ends before the ball P54 passes through the second detection port 5314c, the empty area of the reserved ball of the first special symbol is filled before the ball P54 passes through the second detection port 5314c. Since one can be secured, it is possible to execute the variation display of the first special symbol triggered by the passage of the spheres P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

When the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 0, the free area of the number of reserved balls is sufficient (more than the number of data acquired by passing through the detection ports 312d or the second detection port 5314c of the balls P51 to P54). Since it is secured, the variation display of the first special symbol can be executed by triggering the passage of the spheres P51 to P54 through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c regardless of the end timing of the variation display. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by the balls P51 to P55 entering the first winning opening 64.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, not only when the number of reserved balls is 3, but also when the number of reserved balls is 0 to 2, as shown in FIG. 44, the first winning opening 64 It is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by continuously entering the balls P51 to P55.

Here, a sphere passing through the third detection port 5314e will be described. For example, a detection port A in which a ball entering the first winning opening 64 executes a variation display of the first special symbol by passing the ball, and a detection port B in which a variation display of a normal symbol is executed by the passage of the ball. In the case of a gaming machine that is sorted in order, if the previous game ends immediately after the ball passes through the detection port A, the first winning opening 64 is the first of the balls launched by the player who plays the next game. The ball that has entered the ball passes through the detection port B. Therefore, since it is necessary to execute the variable display of the normal symbol before the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the period required for the player to win the jackpot is extended.

Further, in the above-mentioned gaming machine, it is difficult to determine whether the ball to be entered next is directed to the detection port A or the detection port B, so that the ball first entering the first winning opening 64 Therefore, it is difficult to determine whether the variable display of the first special symbol is performed or the variable display of the normal symbol is performed, and there is a problem that the motivation to start the game may be impaired.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, at least, the ball that first enters the first winning opening 64 after the start of the game inevitably passes through the detection opening 312d (the detection opening that executes the variable display of the first special symbol). It is configured in such a manner that it does not pass through the third detection port 5314e (a detection port that executes variable display of a normal symbol). On the other hand, by inserting a predetermined number or more of balls into the first winning opening 64 within a predetermined period, the balls are configured to enter the third detection opening 5314e.

That is, according to the present embodiment, the gaming machine when the player starts the game has the advantage that the variable display of the normal symbol can be executed depending on the mode of entering the ball into the first winning opening 64. Regardless of the situation, it is possible to maintain the function of executing the variable display of the first special symbol triggered by the ball first entering the first winning opening 64. As a result, it is possible to prevent a decrease in motivation to play.

According to the present embodiment, when the balls P51 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64 in a short period of time, the trailing ball (for example, the ball P53) is blocked from flowing down by the stopping device 5500, and the second detection opening. In addition to delaying the passage of the 5314c, it also has a function of damming the flow of the ball that has passed through the continuous passage groove 5314 among the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 as a follow-up. That is, for example, eight seconds after the ball P51 shown in FIG. 44 enters the first winning opening 64 (almost at the same time as the timing at which the ball P53 passes the lower end position of the introduction groove 5314a), two more balls. When the balls enter the first winning opening 64 in succession, the leading ball moves to the detection port 312d after changing the stop device 3340 as in the ball P51, while the trailing ball is the same as the ball P52. Enter the continuous passage groove 5314.

At this time, in the continuous passage groove 5314, the balls P53 and P54 are stopped at the stopping device 5500. Therefore, the trailing ball is dammed down by the ball P54 on the upstream side of the ball P54. That is, even if a ball enters the first winning opening 64 at intervals (for example, at intervals longer than the period required for the stop device 3340 to return to the initial state), the ball flows down. Can be dammed by the ball that first entered the first winning opening 64. Therefore, the timing at which the trailing ball passes through the second detection port 5314c can be delayed by the action caused by the balls P53 and P54 that have entered earlier (after the balls P53 and P54 have passed through the second detection port 5314c). , The follow-up ball can pass through the second detection port 5314c).

Next, the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stopping device 5500 performs a constant operation by a single driving device 5520 has been described, but in the delay device 6300 in the sixth embodiment, the stopping device 6500 is operated by a plurality of driving devices 6520. That is, unlike the fifth embodiment, the interval at which the sphere that has passed through the introduction groove 5314a of the continuous passage groove 6314 passes through the second detection port 5314c can be created in a plurality of modes. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the description of this embodiment, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

47 (a) and 47 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 6300 according to the sixth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) show a state in which the balls P61 and P62 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is in a changed state. .. Further, FIG. 47 (a) shows a state in which a pair of movable plate portions 6510 of the stopping device 6500 project inside the continuous passage groove 6314 (both closed states), and FIG. 47 (b) shows a pair of movable plates. A state in which the portion 6510 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both open states) is shown.

The pair of balls P61 and P62 shown in FIGS. 47 (a) and 47 (b) are shown in the case where they enter the first winning opening 64 with a slight interval. In the present embodiment, after the detection, the sphere P61 passes through the flow path 5313 (passes over 3 seconds), and the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state (returns over 1 second) to the stop device 3340. The abutted sphere flows down the continuous passage groove 6314 in the same manner as the sphere P62. That is, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 within about 4 seconds after the previous ball P61 has entered the first winning opening 64 passes through the continuous passage groove 6314 in the same manner as the ball P62. Therefore, according to the present embodiment, not only the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 in a continuous state but also the balls that have entered the first winning opening 64 at intervals cause the continuous passage groove 6314 to flow down. be able to.

As shown in FIG. 47, the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 6300 are configured as devices having a symmetrical shape with the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals as those in the description will be given, and the description will be omitted for the parts that overlap with the description in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 47, the delay device 6300 has a main body member 6310 having a flow path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and the action of the ball flowing down inside the main body member 6310. When the stop device 3340 and the stop device 3340 are in a changed state (see FIG. 39), the state is maintained and the posture is changed by the action of a ball passing through the detection port 312d. It mainly includes a maintenance device 3360 that releases the maintenance of the state of the device 3340, and a stop device 6500 that acts on a ball flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 to stop the ball, which will be described later.

As shown in FIG. 47, the main body member 6310 constitutes a flow path that inclines downward, and guides a ball that has entered from the first winning opening 64 to a vertically upward position of the detection opening 312d, and a first groove 5311 and a first groove thereof. From the intermediate position between the second groove 5312 extending vertically from the lower end of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 in which the ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and the second groove 5312. It mainly includes a continuous passage groove 6314 formed as a groove branching to the side (right side in FIG. 47).

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313, and the continuous passage groove 6314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is formed on the game board 13 in the assembled state. By closing, a passage through which the sphere flows is formed.

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 have a symmetrical shape with the configuration having the same name in the third embodiment (first groove 3311, second groove 3312, and post-detection flow path 3313). The description of the part that overlaps with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

In the second groove 5312, the side wall portion 312e extends to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 6314 that forms a branch passage through which a ball can be thrown is arranged between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e.

The continuous passage groove 6314 of the delay device 6300 includes a stop portion 6314b connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is arranged directly below the stop portion 6314b.

Similar to the stop portion 5314b of the fifth embodiment, the stop portion 6314b is configured as a groove portion in which only one ball can be stopped and the ball can flow down. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the ball that has reached the stop portion 6314b may stop at the stop portion 6314b or may pass through the stop portion 6314b (do not stop).

The stopping device 6500 of the delay device 6300 is a drive composed of a pair of movable plate portions 6510 and a pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 (one of solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 6510. It mainly includes a device 6520.

The movable plate portion 6510 is located at a position separated by one ball on the downstream side of the upper movable plate 6511 that appears and disappears inside the continuous passage groove 6314 at the boundary between the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 6314b. Mainly includes a lower movable plate 6512 that appears and disappears inside the continuous passage groove 6314.

The upper movable plate 6511 regulates the flow of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the continuous passage groove 6314 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding inside the continuous passage groove 6314 (the upper surface of the sphere is raised). It is stopped on the side), and the ball is allowed to flow down in the retracted state where the continuous passage groove 6314 is retracted from the inside to the outside.

The lower movable plate 6512 extends in the extending direction of the continuous passage groove 6314 of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the continuous passage groove 6314 is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding inside the continuous passage groove 6314. The flow along the (vertical direction) is restricted, and the flow along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the continuous passage groove 6314 of the sphere is allowed in the retracted state in which the continuous passage groove 6314 is retracted from the inside to the outside.

In the present embodiment, the time required from the center of the ball P62 passing through the upper movable plate 6511 (after invading the stop portion 6314b) to passing through the lower movable plate 6512 (discharging from the stop portion 6314b). The flow path resistance of the stop portion 6314b is set so that the NT stays within 0.1 to 0.2 seconds.

The drive device 6520 has an upper drive solenoid 6521 that is fastened and fixed to the delay device 6300 and generates a driving force that causes the upper movable plate 6511 to move up and down, and a lower movable plate 6512 that is fastened and fixed to the delay device 6300. It mainly includes a lower drive solenoid 6522 that generates a driving force.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the upper movable plate 6511 is driven by the upper drive solenoid 6521 and the lower movable plate 6512 is driven by the lower drive solenoid 6522, each operation can be made independent. Hereinafter, an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 will be described.

FIG. 48 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation modes of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512. The drive device 6520 is driven and controlled in a manner in which the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated in a constant operation pattern illustrated in FIG. 48. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the movable plate portion 6510 that changes depending on the timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 48, the operation patterns of the movable plate portion 6510 are the operation of the chain opening period T6a, the operation of the upper closing period T6b following the chain opening period T6a, and the operation of both opening following the upper closing period T6b. It is composed of an operation of the period T6c and an operation of the lower closing period T6d following the both opening periods T6c.

During the chain opening period T6a, the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 alternately open and close. After the upper movable plate 6511 projects to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after closing), the lower movable plate 6512 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (opens the continuous passage groove 6314) with a slight delay. In the present embodiment, the operation of the upper movable plate 6511 is controlled so as to change the state at intervals of 1.5 seconds, and the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the retracted state for 0.8 seconds and then in the protruding state of 2.2. The operation is controlled in such a manner that the operation is maintained for 2 seconds and the state is repeatedly changed to the retracted state, and the chain opening period T6a is set to 30 seconds.

Thereby, in the chain opening period T6a, the number of balls passing through the upper movable plate 6511 can be limited while the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the inside of the continuous passing groove 6314. In the present embodiment, since the number of balls anchored between the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 is one, the upper movable plate 6511 can move upward while retracting from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314. The maximum number of spheres that pass through the plate 6511 can be limited to one.

Further, after the upper movable plate 6511 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314, for 0.05 seconds (from the period required for the ball to pass through the lower movable plate 6512 (0.1 seconds to 0.2 seconds)). The lower movable plate 6512 projects (closes) inward of the continuous passage groove 6314 (also in front).

As a result, it is possible to ensure that the ball that has passed through the upper movable plate 6511 is stopped above the lower movable plate 6512, and it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through. In the present embodiment, the lower movable plate 6512 is switched from the protruding state to the retracted state 0.75 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state (intermediate timing of the maintenance period of the protruding state). In the embodiment, the drive device 6520 is driven.

Here, since the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state for 0.75 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the protruding state, the ball P62 is released immediately before the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state. Even when passing through the upper movable plate 6511 (entering the stop portion 6314b), the ball P62 can be reliably maintained above the lower movable plate 6512 for at least 0.75 seconds.

Further, since the period from the upper movable plate 6511 in the retracted state to the lower movable plate 6512 in the protruding state is shorter than the time NT, the ball immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the protruding state to the retracted state. Even when P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stop 6314b), the ball P62 is kept on the lower movable plate 6512 while the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state (2.2 seconds). It can be reliably maintained on the upper side.

As a result, the ball P62 passes through the stop portion 6314b (flows down without stopping on the upper side of the lower movable plate 6512) regardless of the timing when the ball P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stop portion 6314b). ) Can be prevented.

In the upper closing period T6b, the upper movable plate 6511 overhangs the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 for a period longer than the period during which the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the overhang (for example, 6 seconds) in the chain opening period T6a described above. This prevents the ball flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 from passing through the upper movable plate 6511. In this case, the ball is more likely to stay above the upper movable plate 6511 as compared with the chain opening period T6a.

Therefore, as compared with the chain opening period T6a, in the upper closing period T6b, when the ball is continuously entered into the continuous passage groove 6314, the ball is detected from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 through the branch flow path 5314d. It becomes easier to pass through the mouth 5314e.

In the present embodiment, a variable display of a normal symbol (an electric accessory 640a (see FIG. 2) that regulates the entry of a ball into the second winning opening 640 is displayed by using a ball passing through the third detection port 5314e as a trigger. It is configured to execute the variable display of the lottery to be opened. Therefore, as compared with the chain opening period T6a, it is easier to obtain an opportunity to enter the ball into the second winning opening 640 by continuously entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 during the upper closing period T6b. Can be done.

As a result, for example, as a look-ahead effect of the upper closing period T6b, a little before the start of the upper closing period T6b, the third symbol display device 81 "inserts five balls into the first winning opening 64 in 5 seconds". If this is possible, by displaying "Is the electric accessory 640a open?", The player is notified that a special benefit can be obtained by continuously entering the ball into the first winning opening 64. Can be done. As a result, the quality of the profit given to the player by continuously entering the ball into the first winning opening 64 can be changed depending on the timing of entering the ball, thus preventing the player from inadvertently launching the ball. can do.

Further, the change in the quality of the profit given to the player by the ball entry timing is repeated at regular intervals regardless of the game mode of the player. In the present embodiment, the content of the quality of profit related to the ball entry timing is set in a mode of displaying on the third symbol display device. Therefore, since the player can launch the ball at a desired timing, the player can play the game after recognizing the difference in the quality of profit given to the player depending on the timing of entering the ball.

That is, in exchange for the advantage that the electric accessory 640a can be easily opened by continuously entering the ball into the continuous passage groove 6314 during the upper closing period T6b, the third lottery for opening the electric accessory 640a is related. Since the prize balls are not given to the player when the balls pass through the detection port 5314e, there is a drawback that the number of prize balls is likely to decrease with respect to the number of balls entered in the first prize opening 64.

On the other hand, in the chain opening period T6a described above, since the balls are sent to the stop portion 6314b at shorter intervals than the upper closing period T6b, the balls are less likely to stay on the upper movable plate 6511 and the continuous passage groove. The ball flowing down the 6314 can be easily passed through the second detection port 5314c without leaking. Therefore, there is a drawback that it is difficult to open the electric accessory 640a, but there is an advantage that the number of prize balls can be secured with respect to the number of balls that have entered the first winning opening 64.

Therefore, if the player does not expect the electric accessory 640a to be released and wants to surely obtain the prize ball, the player launches the ball so as to continuously enter the ball during the chain opening period T6a, and even if the prize ball is reduced. When the game is to be performed in anticipation of the opening of the electric accessory 640a, it is possible to easily obtain the desired profit by launching the ball so that the ball is continuously entered during the upper closing period T6b.

During the double-opening period T6c, the stopping device 6500 is maintained in the double-opening state (see FIG. 47B). In this case, the ball flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 passes through the stop portion 6314b and passes through the third detection port 5314e without stopping at the stop portion 6314b.

Therefore, since the ball that has passed through the continuous passage groove 6314 does not enter the branch flow path 5314d from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1, the ball is prevented from passing through the third detection port 5314e. In this embodiment, both open periods T6c are set to 6 seconds.

Although the ball does not stop at the stop portion 6314b, it takes 2 seconds for the ball to pass through the introduction groove 5314a, while the ball whose state has changed the stop device 3340 immediately presses the detection port 312d. Since it can pass through, in the balls P61 and P62 that have continuously entered the first winning opening 64, the timing at which the ball P61 passes through the detection port 312d and the timing at which the ball P62 passes through the second detection port 5314c are surely confirmed. It can be shifted.

In the present embodiment, since the upper closing period T6b is set to 6 seconds, the variation display is started at the same time as the start timing of the upper closing period T6b (when the start timing of the variation display is the latest). In addition, it is possible to secure two free areas for the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the start timing of the subsequent double opening period T6c.

That is, for example, even in the most severe case (when the number of reserved balls is 4,) the fluctuation display (3 seconds) which starts when the number of reserved balls is 4, and the start when the number of reserved balls is 3. The variable display (3 seconds) to be performed can be completed by the start timing of both open periods T6c, and two free areas for the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol at the start timing of both open periods T6c must be secured. Can be done.

Here, since the number of balls that can be stopped above the upper movable plate 6511 during the upper closing period T6b is two, the balls that are stopped above the upper movable plate 6511 during the upper closing period T6b are the first in both opening periods T6c. 2 The variation display of the first special symbol can be executed by passing through the detection port 5314c as a trigger. That is, it is possible to maximize the profit given to the player by having a plurality of balls enter the first winning opening 64.

In the lower closing period T6d, the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the continuous passage groove 6314 to allow the ball to pass, while the lower movable plate 6512 projects inward of the continuous passage groove 6314 to restrict the passage of the ball.

The lower closing period T6d is the same as the upper closing period T6b in that the balls are stopped by the action of the movable plate portion 6510, but the number of balls that can be stopped is different. That is, in the lower closing period T6d, in addition to the number of balls stopped in the upper closing period T6b (2 in the present embodiment), the number of balls stopped in the stopping portion 6314b (1 in the present embodiment). Can be stopped.

Therefore, in order for the balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 to flow through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 to the branch flow path 5314d and pass through the third detection port 5314e, in addition to the number of balls entering in the upper closing period T6b. Therefore, it is necessary to enter one more ball into the first winning opening 64. That is, the difficulty level of passing the ball through the third detection port 5314e is higher than the case where the ball is passed through the third detection port 5314e during the upper closing period T6b.

On the other hand, since the chain opening period T6a follows the lower closing period T6d, the ball stopped at the stopping device 6500 during the lower closing period T6d is one ball in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 during the chain opening period T6a. It passes through the second detection port 5314c one by one. This ensures a longer period for the subsequent ball to pass through the second detection port 5314c, as compared with the ball stopped at the upper closing period T6b passing through the second detection port 5314c at once during both opening periods T6c. Therefore, it is possible to easily prevent the sphere from passing through the second detection port 5314c when the number of reserved spheres in the variation display of the first special symbol is the maximum (4 spheres) (the sphere is the second). It is possible to easily prevent a situation in which a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even though the lottery has passed through the detection port 5314c).

Therefore, for example, as a look-ahead effect of the lower closing period T6d, a little before the start of the lower closing period T6d, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with "5 balls in the first winning opening 64 in 5 seconds + 1 piece. If it can be inserted, the electric accessory 640a will be opened? (High difficulty, high security) "is displayed.

As a result, a special benefit can be obtained by allowing the player to continuously enter the ball into the first winning opening 64, but while the difficulty of obtaining the special benefit is high, the continuous entry of the ball is obtained. It is possible to inform that the degree of security that the profit (the number of prize balls and the opportunity of lottery) given to the player by the ball is secured is high. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the frequency with which the ball enters the first winning opening 64, and it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently launching the ball.

In the present embodiment, the lower closing period T6d is set to 8 seconds (a period longer than the upper closing period T6b). As a result, the number of balls entering the first winning opening 64 required for the balls flowing down the continuous passage groove 6314 to flow through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 to the branch flow path 5314d and to pass through the third detection port 5314e. Although the period is longer than that of the upper closing period T6b, a sufficient period for allowing a large number of balls to enter the first winning opening 64 can be secured, and the balls pass through the third detection port 5314e. You can create many opportunities.

In the present embodiment, as described above, the continuous opening period T6a (30 seconds), the upper closing period T6b (6 seconds), both opening periods T6c (6 seconds), and the lower closing period T6d (8 seconds) are arranged in this order. At the same time, the drive device 6520 is driven and controlled so as to loop at intervals of 50 seconds.

As a result, the stop device 6500 operates in an operation mode corresponding to the continuous opening period T6a for more than half of the operation time. During that time, the balls are discharged one by one from the stop portion 6314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c. While making it possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol by using this as a trigger (while making the game mode easy to execute the variable display of the first special symbol), at other times, the first winning opening 64 is entered. A period during which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is possible using a part of the incoming ball (upper closing period T6b, lower closing period T6d), a period during which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is impossible (both open periods T6c), and Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to realize a sharp playability, and the player can realize a favorite playability by adjusting the launch timing.

That is, for example, when it is desired to insert a ball into the first winning opening 64 specially for executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the ball is directed toward the first winning opening 64 only during the chain opening period T6a. May be fired, the launch of the ball may be stopped during other periods (T6b to T6d), and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will pass through the third detecting opening 5314e.

On the other hand, for example, if you want to get the opportunity to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol even if you sacrifice the opportunity to display the fluctuation of the first special symbol, you can aim at the upper closing period T6b and the lower closing period T6d and win the first prize. The ball may be launched toward the mouth 64, the launch of the ball may be stopped during other periods (T6a and T6c), and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the possibility of passing through the third detection port 5314e when the balls continuously enter the first winning opening 64 is increased as compared with the case where the ball is always launched toward the first winning opening 64. Can be done.

Next, a modified example of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 49 and 50. In the sixth embodiment, the case where the number of balls anchored in the retaining portion 6314b is limited to one has been described, but the delay device 6300b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment is between the plates of the pair of movable plate portions 6510. The region (corresponding to the stop portion 6314b2) is composed of a size capable of accommodating a plurality of balls (two in the present embodiment). The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. In addition, in the description of this embodiment, FIG. 2 will be referred to as appropriate.

49 (a) and 49 (b) are partial front views of the delay device 6300b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment. Note that FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (b) show a state in which the balls P61 and P62 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is in a changed state. .. Further, FIG. 49 (a) shows a state in which a pair of movable plate portions 6510 of the stopping device 6500b project inside the continuous passage groove 6314 (both closed states), and FIG. 49 (b) shows a pair of movable plates. A state in which the portion 6510 is retracted from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (both open states) is shown.

As shown in FIG. 49, the delay device 6300b in the modified example of the sixth embodiment has a size such that the retaining portion 6314b can accommodate two balls in comparison with the configuration of the delay device 6300 of the sixth embodiment. There are two differences, that is, the upper movable plate 6511 and the upper drive solenoid 6521 of the stopping device 6500b are moved upward, and the other configurations are the same. Therefore, the same reference numerals as those described in the sixth embodiment are given, and the description of the parts that overlap with the description in the sixth embodiment will be omitted.

The continuous passage groove 6314 of the delay device 6300b includes a stop portion 6314b2 connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is arranged directly below the stop portion 6314b2.

The stop portion 6314b2 is formed from a size capable of containing a plurality of balls (two in the present embodiment), unlike the stop portion 6314b of the sixth embodiment in which only one ball can be inserted, and the balls are formed. It is configured as a groove that can flow down.

In the present embodiment, as described above in the sixth embodiment, the ball that has reached the stop portion 6314b2 can be formed either when it stops at the stop portion 6314b2 or when it passes through the stop portion 6314b2 (does not stop). The drive device 6520 is driven so as to be.

The stopping device 6500b of the delay device 6300b is a drive composed of a pair of movable plate portions 6510 and a pair of drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 (one of solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 6510. It mainly includes a device 6520.

The movable plate portion 6510 is located at a position separated by two balls on the downstream side of the upper movable plate 6511 that appears and disappears inside the continuous passage groove 6314 at the boundary between the introduction groove 5314a and the stop portion 6314b2. Mainly includes a lower movable plate 6512 that appears and disappears inside the continuous passage groove 6314.

That is, the upper movable plate 6511 in the present embodiment is arranged at a position raised by one ball as compared with the upper movable plate 6511 in the sixth embodiment. Therefore, when the ball is stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the protruding state, the second ball from the end of the continuous passage groove 6314 on the stopping portion 6314b side is the front side of the upper limit discharge hole 5314a. (FIG. 49 (a), the front side in the vertical direction of the paper surface), the sphere is guided to the branch flow path 5314d through the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1.

Therefore, when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the protruding state, the number of balls that can be stopped above the upper movable plate 6511 is set to one. Therefore, only one ball parked on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 can be dropped immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 changes from the protruding state to the retracted state.

Further, when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state and the ball stopped on the upper side falls and the subsequent ball reaches the end of the continuous passage groove 6314 on the stop portion 6314b2 side, the ball enters the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1. There is a possibility that the ball will be guided to the stop 6314b2 following the ball ahead.

However, in the present embodiment, the upper movable plate is formed after the previous ball starts flowing down the stop portion 6314b2 and before a space for one ball is formed on the upper side thereof (0.2 seconds to 0.3 seconds elapse). The operation of the upper movable plate 6511 is controlled in an operation mode in which the 6511 is in a protruding state (see FIG. 50). As a result, while the upper movable plate 6511 maintains the retracted state, the ball that first entered the stop portion 6314b2 prevents the trailing ball from entering the stop portion 6314b2, so that the pair of balls It is possible to prevent the balls from entering the stop portion 6314b2 in succession. That is, in the chain opening period T62a, it is possible to prevent the balls from flowing down in a row on the stop portion 6314b2 immediately after the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state.

In the present embodiment, the time required from the center of the ball P62 passing through the upper movable plate 6511 (after invading the stop portion 6314b2) to passing through the lower movable plate 6512 (discharging from the stop portion 6314b2). The flow path resistance of the stop portion 6314b is set so that the NTb is contained within 0.4 seconds to 0.6 seconds. Hereinafter, an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 will be described.

FIG. 50 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512. The drive device 6520 is driven and controlled in a manner in which the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated in a constant operation pattern illustrated in FIG. 50. Hereinafter, the operation mode of the movable plate portion 6510 that changes depending on the timing will be described.

As shown in FIG. 50, the operation pattern of the movable plate portion 6510 is the operation of the chain opening period T62a, the operation of the upper closing period T6b following the chain opening period T62a, and the operation of both opening following the upper closing period T6b. It is composed of an operation of the period T6c and an operation of the lower closing period T6d following the both opening periods T6c. Since the upper closing period T6b, both opening periods T6c, and the lower closing period T6d are the same as those described above in the sixth embodiment, detailed description thereof will be omitted.

During the chain opening period T62a, the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 alternately open and close. After the upper movable plate 6511 projects to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (after closing), the lower movable plate 6512 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (opens the continuous passage groove 6314) with a slight delay. In the present embodiment, the upper movable plate 6511 is maintained in the retracted state for 0.2 seconds (a time during which one ball can pass through, but it is difficult for two balls to pass through), and then the upper movable plate 6511 stays in a protruding state of 3. The operation is controlled in such a manner that the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained for a second and then changed to the retracted state again, and the lower movable plate 6512 is changed to the protruding state at the timing when the upper movable plate 6511 changes to the retracted state, and the protruding state is maintained for 3 seconds. After that, the operation is controlled in such a manner that the evacuation state is maintained for 0.2 seconds (a time during which one ball can pass while two balls are difficult to pass), and the state is repeatedly changed to the protruding state. The chain opening period T62a is set to 30 seconds.

According to such an operation mode, in the present embodiment, the number of balls anchored between the upper movable plate 6511 and the lower movable plate 6512 is set to 2, while the upper movable plate 6511 is formed in the continuous passage groove 6314. The number of balls passing through the upper movable plate 6511 while retracting from the inside can be limited to one.

Further, at the same time that the upper movable plate 6511 retracts from the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314, the lower movable plate 6512 projects to the inside of the continuous passage groove 6314 (becomes a protruding state), and then until the lower movable plate 6512 is retracted. In addition, 2.8 seconds, which is a period longer than the time NTb, elapses. As a result, it is possible to ensure that the ball that has passed through the upper movable plate 6511 is stopped above the lower movable plate 6512, and it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through.

In addition, since the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the protruding state for 2.6 seconds after the upper movable plate 6511 is switched to the protruding state, the ball P62 is released immediately before the upper movable plate 6511 is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state. Even when passing through the upper movable plate 6511 (entering the stop portion 6314b2), the ball P62 can be reliably maintained above the lower movable plate 6512 for at least 2.6 seconds.

As a result, the ball P62 passes through the stop portion 6314b2 (flows down without stopping on the upper side of the lower movable plate 6512) regardless of the timing when the ball P62 passes through the upper movable plate 6511 (enters the stop portion 6314b2). ) Can be prevented.

Further, after the ball is stopped on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511, the stopped ball enters the stopping portion 6314b2 when the upper movable plate 6511 is in the retracted state, and then the lower movable plate 6512 Is more than 3 seconds (a fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4 (shortest fluctuation period)) before it flows down and passes through the second detection port 5314c due to the evacuation state. It takes a long time. Therefore, when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c through the stopping device 6500b, the ball overflows at the first winning port 64 (the ball passes through the detection port (for example, the second detection port 5314c) in the first winning port 64). Despite this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of a lottery opportunity).

In the upper closing period T6b, by inserting two balls into the continuous passage groove 6314, the second ball enters the branch flow path 5314d through the upper limit discharge port hole 5314a, and the third detection port 5314e Pass through. As a result, the number of balls that need to enter the continuous passage groove 6314 in order to create a situation in which the balls pass through the third detection port 5314e can be reduced as compared with the case described in the sixth embodiment, and the balls can be reduced. Can easily create a situation in which is passing through the third detection port 5314e.

In both opening periods T6c and lower closing period T6d, the state of the continuous passage groove 6314 is the same as in both opening periods T6c and lower closing period T6d in the sixth embodiment, and thus detailed description thereof will be omitted.

On the other hand, unlike the sixth embodiment, when a plurality of balls are guided to the continuous passage groove 6314 during the lower closing period T6b, and then when the chain opening period T62a is entered, the two balls are accommodated in the stop portion 6314b2. In this state, the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 in the chain opening period T62a is started.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the period during which the lower movable plate 6512 is maintained in the retracted state in the chain opening period T62a is 0.2 seconds (one ball can pass through, but it is difficult for two balls to pass through). Therefore, it is possible to prevent a plurality of balls (two in the present embodiment) stopped at the stop portion 6314b from passing through the second detection port 5314c in succession.

That is, each ball passes through the second detection port 5314c in accordance with the opening / closing operation of the movable plate portion 6510 during the chain opening period T62a. As a result, when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c via the stopping device 6500b, the ball overflows at the first winning port 64 (for example, the ball passes through the detection port (for example, the second detection port 5314c) in the first winning port 64). It is possible to prevent the occurrence of a state in which a lottery opportunity cannot be obtained even though the game has passed.

Therefore, for example, as a look-ahead effect of the lower closing period T6d, a little before the start of the lower closing period T6d, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed with "5 balls in the first winning opening 64 in 5 seconds + 1 piece. If it can be inserted, the electric accessory 640a will be opened? (High difficulty, high security) "is displayed.

As a result, a special benefit can be obtained by allowing the player to continuously enter the ball into the first winning opening 64, but the difficulty of obtaining the special benefit is high (it is possible to continuously enter the ball). (The required number is large), but the degree of security that the profit (number of prize balls and lottery opportunity) given to the player by the consecutively entered balls is secured is high. Can be done. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in the frequency with which the ball enters the first winning opening 64, and it is possible to prevent the player from inadvertently launching the ball.

In the present embodiment, the continuous opening period T62a (30 seconds), the upper closing period T6b (6 seconds), both opening periods T6c (6 seconds), and the lower closing period T6d (8 seconds) are arranged in order and 50 seconds. The drive device 6520 is driven and controlled so as to loop at intervals.

As a result, the stop device 6500 operates in an operation mode corresponding to the continuous opening period T62a for more than half of the operation time. During that time, the balls are discharged one by one from the stop portion 6314b and pass through the second detection port 5314c. While making it possible to execute the variable display of the first special symbol by using this as a trigger (while making the game mode easy to execute the variable display of the first special symbol), at other times, the first winning opening 64 is entered. A period during which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is possible using a part of the incoming ball (upper closing period T6b, lower closing period T6d), a period during which the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is impossible (both open periods T6c), and Can be switched. As a result, it is possible to realize a sharp playability, and the player can realize a favorite playability by adjusting the launch timing.

That is, for example, when it is desired to insert a ball into the first winning opening 64 specially for executing the variable display of the first special symbol, the ball is directed toward the first winning opening 64 only during the chain opening period T62a. May be fired, the launch of the ball may be stopped during other periods (T6b to T6d), and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 will pass through the third detecting opening 5314e.

On the other hand, for example, if you want to get the opportunity to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol even if you sacrifice the opportunity to display the fluctuation of the first special symbol, you can aim at the upper closing period T6b and the lower closing period T6d and win the first prize. The ball may be launched toward the mouth 64, the launch of the ball may be stopped during other periods (T62a and T6c), and attention may be paid to the effect of the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the possibility of passing through the third detection port 5314e when the balls continuously enter the first winning opening 64 is increased as compared with the case where the ball is always launched toward the first winning opening 64. Can be done.

Next, a seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 51. In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stopping device 5500 is arranged on the downstream side of the introduction groove 5314a has been described, but the delay device 7300 in the seventh embodiment is between the introduction groove 5314a and the second detection port 5314c. The stop device 5500 is not arranged. That is, unlike the fifth embodiment, the ball that has passed through the introduction groove 5314a passes through the second detection port 5314c without stopping. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 51 is a partial front view of the delay device 7300 according to the seventh embodiment. Note that FIG. 51 shows a state in which the balls P71 and P72 continuously enter the winning opening 64, and as a result, the stop device 3340 is in a changed state.

As shown in FIG. 51, the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 6300 are configured as devices having a symmetrical shape with the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the third embodiment. The same reference numerals as those in the description will be given, and the description will be omitted for the parts that overlap with the description in the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 51, the delay device 7300 has a main body member 7310 having a flow path for guiding the ball entering the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d, and the action of the ball flowing down inside the main body member 7310. When the stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the above and the stop device 3340 are in the changed state (see FIG. 51), the state is maintained and the posture is changed by the action of the ball passing through the detection port 312d. It mainly includes a maintenance device 3360 that releases the maintenance of the state of the device 3340.

As shown in FIG. 51, the main body member 7310 constitutes a flow path that inclines downward, and guides a ball that has entered from the first winning opening 64 to a vertically upward position of the detection opening 312d, and a first groove 5311 and a first groove thereof. From the intermediate position between the second groove 5312 extending vertically from the lower end of the first groove 5311 to the detection port 312d, the post-detection flow path 5313 in which the ball passing through the detection port 312d is guided, and the second groove 5312. It mainly includes a continuous passage groove 7314 formed as a groove branching to the side (right side in FIG. 51).

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, the post-detection flow path 5313, and the continuous passage groove 7314 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is formed on the game board 13 in the assembled state. By closing, a passage through which the sphere flows is formed.

The first groove 5311, the second groove 5312, and the post-detection flow path 5313 have a symmetrical shape with the configuration having the same name in the third embodiment (first groove 3311, second groove 3312, and post-detection flow path 3313). The description of the part that overlaps with the description in the third embodiment will be omitted.

In the second groove 5312, the side wall portion 312e extends to the detection port 312d. A continuous passage groove 7314 that forms a branch passage through which a ball can be thrown is arranged between the contact wall 312a and the side wall portion 312e.

The continuous passage groove 7314 of the delay device 7300 includes a vertically extending groove 7314b connected to the lower end of the introduction groove 5314a described above, and a second detection port 5314c is arranged at the lower end of the vertically extending groove 7314b.

The vertical extension groove 7314b is extended in the vertical direction and is configured as a groove portion through which a ball can flow down. In the present embodiment, the length of the vertical extension groove 7314b is designed so that it takes 1 second for the ball to pass (free fall) through the vertical extension groove 7314b.

Next, the game playability in this embodiment will be described. In the present embodiment, when the ball passes through the detection port 312d (starting prize is won), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variable display of the first special symbol and two prize balls as a trigger. Is paid out, and when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 executes the variable display of the second special symbol and four pieces are triggered by the start. The prize ball will be paid out.

That is, after the ball P71 enters the first winning opening 64, the ball P72 is the first winning opening with a sufficient time interval (time interval of about 4 seconds or more) for the stop device 3340 to return to the initial state. When entering the ball 64, since the ball enters only the detection port 312d, the variation display of the first special symbol is continuously executed. On the other hand, if the ball P72 is inserted into the first winning opening 64 while the stop device 3340 maintains the changing state (for about 4 seconds or less), the following ball P72 enters the second detection opening 5314c. Therefore, it is possible to execute the variable display of the second special symbol.

In the present embodiment, the jackpot is distributed so that the jackpot of the second special symbol can obtain more profit than the jackpot of the first special symbol (the distribution is such that it is easier to obtain a larger profit). ). As a result, the profit given to the player at the time of a big hit can be changed depending on whether the balls P71 and P72 enter the first winning opening 64 with a sufficient interval or at short intervals. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the ball entering the first winning opening 64.

In the present embodiment, the second special symbol is configured to be displayed in a variable manner in preference to the first special symbol. Further, the first special symbol and the second special symbol are configured so as not to be variablely displayed at the same time. Therefore, the variation display of the first special symbol is always started before the variation display of the second special symbol is executed.

As a result, it is possible to prevent the variable display of the second special symbol, which attracts a lot of attention from the player, from starting immediately after the ball has passed through the second detection port 5314c. That is, when the sphere P72 passes through the second detection port 5314c, the period of the variation display of the first special symbol that has already been executed due to the passage of the sphere P71 through the detection port 312d is set to the period of the second special symbol. It can be used as a waiting time until the variable display is started.

Therefore, after a rare event that the balls P71 and P72 continuously enter the first winning opening 64, the variation display on the side advantageous to the player (the distribution of the jackpot is the first special for the player). It is possible to secure a time until the start of the second special symbol variation display, which is more advantageous than the symbol (a waiting period can be inserted).

Therefore, the time for paying attention to the flow of the balls P71 and P72 that have entered the first winning opening 64 and the third symbol display device due to the fact that the balls P71 and P72 have passed through the detection port 312d or the second detection port 5312c. Of the variation display performed in 81, the time during which the variation display on the side advantageous to the player (second special symbol) is performed can be clearly separated. As a result, it is not necessary for the player to move his / her line of sight between the first winning opening 64 and the third symbol display device 81 in a hurry, so that the player's feeling of fatigue can be reduced.

Further, after having the player confirm that the ball P72 passes through the second detection port 5314c, it is possible to start the variation display caused by the ball P72 passing through the second detection port 5314c.

Therefore, as compared with the gaming machine in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol occur alternately, the ball has passed through the second detection port 5314c, which is advantageous for the player. It is possible to make it easier for the player to grasp that the variable display of the second special symbol is started as a series of flows.

This makes it possible for the player to easily grasp that the variation display next performed by the third symbol display device 81 is the variation display on the side that is advantageous to the player (second special symbol). it can.

Next, the eighth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 54. In the first embodiment, the case where the delay device 300 is connected to the downstream side of the first winning opening 64 has been described, but the delay device 8300 in the eighth embodiment is connected to the downstream side of the V winning device 800. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 52 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 according to the eighth embodiment. The configuration of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 52. In the present embodiment, for each of the above-described embodiments, the second winning opening 640 and the electric accessory 640a are provided below the first winning opening 64, and the V winning device 800 replaces the first variable winning device 65. The first variable winning device 8065 (device having the same function as the first variable winning device 65 in the first embodiment) provided in the lower right portion is provided in the lower part of the V winning device 800, and the ball rolls on the upper surface. A point where a rolling plate 8091, which is formed as a movable overhang plate and discharges the rolling ball to the upper part of the electric accessory 640a when the electric accessory 640a is open, is provided on the right side of the second winning opening 640. Is different.

Since the other configurations are the same as those in the first embodiment, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. The first embodiment also includes a warp passage port 87 for allowing some of the spheres flowing to the left of the center frame 86 to flow into the delayed floor device 400 (through a so-called "warp flow path"). It is the same as the form.

The V winning device 800 is different in that the delay device 8300 is provided in the first variable winning device 65 in each of the above-described embodiments, and has the same structure in other points.

The first variable winning device 8065 operates in the front-rear direction of the game board 13 by the operation of a solenoid (one of the solenoids 209) (not shown). The first variable winning device 8065 does not guide the ball to the specific winning opening 65a (does not enter) by extending forward (closing), while retracting backward (opening). By doing so, it functions to guide the ball to enter the specific winning opening 65a.

A ball that has reached the first variable winning device 8065 but has not been guided to the specific winning opening 65a due to the closure of the first variable winning device 8065 is connected to the left side of the first variable winning device 8065. It rolls on the rolling surface and reaches the upper surface of the rolling plate 8091.

The rolling plate 8091 inclines downward as it goes to the left in front view. Therefore, the ball that has reached the rolling plate 8091 rolls with its upper surface directed to the left in the front view, and is discharged from the left end portion.

The ball discharged from the left end portion of the rolling plate 8091 falls downward and is discharged from the out port 71 if the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state (see FIG. 52). On the other hand, if the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it rolls on the upper surface (inner surface) of the electric accessory 640a and is guided to the second winning opening 640 so that the ball can enter.

On the right side of the V winning opening 800a, similarly to the specific winning opening 65a of the first embodiment described above, a front-view triangular opening / closing plate covering the V winning opening 800a and opening / closing to the right with the lower side of the opening / closing plate as an axis. A V inlet solenoid (one of the solenoids 209) for driving is provided, and the V winning opening 800a is normally closed so that the ball cannot win or it is difficult to win. If the lottery accompanying the entry of the second winning opening 640 is a small hit, the V inlet solenoid is driven to tilt the opening / closing plate to the right, and the open state where the ball can easily win the V winning opening 800a is temporarily opened. Acts to form.

A delay device 8300 is provided as a device for forming a flow path through which the ball that has entered the V winning device 800 passes. The V winning device 800 is provided with a V winning opening 800a, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening 800a, the entry of the game ball is detected, and a predetermined game is played for the player. Balls (eg, 3 balls) are paid out. That is, the V winning opening 800a is a detection port that also serves as a detection sensor. Further, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a passes through the V winning switch 8315d, which will be described later, a big hit game is given.

In the present embodiment, unlike the function in the first embodiment, the detection port 312d functions not as a detection port for performing detection accompanied by a lottery, but as a detection port for purely detecting the passage of a sphere. That is, the number of balls detected by the V winning opening 800a is compared with the number of balls detected by the detection port 312d, and if an abnormality is found in the difference between the numbers, an error notification is performed. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make a hole in the range on the front side of the branch delay groove 8314 of the glass unit 16 and to easily detect an error in inserting the ball directly into the branch delay groove 8314 from the front side.

A first variable winning device 8065 is provided below the V winning device 800. The first variable winning device 8065 is opened and closed a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times) in a jackpot game, and when a game ball enters the first variable winning device 8065a, a predetermined game ball (for example, for example). 15 balls) will be paid out.

Next, with reference to FIG. 53, the configuration of the delay device 8300 in which the ball that has passed through the V winning opening 800a flows down will be described. FIG. 53 is a partial front view of the delay device 8300. Since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 8300 have the same configuration as the device of the third embodiment, they are designated by the same reference numerals as those described in the third embodiment, and in the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given. The explanation is omitted for the part that overlaps with the explanation of.

As shown in FIG. 53, the delay device 8300 includes a main body member 8310 that allows the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a to flow down, and a stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the action of the ball that flows down inside the main body member 8310. A maintenance device 3360 that maintains the state when the stop device 3340 is in a changed state and releases the maintenance of the state of the stop device 3340 as the posture changes due to the action of a ball flowing down inside, which will be described later. It mainly includes a stopping device 8500 that acts on a ball flowing down the annex 8315 to stop the ball.

As shown in FIG. 53, the main body member 8310 forms a downwardly inclined flow path and guides the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a in the first groove 3311 and the vertical direction from the lower end portion of the first groove 3311. The second groove 3312 extending in the second groove 3312, the inclined flow path 8313 extending in the direction of descending to the right from the lower end of the second groove 3312, and the side from the intermediate position of the second groove 3312 (FIG. It is formed as a groove that branches to the left side of 53) and extends vertically downward from the region including the branch delay groove 8314 that rejoins the lower end of the second groove 3312 and the lower bottom opening 8313b of the inclined flow path 8313. It is mainly provided with an annexed groove 8315 composed of a pair of grooves attached to the left and right.

The first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, the inclined flow path 8313, the branch delay groove 8314, and the side-by-side groove 8315 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is a game in the assembled state. By being closed by the board 13, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

The position where the branch delay groove 8314 is connected to the second groove 3312 is formed in the same position as the position where the accommodating recess 3312f is arranged in the third embodiment. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the sphere (the leading sphere, the sphere P81 in FIG. 53) that has reached the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in the initial state (see FIG. 53) is vertical while rotating the stop device 3340 to change the state. The ball that flows downward and is guided to the inclined flow path 8313, while the ball that reaches the stop device 3340 when the stop device 3340 is in a changing state (the second and subsequent follow-up balls, the ball P82 in FIG. 53) is a branch delay groove. It flows down 8314.

The inclined flow path 8313 is formed as a straight flow path that inclines downward as it goes to the right, and is a flow path that extends to the point where the sphere in contact with the contact portion 3363 is further advanced by one sphere. (When two spheres stay from the extended end, the second sphere from the extended end comes into contact with the abutting portion 3363), and the sphere from the extended end 8313a is an opening that is arranged on the back side of the second sphere counting from the extended end and allows the sphere to pass through, and extends to the communication opening 8313a. It is provided with a lower bottom opening 8313b which is opened downward at a position deviated by one sphere in the installation direction. The inclined flow path 8313 is formed from a shape in which 4 seconds elapse from when the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a until it flows straight down the second groove 3312 and reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

The communication opening 8313a is formed as a flow path extending in a U shape with its end facing the front side. That is, the ball that has entered the connecting opening 8313a from the inclined flow path 8313 flows down the U-shaped flow path of the communication opening 8313a and is discharged to the upper end portion of the second groove 8315b. After that, the ball flows down the second groove 8315b.

Since the branch delay groove 8314 is connected to the lower end of the second groove 3312 at its lower end, the ball flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 enters the inclined flow path 8313 via the lower end of the second groove 3312 ( It joins the flow path where the first ball flows down). In the present embodiment, the shape of the branch delay groove 8314 is designed so that the time required for the sphere to pass through the branch delay groove 8314 is 5 seconds or more.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the time required for the ball P81 that first entered the V winning opening 800a to reach the lower base opening 8313b after entering the V winning opening 800a, and the V winning after the ball P81. There is an interval of 5 seconds between the time required for the ball P82 that has entered the mouth 800a to reach the lower base opening 8313b after the ball P82 has entered the V winning opening 800a. As a result, even when a plurality of balls P81 and P82 enter the V winning opening 800a together, the timing at which the balls P81 and P82 reach the lower base opening 8313b is shifted, and the respective balls P81 and P82 are respectively. The falling operation of the V winning switch 8315d can be easily shown to the player. As a result, it is possible to prevent the rushing flow of the balls, such as the balls P81 and P82 flowing down together and it is unknown which ball has passed the V winning switch 8315d.

The sphere that has passed through the inclined flow path 8313 abuts on the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and then flows down the annex groove 8315. The side-by-side groove 8315 is connected to the first groove 8315a extending vertically downward from the lower base opening 8313b and the flow path connected to the communication opening 8313a so that the ball passing through the communication opening 8313a can flow down, and at the upper end portion of the groove 8315. More than the second groove 8315b provided on the left side of the first groove 8315a, the gap 8315c formed as a gap through which a sphere can pass from the first groove 8315a to the second groove 8315b, and the gap 8315c of the first groove 8315a. It mainly includes a V winning switch 8315d arranged so that a ball can pass on the downstream side, and a discharge switch 8315e through which a ball flowing down the first groove 8315a or the second groove 8315b passes.

The ball flowing down the delay device 8300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after passing through the discharge switch 8315e.

The sphere that has reached the annex groove 8315 flows down to the lower base opening 8313b when the sphere does not stay from the lower base opening 8313b, and then starts flowing down along the first groove 8315a.

On the other hand, when the sphere is stagnant starting from the lower base opening 8313b, it is dammed by the stagnant sphere and does not flow down to the lower end portion, but passes through the communication opening 8313a and along the second groove 8315b (in the velocity direction backward). (Switched) Starts flowing down. In this way, the flow path of the sphere that has reached the annexed groove 8315 can be changed depending on whether or not the sphere is retained starting from the lower base opening 8313b. Next, the stopping device 8500 capable of stopping the ball starting from the lower bottom opening 8313b will be described.

The stopping device 8500 includes a drive device 8520 composed of a pair of movable plate portions 8510 and a pair of drive solenoids 8521 and 8522 (one of solenoids 209 (see FIG. 4)) for driving and controlling the movable plate portions 8510. Mainly prepared.

The movable plate portion 8510 includes an upper movable plate 8511 that appears and disappears inside the first groove 8315a at the boundary between the lower bottom opening 8313b and the first groove 8315a, and a gap 8315c on the downstream side of the upper movable plate 8511. Mainly includes a lower movable plate 8512 that appears and disappears inside the first groove 8315a at a position along the lower end side of the above.

The upper movable plate 8511 regulates the flow of the sphere by projecting to a position where the gap formed in the first groove 8315a is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding inside the first groove 8315a. It is stopped on the side), and the ball is allowed to flow down in the retracted state where the first groove 8315a is retracted from the inside to the outside.

The upper movable plate 8511 is set so that the upper surface position thereof is lower than the lower surface position of the lower bottom opening 8313b. Therefore, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state, it can be prevented from flowing down to the lower base opening 8313b and returning (riding) to the inclined flow path 8313 when the ball on the upper movable plate 8511 bounces to the left. it can.

The lower movable plate 8512 protrudes to a position where the gap formed in the first groove 8315a is smaller than the diameter of the sphere in the protruding state protruding inside the first groove 8315a, so that the extension direction of the first groove 8315a of the sphere is extended. The flow along the (vertical direction) is regulated, and the flow along the extending direction (vertical direction) of the first groove 8315a of the sphere is allowed in the retracted state in which the first groove 8315a is retracted from the inside to the outside.

The lower movable plate 8512 is formed from a curved shape whose upper surface shape is inclined downward toward the second groove 8315b. As a result, the period during which the ball that has fallen on the upper surface of the lower movable plate 8512 stays on the upper surface of the lower movable plate 8512 can be shortened, and the ball can be sent to the second groove 8315b in a short time.

The lower movable plate 8512 passes through the lower movable plate 8512 (left side, see FIG. 55) in the retracted state after the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state and the ball stopped at the upper movable plate 8511 starts to fall. It is arranged at a position where the time required for the evacuation is less than 0.1 seconds.

The drive device 8520 is fastened and fixed to the delay device 8300 and is fastened and fixed to the delay device 8300 to generate a driving force for generating a driving force to move the upper movable plate 8511. It mainly includes a lower drive solenoid 8522 that generates a driving force.

In the present embodiment, the upper drive solenoid 8521 is an operation pattern set based on the small hit type of the small hit caused by the ball being entered into the second winning opening 640, and the upper movable plate 8511 is used. It is excited in a mode of haunting operation.

On the other hand, the lower drive solenoid 8522 is excited in such a manner that the lower movable plate 8512 is moved in and out in a constant operation pattern from the time when the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, as an example, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in a protruding state (a state that restricts the passage of a ball) for 2.5 seconds, and then maintained in a retracted state (a state that allows the passage of a ball) for 0.5 seconds. The lower drive solenoid 8522 is driven by an operation pattern that repeats the above.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since the upper movable plate 8511 is driven by the upper drive solenoid 8521 and the lower movable plate 8512 is driven by the lower drive solenoid 8522, each operation can be made independent. Hereinafter, an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 will be described.

FIG. 54 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of each part when a ball entering the V winning opening 800a is detected. In FIG. 54, the waveform is shown in such a manner that the timing at which the output pulse of the V winning opening 800a is turned on indicates the timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a.

The waveform shown as the inclined flow path 8313 is added for easy understanding, and the output pulse rises at the timing when the spheres P81 and P82 passing through the V winning opening 800a reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. It is illustrated in an aspect (which is said to reach the lower end).

As shown in FIG. 54, in the present embodiment, after the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and becomes a small hit, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. As a result, the ball can pass through the V winning opening 800a. In the present embodiment, the shortest fluctuation time of the second winning opening 640 is set to 15 seconds, and the movable member inside the delay device 8300 is driven during that 15 seconds (see FIG. 54).

In FIG. 54, the case where the two balls P81 and P82 pass through the V winning opening 800a is shown. That is, the balls P81 and P82 are shown as balls that have passed through the V winning opening 800a at a ball entry interval of 1.8 seconds or less. Among the balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the ball P81 that has entered at the beginning flows down the inclined flow path 8313 after changing the stop device 3340 from the initial state to the changed state. After the stop device 3340 changes to the changed state, it takes at least 3 seconds for the maintenance of the state to be released by the action of the ball P81, so that the trailing ball P82 is in contact with the stopped device 3340 in the changed state. Enter the branch delay groove 8314.

In this way, the ball P81 that entered the ball at the beginning and the ball P82 that follows the ball flow down the different flow paths and reach the lower base opening 8313b. The time required to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b can be defined by the shape of the flow path. In the present embodiment, it takes 4 seconds for the ball P81 to reach the lower base opening 8313b after passing through the V winning opening 800a, and the ball P82 is added by the amount (5 seconds) of flowing down the branch delay groove 8314. It takes 9 seconds.

The timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a is limited to the time (1.8 seconds) when the V winning device 800 is opened. Therefore, the first arrival period T81, which is 1.8 seconds starting from 4 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened, and 1.8 seconds starting from 9 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened. In a period other than the second arrival period T82, the spheres P81 and P82 cannot reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. In addition, the first arrival period T81 and the second arrival period T82 are separated.

As a result, the timing at which the ball P81 and the ball P82 flow down the side-by-side groove 8315 can be clearly separated. That is, the V winning device 800 is clearly distinguished from the case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a during the opening period of the V winning device 800. It is possible to form a case in which the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on whether or not a plurality of balls have entered the V winning opening 800a during the opening period of.

Further, the falling operation of the balls P81 and P82 onto the V winning switches 8315d can be easily shown to the player. That is, when the balls P81 and P82 flow down together toward the V winning switch 8315d, one passes through the V winning switch 8315d, and the other deviates from the V winning switch 8315d, which ball (enters first). It is possible to prevent the ball from flowing down in a hurry, such as not knowing whether the ball P81 that has been balled or the ball P82) that has been balled in later has passed the V winning switch 8315d.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 54 is shown with the time point at which the V winning device 800 is opened as the left end. The upper movable plate 8511 is switched to the retracted state at the first opening time T83 7 seconds after the opening of the V winning device 800 and at the second opening time T84 12 seconds after the opening of the V winning device 800. (Opened) and switched to the protruding state (closed) after 1 second. The first opening time point T83 and the second opening time point T84 are defined before the ball entry timing regardless of the ball entry timing to the V winning opening 800a.

As shown in FIG. 54, the first opening time point T83 corresponds to the timing 1.2 seconds after the end of the first arrival period T81, and the second opening time point T84 is 1. Corresponds after 2 seconds.

Therefore, the period until the ball that has passed through the V winning opening 800a reaches the lower base opening 8313b and the arrangement of the ball is stabilized (for example, the period during which the slight vibration after colliding with the side wall is contained, or the period for entering three or more balls). (Period for discharging the second and subsequent balls from the communication opening 8313a) can be secured. As a result, the ball can be dropped immediately after the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state (the deviation between the operation timing of the upper movable plate 8511 and the fall start timing of the ball can be minimized. ). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball from irregularly winning the V winning switch 8315d by flowing down in an unintended flow mode.

Regarding this point, in the present embodiment, the period until the arrangement of the sphere becomes stable after the leading sphere P81 reaches the lower base opening 8313b, and after the trailing sphere P82 reaches the lower base opening 8313b, the sphere It can be shortened compared to the period until the arrangement stabilizes.

That is, according to the present embodiment, when the leading sphere P81 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the distance between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is shortened, and a sufficient attractive force acts. On the other hand, when the trailing ball P82 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 are separated from each other and the attractive force becomes weak, so that the leading ball P81 The load received from the contact portion 3363 can be made larger than the load received from the contact portion 3363 by the trailing ball P82.

As a result, the load applied to the ball P81 from the contact portion 3363 can be used as a braking force, and the ball P81 can be decelerated in advance before the ball P81 reaches the lower base opening 8313b. As a result, the degree of rebound caused by the sphere P81 colliding with the lower end of the inclined flow path 8313 can be reduced, so that the period from when the sphere P81 reaches the lower base opening 8313b until the arrangement of the sphere becomes stable. Therefore, the interval between the end of the first arrival period T81 and the first opening time point T83 can be set short. As a result, it is easier to close (switch to the protruding state) the upper movable plate 8511, which has started switching (opening) to the retracted state at the first opening time T83, before the trailing ball reaches the lower base opening 8313b. Can be done (with time to spare).

On the other hand, the load (braking force) given to the ball P82 from the contact portion 3363 is smaller than the load (braking force) given to the ball P81 from the contact portion 3363, so that the ball P82 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b. The period until the arrangement of the spheres becomes stable can be made longer than that of the sphere P81. As a result, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom of the effect performed by utilizing the period until the arrangement of the balls P82 becomes stable. For example, a long-time production can be performed.

The waveform shown as the lower movable plate 8512 shows the operation modes of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing as an example of the opening / closing operation of the lower movable plate 8512 from the time when the V winning device 800 is opened. .. Although the waveforms of the timing charts of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 show changes in the state, they are simplified and shown as rectangular waves for easy understanding.

At the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T83. Therefore, if at least one ball has entered the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 will be in the retracted state at T83 at the time of the first opening, and the ball entered at the beginning will fall from the lower bottom opening 8313b. Then, the V winning switch 8315d is passed, and then the discharge switch 8315e is passed.

At the second timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in a protruding state at the first opening time T83 and the second opening time T84. Therefore, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, the ball falling from the lower base opening 8313b is guided to the second groove 8315b along the lower movable plate 8512, so that it does not pass through the V winning switch 8315d and is discharged. It passes through the switch 8315e.

At the third timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is brought into the protruding state at the first opening time T83, while the lower movable plate 8512 is brought into the retracted state at the second opening time T84. Therefore, when there is only one ball entering the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state at T83 at the time of the first opening, so that the ball entered at the beginning is from the lower bottom opening 8313b. Since the ball falls and is guided to the second groove 8315b along the lower movable plate 8512, the ball passes through the discharge switch 8315e without passing through the V winning switch 8315d.

On the other hand, when there are two or more balls entering the V winning opening 800a, the upper movable plate 8511 is retracted at T84 at the time of the second opening, so that the balls fall from the lower bottom opening 8313b. It passes through the V winning switch 8315d and then the discharge switch 8315e.

As a result, it is possible to create a playability in which the profit given to the player is clearly changed depending on whether one ball is inserted or a plurality of balls are inserted in the V winning opening 800a. This prescribes that the timing of reaching the inclined flow path 8313 is included in the first arrival period T81 regardless of whether the ball is entered at an early timing or at a late timing when the V winning device 800 is opened. As is clear from this, it is clearly different from the playability in which the profit given to the player changes depending on the timing of entering the V winning opening 800a.

According to the playability of the present embodiment, the profit given to the player changes depending on how many balls enter the V winning opening 800a by one opening operation of the V winning device 800. Therefore, the V winning opening 800a It is possible to improve the attention to the mode of entering the ball.

Next, the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. In the eighth embodiment, the case where the sphere that has reached the lower base opening 8313b when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state stays above the upper movable plate 8511 has been described, but the delay device 9300 in the ninth embodiment is above. It is provided with a discharge detection port 9313a for discharging the ball that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313b as it is when the movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state. The same parts as those of the above-described embodiments are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted.

With reference to FIG. 55, the configuration of the delay device 9300 in which the ball passing through the V winning opening 800a flows down will be described. FIG. 55 is a partial front view of the delay device 9300 according to the ninth embodiment. Since the stop device 3340 and the maintenance device 3360 in the delay device 9300 have the same configuration as the device of the third embodiment, they are designated by the same reference numerals as those described in the third embodiment, and in the third embodiment, the same reference numerals are given. The explanation is omitted for the part that overlaps with the explanation of.

A delay device 9300 is provided as a device for forming a flow path through which the ball that has entered the V winning device 800 passes. The V winning device 800 is provided with a V winning opening 800a, and when a game ball enters the V winning opening 800a, the entry of the game ball is detected, and a predetermined game is played for the player. Balls (eg, 3 balls) are paid out. That is, the V winning opening 800a is a detection port that also serves as a detection sensor. Further, when the game ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a passes through the V winning switch 8315d, which will be described later, a big hit game is given.

In the present embodiment, unlike the function in the first embodiment, the detection port 312d functions not as a detection port for performing detection accompanied by a lottery, but as a detection port for purely detecting the passage of a sphere. That is, the number of balls detected by the V winning opening 800a is compared with the number of balls detected by the detection port 312d, and if an abnormality is found in the difference between the numbers, an error notification is performed. By doing so, for example, it is possible to make a hole in the range on the front side of the branch delay groove 8314 of the glass unit 16 and to easily detect an error in inserting the ball directly into the branch delay groove 8314 from the front side.

As shown in FIG. 55, the delay device 9300 flows down the inside of the main body member 9310, which allows the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a to flow down, and the delay device 8300 described in the eighth embodiment. The stop device 3340 whose state changes due to the action of the sphere, and the stop device 3340 that maintains the state when the stop device 3340 changes and changes its posture due to the action of the ball flowing down inside. It mainly includes a maintenance device 3360 for releasing the maintenance of the state, and a stop device 8500 for stopping the ball by acting on the ball flowing down the annexed groove 8315, which will be described later. That is, the delay device 9300 of the present embodiment is different from the delay device 8300 of the eighth embodiment only in the main body members 8310 and 9310, and has the same configuration in other parts.

As shown in FIG. 55, the main body member 9310 includes a first groove 3311, a second groove 3312, a branch delay groove 8314, and a lower bottom opening 8313b having the same configuration as the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment. It is mainly provided with an annexed groove 8315 extending vertically downward from the including area and composed of a pair of grooves attached to the left and right, and in addition, the configuration is different from that of the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment. The inclined flow path 9313 is provided. That is, the main body member 9310 of the present embodiment is different from the main body member 8310 of the eighth embodiment only in the inclined flow paths 8313 and 9313, and has the same configuration in other parts.

The first groove 3311, the second groove 3312, the inclined passage 9313, the branch delay groove 8314, and the side-by-side groove 8315 have a groove shape having an open portion on the game board 13 side, and the open portion is used for gaming in the assembled state. By being closed by the board 13, a passage through which the ball flows down is formed.

The inclined flow path 9313 is formed as a linear flow path that inclines downward toward the right starting from the lower end of the second groove 3312, and the spheres in contact with the abutting portion 3363 are further advanced by two spheres. It is a flow path that extends up to that point (when three balls stay from the extended end, the third ball counts from the extended end comes into contact with the contact portion 3363. The lower bottom opening 8313b arranged at the same position as in the eighth embodiment and the position shifted by one sphere along the extending direction of the inclined flow path 9313 with respect to the lower bottom opening 8313b (there is). The discharge detection port 9313a is mainly provided at the extended end of the inclined flow path 9313) so as to be opened so that the ball can be guided to the back side (the back side of the paper in FIG. 55). The inclined flow path 9313 is formed from a shape in which 4 seconds elapse from when the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a until it flows straight down the second groove 3312 and reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

The discharge detection port 9313a is an opening that guides a ball that has reached its front side (front side in the vertical direction of FIG. 55) and guides it to a ball discharge path (not shown). Further, the discharge detection port 9313a is configured as a switch (a part of various switches 208 (see FIG. 4)) for detecting the passage of the ball.

The sphere that flows down the inclined flow path 9313 and passes through the lower base opening 8313b flows down the annex groove 8315. Since the formation of the communication opening 8313a is omitted in the present embodiment, the second groove 8315b of the side-by-side groove 8315 is formed as a groove in which the sphere is guided only via the first groove 8315a.

That is, the side-by-side groove 8315 includes a first groove 8315a extending vertically downward from the lower base opening 8313b, a second groove 8315b provided on the left side of the first groove 8315a, and a first groove 8315a to a second groove. A gap 8315c formed as a gap through which the ball can pass through the 8315b, a V winning switch 8315d arranged so that the ball can pass downstream from the gap 8315c in the first groove 8315a, and the first groove 8315a or It mainly includes a discharge switch 8315e through which a ball flowing down the second groove 8315b passes.

The ball flowing down the delay device 9300 is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) after passing through the discharge switch 8315e.

The flow mode of the sphere that has reached the lower bottom opening 8313b will be described. First, if the upper movable plate 8511 is in a protruding state when the ball reaches the lower base opening 8313b, the ball does not stay at the lower base opening 8313b and continues to flow along the same flow direction, and the discharge detection port After reaching the front side of 9313a, it passes through the discharge detection port 9313a and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

On the other hand, if the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state when the ball reaches the lower base opening 8313b, the ball passes through the lower base opening 8313b and falls, and then is attached along the first groove 8315a. Start flowing down the groove 8315. After flowing down the annexed groove 8315, the ball passes through the discharge switch 8315e and is guided to a ball discharge path (not shown).

In this way, when the ball flowing down the inclined flow path 9313 reaches the lower base opening 8313b, the subsequent flow path of the ball may be different depending on whether the upper movable plate 8511 is in the protruding state or the retracted state. it can.

In the present embodiment, the lower drive solenoid 8522 is excited in such a manner that the lower movable plate 8512 appears and disappears in a constant operation pattern from the time when the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, as an example different from the eighth embodiment, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in a protruding state (a state of restricting the passage of a ball) for 5.5 seconds, and then in a retracted state (a state of allowing the passage of a ball). ) Is repeatedly maintained for 0.5 seconds, and the lower drive solenoid 8522 is driven. Next, an example of the operation mode of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 will be described.

FIG. 56 is a timing chart showing an example of the operation mode of each part when a ball entering the V winning opening 800a is detected. In FIG. 56, the waveform is shown in such a manner that the timing at which the output pulse of the V winning opening 800a is turned on indicates the timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a.

The waveform shown as the inclined flow path 8313 is added for ease of understanding, and the output pulse rises at the timing when the spheres P91 and P92 passing through the V winning opening 800a reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. Illustrated in aspects.

As shown in FIG. 56, in the present embodiment, after the ball enters the second winning opening 640 and becomes a small hit, the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds. As a result, the ball can pass through the V winning opening 800a. In FIG. 56, the case where the two balls P91 and P92 pass through the V winning opening 800a is shown. That is, the balls P91 and P92 are shown as balls that have passed through the V winning opening 800a at a ball entry interval of 1.8 seconds or less.

Among the balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the ball P91 that has entered at the beginning flows down the inclined flow path 9313 after changing the stop device 3340 from the initial state to the changed state. After the stop device 3340 changes to the changing state, it takes at least 3 seconds (longer than the opening time of the V winning device 800) until the maintenance of the state is released by the action of the ball P91. P92 enters the branch delay groove 8314 while abutting on the stop device 3340 in the changing state.

In this way, the ball P91 that entered the ball at the beginning and the ball P92 that follows the ball flow down the different flow paths and reach the lower base opening 8313b. The time required to reach the lower bottom opening 8313b can be defined by the shape of the flow path. In the present embodiment, it takes 4 seconds for the ball P91 to reach the lower base opening 8313b after passing through the V winning opening 800a, and the ball P92 is added by the amount (5 seconds) of flowing down the branch delay groove 8314. It takes 9 seconds.

The timing at which the ball passes through the V winning opening 800a is limited to the time (1.8 seconds) when the V winning device 800 is opened. Therefore, the first arrival period T81, which is 1.8 seconds starting from 4 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened, and 1.8 seconds starting from 9 seconds after the V winning device 800 is opened. In a period other than the second arrival period T82, the spheres P91 and P92 cannot reach the lower bottom opening 8313b. In addition, the first arrival period T81 and the second arrival period T82 are separated.

That is, the timing at which the sphere P91 and the sphere P92 reach the lower base opening 8313b can be clearly separated. That is, the V winning device 800 is clearly distinguished from the case where the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a during the opening period of the V winning device 800. It is possible to form a case in which the profit given to the player fluctuates depending on whether or not a plurality of balls have entered the V winning opening 800a during the opening period of.

The timing chart shown in FIG. 56 is shown with the time point at which the V winning device 800 is opened as the left end. The upper movable plate 8511 is switched from the protruding state to the retracted state (opened) at the first opening time T93 9 seconds after the opening time of the V winning device 800, and is switched from the retracted state to the protruding state after 2 seconds (opened). Will be closed). The first opening time T93 is defined before the ball entering timing regardless of the ball entering timing into the V winning opening 800a.

As shown in FIG. 56, the first opening time point T93 corresponds to the beginning of the second arrival period T82. Therefore, no matter when the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a while the V winning device 800 is open, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in the retracted state at the timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower base opening 8313b. be able to.

On the other hand, during the period corresponding to the first arrival period T81, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in a protruding state, so that when the ball P91 enters the V winning opening 800a while the V winning device 800 is open. Even if there is, the upper movable plate 8511 is maintained in the protruding state at the timing when the ball P91 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b.

Therefore, it is possible to prevent the ball P91 that has entered the V winning opening 800a at the beginning from invading the annexed groove 8315, and the same opening as the opening of the V winning device 800 when the ball P91 enters the V winning opening 800a. Inside, the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a after the ball P91 that has entered the V winning opening 800a can be guided to the annexed groove 8315. As a result, during the same opening of the V winning device 800, the ball P91 is compared with the profit given to the player by the ball P91 that first enters the V winning opening 800a. It is possible to configure a gaming machine in which the profit given to the player by the ball P92 that enters the V winning opening 800a after the above is larger. In other words, it is possible to form a gaming machine in which the ball P91 can be prevented from passing through the V winning switch 8315d and the ball P92 can pass through the V winning switch 8315d.

For this purpose, it is necessary to prevent the sphere P91 from colliding with the extending end of the inclined flow path 9313 and rebounding, causing the sphere P91 to be returned to the bottom opening 8313b. In the present embodiment, the ball P91 can be decelerated by the braking action generated by the contact (rubbing) between the ball P91 and the contact portion 3363, so that even when the ball P91 vigorously flows through the inclined flow path 9313. , It is possible to prevent the ball P91 from colliding with the extended end of the inclined flow path 9313 and bouncing back to the lower bottom opening 8313b. Therefore, the speed of the sphere flowing down the inclined flow path 9313 increases in the setting range of the inclination angle of the inclined flow path 9313 until the inclination angle with respect to the horizontal plane becomes large (until it reaches the contact portion 3363). Can be spread to the side).

The braking action of the ball P91 utilizes the contact between the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360, which is arranged to release the maintenance of the stop device 3340 in the changed state, and the ball P91, and is individual. It is not a new addition to the braking device of. That is, in the present embodiment, the maintenance device 3360 can be used for both the switching of the state of the stop device 3340 and the deceleration of the ball P91.

Further, according to the present embodiment, the deceleration action generated on the trailing ball P92 can be reduced as compared with the deceleration action generated on the leading ball P91 due to the contact with the contact portion 3363.

That is, according to the present embodiment, when the leading sphere P91 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the distance between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 is shortened, and a sufficient attractive force acts. On the other hand, when the trailing ball P92 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363, the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360 are spaced apart from each other and the attractive force becomes weak, so that the leading ball P91 The load received from the contact portion 3363 can be made larger than the load received from the contact portion 3363 by the trailing ball P92.

Therefore, while the sphere P91 is sufficiently decelerated, the deceleration degree of the sphere P92 can be suppressed as compared with the deceleration degree of the sphere P91. As a result, the flow of the inclined flow path 9313 of the ball P92 can be smoothed, and it is possible to suppress dissatisfaction from the player who visually follows the flow of the ball P92.

For example, when the degree of deceleration of the ball P92 by the contact portion 3363 is large, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state when the ball flowing down the inclined flow path 9313 starts to contact the contact portion 3363. While the ball is in contact with the contact portion 3363 and decelerating, the event that the lower movable plate 8512 is in a protruding state is likely to occur. In this case, there is no basis from the player such as "Isn't it possible that a wind is generated inside and the ball P92 is intentionally decelerated to make it difficult for the ball to pass through the V winning switch 8315d?" Speculation was easy to spread, and there was a risk that the player's willingness to play would be diminished.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the ball P92 capable of entering the annex groove 8315 is in contact with the contact portion 3363 as compared with the ball P91 which cannot enter the annex groove 8315. Since the degree of deceleration can be reduced, the flow of the sphere P92 near the contact portion 3363 can be smoothed, and the possibility of spreading unfounded speculation can be reduced.

Further, when the leading ball P91 comes into contact with the contact portion 3363 and a distance is provided between the magnet portion 3346 of the stop device 3340 and the magnet portion 3362 of the maintenance device 3360, the contact portion 3363 is moved upward with the shaft portion 3361a as an axis. Rotate towards. After that, the contact portion 3363 is lowered to the position shown in FIG. 55 again due to gravity, but the time required to reach the state shown in FIG. 55 changes depending on the weight balance of the maintenance device 3360 and the like. That is, the lighter the weight of the contact portion 3363, the longer it takes to reach the state shown in FIG. 55.

Here, if the sphere P92 passes below the abutting portion 3363 after the abutting portion rotates upward and before reaching the state shown in FIG. 55, the sphere P92 abuts on the abutting portion 3363. Since it is never decelerated and is not decelerated, it can flow down the path to the bottom opening 8313b purely according to the shape of the flow path (without deceleration for other special reasons). In this case, it is possible to make it easier to accurately set the period until the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a reaches the lower base opening 8313b.

Therefore, in a single opening of the V winning device 800, the spheres P92 are connected to the sphere P91 as compared with the case where the spheres P91 and P92 are separated and pass through the V winning opening 800a immediately after opening and immediately before closing. When passing through the V winning opening 800a, the period from when the contact portion 3363 rotates upward due to the contact with the ball P91 until the ball P92 reaches the lower part of the contact portion 3363 can be shortened. In this case, since it is easy to create a situation in which the ball P92 flows down without contacting the contact portion 3363, the timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower base opening 8313b (9 seconds after entering the V winning opening 800a). ) Can be easily set by the flow path shape of the main body member 9310.

Therefore, when the drive control of the stopping device 8500 is performed in consideration of the timing (see FIG. 56), the sphere P92 and the sphere P91 are brought together by connecting the sphere P92 to the sphere P91 and entering the V winning opening 800a. The maximum profit given to the player by the ball P92 (the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d) as compared with the case where the ball enters the V winning opening 800a at intervals (up to about 1.8 second intervals). It is possible to make it easier for the player to acquire the big hit.

The waveform shown as the lower movable plate 8512 shows the operation modes of the first timing, the second timing, and the third timing as an example of the opening / closing operation of the lower movable plate 8512 from the time when the V winning device 800 is opened. .. Although the waveforms of the timing charts of the upper movable plate 8511 and the lower movable plate 8512 show changes in the state, they are simplified and shown as rectangular waves for easy understanding.

In the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the protruding state for 2 seconds from the first opening time T93, that is, during the period when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Therefore, regardless of the number of balls that have entered the V winning opening 800a, the balls are prevented from passing through the V winning switch 8315d, and the balls that deviate from the V winning switch 8315d pass through the discharge switch 8315e.

At the second timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the protruding state until the end of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, and the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state just before the end of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. It can be switched to the evacuation state. Therefore, the closer the timing at which the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a to the timing at which the V winning device 800 is switched to the closed state, the easier it is for the ball P92 to flow down the first groove 8315a in the retracted state of the lower movable plate 8512. , The profit given to the player is increased.

At the third timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the first opening time T93, so that the lower movable plate 8512 is in the protruding state at least in the latter half of the period in which the upper movable plate 8511 is retracted. Be maintained. Therefore, the closer the timing at which the ball P92 enters the V winning opening 800a to the timing at which the V winning device 800 is switched to the open state, the easier it is for the ball P92 to flow down the first groove 8315a in the retracted state of the lower movable plate 8512. , The profit given to the player is increased.

As described above, according to the present embodiment, only the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a after the ball P91 can reach the lower bottom opening 8313b of the inclined flow path 9313 when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. The timing when the ball P92 reaches the lower bottom opening 8313b and falls (the timing when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a by back calculation) and the timing when the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state match well. Thereby, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d.

That is, the condition for passing a ball through the V winning switch 8315d is that two or more balls are passed through the V winning opening 800a within a single opening operation of the V winning device 800, and the second ball is V winning in a timely manner. It can be two points of passing through the mouth 800a.

As a result, it is possible to create a playability in which the profit given to the player is clearly changed depending on whether one ball is inserted or a plurality of balls are inserted in the V winning opening 800a. According to the playability of the present embodiment, the profit given to the player changes depending on how many balls enter the V winning opening 800a by one opening operation of the V winning device 800. Therefore, the V winning opening 800a It is possible to improve the attention to the mode of entering the ball. On the premise of this playability, an example of an effect executed by the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 52) will be described as an effect suggesting the magnitude of the possibility of a big hit.

In the third symbol display device 81, various effects related to the magnitude of the jackpot expectation are executed in conjunction with the variable display. The magnitude of the jackpot expectation degree referred to here refers to the magnitude of the probability that a ball that has passed through the V winning opening 800a will pass through the V winning switch 8315d.

For example, when the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the first timing, the lower movable plate 8512 is maintained in the protruding state when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state, so that the ball P92 can pass through the V winning switch 8315d. The sex is extremely low. Therefore, in this case, in the present embodiment, for example, by displaying characters such as "Don't expect" or "Send off this time" on the third symbol display device 81, the player has an excessive expectation. It is controlled by the MPU 221 so as to give a non-stop notification. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be based on the voice emitted from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, an extremely short voice or a voice with a very common negative image may be emitted), or from the lamp display device 227. It may be due to the emitted light (for example, in a setting where the degree of expectation increases as the color changes to blue, green, or red, blue light may be emitted, etc.), or a movable mechanism near the third symbol display device 81. Is arranged, and it may be due to the operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in the operation mode in which the intensity of the movement is set to be strong or weak, the intensity may be weakened).

On the other hand, in both the case where the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the second timing and the case where the lower movable plate 8512 is operating at the third timing, ideally, when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Since the ball P92 can reach the lower bottom opening 8313b, there is a possibility that the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d. However, in the present embodiment of the game property in which the ball P92 that has entered the V winning opening 800a afterwards passes through the V winning switch 8315d, there is a clear difference in the jackpot expectation.

This is because, in the present embodiment as well, as in the conventional model, the ball firing interval is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, and from the arrangement of the V winning opening 800a shown in FIG. 52, the V winning opening 800a is launched after firing. This is because the period until entering the ball does not change significantly from ball to ball. Since the firing interval is 0.6 seconds at the shortest, it is assumed that the interval at which the ball enters the V winning opening 800a is about 0.6 seconds. Therefore, the ball immediately after the V winning device 800 is opened. It becomes difficult for P92 to pass through the V winning opening 800a.

That is, the jackpot expectation is higher when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing than when it operates at the third timing. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, a notification suggesting that the jackpot expectation is high is given, while when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the third timing, the notification is given. Is controlled by the MPU 221 to give a lively notification suggesting that the jackpot expectation is medium.

For example, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, in the present embodiment, the player displays characters such as "great chance" and "make a look" on the third symbol display device 81. It is controlled by the MPU 221 so as to give a notification that gives the expectation of a big hit. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be the sound emitted from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, the sound of a long version of the image song of the model, the sound of a very common plus image, etc. may be emitted). , It may be due to the light emitted from the lamp display device 227 (for example, in a setting where the degree of expectation increases as the color changes to blue, green, red, etc., red light may be emitted), or the third symbol. A movable mechanism may be arranged in the vicinity of the display device 81, and may be based on the operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in an operation mode in which the intensity of the movement is set to be strong or weak, the intensity may be increased).

On the other hand, for example, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the third timing, in the present embodiment, characters such as "something" or "I do not know until the end" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the MPU 221 controls the player to give a notification that gives the player some expectation. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be the sound emitted from the sound output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, the sound of a short version of the image song of the model, the sound of a very common intermediate image, etc. may be emitted). , It may be due to the light emitted from the lamp display device 227 (for example, in a setting where the expectation becomes higher as the color changes to blue, green, red, etc., it may generate green light emission, etc.), or the third symbol. A movable mechanism may be arranged in the vicinity of the display device 81, and may be based on the operation mode of the movable mechanism (for example, in an operation mode in which the intensity of the movement is provided with strength or weakness, the intensity may be moderate). ..

In the other operation timings of the lower movable plate 8512 (fourth timing (not shown)), the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state at the second timing and the lower movable plate 8512 is retracted at the third timing. In the meantime, the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state.

In this case, the ball P92 may pass through the V winning switch 8315d when the ball P92 enters the ball at an intermediate timing during the opening of the V winning device 800. On the other hand, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, the ball P92 is arranged on the upper side of the opening / closing plate of the V winning device 800 in the open state, and it is unknown when the ball enters the V winning opening 800a. Even if there is, the ball P92 can be forcibly inserted into the V winning opening 800a by the operation of the opening / closing plate accompanying the switching of the V winning device 800 to the closed state, so that the operation timing of the V winning device 800 can be used. Minutes, it is possible to easily form a situation in which the ball P92 passes through the V winning switch 8315d.

Therefore, as another example (or an example of adding) of the above-mentioned notification, when the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, the operation timing at which the lower movable plate 8512 is in the retracted state when the upper movable plate 8511 is in the retracted state. Of these, it may be set as the case where the jackpot expectation is the highest, and the corresponding notification may be performed.

For example, as another example of the case where the lower movable plate 8512 operates at the second timing, in the present embodiment, characters such as "Big hit confirmed !?" and "Congratulations" are displayed on the third symbol display device 81. This is controlled by the MPU 221 to notify the player to maximize the expectation of a jackpot. The notification method is not limited to the display on the third symbol display device 81. For example, it may be based on the sound emitted from the voice output device 226 (see FIG. 4) (for example, the sound of the fixed sound of the model may be emitted), or it may be based on the light emitted from the lamp display device 227. Good (for example, the higher the color changes to blue, green, and red, the higher the expectation, and in a setting where the rainbow color is a big hit, rainbow-colored light may be generated, etc.), and the third symbol display device 81 A movable mechanism may be arranged in the vicinity, and the movement mode of the movable mechanism may be used (for example, in a movement mode in which the intensity of the movement is set to be strong or weak, the intensity may be the strongest).

Although the present invention has been described above based on the above-described embodiment, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it is easy to make various modifications and improvements within a range that does not deviate from the gist of the present invention. It can be inferred.

In each of the above embodiments, a part or all of the configurations in one embodiment may be combined with or replaced with a part or all of the configurations in another embodiment to form another embodiment.

In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 is convexly provided on the slide moving member 321 and the projecting portion 321a1 projects inward of the first groove 311 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a pair of wall portions forming an S-shaped path are arranged on the slide moving member 321 and the slide moving member 321 moves to complete an S-shaped path in which a sphere flows down inside the first groove 311. It may be composed of. In this case, since the path itself through which the sphere flows can be lengthened by the pair of wall portions, the deceleration effect can be maintained for a long period of time as compared with the case where the convex portion 321a1 reduces the deceleration effect due to wear. .. Further, the slide moving member 321 may be configured in such a manner that the region where the convex portion 321a1 is formed and the region where the S-shaped path is formed are continuously provided.

In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 projecting inward of the first groove 311 moves by the kinetic energy of the sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, a state in which the convex portion 321a1 moves by the driving force of a drive motor that constantly operates constantly and projects inward of the first groove 311 (a state in which the degree of deceleration becomes large) and a state in which the convex portion 321a1 retracts from the first groove 311. (A state in which the degree of deceleration becomes small) may be switched (may function as a deceleration device for constant operation). In this case, the degree of deceleration of the ball flowing down the first groove 311 can be changed according to the drive pattern of the drive motor.

Further, the speed reducing device having a constant operation described above may be arranged in the post-detection flow path 5313 according to the fifth embodiment, for example. In this case, the period required for the sphere that has passed through the detection port 312d to pass through the flow path 5313 after detection can be changed depending on the state of the speed reducer, so that the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. You can have variations in the period. More specifically, it is necessary for a ball that has passed through the detection port 312d to pass through the post-detection flow path 5313 when the speed reducer is retracted from the post-detection flow path 5313 (same as the state of only the post-detection flow path 5313). Compared to the period, the period required for the ball that has passed through the detection port 312d to pass through the detection flow path 5313 when the speed reducer is in a state of projecting inside the detection flow path 5313 can be lengthened. Therefore, depending on the timing at which the ball P51 enters the first winning opening 64, the state of the speed reducer when the ball P51 passes through the detection port 312d changes, and the ball P51 passes through the flow path 5313 after detection. Since the period changes, a plurality of patterns can be set for the period in which the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state due to the difference in the timing at which the ball P51 enters the first winning opening 64.

In the first embodiment, the case where the convex portion 321a1 of the speed reducing device 320 projects upward has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the convex portion 321a1 may project downward into the first groove 311 or the convex portion 311a1 may project downward into the first groove 311. In this case, it is possible to prevent the slide moving member 321 from moving to the outside of the first groove 311 due to the weight of the sphere.

In the first embodiment, the case where the balls P1 and P2 can be distributed even when the balls P1 and P2 enter the distribution device 340 in the initial state in succession has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. It's not a thing. For example, before the spheres reach the allocating device 340, after arranging an interval load means for surely spacing the connected spheres, the spheres enter the allocating device 340 and a while later, the state of the allocating device 340. May be configured in such a manner that In this case, since it is not necessary to strictly control the timing of the state change of the distribution device 340, the distribution device 340 can be loosely supported and the load required for the state change can be reduced.

In the first embodiment, the case where the portion of the sorting device 340 where the spheres collide is formed of an arc shape (arc wall portion 343) is described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be composed of a flat plate-like portion of a portion corresponding to the arc wall portion 343. In this case, if a ball enters the sorting device 340 while the sorting device 340 is returning to the initial state, the sorting device 340 is rotated by the load given from the ball and returned to the changed state. As a result, the period during which the sorting device 340 is maintained in the changed state can be extended.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sorting device 340 is operated to return by changing the center of gravity has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the sorting device 340 is returned by using a product whose urging force changes depending on the moving direction (moving resistance is applied only in one direction) or a cylinder product that changes the moving resistance in each direction using an orifice. It may be operated. In this case, maintainability can be improved by using a commercially available product. Further, by configuring the rotation resistance of the rotation shaft of the distribution device 340 to be small in the forward rotation and large in the reverse rotation, a constant urging force is applied to the distribution device 340, so that the return operation of the distribution device 340 takes time. Delays can occur.

In the first embodiment, the case where the sphere flowing from the fan-shaped member 410 to the inflow port 435 is guided through the delay flow path 436 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by forming another floor surface below the inflow port 435 (by forming a floor on which the sphere can roll in two stages), the sphere that has flowed into the inflow port 435 from the fan-shaped member 410 is again in the floor. The surface may be rolled to enter the first winning opening 64. In this case, since the period during which the ball rolls on the floor surface can be extended, the player can pay attention to the movement of the ball and extend the period during which the launch of the ball is stopped. Therefore, the fluctuation of the winning amount held during that period can be digested, and the occurrence of overflow can be suppressed.

In the first embodiment, the case where the fan-shaped member 410 is tilted with the rotation axis aligned in the left-right direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the rotation axis may be tilted along the front-rear direction. In this case, the ball can be dropped toward the first winning opening 64 along the inclination of the arc portion of the fan-shaped member 410 (the position in the left-right direction can be corrected).

In the first embodiment, the case where the fan-shaped member 410 operates under the weight of a sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped member 410 may be electrically operated in a constant repetitive operation mode. In this case, a plurality of types of combinations of operations of the pair of fan-shaped members 410 can be configured. For example, the front side fan-shaped member 410 is in a raised position and the back side fan-shaped member 410 is in a lying position, and the front side fan-shaped member 410 is in a raised position and the back side fan-shaped member 410. The member 410 is in a raised position, the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side is in a lying position, and the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is in a lying position, and the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side is lying down. It is possible to configure a posture in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is in a raised posture and a posture in which the fan-shaped member 410 on the back side is raised, and it is possible to increase the combination of the states of the pair of fan-shaped members 410.

In the first embodiment, the case where the pair of fan-shaped members 410 are formed of the same shape has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped member on the back side may be configured to have a longer width in the left-right direction as compared with the fan-shaped member 410 on the front side. In this case, even for a sphere located at a position away from the center position in the left-right direction of the fan-shaped member 410 and above the fan-shaped member on the back side, an action (push-back action) associated with the inclination of the fan-shaped member is exerted. Can be caused.

In the first embodiment, the case where the outlet of the delay flow path 436 is displaced in the left-right direction with respect to the first winning opening 64 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the delay flow paths 436 below the pair of left and right inlets 435 may merge at the center of the left and right, and the outlets thereof may be arranged directly above the first winning opening 64. In this case, it is possible to improve the rate at which the balls discharged from the exit of the delay flow path 436 into the game area enter the first winning opening 64.

In the first embodiment, the initial state and the changed state of the sorting device 340 have been described as one of the postures taken by the sorting device 340, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the initial state is a posture in which the ball reaching the sorting device 340 is received by the first wall portion 341, and the changing state is a posture in which the ball reaching the sorting device 340 is sent to the third groove 313. The state may be defined by the function of the sorting device 340. In the first embodiment, the ball can be received by the first wall portion 341 only in the initial state of the sorting device 340, and the ball reaching the sorting device 340 between the initial state and the changing state is exclusively the third groove 313. Since the ball is thrown into the changing state (dimensional relationship), the sorting device 340 is set to the changing state regardless of whether the initial state and the changing state are defined by the function or one of the postures. The time required to return to the initial state can be the same. This also applies to the sorting device 2340 and the stopping device 3340 in each of the above embodiments.

In the first embodiment, the case where the fluctuation period that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3 or 4 is 3 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 3, the variable period which is easy to be selected is set to 5 seconds, and when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is 4, the variable period which is easy to be selected is set to 3 seconds. May be done. In this case, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 while the variable display when the number of reserved balls of the first special symbol is three continues to display the detection port 312d before the continuous variable display ends. It may pass (the number of reserved balls will be 4). On the other hand, since the ball entering interval between the following balls is 3 seconds or more and the fluctuation display when the number of reserved balls is 4 is 3 seconds, the ball entering the first winning opening 64 after that is detected. Before passing through mouth 312d, ongoing fluctuations can be terminated to free up storage space.

In the first embodiment, a ball that rolls on the delay floor device 400 and falls from the chamfered portion 411a and then enters the delayed floor device 400, and the fan-shaped member 410 is caused by the ball falling from the chamfered portion 411a. The case where it is temporarily pushed back by operating has been described, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the fan-shaped member 410 may be driven regardless of the fall of the ball, and the ball that has entered the delay device 400 later may be temporarily stopped in one state during the operation. In this case, it is possible to give the possibility of temporarily stopping on the delay device 400 to all the balls entering the delay device 400.

In the first embodiment, the case where the delay device 300 is connected to the first winning opening 64 has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the delay device 300 may be connected to the second winning opening 640.

In the first embodiment, the period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d to when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d is longer when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d and then the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d. By being set longer than the period until passing through 312d, there is a possibility that the sphere P2 will pass through the detection port 312d before the variation display of the first symbol is completed after the sphere P1 has passed through the detection port 312d. Has been described when it can be lowered, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d and the period from when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d. And may be set to substantially the same length. In this case, since the hold display of the first symbol occurs after a period of substantially the same period, it is possible to give the player a sense of security.

Further, for example, from the period from when the sphere P1 passes through the detection port 312d to when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d until when the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d until the sphere P3 passes through the detection port 312d. The period of may be set to be longer. In this case, since the sphere P2 passes through the detection port 312d at an early stage, it is possible to easily increase the number of reserved spheres when the currently ongoing fluctuation ends, and the duration of the subsequent fluctuation display is shortened. Since it is possible to easily make the ball, it is possible to reduce the possibility that an overflow will occur at the first winning opening 64 due to a subsequent ball entry.

In the first embodiment, the fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is four is set to 3 seconds, and the fluctuation period that is easily selected when the number of reserved balls is one is mentioned. I explained the case where it is not done, but it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is 1, the variable period that is likely to be selected is 10 seconds, and if the number of balls is 2, the variable period that is likely to be selected is 6 seconds, and the variable period is selected when 3 or 4 balls. The variable period that is likely to occur may be set to 3 seconds.

In this case, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is three, when the balls are fired so as to allow the balls to enter the first winning opening 64 (variation display when the number of reserved balls is three is executed). (When a ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64), the variation display when the number of reserved balls is 3 ends before the ball P1 passes through the detection port 312d, and the number of reserved balls is 2. The variable display in the case of is started.

The ball P3 does not pass through the detection port 312d while the variation display when the number of reserved balls is two is executed (6 seconds, that is, less than 9 seconds after entering the ball). Therefore, since the sphere P3 can be made to pass through the detection port 312d after the current fluctuation is completed, the spheres P1 to P3 are detected in the three storage areas secured by the end of the current fluctuation. Data acquired by passing through 312d can be stored.

In this way, under the condition that the fluctuation period that is likely to be selected when the number of reserved balls is 3 or 4, the fluctuation period when the number of reserved balls is 2 is 7.5 seconds. Less than (ball P3 passes through the detection port 312d (10.5) even if the variation display (3 seconds) when the number of reserved balls is 3 is started at the same time when the ball P1 enters the first winning opening 64. By setting (a fluctuation period) in which the fluctuation ends before (seconds later), it is possible to prevent an overflow from occurring in the first winning opening 64 even if three balls enter the first winning opening 64 in a row. it can.

In addition, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is two, when the balls are fired so as to enter the first winning opening 64 (after the variable display when the number of reserved balls is two is executed). (When a ball is inserted into the first winning opening 64), the variation when the number of reserved balls is two after the ball P1 has passed through the detection port 312d and before the ball P2 has passed through the detection port 312d. The display ends, and the variable display when the number of reserved balls is two (after the number of reserved balls increases due to the entry of the ball P1) is started again. After that, since the spheres P2 and P3 can be made to pass through the detection port 312d, the data acquired by the spheres P2 and P3 passing through the detection port 312d is stored in the remaining two storage areas. Can be done.

Further, when the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is one and the ball is launched so as to allow the ball to enter the first winning opening 64, the balls P1 to P3 must pass through the first winning opening 64. Since the area for storing the data acquired by the above is sufficiently free, the data acquired by the spheres P1 to P3 passing through the detection port 312d can be stored without any problem.

In each of the above embodiments, when a ball enters the first winning opening 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is 3 or less, the overflow occurs in the first winning opening 64. This is to explain that, and does not cause an overflow suppressing effect even when a ball is entered into the first winning opening 64 in a state where the number of reserved balls in the first winning opening 64 is 4 (maximum).

In the third embodiment, the case where the stop device 3340 is maintained in the posture by the magnetic force has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the locking member projects from the lower surface of the first wall portion 341, the overhanging tip is bent toward the center hole 345, and the tip of the main body rod 3361 of the maintenance device 3360 is bent downward. The posture of the stop device 3340 may be maintained by hooking the bent portions to each other. In this case, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state regardless of the magnitude of the load applied to the stop device 3340.

In the fourth embodiment, the case where the second groove 4312 is extended in the vertical direction has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the second groove 4312 may be inclined along the front-rear direction immediately before the sprocket 4340 (immediately before the upstream side). In this case, even if the number of balls staying above the sprocket 4340 increases, the load applied to the sprocket from the balls can be reduced, and problems such as poor rotation of the sprocket 4340 can be suppressed. ..

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) is won at about 1/1 regardless of the gaming state has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be about 1/10 during the normal period, and the lottery of the normal symbol (second symbol) may be about 1/1 during the probability change.

In the fifth embodiment, when a plurality of balls P51 to P55 enter the first winning opening 64, the third symbol display device 81 is displayed at the timing when the following balls P52 to P53 pass through the second detecting port 5314c. The case where the first special symbol is displayed on hold has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, when there is a ball (a ball waiting to pass) after entering the first winning opening 64 but before passing through the second detection port 5314c, the first special symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. When there is a vacancy in the hold display area of (when the ongoing fluctuation ends), the ball waiting to pass is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in advance even before it passes through the second detection port 5314c. The hold display may be performed in such a manner as to fill the empty area of the hold display of the first special symbol.

In this case, even though there is a ball waiting to pass, there is a vacancy in the hold display of the first special symbol regardless of it, and the player who sees it launches a new ball toward the first winning opening 64. After that, the ball waiting to pass passes through the second detection port 5314c to fill the empty area of the hold display, and after all, even if the newly launched ball enters the first winning opening 64, the first special symbol It is possible to prevent the player from being given the disadvantage that the variable display is not executed.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the ball that has passed through the stopping device 5500 passes through the second detection port 5314c immediately after that has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the ball that has passed through the stopping device 5500 may pass through a member such as a crune that can make the flow of the ball non-uniform before passing through the second detection port 5314c. In this case, the period from when the ball passes through the stopping device 5500 to when it passes through the second detection port 5314c can be varied, and the randomness of the timing when the ball passes through the second detection port 5314c is guaranteed. can do. Further, a member such as a crune may be arranged on the upstream side of the stopping device 5500.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the stop device 3340 is released from the changed state by the action of the ball that has entered the ball at the beginning has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stop device 3340 may be released from the changed state with a follow-up ball. As a result, the stop device 3340 can be maintained in the changed state until the follow-up ball enters the first winning opening 64.

In the fifth embodiment, the case where the continuous passage groove 5314 is extended to the right has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the continuous passage groove 5314 may be extended to the back side. In this case, the space on the back side of the game board 13 can be effectively utilized.

In the fifth embodiment, the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is arranged on the upstream side of the stop device 5500, and when the frequency of flow of the ball toward the stop device 5500 becomes excessive, the ball is discharged from the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1. The case where the ball can be prevented from being clogged (for example, the ball stays up to the first winning opening 64) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a sprocket capable of arranging the sphere at each angle position may be disposed and rotationally driven at a constant speed in a manner of partially projecting into the flow path on the upstream side of the stopping device 5500. In this case, until the sprocket is full, the balls flowing down toward the stopping device 5500 can be accommodated at each angle position, so that the ball clogging can be prevented. The rotation axis of the sprocket is not limited at all. For example, it may rotate about an axis extending along the front-rear direction, or may rotate around an axis extending along the vertical direction.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the pair of movable plate portions 6510 are operated by the pair of independently driven drive solenoids 6521 and 6522 and the flow mode of the sphere flowing down the stop portion 6314b changes for each period has been described. It is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the pair of movable plate portions 6510 may be operated in such a manner that the flow mode of the sphere flowing down the stop portion 6314b is always constant. In this case, it is possible to easily grasp the flow mode of the sphere.

In the sixth embodiment, the case where the chain opening period T6a is set in 30 seconds while the upper closing period T6b is set in 6 seconds, which is 1/5 of the chain opening period T6a, has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. .. For example, the chain opening period T6a may be set in 6 seconds, while the upper closing period T6b may be set in 30 seconds, which is five times that. In this case, since the period during which the ball stays on the upper surface of the upper movable plate 6511 can be lengthened, the number of stays can be easily increased, and the ball can be easily passed through the third detection port 5314e. It is possible to realize the game property in which the electric accessory 640a is frequently opened in the game state in which the ball is launched toward the winning opening 64.

In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the case where the retaining portion 6314b2 has a size capable of accommodating two balls has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, it may be large enough to accommodate three or four pieces. Further, the method of accommodating the ball is not limited to the vertical packing. For example, the stop portion may be a horizontally long region and the spheres may be arranged side by side, or the shape may be similar to that of a funnel so that the space for arranging the spheres is narrowed toward the bottom.

In the modified example of the sixth embodiment, the case where the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 is arranged limits the number of balls anchored on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 to one has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited. For example, the formation of the upper limit discharge hole 5314a1 may be omitted. In this case, the upper limit of the number of balls parked on the upper side of the upper movable plate 6511 can be removed.

In the modified examples of the fifth embodiment, the sixth embodiment, and the sixth embodiment, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, and 6500b are arranged in one of the flow paths branched downstream of the first winning opening 64. However, the case is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b may be arranged on the upstream side of the branch point (the connecting point between the second groove 5312 and the continuous passing grooves 5314, 6314) downstream of the first winning opening 64. In this case, the ball that has entered the first winning opening 64 is stopped at the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b, and the stopped ball can be visually recognized by the player through the glass unit 16. Therefore, the first winning opening 64 Even if it is not possible to judge at a glance whether or not the ball has won in the first winning opening 64 due to the game ball bouncing around on the upstream side of the, whether or not there is a ball stopped in the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b. By confirming whether or not, it is possible to grasp that the ball has entered the first winning opening 64. In this case, it is not necessary to form a branch flow path on the downstream side of the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b. That is, the stopping devices 5500, 6500, 6500b may be arranged in the middle of the flow path formed by a single road from the first winning opening 64 to the ball discharge path (not shown).

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the stop device 3340 returns to the initial state by the action of the flowing sphere has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, if the ball does not come into contact with the stop device 3340 for a certain period of time after the change state, the return to the initial state may be started. In this case, if the ball continues to come into contact with the stop device 3340 at regular time intervals, the ball can continue to enter the continuous passage groove 7314. Further, the return may be started within a certain time after the stop device 3340 is in the changed state.

In the seventh embodiment, the case where the length from the first winning opening 64 to the second detecting opening 5314c is longer than the length from the first winning opening 64 to the detection opening 312d has been described, but this is not necessarily the case. It is not limited to. For example, when the length from the first winning opening 64 to the detection port 312d and the length from the first winning opening 64 to the second detection port 5314c are set to be the same, when the ball flows down to the detection port 312d. The flow path may be designed so that the flow resistance when the ball flows down to the second detection port 5314c is larger than the flow resistance. In this case, it is possible to specify the passing order of the spheres while suppressing the arrangement space of the flow path.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the direction of the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363 is the direction along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the lower surface of the contact portion 3363 may be configured so as to be inclined upward toward the back surface side. In this case, the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363 can include a directional component along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed and a directional component facing the back surface side.

In this case, depending on the magnitude of the load applied to the sphere from the contact portion 3363, the sphere can easily flow down continuously in the direction along the plane on which the main body member 8310 is formed, or the sphere can easily flow down toward the back surface side. It is possible to switch between.

For example, when the stop device 3340 is in a changed state and the contact portion 3363 and the sphere come into contact with each other when the moving resistance of the contact portion 3363 is increased due to the attractive force of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362, the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 are attracted. Since a large amount of energy is consumed to peel off and the sphere decelerates rapidly, the velocity in the extending direction of the inclined flow path 8313 becomes extremely small, and the sphere is along the inclination of the abutting portion 3363 that abuts. Flows to the back side and flows down the second groove 8315b from the communication opening 8313a.

On the other hand, for example, when the stop device 3340 rotates from the changed state, the attractive force of the magnet portions 3346 and 3362 becomes weak, and the contact portion 3363 and the ball come into contact with each other when the movement resistance of the contact portion 3363 is weakened. In this case, since the deceleration action given to the sphere by the load from the abutting portion 3363 becomes small, the sphere flows down along the extending direction of the inclined flow path 8313 while pushing away the abutting portion 3363. Therefore, the sphere reaches the lower base opening 8313b and starts flowing down the first groove 8315a.

Therefore, when the balls P81 and P82 pass through the V winning opening 800a in succession, the leading ball P81 flows down the second groove 8315b, while the trailing ball P82 is arranged in the first groove 8315a (V winning switch 8315d). The groove) can be made to flow down. Thereby, regardless of the operation mode of the stopping device 8500, when there is one ball passing through the V winning opening 800a, it is possible to prevent the ball from passing through the V winning switch 8315d.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where the V winning device 800 is opened for 1.8 seconds has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, the period in which the V winning device 800 is opened may be 0.5 seconds, 1.0 seconds, or 1.8 seconds. In this case, it is possible to switch whether or not a plurality of balls easily pass through the V winning opening 800a depending on the length of the opening period of the V winning device 800, and it is possible to pay attention to the mode in which the balls pass through the V winning opening 800a. ..

In this case, it may be controlled to set the length of the opening period of the V winning device 800 depending on whether or not the ball can pass through the V winning switch 8315d by passing a plurality of V winning openings 800a. .. For example, when a plurality of balls can pass through the V winning switch 8315d by passing through the V winning opening 800a, there is an 80% probability that the opening period of the V winning device 800 will be 0.5 seconds. By controlling to, the frequency of occurrence of the phenomenon itself that a plurality of balls pass through the V winning opening 800a while creating a situation in which the balls pass through the V winning switch 8315d if a plurality of balls pass through the V winning opening 800a. Can be reduced. As a result, it is possible to create a game property in which the ball is likely to pass through the V winning switch 8315d and does not actually pass through.

In the eighth embodiment, when a plurality of balls do not enter the V winning device 800, it is difficult for the player to grasp whether or not those balls pass through the V winning switch 8315d. However, it is not necessarily limited to this. For example, by interspersing a plurality of LEDs in the extending direction of the side-by-side groove 8315 and causing the LEDs to emit light in order, control is performed so as to indicate the arrangement of the spheres that flow down when the spheres enter the V winning opening 800a. Then, by visually recognizing the light emitting LED, the arrangement of the flowing balls when the balls enter the V winning opening 800a may be grasped. In this case, for example, even if a plurality of balls do not enter the V winning opening 800a, how the plurality of balls flow down if they have entered the V winning opening 800a is determined by the light emission of the LED. Since it is possible to notify whether or not a ball has passed through the V winning switch 8315d, the player's interest (motivation to enter a plurality of balls into the V winning opening 800a) is improved. Can be made to.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where all the balls flowing down the inclined flow path 8313 come into contact with the contact portion 3363 of the maintenance device 3360 and the stop device 3340 can be returned from the changed state to the initial state has been described, but it is not always the case. It is not limited to this. For example, the contact portion 3363 may be arranged on the downstream side of the V winning switch 8315d, and the stop device 3340 may be returned from the changed state to the initial state only when the ball passes through the V winning switch 8315d. In this case, after all the balls flowing down the main body member 8310 deviate from the V winning switch 8315d and pass only the discharge switch 8315e, the stop device 3340 is maintained in the changed state. Therefore, even if only one ball enters the main body member 8310, the ball can flow into the branch delay groove 8314. Thereby, for example, the opening / closing pattern of the V winning device 800 sets the opening time of the V winning device 800 when the stopping device 8500 operates so that the ball flowing down the branch delay groove 8314 can pass through the V winning switch 8315d. Even if the length is controlled to be shortened (the length is rare for two balls to enter), even if there is only one ball passing through the V winning opening 800a, the stopping device 3340 maintains the changing state. Since the ball can flow into the branch delay groove 8314, it is possible to create a situation in which the ball passes through the V winning switch 8315d. That is, after the opening operation of the V winning device 800 that the ball did not pass through the V winning switch 8315d, when the V winning device 800 is opened again, the ball that has entered the V winning opening 800a presses the V winning switch 8315d. The possibility of passing through can be increased.

In the eighth embodiment, the case where only the first variable winning device 8065 operates in the jackpot game has been described, but the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. For example, in the jackpot game, in addition to the first variable winning device 8065, the V winning device 800 may open and close. In this case, the first variable winning device 8065 and the V winning device 800 are not opened at the same time, and the number of jackpot rounds in the big hit game is the opening operation (constant opening and closing) of the first variable winning device 8065 and the V winning device 800. It is set to match the total number of operations). In this case, the drive device 8520 operates differently depending on the jackpot type, and when the ball passes through the V winning switch 8315d during the jackpot game, the gaming state is set to a high probability state after the jackpot game is completed. It may be set. It should be noted that this high-probability state may be continued until the start of the next jackpot game, or may be continued until a predetermined number of fluctuations of the first symbol (for example, 100 fluctuations) are completed. On the other hand, if the ball does not pass through the V winning switch 8315d during the jackpot game, the gaming state may be shortened after the jackpot game is completed.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs including that. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as a pachinko machine, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and the stop is stopped. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started due to, for example, the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Suppress overflow by turning the second and subsequent balls to another route and delaying them>
Opportunity for lottery even if the game ball enters in the first state where the opportunity for lottery is given when the game ball enters and the state where the game ball is switched by entering the ball in the first state. In a gaming machine provided with a detection slot that can be configured with a second state in which is not given, and after switching to the second state, a predetermined return period elapses to return to the first state. , When a plurality of gaming balls are inserted, the period from when the first gaming ball, which is one of the plurality of gaming balls, is entered to when the ball is thrown into the detection slot is compared. Then, a delay means for delaying the period from when the second game ball, which is another game ball, enters the ball to when the ball is thrown to the detection entry port is provided, and the period delayed by the delay means is equal to or longer than the return period. A game machine A1 characterized by being said to be.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, information is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball and the entry of the game ball into the entrance, and the display means based on the information. There is a gaming machine that dynamically displays the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information acquired based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entrance, and it is impossible to store any more information. Although it is configured, if multiple gaming balls enter the entrance in succession at short intervals, the upper limit of the number of memorable balls will be reached (the second state), and there is a risk of so-called overflow. There was a problem. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to make a self-judgment to reduce the number of balls to be continuously launched, or to play while checking the number of balls that constantly store information, which puts a burden on the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A1, the period from when the first gaming ball enters the detection entry slot to when the second gaming ball enters the detection entry slot by the delay means is longer than the return period. Since the length is increased and the second game ball is prevented from entering the detection entry port in the second state, the detection entry port is in the second state when the first game ball enters the detection entry port. Even in the case of, it is possible to form a memorable number of vacant spaces before the second game ball enters the detection entrance, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

The period delayed by the delay means is at least longer than the period of one dynamic display mode performed by the dynamic display means such as a liquid crystal device, and is the longest when the number of stored information storage means is the upper limit. It is desirable that the period is longer than the period of the dynamic display mode of.

The configuration of the delay means is not particularly limited, and various modes can be considered. For example, the flow path of the game ball may be distributed by a movable member, or the flow path of the game ball may be distributed according to the relationship between the shape of the flow path and the collision of the ball.

In the game machine A1, the delay means distributes the game ball to a plurality of paths and changes the posture from the first posture to the second posture by passing the game ball, and the distribution means thereof. The urging means that generates an urging force that changes the posture from the second posture to the first posture and the first game ball that has passed through the sorting means when the sorting means is in the first posture are guided and the detection is entered. The first guide flow path for throwing balls to the ball mouth and the second game ball that has passed through the distribution means between the time when the distribution means returns from the second posture to the time immediately before returning to the first posture are guided to the detection entry port. A second guide flow path for throwing balls to the ball is provided, and the period during which the second game ball passes through the second guide flow path is compared with the period during which the first game ball passes through the first guide flow path. The gaming machine A2 is characterized in that the delay period is configured as a difference between the delay periods.

According to the gaming machine A2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A1, the delay means includes the sorting means, the first guide flow path in which the game ball is sorted by the sorting means, the second guide flow path, and the sorting means. It is equipped with an urging means for returning the posture, and is compared with the period until the first gaming ball, which first passes through the sorting means and is guided through the first guide flow path, reaches the detection entry port, and then after that. It is possible to prolong the period until the second gaming ball that has passed through the sorting means and is guided through the second guide flow path reaches the detection entry port by the time immediately before the sorting means returns to the first posture by the urging means. Since the delay period is configured as the difference between these periods, the period during which the game ball flows down is assured as compared with the case where the flow path of the game ball is randomly determined as in the case where the game ball collides with a nail. It can be lengthened to, and the timing at which the game ball reaches the detection entrance can be reliably shifted.

In addition, since the posture of the sorting means is restored by the urging means, the game balls are sorted even when the game balls reach the sorting means at intervals (when it is not necessary to delay the game ball that came later). It is possible to prevent the second guide flow path from being distributed by the means.

In the gaming machine A2, the sorting means uses the first wall portion facing the gaming ball in the flow direction and the gaming ball in contact with the first wall portion in the case of the first posture. A second wall portion is provided at a sandwiched position, and the second wall portion receives a load along the flow direction from the game ball, so that the first one from the second posture of the sorting means. A gaming machine A3 characterized in that a change in posture in a direction toward a posture is suppressed.

According to the gaming machine A3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2, the second wall portion arranged at a position sandwiching the gaming ball colliding with the sorting means with the first wall portion is along the flow direction from the gaming ball. By receiving the load, it is suppressed that the sorting means changes its posture from the second posture to the first posture. Therefore, the game ball that has passed through the sorting means first passes through the sorting means later. The action of the sphere can prevent the flow from being hindered and the flow from being delayed.

In the gaming machines A2 or A3, the sorting means includes a dividing means for dividing the gaming balls flowing down in a row and guiding only one ball to the first guide flow path, and the posture changes depending on the weight of the gaming balls. The gaming machine A4 having a configuration, wherein the dividing means functions by changing the posture of the sorting means.

According to the gaming machine A4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A2 or A3, the dividing means of the sorting means divides the spheres flowing down in succession, and a plurality of spheres are guided to the first guide flow path. This can be prevented without the addition of a drive source.

As the dividing means, a means for pushing the game balls toward the second guide flow path by projecting inward of the flow path, or a means for pushing the game balls in a row by projecting toward the inside of the flow path. An example is a means of inserting the game balls in between and separating the game balls from each other.

In the gaming machine A4, the sorting means uses the first wall portion facing the gaming ball in the flow direction and the gaming ball in contact with the first wall portion in the first posture. It is provided with a second wall portion arranged at a sandwiched position, and when the sorting means changes its posture from the first posture to the second posture, the second wall portion becomes the second gaming ball in the moving direction. The gaming machine A5 is characterized in that the gaming ball is introduced into the second guide flow path by colliding with the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A4, when the sorting means collides with the second game ball in the moving direction during the posture change, the game is played between the sorting means and the first guide flow path. It is possible to prevent the ball from being pinched and causing the sorting means to malfunction.

Here, for example, when the sorting means operates electrically, the sorting means operates regardless of the position of the game ball, so that the game ball is at a position away from the entrance of the second guide flow path and also with the sorting means. When the sorting means operates in a direction in which the distance between the sorting means and the side wall of the first guide flow path is narrowed in a state of being arranged at a position between the side wall of the first guide flow path, the sorting means and the first The game ball may be caught between the guide flow path and the sorting means may malfunction.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine A5, since the operation of the sorting device is generated by the weight of the game ball instead of being electric, the sorting means does not operate in a state where the sorting means malfunctions due to the arrangement of the game ball. The positional relationship and the shape relationship can be designed in advance. As a result, it is possible to prevent malfunction of the sorting means.

In the gaming machine A5, a position where a plurality of gaming balls reach the sorting means, one gaming ball abuts on the first wall portion, and the other gaming ball abuts in the moving direction of the second wall portion. In the connected ball introduction state in which the distribution means has changed its posture, it is a side surface forming the inlet of the one game ball and the second guide flow path from the first guide flow path, and is the first guide flow. The gaming machine A6, which is the distance between the end faces with the side surface on the downstream side of the road, and the distance along the extending direction of the first guide flow path is equal to or less than the radius of the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine A6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine A5, when the other gaming ball is connected to one gaming ball and reaches the sorting means in the connected ball introduction state, the center of the other gaming ball is the second. Since it is arranged in the area inside the second guide flow path when the guide flow path is extended, the game ball can be pushed along the side surface of the second guide flow path, and the game ball can be used as the second guide flow path. Can be introduced.

A7, wherein in the gaming machines A4 to A6, the sorting means performs a returning operation from the second posture to the first posture over a period longer than the returning period.

According to the gaming machine A7, in addition to the effects of the gaming machines A4 to A6, it is surely prevented that the second gaming ball is entered into the detection entry slot during the period when the entry detection port is in the second state. be able to.

When the dynamic display mode of the display device is such that the larger the number of memory of the detection entry port is, the easier it is to select a short-term display mode, the length of the predetermined dynamic display mode is at least the detection input. It is desirable that the length of the shortest dynamic display mode or more when the memory number of the ball mouth is the upper limit value or more.

<Overflow suppression by making the stage movable by the weight of the sphere>
Opportunity for lottery even if the game ball enters in the first state where the opportunity for lottery is given when the game ball enters and the state where the game ball is switched by entering the ball in the first state. In a gaming machine provided with a detection inlet that can be configured with a second state in which is not given, and returns to the first state after a predetermined return period elapses after being switched to the second state. , A rolling means configured to have an optimum drop portion, which is a descending start position at which the game ball can easily enter the detection entry port, and to roll on the upper surface in a manner in which the game ball passes through the optimum drop portion. The gaming machine B1 is characterized in that the rolling means operates in a mode in which the gaming ball is started to descend from the optimum falling portion at intervals equal to or longer than the return period.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, the game ball has an optimum drop portion arranged as a descent start portion where the game ball can easily enter the detection entry port, and the game ball arranged on the upper surface provides the optimum drop portion. There are gaming machines provided with rolling means (so-called "stages") that are configured to be rollable in a passing manner (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156508). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, the second gaming ball rides on the rolling means before the first gaming ball on the rolling means first descends from the rolling means, and the first gaming ball and the first gaming ball are on the rolling means. The two gaming balls may descend from the optimum drop portion in a short period of time, and in that case, there is a problem that an overflow may occur at the detection entry port.

This is different from the state in which the game balls flow down while colliding with the nails, and when the game balls reciprocate in the left-right direction in a manner of passing the optimum drop portion (the game balls reciprocate on a specific path), the game balls are reciprocated with each other. Is a problem peculiar to the rolling means that tends to collide frequently.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine B1, the rolling means operates in such a manner that the gaming balls are started to descend one by one at intervals from the optimum falling portion, so that the gaming machines can be played at the detection slot in a short period of time. It is possible to prevent the balls from entering all at once. Therefore, even when a plurality of game balls are placed on the rolling means, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the detection entry port.

The gaming machine B1 includes an introduction flow path for introducing the game ball into the rolling means, and the rolling means guides the game ball to the optimum falling portion while the game ball is introduced from the introduction flow path. A floor member is provided, and the first floor member is formed to be movable by the weight of a rolling game ball, and the movement reduces the speed of the game ball arriving later toward the first floor member. A gaming machine B2 characterized in that it operates in a mode.

According to the gaming machine B2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B1, when the gaming ball rides on the first floor member of the rolling means, the first floor member operates by the weight of the gaming ball, so that the game is played. Since the speed of the ball toward the first floor member can be reduced, the distance between the game ball on the first floor member and the game ball toward the first floor member can be widened. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the detection entry port.

The speed of the game ball toward the first floor member may be reduced, for example, the speed of the game ball toward the first floor member may be reduced (braking), or the game ball may be stopped. , The case where the game ball is moved (runs in the opposite direction) in the direction opposite to the direction toward the first floor member is exemplified.

Further, as a method of reducing the speed of the game ball toward the first floor member, for example, a method of making the first floor member descend and incline in a direction away from the first floor member, or an upper surface of the first floor member. Examples thereof include a method of projecting a deceleration protrusion and a method of projecting a magnet at a position where a magnetic force can act on a game ball on the first floor member.

In the gaming machine B2, the optimum falling portion is arranged on the first floor member, and the first floor member is configured to operate when the game ball is dropped from the optimum falling portion. The moving means is placed in the vicinity of the first floor member before and after the game ball falls from the optimum drop portion, and the optimum drop of another game ball heading toward the optimum drop portion within a predetermined period of time. The gaming machine B3, which is provided with a preventive means for preventing the player from reaching the unit.

According to the gaming machine B3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B2, the first floor member operates when the gaming ball falls from the optimum falling portion, and the rolling means is the gaming ball from the optimum falling portion. Is placed on the first floor member before and after the fall, and other game balls heading toward the optimum drop portion are prevented by the preventive means within a predetermined period, so that a plurality of game balls are continuously introduced into the optimum drop portion. Even in this case, it is possible to prevent other gaming balls from continuously falling from the optimum falling portion after the earliest gaming ball has fallen from the optimum falling portion. As a result, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the detection entry port.

In the game machine B3, the prevention means can configure a preventive state in which the game ball can be prevented and a passing state in which the game ball cannot be prevented, and the optimum immediately after the game ball falls from the optimum drop portion. As the state of the falling portion, a preferable falling state in which the game ball has fallen in a manner in which the game ball can be easily entered into the detection entry port, and a game ball being inserted into the detection entry port as compared with the preferable falling state. A normal falling state in which the game ball has fallen in a mode that is difficult to cause is configured, and the preventing means is set to the preventing state when the suitable falling state is set, and the preventing means is set to the preventing state when the game ball is set to the normal falling state. The gaming machine B4, which is characterized in that the player is in a passing state.

According to the gaming machine B4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3, when the optimum falling portion is in a suitable falling state, the preventive means is set in a preventive state, and the optimum falling portion is set in a normal falling state. Since the prevention means is passed through the ball, it is possible to suppress the prevention of the game ball even when the game ball falling from the optimum drop portion does not enter the detection entry port, and the game ball is placed at the detection entry port. It is possible to prevent the timing of entering the ball from being unnecessarily delayed.

The gaming machine B3 or B4 is provided with a throwing means for throwing a game ball prevented by the preventing means in a direction away from the optimum falling portion.

According to the gaming machine B5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B3 or B4, the gaming ball prevented by the preventing means by the throwing means is thrown in the direction away from the optimum falling portion, thereby intensifying the movement of the gaming ball. Since it is possible to increase the period until the game ball reaches the optimum drop portion again, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow at the detection entrance while improving the interest of the player.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, an intermediate floor member for introducing a game ball into the first floor member is provided, the intermediate floor member is made operable, and the operation causes the player to descend in a direction away from the first floor member. A gaming machine B6 characterized in that the intermediate floor member changes state in an inclined state.

According to the gaming machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B5, the intermediate floor member inclines downward in the direction away from the first floor member, so that the gaming ball reaches the intermediate floor member. , The gravitational acceleration can be generated in the direction away from the first floor member. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the gap between the game ball arranged on the first floor member and the game ball that will reach the intermediate floor member from being reduced.

The gaming machine B6 is characterized in that the intermediate floor members are arranged in pairs on both sides of the first floor member, and the posture changes of the intermediate floor members occur alternately in the pair of intermediate floor members.

According to the gaming machine B7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine B6, the intermediate floor members are arranged in pairs on both sides of the first floor member, and the posture changes of the intermediate floor members occur alternately in the pair of intermediate floor members. When the gaming balls are directed toward both of the pair of intermediate floor members, the timing at which the gaming balls are decelerated can be shifted, and the timing at which the gaming balls reach the first floor member can be shifted. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball from being congested in the vicinity of the optimum drop portion.

In any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, in the rolling means, the gaming ball that has reached the optimum drop portion after the reciprocating motion in the left-right direction has converged, and the gaming ball that has passed through the introduction flow path to the first floor member. The gaming machine B8 is characterized in that it is configured in a manner of preventing a collision with a gaming ball flowing down toward it.

According to the gaming machine B8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines B2 to B7, in the rolling means, the reciprocating motion in the left-right direction is completed and the gaming ball reaches the optimum drop portion and passes through the introduction flow path. Since it is configured to prevent a collision with a game ball flowing down toward the first floor member, the game ball immediately before falling from the optimum drop portion collides with another game ball and is detected as a ball entry port. It is possible to prevent the pachinko balls from falling in a direction away from the ball and from passing the colliding game balls in a row and passing through the detection entry port.

<Overflow suppression by decelerating the second and subsequent balls and shifting the winning timing>
Opportunity for lottery even if the game ball enters in the first state where the opportunity for lottery is given when the game ball enters and the state where the game ball is switched by entering the ball in the first state. In a gaming machine provided with a detection inlet that can be configured with a second state in which is not given, and after switching to the second state, the game returns to the first state after a predetermined return period elapses. , When a plurality of game balls enter, the flow speed of the second game ball that enters after that is compared with the flow speed of the first game ball that enters first among the plurality of game balls. The pachinko ball is provided with a deceleration means for decelerating the speed, and the game ball thrown from the deceleration means enters the detection entry port. The period required for the ball to enter the ball opening is longer than the period required for the first gaming ball to enter the detection entry port after the first gaming ball enters the deceleration means. A gaming machine C1 characterized in that it is configured to be longer than that.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, information is acquired based on the entrance of the game ball and the entry of the game ball into the entrance, and the display means based on the information. There is a gaming machine that dynamically displays the machine (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-156058). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, it is possible to store up to a predetermined number (for example, 4) of information acquired based on the fact that the gaming ball has entered the ball entrance, and it is impossible to store any more information. However, there is a problem that if a plurality of game balls continuously enter the ball entrance at short intervals, the upper limit of the number of memorable balls may be reached and a so-called overflow may occur. Therefore, it is necessary for the player to make a self-judgment to reduce the number of balls to be continuously launched, or to play while checking the number of balls that constantly store information, which puts a burden on the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine C1, when a plurality of gaming balls enter the deceleration means, the speed is compared with the flow speed of the first gaming ball in which the deceleration means enters the first of the plurality of gaming balls. Then, the second gaming ball that has entered after that is decelerated, and the second gaming ball is placed in the detection entry slot until the return period elapses after the first gaming ball enters the detection entry slot. Since the ball is prevented from entering, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow.

The period from when the second game ball enters the deceleration means to when the ball enters the detection entry port is the period from when the first game ball enters the deceleration means to when the ball enters the detection entry port. The length is at least longer than the length of the period (return period) of one dynamic display mode performed by the dynamic display means, and in particular, the detection entrance is set to the second state. It is desirable that the period be longer than the period of the longest dynamic display mode in the case of.

Further, the deceleration of the game ball means that the velocity component along the path toward the detection entry port is reduced. For example, the game ball flows in the direction away from the detection entry port (negative speed). The deceleration means has a preventive means for temporarily preventing the ball from being thrown, such as when the ball is reciprocated (moves in a zigzag pattern) in a direction perpendicular to the direction toward the detection entry port, and the ball is thrown by the preventive means. Until the prevention is released, the case where the game ball reciprocates in front of the prevention means, the case where the game ball temporarily stops, and the like are included.

As means for decelerating the game ball, a method of projecting an abutting member which faces and abuts in the flow direction of the game ball into the flow path, a method of applying a magnetic force to the flowing game ball, or a game ball. An example is a method of arranging a sprocket in a passage through which the sprocket passes and rotating the sprocket on a game ball.

In the gaming machine C1, the deceleration means decelerates the gaming ball by intermittently applying a load in the direction opposite to the flow direction to the gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C1, the deceleration means intermittently applies a load in the opposite direction of the flow direction to the gaming ball to reduce the rotation speed of the gaming ball, and as a result. Since the game ball is decelerated, the game ball can be effectively decelerated.

When decelerating by friction with the wall surface, it is necessary to increase the contact area in order to improve the deceleration efficiency, but if the target is a sphere such as a game ball, it is difficult to sufficiently increase the contact area. Is. On the other hand, in the mode in which the load is intermittently applied in the direction opposite to the flow direction, the deceleration efficiency does not depend on the target shape, so that the game ball can be effectively decelerated.

In the gaming machine C2, the deceleration means is arranged so as to be relatively movable with respect to the deceleration flow path for guiding the entering game ball and the deceleration flow path, and is configured to be able to apply a load to the game ball. It is provided with a moving means having an acting portion, and the moving means can configure a first state and a second state which is a state after relative movement from the first state to the deceleration flow path. The action unit is configured to apply a load to the gaming ball flowing down the deceleration flow path in the second state, and the moving means is such that the first game ball passes through the deceleration flow path. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that the state changes from the first state to the second state, and in the second state, the acting unit applies a load to the second gaming ball.

According to the gaming machine C3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C2, the moving means having the acting portion can configure the first state and the second state, and the moving means is the first gaming ball passing through the deceleration flow path. The state is changed to the second state by the action of, and the second game ball is given a load from the action part in the second state, so that the second game ball can be decelerated without separately preparing a drive device. The distance between the first game ball and the second game ball can be separated.

Examples of the acting portion include a rib portion extending in a direction perpendicular to the extending direction of the deceleration flow path and projecting into the deceleration flow path, a magnet portion for applying a magnetic force to the game ball, and the like. When the acting part is a rib part, there are a mode in which the speed of the game ball is gradually reduced so that the game ball can pass through, a mode in which the game ball overhangs so as not to pass, and a mode in which the game ball is stopped. Illustrated.

In the gaming machine C3, the moving means is configured in such a manner that the deceleration degree of the second gaming ball is increased as the number of balls that the acting unit enters the deceleration means within a predetermined period increases. Characteristic gaming machine C4.

According to the gaming machine C4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C3, as the number of balls entering the deceleration means within a predetermined period increases, the acting unit increases the deceleration degree of the second gaming ball. When the number of balls flowing in the deceleration flow path becomes three within the period, the third game ball can be decelerated more than the second game ball, so that the second game ball can be decelerated more. And the third game ball can be widened. As a result, even when the second game ball enters the detection entry port and the detection entry port is in the second state, before the third game ball enters the ball. It is possible to earn a period (return period) in which the dynamic display of 1 is executed, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of overflow due to the passage of the third game ball through the detection means.

In addition, as a mode in which the action unit increases the deceleration degree of the second game ball, for example, a mode in which the load acting on the second game ball increases and a length (duration) in which the load acts on the second game ball are used. An embodiment in which the amount of work applied to the second game ball increases due to the expansion is exemplified.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the deceleration means includes a miniaturization means configured to be movable relative to the flow path through which the game ball flows, and the miniaturization means is the first game ball. The gaming machine C5, characterized in that, upon passing, the second gaming ball moves in a direction that narrows the inner peripheral shape of the flow path before the second gaming ball passes through.

According to the gaming machine C5, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C4, the miniaturization means changes the shape of the inner circumference of the flow path before the second gaming ball passes by the passage of the first gaming ball. Since it moves in the narrowing direction, it is possible to increase the resistance of the flow path when the second game ball passes through. As a result, the second game ball can be decelerated.

By matching the position where the inner peripheral shape of the flow path is narrowed with the position where the flow path changes direction (the position where the velocity component in the direction in which the game ball has flowed down disappears), the game ball flows down until then. It is possible to apply a large resistance at the timing of stopping along the direction in which the game ball was in place, to prevent the game ball from passing by with force, and to increase the action of decelerating the game ball.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a release means for releasing the deceleration effect generated on the second game ball by the deceleration means by changing the state is provided, and the state change of the release means is a game that has passed through the deceleration means. A gaming machine C6, characterized in that the ball passes through a predetermined position.

According to the gaming machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C5, a releasing means for canceling the deceleration effect is provided, and the releasing by the releasing means causes the gaming ball that has passed through the deceleration means to pass through a predetermined position. Since it is performed by doing so, it is possible to eliminate the need for another driving means for changing the state of the releasing means.

In the gaming machine C6, the gaming machine C7 is characterized in that the releasing by the releasing means is performed by the gaming ball after passing through the detection entrance.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of the game machine C6, the release by the release means is performed by the game ball after passing through the detection entrance, so that it is easy to manage the release timing by the release means. Can be.

In any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the deceleration means is configured in a mode in which the state changes between an initial state and a change state different from the initial state, and in the initial state, the deceleration means is used by the gaming ball. It changes to the changed state by passing through, and in the changed state, it is configured to change to the initial state by not passing the deceleration means through the deceleration means for a predetermined period, and the game ball passes through the deceleration means. The gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the period of passing through the decelerating means in the changing state is set longer than the period of passing through the decelerating means in the initial state.

According to the gaming machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines C1 to C7, the passing period of the gaming ball passing through the deceleration means in the initial state is shortened, and then the deceleration means is passed. As long as the interval between the gaming balls does not become longer than a predetermined period, the deceleration means can always be maintained in a changing state, and the period during which the gaming balls pass through the deceleration means can be maintained for a long time.

In the gaming machine C8, when the gaming balls enter the deceleration means at intervals shorter than the predetermined interval while the deceleration means is in the changing state, the number of the entering game balls does not matter. The gaming machine C9, wherein the deceleration means throws a gaming ball at a constant interval longer than the predetermined interval.

According to the gaming machine C9, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine C8, when the deceleration means is in a changing state, even if a plurality of game balls are entered into the deceleration means, the number of balls is constant regardless of the number of balls entered. Since the game balls can be thrown at intervals, it is possible to prevent overflow from occurring at the detected ball entry port regardless of the number of balls entered.

As the deceleration means, a sprocket-shaped device configured to accommodate a game ball in a recess on the peripheral surface is exemplified.

<A big concept that delays the follow-up ball after continuous entry. Confluence, branch, both included>
A game area in which a game ball is formed so as to be able to flow down, a detection means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the game ball flowing down the game area, and the game area and the detection means are provided by the game ball. The connecting flow path is provided with a connecting flow path that allows the game to flow down and a switching means that can switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path, and the connecting flow path includes at least one flow path. The gaming machine D0 is characterized in that the period required for the game ball to flow down the connecting flow path changes depending on which flow path of the flow path formed by the connecting flow path.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a storage device capable of storing game balls is provided in a plurality of taxiways that are guided to the starting winning opening, and the game balls are stored in the storage device. After the game ball that has arrived is guided to another taxiway, it is guided toward the start winning opening, and the game ball stored in the storage device is released from storage by any operation of the player, and the start winning prize is obtained. There are gaming machines that are guided toward the mouth (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176547). However, in the conventional gaming machine described above, since the discharge timing of the gaming balls stored in the storage device depends on the operation of the player, for example, when a plurality of gaming balls are guided in one taxiway. , When a game ball is guided to another taxiway, the storage of the storage operation is released without noticing it, and there is a risk that multiple game balls will be discharged in succession toward the starting winning opening. There was a problem. In this case, since the player needs to follow the flow mode of the plurality of game balls with his / her eyes, he / she may feel the flow of the game balls in a hurry, which may be confusing to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine D0, it is possible to switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path, and the gaming ball flows down the connecting flow path depending on which flow path formed by the connecting flow path. Since the period required for flowing down changes, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the gaming balls are continuously discharged from the connecting flow path.

In the gaming machine D0, the detecting means detects the passage of at least a part of the gaming balls flowing down the connecting flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by detecting the passage of the gaming balls. The first flow path, which is provided with at least one and is connected to one of the detection means, and the first flow path thereof are at least partially different from each other and of the detection means. A second flow path connected to one of the two is provided, and the second flow path is used for a period required for the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. In comparison, the gaming machine D1 is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the gaming ball to flow down from the gaming area to the detecting means.

According to the gaming machine D1, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D0, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connecting flow path in a row from the gaming area, the detection means flows down the first flow path. A difference can be provided in the timing of entering the pachinko ball between the pachinko ball that has passed and the pachinko ball that has flowed down the second flow path and passed through the detection means. That is, even when a plurality of game balls are connected to each other and enter the connecting flow path, the timing at which the entered game balls pass through the detection means can be shifted.

The mode of lengthening the period is not limited at all. For example, the second flow path may be formed in such a manner that the flow resistance is larger than that of the first flow path (difference depending on the velocity), and the second flow path is the first flow path. It may be formed longer along the flow direction of the game ball (difference depending on the distance).

In the gaming machine D1, the switching means is switched to a changing state in which the gaming ball flows down the second flow path due to the gaming ball flowing down the first flow path, and is in the changing state. The gaming machine D2 is characterized in that the period to be maintained is defined regardless of the gaming ball flowing down the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine D2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D1, a gaming ball flowing down the second flow path during a period in which the switching means is maintained in the changed state, unlike the case where the distribution member of the alternating distribution is used. By defining independently of, it is possible to continuously enter the game ball into the second flow path during this period. As a result, for example, when the entry into the second flow path sets a larger benefit to the player than the entry into the first flow path, the game ball continuously enters the second flow path. This can enhance the interest of the player.

In the gaming machine D2, the switching means is characterized in that the maintenance of the changed state is released by the gaming ball that has passed through the first flow path.

According to the gaming machine D3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D2, the maintenance of the changed state of the switching means is released by the gaming ball passing through the first flow path, so that the gaming ball passing through the first flow path is released. By making the flow mode of the above constant, the period for maintaining the switching means in the changed state can be made constant. As a result, it is possible to facilitate a game in which the game ball is aimed to enter the second flow path.

On the other hand, by making it possible to change the flow mode of the game ball that has passed through the first flow path, it is possible to change the period for which the switching means is maintained in the changed state. As a result, it is possible to prevent the period during which the game ball is entered into the second flow path from being always the same, so that it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game.

In any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the detection means includes a first detection port connected to the first flow path and a second detection port connected to the second flow path. The gaming machine D4.

According to the gaming machine D4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines D1 to D3, the second detection port is set so that the profit obtained by the player is larger than that of the first detection port. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the player when continuous ball entry occurs. For example, a game ball that has passed through the first detection port can be used to obtain a lottery opportunity for the first special symbol, while a game ball that has passed through the second detection port can be used to obtain a lottery opportunity for the second special symbol. You can do it.

In this case, the distribution of the jackpot of the second special symbol can be set so that the profit given to the player is higher than the distribution of the jackpot of the first special symbol, and the player for continuous entry. It is possible to improve the interest of.

Further, the number of prize balls to be paid out when passing through the second detection port is set to be larger (for example, 4) than the prize balls to be paid out when passing through the first detection port (for example, 1 piece). As a result, even if the special symbol is not a big hit, the profit given to the player by continuous ball entry can be increased, and the player's interest can be improved.

In other words, the present invention includes a game ball that is finally determined to pass through the first detection port and enables the ball to enter the second detection port. As a result, for example, when a game ball other than the game ball passing through the first detection port enables continuous entry into the second detection port (for example, the second detection port can acquire the second special symbol). It is possible to improve the attention to the game ball passing through the first detection port as compared with the case where the detection port of the normal symbol is arranged on the left side of the game area.

The second detection port connected to the second flow path may be arranged as a detection port through which all the game balls that have entered the second flow path pass, or the game that has entered the second flow path. It may be arranged as a detection port through which a part of the sphere passes. In this case, it may be specified how many of the game balls that have entered the second flow path pass through the second detection port due to the frequency of the game balls entering the connecting flow path. Further, even if the frequency of entering the game balls into the connecting flow path is the same, a movable device capable of changing the number of game balls passing through the second detection port may be arranged in the connecting flow path.

Further, even if a plurality of game balls continuously flow down toward the detection means, if the game balls that have passed through the first detection port cancel the maintenance of the changed state of the switching means, until then. , The game ball can flow down toward the second detection port connected to the second flow path.

As a result, when the first detection port and the second detection port are start ports capable of obtaining a lottery for fluctuations of the same special symbol, it is easy to create a situation in which the game ball passes through the second detection port after the fluctuation is completed. be able to.

In the gaming machine D4, the connecting flow path is provided with a passage port through which the game ball can pass on the upstream side of the switching means, and the game ball that has passed through the passing port is guided to the switching means and passes through the passing port. The gaming machine D5 is characterized in that, among the gaming balls that have passed through and guided to the switching means, the gaming balls that deviate from the first flow path can enter the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine D5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D4, the gaming ball that has passed through the passing port of the connecting flow path is guided to the switching means, so that the gaming ball can be continuously launched aiming at the passing opening. , The state change of the switching means and the striking of the game ball into the first flow path and the second flow path can be executed. This makes it easy to adjust the firing intensity of the game ball.

In the game machine D4 or D5, the second detection port is a detection port capable of obtaining a lottery of a type different from the lottery that can be obtained by a game ball passing through the first detection port.

According to the game machine D6, in addition to the effect of the game machine D4 or D5, at least one game ball passes through the first detection port before the game ball passes through the second detection port. Using the notification related to the lottery of the detection port as a mark, it is possible to prevent overlooking that the game ball has passed through the second detection port.

The combination of lottery types that can be obtained by passing the game ball through the first detection port and the second detection port is not limited in any way. For example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be different from each other, or the first special symbol and the normal symbol may be different from each other.

In the game machine D6, the second detection port is a detection port capable of obtaining a lottery more advantageous than the lottery that can be obtained by the game ball passing through the first detection port.

According to the gaming machine D7, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, even when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connecting flow path at the same time, the second after the gaming balls pass through the first detection port. Since it is possible for the game ball to pass through the detection port, it is possible to forcibly create a waiting time until the advantageous lottery variation display is started.

In the gaming machine D6, the second detection port is an advantageous detection that starts a fluctuation more advantageous than the fluctuation started due to the passage of the game ball due to the passage of the game ball. The gaming machine D8 is characterized by being a detection port capable of initiating fluctuations for forming a state in which a gaming ball can easily enter the mouth.

According to the gaming machine D8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine D6, the action of the gaming ball entering the connecting flow path can open and close the movable device at a position different from that of the connecting flow path, thereby opening and closing the movable device. It is possible to form a gaming state in which the profit given to the player is large. In this case, in the gaming state in which the profit given to the player is large, a notification prompting the player to launch the game ball toward the movable device in the open state is notified. It is possible to naturally elapse the time during which the fluctuation started due to the passage of the game ball.

<Concept of placing a constant drive stop device in the second flow path>
A game area in which a game ball is formed so as to be able to flow down, a detection means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the game ball flowing down the game area, and the game area and the detection means are provided by the game ball. It is provided with a connecting flow path that allows the game ball to flow down and a switching means that can switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path, so that the game ball flows down inside the connecting flow path. The detection means includes two movable members that change the state between a first state that regulates and a second state that allows the game ball to flow down, and a drive means that drives the movable member. It detects the passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the connecting flow path and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by detecting the passage of the game balls, and is provided with at least one of the above two. The gaming machine E1 is characterized in that the movable members are arranged at intervals capable of accommodating at least one gaming ball.

In a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a storage device capable of storing game balls is provided in a plurality of taxiways that are guided to the starting winning opening, and the game balls are stored in the storage device. After the game ball that has arrived is guided to another taxiway, it is guided toward the start winning opening, and the game ball stored in the storage device is released from storage by any operation of the player, and the start winning prize is obtained. There are gaming machines that are guided toward the mouth (see, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-176547). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the discharge timing of the gaming ball stored in the storage device depends on the operation of the player. Therefore, for example, while the gaming ball is being guided to another taxiway, this is the case. There is a problem that the storage of the storage device is released without noticing the above, and a plurality of game balls may be discharged at the same time toward the starting winning opening.

In this case, since the player needs to follow the flow mode of the plurality of game balls with his / her eyes, he / she may feel the flow of the game balls in a hurry, which may be confusing to the player. In addition, when the upper limit of the number of reserved balls of fluctuation in the starting winning opening is 0, even if a plurality of game balls enter the starting winning opening, a lottery will be drawn by entering some of the game balls. Only the opportunity will be obtained, which may be disadvantageous to the player.

On the other hand, according to the gaming machine E1, two movable members that are driven by the driving means and allow or regulate the flow of the gaming ball flowing down the connecting flow path can accommodate at least one gaming ball in between. Since the game balls are arranged at various intervals, the game ball can be stopped in the connecting flow path while at least one of the movable members maintains the first state. Therefore, depending on the driving mode of the two movable members, the connecting flow An interval can be provided at the timing when the game ball is discharged from the road.

In the gaming machine E1, the two movable members include a first movable member and a second movable member arranged on the downstream side of the connecting flow path as compared with the first movable member, and the first movable member thereof is provided. The 2 movable member is a gaming machine characterized in that a gaming ball that has passed through the first movable member in the second state is driven so as to be able to form the first state when it reaches at least the second movable member. E2.

According to the gaming machine E2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E1, the first movable member and the second movable member are arranged along the flow direction of the gaming ball, and the gaming ball that has passed through the first movable member is at least. Since it is driven so that it can be formed in the first state when it reaches the second movable member, it is possible to prevent the game ball from passing through (passing without stopping). Therefore, for example, it is possible to eliminate the need for complicated control such as detecting the arrangement of the game ball flowing down the connecting flow path and changing the movable member to the first state immediately before the game ball reaches the movable member.

In the gaming machine E2, a predetermined game ball entering the connecting flow path is regulated to flow down by the first movable member or after being restricted from flowing down by the second movable member. The gaming machine E3 is provided with an upper limit passing means formed so that a gaming ball can pass when the number of balls exceeds the upper limit.

According to the gaming machine E3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E2, the number of gaming balls that need to be entered into the connecting flow path in order for the upper limit passing means to pass the gaming balls is a state of two movable members. Therefore, the number of game balls that need to enter the second flow path in order to pass the game balls to the upper limit passing means can be changed depending on the case.

Further, when more game balls than the upper limit number enter the connecting flow path, the game balls pass through the upper limit passing means and are discharged to another flow path, so that an excessively large number of game balls flow in the connecting flow path. When the ball enters the road, it is possible to prevent the ball from being jammed.

It should be noted that when the game balls are accumulated starting from the second movable member (when the flow is restricted by the second movable member), when the game balls are accumulated starting from the first movable member (flowing down to the first movable member). The upper limit number is increased by the number that can be accommodated between the first movable member and the second movable member.

Further, when both the first movable member and the second movable member are in the second state, the upper limit number is not specified (becomes infinite) because the game balls are not accumulated.

In the game machine E3, the detection means includes an upper limit passage port in which a game ball that has flowed down through the upper limit passing means is arranged so as to be able to pass through, and the upper limit passage port is a game ball due to the passage of the game ball. Fluctuations for forming a state in which the gaming ball can easily enter the advantageous detection port, which initiates fluctuations that are more favorable than the fluctuations that are initiated due to the passage of the pachinko ball through the detection means. The gaming machine E4, which is configured as a detection port capable of starting the above.

According to the gaming machine E4, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E3, when the gaming ball passes through the upper limit passage port, a state in which the gaming ball can pass through the advantageous detection port is formed, so that there are many in the connecting flow path. It is possible to motivate the player to continuously enter the game ball.

In addition, the type of fluctuation started by the game ball that has entered the connected flow path can be switched depending on the matter that the player can change whether or not to execute the ball in the connected flow path. Can be done. Therefore, the detection port through which the game ball passes is switched according to the order in which the game ball enters the connecting flow path, and the game ball is inserted into the connecting flow path as compared with the case where the type of fluctuation to be started is switched. This makes it possible to increase the proportion of the player's will in determining the type of variation that is initiated.

In the gaming machine E4, the dynamic upper limit number, which is the number at which the gaming balls can pass through the upper limit passing port by inserting a predetermined number of gaming balls into the connecting flow path according to the state of the movable member, is set. A gaming machine E5 characterized in that it can be set.

According to the gaming machine E5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine E4, the dynamic upper limit number can be set according to the state of the movable member (including the operating speed), so that the state of the movable member during the game is different. Thereby, it is possible to change the number of game balls to be entered into the connecting flow path to pass through the upper limit passage port. As a result, it is possible to improve the attention to the game ball that has entered the connecting flow path.

In any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, the driving mode of the driving means is a first storage state in which the game balls can be stored in the two movable members, and the game balls are less likely to be stored than in the first storage state. The gaming machine E6 characterized in that it can be switched between the second storage state and the second storage state.

According to the gaming machine E6, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines E1 to E5, even when the number of gaming balls sent to the second flow path is the same, the driving mode of the driving means is the first storage. Depending on whether it is in the state or the second storage state, it is possible to form a state in which the game ball is easily stored by the two movable members and a state in which it is difficult to store the game ball.

As a result, there is a profit that the player can obtain even if the game ball is put into the connecting flow path in the same manner depending on whether the game is played in a state where the game ball is easily stored or when the game is played in a state where it is difficult to store the game ball. Since it changes, the player can be made to select which state to play the game by displaying the change in the profit obtained on the display device.

The first storage state includes a state in which all the balls reaching the two movable members are stored, and the second storage state does not store all the balls reaching the two movable members. The state to pass is included.

<Type 1 Type 2 V (or V probability). V with multiple balls (initially, an image of a flow path that can be covered)>
A game area in which a game ball is formed so as to be able to flow down, a detection means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the game ball flowing down the game area, and the game area and the detection means are provided by the game ball. The detection means includes at least a part of the connecting flow path that is connected so as to be able to flow down and a switching means that is configured to be able to switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path. At least one of the above-mentioned switching means is provided, which detects the passage of the game ball and gives the player a predetermined benefit by detecting the passage of the game ball. Of the plurality of gaming balls that have entered the connecting flow path, the succeeding gaming ball that has entered afterwards is more likely to pass through the detection means than the earliest gaming ball that has entered first. The gaming machine F1 characterized in that the connecting flow path is switched in such an manner.

In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there is a gaming machine provided with a taxiway in which a game ball passing through a through gate is guided to a starting winning opening, and the ratio of winning from the guiding path to the starting winning opening can be changed periodically. (See, for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-70526). However, in the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine, the ratio of winning from the taxiway to the starting winning opening does not change depending on the entry mode of the gaming ball, and even if the gaming ball enters the taxiway in a single shot, a plurality of gaming balls Even if you try to enter the taxiway together, there is no big change in the profit given to the player. Therefore, there is a problem that the effect of improving the attention to the game ball entering the taxiway is insufficient.

According to the gaming machine F1, when a plurality of gaming balls enter the connecting flow path within a predetermined period, the subsequent gaming balls that enter after that are compared with the earliest gaming ball that entered first. Since the switching means acts so that the ball easily passes through the detecting means, it is possible to improve the attention to the following game balls, and the motivation to put a plurality of game balls into the connecting flow path collectively. It is possible to suppress the player from making a single shot.

In the gaming machine F1, the switching means functions by an action given by the flow of a gaming ball that has entered the connecting flow path.

According to the gaming machine F2, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine F1, the switching means functions due to the action given by the flow of the gaming ball, and the succeeding gaming ball is easier to pass through the detecting means. It is not necessary to control the operation of the electric movable device by predicting the flow time of the first game ball and the subsequent game ball, and it is possible to facilitate the operation control.

The mode in which the switching means functions by the action of the game ball is not particularly limited, and various modes are exemplified. For example, the posture of the switching means may be changed by the collision of the game balls, or the switching means may be driven by detecting the passage of the game balls.

In the gaming machine F1 or F2, the connecting flow path is connected to one of the detecting means while having at least a part different from the first flow path connected to the detecting means and the first flow path thereof. The second flow path is provided with a second flow path, and the second flow path is the game area as compared with the period required for the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. The switching means is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the game ball to flow down from the detection means to the detection means, and the switching means is caused by the first game ball flowing down the first flow path. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that is changed to a state of passing through the second flow path.

According to the gaming machine F3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F1 or F2, even when a plurality of gaming balls pass through the connecting flow path collectively, there is a timing interval at which they can pass through the detection means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls from flowing down in a hurry, as in the case where a plurality of game balls pass through the detection means at substantially the same time. As a result, it is possible to easily identify the game ball passing through the detecting means, and it is also possible to easily prevent an unexpected game ball from passing through the detecting means.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, the switching means is arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means of the connecting flow path, and the first state of restricting the entry of the gaming ball into the detecting means and the gaming ball. The discharge controlling means is provided with a second state that allows the ball to enter the detecting means, and the discharge controlling means is set to the first state at least when the first gaming ball arrives, and the subsequent state is set. The gaming machine F4 is characterized in that it can be switched in the mode of the second state when the gaming ball arrives.

According to the gaming machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F3, there may be a case where only the succeeding gaming ball can pass through the detecting means depending on the mode of the state change of the emission controlling means. Even after the first game ball has passed without passing through the detection means, the player's expectation can be maintained. Therefore, it is possible to improve the player's attention to the subsequent game ball.

In the embodiment in which the distance between the first game ball and the succeeding game ball is forcibly separated, the emission control means for switching the difficulty level of entering the detection means between the first game ball and the succeeding game ball. The switching timing of the state change can be loosened.

In addition, various modes are exemplified as the mode in which the discharge to the detection means is difficult by the discharge control means. For example, the game ball may be discharged to another discharge path other than the detection means, or the game ball may be temporarily stopped on the upstream side of the discharge control means.

The gaming machine F4 includes a ball entry regulating means capable of switching between a first state in which a game ball can enter the connecting flow path and a second state in which the game ball cannot enter the connecting flow path. The gaming machine F5 characterized by this.

According to the gaming machine F5, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F4, the timing of entering the ball into the connecting flow path can be limited to the time when the entry controlling means is in the first state, so that the state of the emission controlling means can be controlled. Can be facilitated.

In the gaming machine F5, the emission controlling means is compared with other cases when the state changes in such a manner that the first gaming ball cannot pass through the detecting means and the succeeding gaming ball can pass through the detecting means. The gaming machine F6 is characterized in that the period during which the ball entry restricting means is maintained in the first state is shortened.

According to the gaming machine F6, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F5, it is difficult to allow the gaming ball to enter the connecting flow path within a predetermined period in a situation where the succeeding gaming ball can pass through the detection means. Can be done.

As a result, it is possible to make the player visually recognize the situation while actually forming a situation in which the succeeding game ball can pass through the detection means, so that the player can frequently appeal the self-made game. can do.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the switching means includes a deceleration means for decelerating a gaming ball flowing down the connecting flow path, and the degree of deceleration by the deceleration means is switched between the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball. A gaming machine F7 characterized by being made possible.

According to the gaming machine F7, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F6, the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball can be decelerated by the deceleration means, and the degree of deceleration can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to improve the degree of freedom in designing the connecting flow path as compared with the case where the arrangement of the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball is defined only by the shape of the flow path through which the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball flow down. it can.

In the gaming machine F7, the action of deceleration by the deceleration means is smaller than the action given to the first gaming ball. ..

According to the gaming machine F8, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine F7, the degree of deceleration given to the succeeding gaming ball by the deceleration means is suppressed, so that the flow mode of the succeeding gaming ball becomes awkward or stops in the middle. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from giving a sense of discomfort to the flow mode of the subsequent gaming ball.

In any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the switching means is formed so as to prevent the gaming ball of the detecting means from passing through within a predetermined period, and at the beginning of the predetermined period, the succeeding gaming ball is connected to the connecting flow path. A gaming machine F9 characterized in that it is set regardless of when entering the ball.

According to the gaming machine F9, in addition to the effect of any of the gaming machines F1 to F8, the start of a predetermined period can be set without being involved in the timing when the succeeding gaming ball enters the connecting flow path.

That is, when a movable member capable of switching whether or not the game ball can enter is arranged at the entrance of the connecting flow path, the start of a predetermined period is set regardless of the timing at which the subsequent game ball passes through the movable member. can do.

The criteria for setting the start of a predetermined period are not particularly limited. For example, it may be set according to the flow mode of the first game ball, or may be set based on the opening timing of the movable mechanism that opens and closes the inlet of the connecting flow path.

A gaming machine F1 in any one of gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10, wherein the gaming machine is a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of a slot machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. A gaming machine provided with a special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

A gaming machine F2 characterized in that the gaming machine is a pachinko gaming machine in any one of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the gaming machines A1 to A9, B1 to B8, C1 to C9, E1 to E9, and F1 to F10, the gaming machine is a fusion of a pachinko gaming machine and a slot machine. Machine F3. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special gaming state generating means for generating a special gaming state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In gaming machines such as pachinko machines, there are gaming machines in which the ratio of winning from the taxiway to the starting winning opening can be changed periodically (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-70526).
However, the above-mentioned conventional gaming machine has a problem that there is room for improvement in the attention of the gaming ball entering the taxiway. The purpose of this technical idea is to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and to provide a gaming machine capable of improving the attention to the gaming ball entering the taxiway. To do.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 can detect the passage of a gaming area in which the gaming ball is formed so as to be able to flow down and at least a part of the gaming ball that has flowed down the gaming area. The detection means, a connecting flow path that connects the gaming area and the detecting means so that the game ball can flow down, and a switching means that can switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path are provided. The detection means detects the passage of at least a part of the gaming balls flowing down the connecting flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by detecting the passage of the gaming balls, and at least. One of the switching means is provided, and the switching means is inserted after the earliest gaming ball, which is the first gaming ball among the plurality of gaming balls that have entered the connecting flow path within a predetermined period. The connecting flow path is switched in such a manner that the following game ball that has been balled makes it easier for the ball to pass through the detection means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the connecting flow path is at least partially different from the first flow path connected to the detection means and the first flow path thereof. A second flow path connected to one of the detection means is provided, and the second flow path allows the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. It is configured as a flow path that requires a long period of time for the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means as compared with the period required for the switching means. Due to the flow down, the succeeding game ball changes to a state of passing through the second flow path.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 3 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2, wherein the switching means is arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means of the connecting flow path, and the gaming ball is attached to the detecting means. An emission regulating means that can be switched between a first state for restricting entry of a ball and a second state for allowing the gaming ball to enter the detection means is provided, and the emission regulating means is at least the first gaming ball. The first state is set when the player arrives, and the second state is set when the subsequent game ball arrives.
<Effect>
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1, the attention to the gaming ball entering the taxiway can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 2, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, the attention of the first gaming ball and the succeeding gaming ball can be improved.
According to the gaming machine described in the technical idea 3, in addition to the effect of the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1 or 2, the switching mode of the emission control means and the flowing mode of the gaming ball can be combined. It is possible to improve the attention to the ball.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Game board (part of the game area)
64 Winning opening (part of detection entry opening, part of passing opening)
87 Warp passage (part of the passage)
300, 2300 Delay device (delay means)
311 1st groove (part of deceleration flow path)
312 2nd groove (part of the 1st guide flow path)
312d detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entry port, first detection port)
312e Side wall (part of connecting flow path, part of first flow path)
313 Third groove (part of the second guide flow path)
321 Slide moving member (moving means, miniaturizing means)
321a1 Convex part (acting part)
340, 2340 Sorting device (sorting means)
341, 2341 1st wall part (1st wall part)
342 2nd wall (2nd wall)
342a Convex tip (part of dividing means)
350 2nd adjustment device (urging means)
400 Delayed floor device (rolling means)
410 Fan-shaped member (first floor member, part of prevention means, part of ball throwing means, intermediate floor member)
411a Chamfered part (optimal falling part)
436 Delayed flow path (part of throwing means)
800 V winning device (part of ball entry regulation means)
3340 Stop device (part of deceleration means, part of switching means)
3360 Maintenance device (release means, part of deceleration means)
3363 Contact part (part of deceleration means)
4340 sprocket (part of deceleration means)
5310, 6310, 7310, 8310, 9310 Main body member (part of connecting flow path)
5311 1st groove (part of connecting flow path, part of 1st flow path, part of 2nd flow path)
5312 Second groove (part of the connecting flow path, part of the first flow path, part of the second flow path)
5314, 6314, 7314 Continuous passage groove (part of connecting flow path, part of second flow path)
5314a1 Upper limit discharge hole (upper limit passing means)
5314c 2nd detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entry port)
5314e Third detection port (part of detection means, part of detection entry port, second detection port, upper limit passage port)
5510 Movable plate (movable member)
5512 Upper extension plate (first movable member)
5513 Lower extension plate (second movable member)
5520, 6520 Drive device (part of drive means)
6510 Movable plate (movable member)
6511 Upper movable plate (first movable member)
6512 Lower movable plate (second movable member)
8313, 9313 Inclined flow path (part of connecting flow path, part of first flow path, part of second flow path)
8314 Branch delay groove (part of connecting flow path, part of second flow path)
8315d V winning switch (detection means, detection entry port)
8511 Upper movable plate (part of emission control means)
8512 Lower movable plate (part of emission control means)
P1, P4, P6, P21, P31, P41 balls (first game ball)
P2, P5, P7, P22, P32, P42 balls (second game ball)
P11, P12 balls (game balls, other game balls)
P81, P91 Game ball (first game ball)
P82, P92 game ball (subsequent game ball)

Claims (3)

The game area where the game ball is formed so that it can flow down,
A detection means capable of detecting the passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the game area, and
A connecting flow path connecting the game area and the detection means so that the game ball can flow down,
A switching means configured to switch the flow path through which the game ball flows down in the connecting flow path is provided.
The detection means detects the passage of at least a part of the game balls flowing down the connecting flow path, and gives a predetermined benefit to the player by detecting the passage of the game balls, and at least one of them. Be prepared,
The switching means is a subsequent game ball that is entered after the first game ball that is the first game ball among a plurality of game balls that have entered the connecting flow path within a predetermined period. Is a gaming machine characterized in that the connecting flow path is switched in a manner that facilitates passage through the detecting means. The connecting flow path includes a first flow path connected to the detecting means and a first flow path.
It is provided with a second flow path that is at least partially different from the first flow path and is connected to one of the detection means.
In the second flow path, the game ball flows down from the game area to the detection means as compared with the period required for the game ball to flow down from the game area to the detection means through the first flow path. It is configured as a flow path that takes a long time to
The change according to claim 1, wherein the switching means changes to a state in which the succeeding game ball passes through the second flow path due to the leading game ball flowing down the first flow path. Gaming machine. The switching means is arranged on the upstream side of the detecting means of the connecting flow path, and allows a first state for restricting the entry of the game ball into the detecting means and a first state of restricting the entry of the game ball into the detecting means. Equipped with emission control means that can be switched between the second state and the second state
The emission controlling means is at least switchable in a mode in which the first state is set when the first game ball arrives and the second state is set when the subsequent game ball arrives. Item 2. The gaming machine according to item 1 or 2.

Images